(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Members of the Senate of the University of Toronto [microform]"

IMAGE EVALUATION 
TEST TARGET (MT-3) 











:/. 



^ 



1.0 



I.I 



11.25 



i^ Ki^ 1112.2 
Ht U£ 12.0 



1.8 



1-4 ill 1.6 



V] 



<^ 



7^ 










/ 







/J. 



'W J^' /'/ 




y 




Photographic 

Sciences 
Corporation 



23 WEST MAIN STREET 

WEBSTER, NY. 14580 

(716) 872-4503 





\ 





o<^ 



\ 



\ 






k 



iv^ <* >, -"^tiS 



^^>. Q 




^ 



'^KO 



% 



V^\ ^ 



■^ 






^ 




CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 



CIHM/ICMH 
Collection de 
microfiches. 




Canadian institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques 





Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques 



The 
toti 



The Institute has attempted to obtain the best 
original copy available for filming. Features of this 
copy which may be bibliographically unique, 
which may alter any of the images in the 
reproduction, or which may significantly change 
the usual method of filming, are checked below. 



D 



D 



D 



D 



D 



Coloured covers/ 
Couverture de couleur 



I I Covers damaged/ 



Couverture endommagAe 

Covers restored and/or laminated/ 
Couverture restaurie et/ou pelliculAe 

Cover title missing/ 

Le titre de couverture manque 



I I Coloured maps/ 



Cartes giographiquea en couleur 

Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ 
Encre de coulsur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) 



I I Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ 



Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur 



Bound with other material/ 
Reli6 avec d'autres documents 



r~~1 Tight bi iding may cause shadows or distortion 



along interior margin/ 

La re liurq serrie peut causer de I'ombre ou de la 

distorsiort le long de la marge int6rieure 

Blank leaves added during restoration may 
appear within the text. Whenever possible, these 
have been omitted from filming/ 
II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajouties 
lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte, 
mais, iorsque cela Atait possible, ces pages n'ont 
pas iti filmies. 

Additional comments:/ 
Comnentaires supplimentaires: 



L'Instltut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire 
qu'il lui a iti possible de se procurer. Les details 
de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du 
point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier 
une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une 
modification dans la m^thode normale de fiimage 
sont indiquis ci-dessous. 

□ Coloured pages/ 
Pages de couleur 

□ Pages damaged/ 
Pages endommagies 

I I Pages restored and/or laminated/ 



n 



Pages restauries et/ou pelliculdes 

Pages discoloured, stained or foxei 
Pages dicolor^es, tacheties ou piquies 

Pages detached/ 
Pages ditachdes 

Showthrough/ 
Transparence 

Quality of prir 

Qualiti inigale de I'impression 

Includes supplementary materit 
Comprend du materiel supplementaire 

Only edition available/ 
Seule Edition disponible 



The 
poei 
of tl 
film 



Oris 

begi 

the 

slon 

othi 

first 

sion 

orii 



r~~1 Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ 

r~| Pages detached/ 

r~;] Showthrough/ 

I I Quality of print varies/ 

rn Includes supplementary material/ 

I I Only edition available/ 



The 
shal 
TINI 
whii 

Mar 
diff< 
entl 
begi 
righ 
reqi 
met 



Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata 
slips, tissues, etc., have been ref limed to 
ensure the best possible image/ 
Les pages totalement ou partiellement 
obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, 
etc., ont ixi filmies d nouveau de facon d 
obtenir la meilleure image possible. 



This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ 

Ce document est filmd au taux de reduction indiqu6 ci-dessous. 

10X 14X 1SX 22X 



9fiy 



30X 















• 








_y 

























12X 



16X 



aox 



24X 



28X 



32X 



The copy ffilmad h«r« hat bean reproduced thank* 
to the generosity of: 

Douglas Library 
Queen's University 



L'exemplaire filmA f ut reproduit grAce A la 
gAnArosit* de: 

Douglas Library 
Queen's University 



The Images appearing here are the best quality 
possible considering the condition and legibility 
of the original copy and in keeping with the 
filming contract specifications. 



Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed 
beginning with the front cover and ending on 
the last page with a printed or Illustrated impres- 
sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All 
other original copies are filmed beginning on the 
first page with a printed or illustrated Impres- 
sion, and ending on the last page with a printed 
or illustrated impression. 



Les images suivantes ont AtA reproduites avec ie 
plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et 
de la nettetA de l'exemplaire film6, et en 
conformity avec les conditions du contrat de 
filmage. 

Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en 
papier est ImprimAe sont filmte en commen^ant 
par Ie premier plat et en terminant soit par la 
derniire page qui comporte une empreinte 
d'Impresslon ou d'lliustration, soit par Ie second 
plat, selcrn Ie cas. Tous les autres exemplaires 
originaux sont flimte en commenpant par la 
premldre page qui comporte une empreinte 
d'Impresslon ou d'illustration et en terminant par 
la dernlAre page qui comporte une telle 
emitreinto. 



The last recorded frame on each microfiche 
shall contain the symbol — ^ {meaning "CON- 
TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), 
whichever applies. 



Un des symboies suivants apparaftra sur la 
dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon Ie 
cas: ie symbols —^ signifie "A SUIVRE", Ie 
symbols V signifie "FIN". 



Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at 
different reduction ratios. Those too large to be 
entirely included in one exposure ere filmed 
beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to 
right and top to bottom, as many frames as 
rsqulred. The following diagrams illustrate the 
method: 



Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre 
filmte A des taux de reduction diffirents. 
Lorsque Ie document est trop grand pour Atre 
reproduit en un seul clichA, il est film6 d partir 
de i'angle supArleur gauche, de gauche d droite, 
et de haut on bas, en prenant ie nombre 
d'images nAcessalre. Les diagrammes suivants 
illustrent la mAthode. 



1 2 3 




32X 



1 


2 


3 


4 


5 


6 



LP 
LLz).T 



1% ie>G4 






MEMBERS OF THE SENATE 



Of THB 



llttivwitjj irf ^0mU. 



THE HON. JOSEPH C. MORRISON, Chancellor 

ADAM CROOKS. LL.D., Q.C., Vice-Chancellor 

THE REV. JOHN McCAUL, LL.D. 

HON. JAMES PATTON, LL.D., Q.C. 

JOHN LANGTON, M.A. 

THE HON. DAVID CHRISTIE, M.L.C. 

SIR WM. E. LOGAN, F.R.S. 

JAMES J. HAYES, M.D. 

THE REV. A. LILLIE, D.D. 

E. M. HODDER, M.D., F.R.C.S., Eng Presid.n, .r at ^- , » 
THP wnw TnuxT Tr /^ . , ^■' ^'"**"" of Medical Board. 

THE HON. JOHN H. CAMERON, Q.C Trea»,ir^r r,f r c. • 
THE REV. .3. RYERSON D D rw V ^ ^'"''^' 

THE PRINCIPAL OP QUEEN'S COLLEGE, Kingston 

THE REV. J. TABAREP, S.,,r;.r%,J„^,Z' 

J. B. CHERRIMAN, M.A. 

DANIEL WILSON, LL.D, \ 

THE REV. JOHN JENNINGS, D.D. \ 

HON. 0. MOVVAT, V.O. 

GEORGE HERRICK, M.D. \ 

IRA LEWIS, M.A. \ 

LARRATT WM. SMITH, D.C.L. 

S. 8. MACDONELL, LL.D. 

THE REV. H. BATE JESSOPP. M A v \ 

JOHN HELLIWELL, M.A. \ 

WM. GEO. DRAPER, M.A. 



5J688S0 



2 



UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO. 
MEMBERS OP THE 8EmTE^Continued 



T. A. McLEAN, M.A. 

JOHN BOYD, M.A., B.C.L. 

DANIEL MoMICHAEL, LL.D. 

JOHN E. THOMSON, B.A. 

E. C. JONES, B.A. 

J. D. ARMOUR, B.A. 

J. J. KINGSMILL, B.A. 

HON. WM. CAYLEY. 

REV. W. McCLURE, M.A. 
REV. R. FYFE, D.D, 
J. H. MORRIS, M.A. 
EDWARD BLAKE, M.A., Q.C. 
C. F. ELLIOT, M.A. 
EEV. j. BARCLAY, D.D. 
T. J. ROBERTSON, M.A. 
REV. W. F. CHECKLEY, M.A. 
REV. VICAR-GENERAL WALSH. 
REV. A. CARMAN, M.A. 
T. H. BULL, M.A. 
REV. J. DAVISON. 
REV. DR. HELLMUTH. 



i?«r,ar_DAVID BUCHAN, Esq. 
Hfffiatrar— THOMAS MOSS, M.A. 
Librarian— KEY, A. LORIMER, B.A. 
Bedel— T. C. JOY. 



EXAMINERS, 1884. 



LA.W. 

Adam Cbooks, Q.C, LL.D. E. FiTzaKaAi,D, M.A., LL.B. 



MEDICINE. 

Midwifery and VediealJurisprudence. C.J. rinLBRicK,M,D.,M.R.C.S.,Eng. 

Surgery and Anatomy \s, T. AiKiNS, M D. 

Physiology and Comparative Anatomy. M. Barrett, M.D , M.A. 
Medicine and Therapeutict Uzzxel Oqden, M.D. 



MEDICINE AND ARTS. 
Chemistry , Hbnry Croft, D.C.L. 

miural Ilittory i ]^^^ W. Hincks, F.R.S- 

■ I T. J. Cottle, Esq. 



ARTS. 

Greek and Latin / '^"^ ^^^- John McCaui,, LL.D. 

\ Thomas Moss, MA. 

Malhenatics / J- B, Chehriman, M.A. 

I Rev. W. Jones, li.A. 

English and History i ?• .WiJ^*>n, LL.D. 

\J.A. BotD, M.A. 

French, German, Italian, and Spanish J i'^^^"'^ Fo«neri, LL D. 

^ \ Robert SiJLiavAN, xM.A. 

Mineralogy and Geology T. S. Hunt M.A., F.R.S. 

Metaphysics and Ethics / ^^^^- James Dbaven, D.D. 

I Rev. J. C. Murray, M.A. 

Oriental Languages H' ^^- HiRschielder, Esq. 

* I Rev. M. WiLLft, D.D. 

Meteorology Q. T. KiNasTON,M.A. 

Civil Engineering T. C. Kkefer, Esq., c.E. 



UNIVERSITY OP TORONTO, 

GRADUATES. 



Diite of 
Admitcioo. 



D.C.L. 



1850. Croft, H. H. {Hon.) 
1852. Crookshank, G (o4.) 
1847. Lundy,Rev.P.J.(^rfe«„rfeOT) 
1862. Smith, L. W. 
LL.D. 
Croaks, A., M.A. 
Hurlburt, J. 
Mncdonell, S. S. 
^McMichael, D. 
Patton, J. 
'WicksoD, Rev. A. 

M.D. 
Beaumont, W. (/7on.) 
Bovell, J. {Ad tundem.) 
Boyd, W. 

Boys, H. {Ad emdem.) 
Chewett, W. C. 
Cronyn, J. 
Desmond, If, 
Eastwood, W. O. 
Eastwood, C. S. 
Freeman, C. 
Hamilton, J. (ob.) 
Henry, J. 

Herrick, G. {Admndem.) 
King J. {ob.) 
«AliIIer, T. 

McKenzie, M.B. {ob.) 
Nicol, W. B. 
*0ille, L. S. 

O'Brien, L.{Ad emdem.) 
Pfiillips, T. G. 
Richardson. J. H. 
Scott. J. {Ad eundm.) 
Shantz, S. E. 
Thorburn, J. {AUundem.) 
«TisdelI, F. B. {»b.) 
Turner, H., {AJ eundem.) 
Walker, N. 0. 
Wanless, J. 



1863. 
1856. 
1858. 
18(50. 
1858. 
1860. 

1860. 

1848. 

1863. 

1844. 

1851. 

1860. 

1853. 

1851. 

1851. 

1853. 

18-f4. 

1864. 

1854. 

1844. 

1859. 

1853. 

1850. 

1859. 

1845. 

1860. 

1850. 

1850. 

1864. 

1859. 

1861. 

1859. 

1859. 

1862. 



1. Medallist In Metaplysics and Ethici. 
*• I'Old VledalligtinOftsslci. 

_. .,!...-, :>itrUaillSI. 

*. flold Mrdallifit 
•• fldvsr AledaJlUt. 



Date of M.D. 

Admisalon. 

1853. Winer, W. 

1856. Woodruff, W. 

M.A. 
1849. Baldwin, Rer. E. 

1857. Barber, G. A. {ob.) 

1858. Barrett, M. 
1845. Barron, P. W. 
1858. Blake, D. E. 
1857. Boulton, J. p. 
1868. iBowIby, W. H. 
1850. Boyd, J. 
1861. ^Boyd.J.A. 
1856. lloyd, W. T. 
1856. 'Brown, J. 

I860. Cameron, H. {Ad eundm.) 
1856. C&mhie, C. {Ad eundem.) 
1858. *Cattenach, A. J. 
1854. sciark, A. M. 
1858. Craigie, W. 
1864. «Cooper, G. 

1867. TCrombie, E. 

1868. scrombie, M. M. 
1863. BCrooks,A. 

1849. Crookshank, O. {ob.) 

1850. Draper, W. G. 
1863. lOEHof. C. P. 

1857. "English, C. E. 

1860. i^Fitch, B. p. 
1867. "Fitzgerald, E. 

1858. Francis, W, S. 

1861. "Fraser, J. T. 

1. Jameson Medallist. 

^ ^Silver MedHllU in K?h?4 *""• "** 
4. Gold Medallist in Modern u^guaee. 
. «"'';'»'ne*""n Medallist. ""'K'"'8"» 
'■''.fnKa,K*''^^-«-'«>'»J»n»p. 

8. Gold M,.daliist in Classics. 

^eJ'l' r.<*? "«"° ClHssics. and Sliver- 

iJ'II/^m'I"!"'''" Ethics. 

^" "Naturaf?hii;«^^h;:^"^^'"-"«« '"'* 
U. Gold Medallist In ClLiM. 



Date of 
Admiation. 



UNIVERSITY OP TORONTO. 
QRABVATEa—Conlinutd. 



MA. 

1864. JSFrisby, E. 
1864."aibson, J. Morison. 
1848. Grasett, Rev. E. 

1863, Hatton. J. C. 
1850. iHelHwell, J. 
1859. Hill, Rev. G. 

1859. Ilodgins, T. H. 

1860. JHylcomb^ J. W. 

1864. "Hubbert, J. 
1869. Hume, Eev. R. 
1862. Hunter, J. H. 
1849. *Je88opp, Rev. II. B, 
1858. Jones, C. 

1860. 6Kerr, W. U. C. 
1860. "Kennedy, G. 

1858. 'Kingsmill, N. 

1857. Liiwrason, W. L. 

1848. Lewis, I. 
1864. Light, R.N. 
1845. Lightburne, S. 

1859. Litton, J. L. (Ad eundem.) 
1864. SLoudon, J. 

1849. Macdonell, S. S. 

1858. Macnabb, A. 

1856. «Marling, 8. A. 

1868. Montgomery, Rev. D. E.{Ad 

leundem.) 
1864. Morris, J. U. 

1859. "AJosa, T. 

1850. Murray, Rev. R. (oJ.)' 

1857. "McGregor, C. J. 
1856 McKeown, J. 



ih' I. """■ 'i^«L'""^t5n Mathematics 

1. Gold Medallist in CIbspIck. 

S wT"" JI''?"'"'* In Metaphynlre. Ae 

6. Gold Medallist in Classics. 

8 n„r; »':?•'? '"'^'"Cla.s^c.s. ' " 

On M M*1" n!"'*" "atll«matio8. 

OoI,| Meda Ii«t in Classics, and Chan- 
„ andM^tn'i^an'^™' "*'"-«««« 



Date of 
AdmiHion. M.A. 

1850. McLean. T. A. 

1868. >McLellan, J. A. , 
I860. Ale Michael D. 

1864. '.MoMurriob, W. B 

1864. 'McNisb, N. 
1868. Oille,L.S. 

1859. Paul, CD. 

1866. <Peterson, H. W, 
1845. Ramsay, W. 
1862. Reeve, W. A. 
1848. »Roaf, J. 

1867. Ryerson, E. P. 
1861. Sampson, D. A. 

1858. 'Sanderson, Rev. J. E. 
1848. «Stennett, Rev. W. 
1864. ^Sullivan, R. 

1868. Tassie, W. 

1866. Taylor, T.W. {Ad eundem.) 

1859. Tudell, F. B. (o6.) 

1869. Turpin, J. (^rfeunrfeff,,) 
1869. ^Walker. N.O. 

1860. Waters, D. 

1858. Watts, W. A. {Adeundem.) 

184a Wedd, W. ' 

1849. We8tropp,R G (4rf«M„rf,m.) 

I860. ^Wiekion, Rev. A 

1863. Willi.-..., A. L. 

1857. Win. ..J. (^rf,„„^^, 

1864. Withrov, W.H. 
1864. lowoods, S. 

B.CL. 
1854, Boyd, J. 
1851. Crooks, A. 
1847. ZeW*,/. 

4. Silver Meda ^in Kthin. 

Metaphys C8 aw in b-.m!! "* *° 
T, Gold Medallist inMetwhv«.«"i . 

Silver M-vl.!!!"!'- ''^•^- • *«-•««» 

8. Gold Medinut'invatuMl^?*"''*^ 
8. Vide ante. ' ""'""'al Science*. 

10. Gold Sledalllit in CkwlcB, 



\ 



UKIVERSITY OF TORONTO. 



Date of 
Admission 



QRADVATES-Continued. 



MA. 

1854. "Frisby, E. 

1864. "Gibson, J. Morieon. 

1848. Grasett, Rev. E. 

1863. Hatton. J. C. 
1850. iHelliwell, J. 

1859. Hill, Rev. G. 
1869. Ilodgins, T. H. 

1860. aflolcombi J. W. 

1864. SHubbert, J. 

1859. Hume, Eev. R. 
1862. Hunter, J. H. 
1849. *Jes8opp, Rev. H. B. 
1868. Jones, C. 

1860. 6Kerr, W. U. C. 
1860. "Kennedy, G. 
1868. ^Kingsmill, N. 
1857. Liiwrason, W. L. 
1848. Lewis. I. 



Date of 
Admission. M.A. 

1850. McLean, T. A. 

1868. iMcLellan, J. A. ; 

I860. McMiehaelD. 

1864. »McMurrlch, W. B. 

1864. 'McNiah, N. 

1858. Oilte, L. S. 

1859. Paul, CD. 

1856. t'Patat>an^ Tr m 
— —.oOu, LI, rr. 

1845. Bamsay, W. 
1862. Reeve, W. A. 
1848. fiRoaf, J. 

1857. Ryerson, E. P. 
1861. Sampson, D. A. 

1858. 'Sanderson, Rev. J. E. 
1848. «Stennett, Rev. W. 
1854. TSuUivan, R. 

1858. Tassie, W. 



I)lit« of « -, - 

Adinliiiun. B.C.L 

1847. lloaf, J. 
1861. 'Stinson, B. [oh. 
LL D. 
npguo, T. ir. 
Benson, R. L. 
n»lliune, J, 
Itliiin, D. 
Hoys, W. 
1858. ^liowlKy, W. H. 
18(10. Bowlby, J. W. 
Cocliriuie, S. II. 
Crombif, M. M. 
Cronyn, V. 
Cross, J. P. 
Cumin, J. 
Denison, 0. P. 
Donroclic, E. J. 
Douglna, W. 
Donaldson, J. 
Duggnn, a. P. 
1858. n:nyl,Mh, C. E. 
1801. English, L. 

Fiirewell J. E. 
Fitzyerald, E. 
Foster, W. A. 
llunn, J. V. 
Ilancook, J. W. 
1858. Hoilgins, T. 
1860. llodglns, J. O. 
1862. Ilolcomb, J. W. 
1864. Ellington, J. 
1804. Joseph, J. p, 
1804. Kennedy, 0. 
Laird, W. P. 
Lerinrx, D. 
I860. 'Livingsione, J. 
1862. ■Marling, A. 

Meredith, W R. 
Miller. W. V. 



UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO. 
GRADUATES— ronfffliwi. 

Dntn nf 
Adiiiliiklcin. 



1863. 

1800. 

.1801, 

1850. 
1801. 



1860. 
1859. 
1800. 
1802. 
1800. 
1801. 
18Ga. 
1861. 
1804. 
1804- 



18U4. 
1858. 
1860. 
1860. 
1800. 



1859 
1S04 



1803. 
1861. 



LL.D. 
Moore, Q. E. 
MoCtiughejr, J. 
MoDonnId, J. P. 
O'llricn, W. L. 
O'Gnrft, M. 
Osier, B. B. 
Pnpp«, 0. S. 
Tenfon, E. 
Road, P. A. 
Robortiton, II. 
^Sampson, J). A, 
Sisson, J. 
Smith, J. P. 
Smith, 0. T. 
'Smith, R. 
Snelling, R. 
•Spencer, T. 11. 
Stftnton, W. I. 
Staynor, P. II. 
Stephens, R. P. 
Stewart, II. D. 
Stuart, A. II. 
Upper, M. C. 
Wood, S. O. 
Wood, S. 0. (ob.) 

M.B. 
*Aikins, M. II. 
•Barnhnrt, C. E. 
1860. 'Bascom, J. 
1864. Bell, W. II. 
Bell, J. 
^Bolster, J. 
Cascaden, J. 
Constnntinides, P. 
Covernton, W. II. 
Dack, T. B. N. 
*DeGra8Pi, 0. P. 



1808. 

1858. 

1804, 

1801. 

1801. 

180 J. 

1800. 

1802. 

1802. 

1861. 

1858. 

1869. 

1862. 

1864. 

1861. 

1863. 

1860. 

1869. 

1861. 

1861. 

1862. 

1802. 

1862. 

1860. 

18U2. 

1868. 
1859. 



1861. 
1862. 
1862. 
1864. 
1863. 
1803. 
1862. 



1. OoUl Meaallbt, 
li. Uo.J MtdHUi.-U 
8. Silver Meilallist 
4. Qoia -Medallist. 
i>. Siirvr MednUIUi 



1. SilTer Medallist. 

2. Silver Mtdaliist. 

3. Silver Vledullift. 

4. Silver Metfalligt. 
6. Uold MeUalliKt. 
6. Uold Me<Jalli^t 
?- Giild .\!ti;5?;"*s* 
8. Quid Medaiiiit 



UNIVBRgIT¥ 0? TORONTO. 



ORADUAT£S-Con<iiitt«/. 



Admifflon 



M.B. 
1864. Eby, A. 
1862. Eokhardt, T. B. 
1861. Elliott, J. 
1867. "Francis, W. 8. 
1804. Fulton, J. 
1864. Harlcy, J. 
1864. Kelly, M. J. 

1859. »King, J. 
1864. Langs, M. 8, 

1860. 8Martyn, DcW. H. 
1860. *Morton, E. D. 
1868. McAlpine, D. L. 
1803. McCallum, J. 

1863. McCool, D. B. 
1803. McKay, VV. 

1864. fixMoLaughlin, J. W. 
1864. Newman, J. B. 
1864. Nicol, II. 

1860. «Og(ieu, W. W. 
1868. Orton, R. 

1860. 'Playter.E. 

1861. Pollock, D. J. 
1864. Potta, R. 
1868. SRamsay, S. F. 
1864. Sill, A. 
1861. Sinclair, L. C. 

1863. Stewart, J. W. 
1801. Tempest, W. 

1864. Thorn, J. C. 
1864. Tisdale, J. C. 

1863. Trenor, J. ;i 

1864. Vail, C. L. 
1864. Whiteside, W. N. 
1864. Wian, T. B. 

B.A. 
1854. Adams, 0. 
1853. "Alma, E. J. (oA) 

1. silver Medallist 

2. Silver. Medallist, ' 

3. .Silver M^dullist. 

4. Silver MrdHllisI:. 
6. Gold Medal lift. 
C. Sliver .VltMlalllxt. 
f. Silver Med«lliBt. 
8. Gold MedallUt. 



Date of 
Admiiilon. B.A. 

1859. Appelbo, R. 8. 

1860. "Armour, J. D. 
1864. »Bayley, R. 
1845. Beadle, D. W. (ad tundem.) 

Bell, J. W. 

Bernard, R. 

Bethune, N. 

Bettridge, W. 

Blake, S. II. 

Boulton, II. J, 

Boulton, J. 
1862. "Bucbnn, J. M. 
1864. Buclian, II. E. 

Bull, S. J. 

Bui!, T. II. 
. Miurns, N*. 
*Connor, J. \V. 
«Craig, T. D. 
^Crawford, W. G. 
Back, T. B. 
DesVeux, O. W. 
Bixon, Rev. A. 
Dormer, 0. (ad eundm.) 
Eastwood, W. 0. 
"Evans, 0, M. 
Ferguson, J. 
•Fisher, J. 
Fleming, W. B. 
Francis, W. S. 
Freer, C. 
Gage, 0. L. 
Geddes, Rev. G. 
Gibbon, II. F. II. 
"Gibson, Rev. J. Monro. 



1864. 

1868. 
184>. 
1858. 
1868. 
1845. 
1848. 



1853. 

1857. 

1857. 

1804. 

1864. 

1862. 

1849. 

1858. 

1845. 

1867. 

1849. 

1850. 

1804. 

1862. 

1864. 

1857. 

18ol. 

1850. 

1848. 

1862. 

1802 



1. Gold MedAl list in Cla.«Mc8. 

4. S ver Med«\li8tin Natural Scieucefc 
*• ^",T„*'':«l»^>"t in Classics. 
' Villi: u''.^'' If '" MetaphyilM. 

dei^cis *^*«»''ii'''". and in Evl- 

' iii„.„ i, •"■ ; 'iuui-Tn baiignagei, 
man. ^*'*'*' "' '"^ *''^'''*'« *""*«- 



UNIV»RgIT¥ Olf TORONTO. 



aRADUATE6h-.(7o«<»«tt«/. 



Date of 
Admiifion. 



M.B. 
1864. Eby, A. 
1862. Eokhardt, T. B. 
1861. Elliott, J. 
1867. "Francis, W. S. 
1864. Fulton, J. 
1864. Harley, J. 
1864. Kelly, M.J. 

1859. aKing, J. 
1864. Laiigs, M. S. 

1860. 'Martyn, DcW, H. 
1860. *Morton, E. D. 
1863. McAlpint, D, L. 
1863. MoCallum, J. 

1863. McCool, D. B. 
1868. McKay, VV. 

1864. «MoLaughlin, J. W. 
1864, Newman, J. B. 
1864. Nicol, 11. 



Date of 
AdmiMion. B.A. 

1859. Appelbe, R. S. 

1850. lArmour, J. D. 

1854. ^Bayley, R, 

1845. Beadle, D. W. (ad emdem.) 

1864. Bell, J. W. 

1868. Bernard, R. 

1845. Betbune, N. 

1853. Bettridge, W. 
1858. Blake, S. H. 
1845. Boulton, H. J. 
1848. Boulton, J, 
1862. SBucban, J. M. 
1864. Bucban, H. E. 
1853. Bull, S. J. 
1857. Bui!, T. II. 
1857. *Burn8, If. 
1864. sConnor, J. W. 
1864. «Crftiff. T n 



UKIVER5ITT Of TCIONTO. 



QKADVATES^Conitnutd. 



IMtAOf 

AdmlHlOD. 

1801. 

1850. 

1861. 

1861. 

1868. 

1860. 

1864. 

1862. 

1845. 

1864. 

1868. 

1864. 

1848. 



D.A. 

Qillespie, A. 
'Grant, A. J. 
•Grant, A. 
•Gront, O. 

Orajdon, S. (Ad eundtm.) 
Green, 0. 
Grovor, T. 
Hagar, C. 
Hagerman, J. T. 
*Harbottle, R. 
Hector, A. 
Hill, R. 
Hudspeth, T. A. (ob.) 



1858. BHuggard, J. T. 



1861 

1848. 

1850. 

1846. 

1858. 

1864. 

1864. 

1849. 



Hunter, J. H. 

Hurlbwt, j. 

Hurlburt, H. 

Jones, E. C. 

Jones, H. C. {Ad eundem.) 

Keefer, W. N. 

King, J. 

Kingsmin, J. J. 



1863. "Lafferty, A. M. 



1868 
1862. 
1849. 
1861. 
1864. 
1845. 



(Ob.) 



^Le Sueur, W. 

"Livingstone, R. T. 

Lorlng, G. T. (ob.) 

LouDt, S. 

Macallum, A. 

•Marsh, Rev. J. W. 
1848. "Marsh, Rev. T. W. 
1856. Matheson, T. O. 
1866. "Matbeson, R. 
1853. Meudell, W. 
1868. Milroy, W. 



1. .Umenoii Medalliot. 

2. Gold Medallist In Naturil Sci.>ii(!es and 

Plvcr Medallist in Metaphysica. 4o 
8. Gold Medallist In Metaphysics, .tc.and 
. „.^T'"«inan in Oriental LanguaK^s. 
4. Silver Medallidt in Nitural dcien-es 

6. Gdid Medallist in Cliwics. 

e. Silver Medallist in Oassica and Mathe- 
matics. 

7. Silver Medallist in Classics. 

o fill''*'" »''^".','.'''* '* i'o'BphyslcB, 4e. 

10. Silv- Medallist fti Evidences. 

U. Gold MedalllBt ia Natural Sciencas. 



Pate of 
Admlsalon. B A. ' 

1859. »MitolieIl, J. L. 
1868. >Mulock, W. 
1859. »MoDougall, J. L. 
1859. Monearrnt, N. 
1857. McDermid, P. 
1864. «MoMiIIttn, J. 
1862. McFayden, C. 
1861. McOee, R. 
1849. 'McKenzie, R. , j. o. D. 
1849. McKtnxie, M. B. (ob.) 
•McMurcby, A. 
McNaughton, T. 
^MoWilliam, W. 
•MoWilliams, W. Q. 
•Ogden, I. 0. (ob.) 
1863. "Oidright, W. 
1857. "Oliver, W. 
1861. "Ormiston, D. 
1804. Patte8on,T. C. (Adtundem.) 
1857. Preston, Rev. J. A. 
1857. "Rattray, W. J. 
18G2. "Reeve, R. A. 

1861. "Robarts, Rev. T. T. 
1864. "Robertson, T. J. 

1862. Roger, W. M. 
1861. Ross, J. B. 
1864. Rnssin, J. 
1846. "Robinson, C. 
I860. Rock, W. 
1857. "Ross, J. 



1861. 
1858. 
1862. 
1863. 
1860. 



6 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
1«. 
17 
18. 



■ n^^ W<'d» list in Natural Sciences. 

■ n M if^?' :' '^ M'^*" Languages. 

Silver MedalliHtin Mod.rn LanijuainML 
Silver Medallist in Metapbysiw, |^ 

and Prince's Prizeman. ' ■• 

Si ver Medrtilist in Evidences. 

I l«!; '«^ '!l!'" *" »'«thHn>atio*. 
f ^«' J^"^*'""* '" Metapbys cs. 
Silver Medallist in Metaphysics. 
Oo d Medallist in Metaphysics. 

r«M u*^*,,'-''?" ^''^'''•" '^"nguages. 
Gold Medallist in Natural Sciences 

^'';'«',*'«<lH V'l '" -^'athematics. 
Gold Medallist in Metaphysics. 
Wivrr Medallist in Natural Sciences. 
Mednilistin Metaphysics. 
Silver VIsHnlii.f ir. 1...11 .. 

■lameson Medallist 

Gold xMedaliliit in Modern UngnagM. 



UNIVBR8ITT OP TORONTO. 



D«t« of 
Admlulon. I3.A. 

1860. Ross, D. W. 

1804. JRutledge, J. 

1863. 'Soott. T. IL 
1800. Soott, W. ir. 

1804. Seath, J. A. (Ad eundm.) 

1804. •Seymour, F. E. 

1848. Shaw, J. (oi.) 
18G4. Sharpe, W. 
1860. ^Sinclair, W. 

1857. Smith, J. F, 

1864. »Snider, E. P. 
1804. Spotten, H. B. 
1846. Stanton, J. 

1849. «Stin8on, E. (ob.) 
1862. Strang, H. I. 

1850. 'Tftssie, H. 

1858. Thom, Rev. J. 



QB.APVATBB— Continued. 



1. Silver ModalllRt la MaUiematlca. 

2. Hilvor Mi'dalllst In Modern Language*. 
8. Oolil Moilalllst In Modern LanKUBgos. 
4. Silver Modullist In Natural ffcieucu*. 

6. Oold McdalllHt In Natural Soionces. 

6. Silver Medallist In Natural PhllosophT. 

7. Silver Medallist In Classics. 



Dato of 
AdmlstioD. B.A. 

1861. »Thom, J, II. 
1846, Thomson, J. E. 
1854. Trow, N. M. 
1801. Turnbull, J, 
1801. «Tyner, R. J, (ob.) 

1862. 'Tytler, W. 
1866. Unsworth, R. 

1864. *Vander8mis8en, W. H. 

1846. Vankoughnet, B. F. (ob.) 

1854. swells, R. M. 

1800. White, J. 

1804. 'Wilson, J. 8. 
1849. Winer, W. 

1853. Woodruff, W. 

1868. 'Wright, T. W. 



1. silver Medallist In Math..^iatlc«. 

2. Chancellor's Medallist for Kvidencos 

3. Oold MedalllKt In Natural Science*. ' 

4. Silver Mtdnllint in ClasHics. 

6. Jameson Medallist, and Silver ModAl> 
list In Ethics. 

6. Silver Medallist in Mathomatici 

7. Qold M«dallist in Matbomaties. 



DIPLOMAS IN CIVIL ENQINBEBINQ. 

1851. Robertson, C. F. (Prizeman.) 

1862. Irwin, B. 

1868. Bellairs, W. G. (Prizeman.) 



DIPLOMAS IN AGBICTILTUBE. 

1860. Farewell, J. C. (Prizemw.) 

1862. Forneri, C. C. 

1862. Thompson, J. B. (Prizeman.) 



10 



UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO. 



UNDERGRADUATES. 



Sate of 
Aiimission. 

1857. Adams, R. W. 

1859. Alma, T. 
1864. Betts, J. 
1864. Brough, C. A. 

1860. Burnlmm, J. 
1866. Cawtlira, II. 
1857. Clarke, W. 

1859. Clarke, A. A. 

1860. D'Aub'gny, P. 
1857. Dew; r, J. 

1861. Dixon, T. 

1862. Duncombe, D. ] 

1859. Dunn, J. M. 

1860. Freel, E. 

1862. Frost, A. 
1857. Ghent, S. 11. 

1861. Gilbert, J. H. 
1861. Glassco, J. T. 
1864. Green, T. J. C. 
1859. Ham.lton, J. C. 
1857. Howell, A. 

1857. Jones, H. C. 

1863. Kelly, M. J. 

1858. Kerr, J. W. 

1859. Kerr, W. J. 
1867. Lambert, W. 

1864. Land, R. C. A. 



FACULTY OF LAW. 

Date of 
Admission. 



1857. Lapsley, W. 
1864. Lash, Z. A. 
1864. Lillie, J. A. 
1864. Masterson, C. M. 
1860. McCaul, G.L. 

1859. MrGlashan, J. 

1858. McKelcan, F. 

1860. McKellar, P. D. 

1859. McKenzie, W. L. 

1859. McLennan, D, 
1857. McNaughton, A. T. 

1860. Peebles, J. 
1862. Preston, J. 
1803. Preston, D. IL 
1864. Richardson, W. 

1856. Scott, A. F. 
1800. Selby, S. B. J. 

1857. Shaw, G. C. 

1861. Smith, A. F. 
1861. Smith, R. W. 
1864. Smith, D. S. 
1856. Sullivan, W. B. 
1864. Sullivan, D. L. 
1861. Warren, E, 
1864. Webb, E. 
1859. Wethey, H. 
1864. Williams, A. 



FACULTY OP MEDICINE. 



1863. 


Aberdein, R. 


1862. 


Bulmer, T. S. 


1863. 


Anderson, H. 


1862. 


Burnett, D. 


1863. 


Beith, A. 


1862. 


Burnbam, E. L 


1861. 


Bigelow, A. 


1863. 


Burns, J. H. 


1863. 


Bowmai), J. W. 


1863. 


Carlyle, J. 


1863. 


Buohanaa, C. H. 


1861. 


Cassady, J. 



UNIVERSITY OP TORONTO. 



11 



UNDERGRADUATES— Con/mM«i. 



Date of 
AdmiBsion. 



1864 
1868 
1863, 
1863, 
1858, 
1861, 
1861. 



Cttssidy. J. J. 

Chapman, 0. W. 

Chrysler, W. H. 

Clerke, C. H. 

Donaldson. J. G. 

DeLaHaye, A. 
.V.W.. Douglas, C. _ 
1864. Douglasi /.rvT. 
1864. Eccles, F. R. 
1858. Farewell, J, E. 
1864. Farewell, W. G. 
1862. Fife, J. A. 

1861. Forrest, R. W. 
1S63. Goodell, R. H 

1862. Gouinlock, W. v.. 

1863. Grote, 0. W. 

1864. Gwyn, 11. C. 
1863. Harrison, P. 

1861. Henry, J. 

1862. Hodder. P. W. 

1861. Holme, J. 

1862. Holme, W. R. 

1861. Hornibrooke, E. 

1863. Howe, J. 

1863. Hughes, J. 

1864. Hughes. A. H. 

1862. Jackes, A. G. 
1864. Jacques, T. 

1862. King, R. 

1863. King, P. 
1861. Kitchen, E. 
1863. Langrill, J. A. 

1863. Lynch, J. 

1861. McCarthy, J. L. Q. 

1864. McConnell, J. 
1863. McCulloch, J. 

1863. McDonald, A. E. 

1864. McFarlane, L. 
1864. Mclntyre, N. 
1863. McKenna, C. 

1862. McPherson, A. G. 
1862. Miokle, W. * 



Date of 
Admlgflion. 

1862. Miller, W.H. 
18G1. Milne, W. 
1864. Montgomery, J. 
1864. Morton, W. 
1861. Munns, W. 
18G3. Murray, R. G. 
1864. Newton, J. H. 
1864. Oronhyatekha. 
1864. Palmer, R. V. 

1863. Passmorc, W. J. 
1863. Pentland, W. R. 

1863. Penwarden, J. 

1861. Perchard, J.;P. 

1864. Quinlan, J. ' 

1862. Rae, F. 
1858. Ramsay, R. 
1800. Renwick, H. 
18G1, Richardson, J. 
18G0. Robertson, C. 
18G0. Roche, A. 
18G3. Ross, W. 
18G2. Scholfield, D. T. 
18G1. Shantz, S. E. 
1861. Sinclair, J. 
18G1. Smale, S. B. 

1863. Smith, D. 

1858. Sparrow, J. W. 
18G0. Standish, J. 

1859. Stinson, C. W. 
18G2. Stubbs, J. 

1860. Sutton, H. H. 

1863. Tempest, W. F. 

1864. Tennant. 
18G3. Thorburn, R. 
1864. Tyiwhitt, J. 
1858. Wall, J. 
18G3. Wallace. J. 

1861. White, T. 
1861. Wilkins, G. 
1864. Workman, J. 
185G. Young, S. H. 






1^ 



UNIVBRSITT OF TORONTO. 

UNDERGRADUATES—Confj/iMcrf. 
FACULTY OF ARTS. 



I 



Date of 
Admission, 




Date of 
Aamission. 


1860. ^llirrt CKwiuli, 


p. (Ad 


1862 


Byers, M. 


1863. Adams, J. 


l^eundem.) 


1861 


Cameron, A 


1860. Alexander, R. H. 




1858 


Campbell, A. 


-1864. Amos, W. 




1861. 


Campbell, A. P. 


1868. Anderson, A. 




1853. 


Campbell, P. 


1857. Andrew, A. 




1861. 


Campb^JUJ. 


1858. Andrews, H. A. 




1864. 


V 

Campbell, J. . 


1863. Austin, J. 




1864. 


Carney, R. - 


1859. Bain, W. 




1858. 


Carroll, W. A. 


1861. Baldwin, R. 




1864. 


Carruthcrs, G. F 


1862. Baldwin, R. R. 




1859. 


Cassady, J. 


1860. Ballantyne, W. D. 




1864. 


Cassels, A. - 


1861. Barber, R. 




1861. 


Cassels, W. G. P 


1861. Barbour, W.T. 




1864. 


Chase, G. A. - 


1862. Barker, P. M. 




1861. 


Chisholm, W. R. 


1862. Barron, J. 




1861. 


Christie A. J. 


1856. Bates, N. 




1862. 


Clark, H. 


1860. Bearman, E. C. 




1860. 


Cleary, R. 


1869. Bell, W. C. 




1859. 


Coleman, E. 


1862. Bell, C. W. 




1863. 


Connon, C. H. 


1861. Bemiss, D. 




1859. 


Corbett, G. 


1858. Bethune, J. 




1861. 


Corbould, C. 


1861. Bielby, P. 




18G4. 


Coyne, J. H. - 


^ 18G/. Brigg, E. M. 




1859. 


Cowan, S. 


1861. Black, D. 




I860. 


Croly, J. E. 


1862. Bowes, J. 0. 




1864. 


Crozier, J. - 


1858. Boys, W. 




1863. 


Currie, C. D. 


1861. Bowers, J. E. 




1860. 


Cutten, H. II. 


1860. Bigg. W. R. 




1852. 


Davidson, W. 


1861. Brisbin, B. 




1862. 


Davidson, G. 


1857. Brodie, J. 




18G1. 


DelaMater, H. 


1857. Brown, W. 




1864. 


DelaMater, R. A. 


1858. Brough, R. R. 




18G2. 


Delamere, T. D. 


>1864. Bruce, J. 




1862. 


Denroche, H. M. 


1862. Brunei, G. 




1856. 


Dick, A. 


1863. Bryce, G. 




1861. 


Dickie, T. 


1859. Buckland, W. G. 




1864. 


Dickson, G. -. 


1859. Budd, S. A. 




1858. 


Dill, A. 


1864. Burnfield, 0. 




1860. 


Dixon, A. 


1858. Burnham, Q. A. 




1862. 


DobsoU, R. L. 


1862. Butler, T. P. 




1859. 


Donaldson, J. 



UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO. 



13 



DNDERGRADUATES-Con<i/j««i. 



Dato of 
▲dmisBioD. 



1868. Dow, J. 
1863. Dowsley, A. 
1863. E11.S, W. H. 

- 1864. Evans, J, 

1862. Falconbridge, W. G. 

1862. Farley, P. 
1861. Ferguson, P. 
1861. Fitzgerald, W. 

- 1864. Fleming, R. MoM. 
1861. Fletcher, J. 
1868. Forrest, W. 

- 1864. Fobs, W. D. 

1861. Foster, 8. 

1863. Qalbraith, J. 

1862. Gilles, G. 

1861. Gcodwillie, G. S. 

- 1864. Goodwillie, J. M. 
1859. Gordon, J. 

1862. Gould, J, E. 
1857. Grahame, J. 

1863. Graham, W. 
1862. Greenlees, A. 

1861. Greer, G. M. 
1857. Grierson, J. C. 

- 1864. Grover, T. M. 

1860. Gundy, J. R. 
1859. Hamilton, W. R. 

> 1864. Hamilton, A. 

1859. Hastie, A. 
1863. Hill, A. C. 

1862. Hill, H.- p. 

1861. Hill, J. 

- 1864. Hodge, G. 

1861. Hodgson, J. 

1860. Holme, J. C. 

1862. Holmes, W. R. 

1863. Hope, R. 
I860. Hopkin, J. W. 
1863. Hudson, R. S. 
1856. Hume, H. H. 
18G2. Hunter, D. 
1858. Hurlbert, J. 
1860. Jackes, C. B. 



Dat«of 
Admission 

I860. 

1864. 

1863. 

1860. 

1858. 

1860. 

1860. 

1861. 

1861. 

1862. 

1860. 

1861. 

1864. 

1859. 

1858. 

1861. 

1858. 

1859. 

1861. 

1859. 

1863. 

1859. 

1863. 

1860. 

1864. 

1860. 

1860. 

1861. 

1862. 

1857. 

1861. 

1861. 

1860. 

1861. 

1861. 

1862. 

1861. 

1861. 

1857. 

1860. 

1861. 

1863. 

1864. 



Jackson, J. P. 
Jamieson, C. »• 

Jeffers. 

Johnstone, J, 

Johnson, M. M. 

Jolly, J. W. 

Jones, S. A. 

Junor, D. 

Kay, W. 

Kennedy, A. 

Kerr, G. 

Kerr, B. 

Killmaster, J. , 

Kilpatrick, G, 

King, W. 0. 

King, A. McP. 

Kirkland, T. 

Laidlaw, R, J. 
Lash, Z. A. 

Lazier, S. P. 
Lazier, W. D. 
Ledyard, T. 
Ledyard, W. E. 
Lount, G. 
Macdonald, W. - 
Magee, J. 
Malcolm, J. 
Malloy, W, 
Mewbum, H. 
Miller, A. E. 
Miller, J. H. 
Millar, W. 
Mills, J. H. 
Mitchell, G. A. 
Moore, W. 
Moderwell, M. C. 
Morgan, J. C. 
Morrison, J. 
Muir, T. 
Mulholland, J. 
Mulholland, J. W. P. 
Munro, W. 
Murdoch, A. _ 



14 



UNIVERSITY OP TORONTO. 
UNDERGRADUATES-Con<in«firf. 



Date of 
AdmitiBion. 



i 



1861. Murphy, J. 

- 1864, McArthur, " C. 

1863. McBride, W. 
1858. McCarrol, W. 

-1864. McCoU, J. 

1862. McDiarmid, W. 

1860. McEwan, P.A. 

1864. McQiachy, W.{Adeunclem.) 
1858. McGregor, M. A. 

1856. McGrigor, J. 
1858. McGuire, T. 

1861. Mclnnis, W. 

1861. Mclnnes, D. J. 
1863. Mcintosh, .7. 
1858. Mclntyre, W. B, 

1858. McKay, W. 

1859. McKee, R. 
1858. McKenzie, G. 
1858. McKenzie, W. 

1862. McKenzie, M. 

1861. McKinnon, A. 
1858. McLean, J. 

1862. McLennan, F. 

1863. McLennan, P. 
1858. McPherson, A. F, 

^ 1864. Nason, W. R. 
-1864. Nichols, W. L. 

1857. Northgraves, Rev. G. R. 
~ 1864. O'Meara, C. 

1861. Orr, R. 

1860. Osborne, R, B. 

1861. Osborne, J. K. 
1858 Palmer, J, H. 
1860. Park, S. 

1862. Paterson, J. A. 

1863. Patterson, E. G. 
1860. Patton, F. L. 

- 1864. Paul, E. 
1860. Perchard, J. P. 
1863. Phillips, J. W. 

1858, Phillipps, H. 

1859. Piatt, G. 
1862. Porter, G. B. 



Date of 
Admiggion. 



1861. 

1863. 

1864. 

1861. 

1861, 

1861, 

1862, 

1860. 

1861. 

1863. 

1861. 

1861. 

1864. 

1861. 

1862. 

1857. 

1859. 

1862. 

1862. 

1863. 

1858. 

1863. 

1869. 

1860. 

1857. 

1861. 

1861. 

1864. 

1859. 

1857. 

1858. 

1863, 

1862, 

1858. 

1864. 

1864, 

1870. 

1861. 

1859. 

1863. 

1861. 



Preston, J. 
Pruyn, D, 
Purdy, J. - 
Purslowe, A. 
Quarry, J. J. 
Rathwell, W. 
Rattray, C. G. 

Reynolds, R. (Ad eundem.) 

Reazin, H. 

Reesor, F. A. 

Reid, D. 

Reid, L. H. 

Reid, W. J. - 

Rennelson, W. H. 

Rennio, G, 

Ridout, J. G. 

Ridout, J, 

Ridout, J. 

Robertson, L. H. 

Robertson, J. 

Robinson, E. 

Robinson, E. F. 

Rollo, J. F. 

Rolph, J. W. 

Roseborough, A. M. 

Sanson, J. 

Scott, R. G. 

Scott, J, » 

Seymour, C, 

Shaw, J. 

Shaw, W. J. 

Shaw, A. 

Sheppard, G. 

Sills, 0. 

Sinclair, A. - 

Sinclair, J, E. 

Small, J. S. 

Smiley, J. 

Smith, A. 

Smythe, E. H. 

Sp,ifford, J. 8. 



1864. Sparling, G. B, - 



UNIVERSITY OP TORONTO. 



15 



UNDERGRADUATES-Coniwued. 



Date of 
Admission. 

1859. 

1861. 

1860. 

1863. 
. 1864. 
. 1864. 

1858. 

1859. 

1863. 

1860. 
1862. 

1861. 
1862. 
1863. 
1861. 
1859. 
1859. 
1859. 
1861. 
1860. 
1859. 
1858. 



Squier, W. R. 
Squire, G. H. 
Stephenson, J. 
Stevenson, R. A. 
Stevenson, E, S. 
Stevenson, J. H. 
Stewart, H. D. 
Stewart, A. 
Stewart, McL. 
Stowell, J. 
Tait, J. 

Tamblyn, W. W. 
Taylor, H. 
Taylor, J. 
Terrill, J. J. 
Thompson, A. 
Thompson, J. B. 
Thompson, W. 
Thornburn, R. 
Thornton, R. M. 
Traver, A. H. 
Trenholme, N. 



Dato of 
Admission. 

1862. Tyner, A. C. 

1859. Ussher, S. G. 

1863. Walker, W. F. 

1860. Wallace, D. 

1864. Walshe, S. - 

1859. Warren, C. 
1864. Waters, R. II. - 

1862. Watt, W. 

1860. White, J. 
1859. Wilkins, G. 

1863. Williams, C. 

1863. Wilson, G. 
1859. Winn, T. B. 

1864. Wismer, J. A. - 
1858. Wood, S. G. 
1858. Woodland T. 
1863. Woodside, H. J. 

1861. Woolverton, A. 

1862. Wright, A. H. 
1861. Wright, P. 

1863. Yale, H. 

1864. Yokome, F. R. 



* 



16 



UNIVERSITY OP TORONTO. 



MEDALLISTS~-1864. 



FACULTF OF LAW. 



Gold Medal. 



IdiogtOD, J. 



FACULTY OF MEDICINE. 
Gold Medal McLaughlin, J. W. 



FACULTY OF ARTS. 

Silver Medal Clatsics Connor, J. W. 

" Vandersmissen, W. H. 

Mathematict Robertson, T.J. 

Wilson, J. S. 

Rutledge, J. 

Gold Medal Modern Languages Seymour, F. E. 

Natural Sciences Snider, E. F. 

Ethics, Met. Jf Civil Polity Craig, T. D. 

" " McMillan, J. 



I< 


<( 


<( 


It 


(C 


(1 


-— 1 


It 




WEDi 
t. 


i( 


tt 


t< 


ft 



tl 
tl 



IH, 



SCHOLARSHIPS. 



FACULTY OF LAW. 



FiEST Ybab. 

THIfiD " .. 



McEenzie, M. 
Gibbon, H. F. H. 



FACULTY OF MEDICINE. 

First Year Harbottle, R. 

Seoonr " Reeve, R. A. 

Third " McCarthy, J. L. G. 



UNIVERSITY OP TORONTO. 



17 



FACULTY OP ARTS. 
Matriculation... Oreek and Latin 'Cassels, A. 



Connon, C. H. 
Bell, C. W. 
Hill, J. 

1. 'Ilamilon, A. (doable.) 

2. 'Crozier, J. 
Galbraitb, J. 
Patterson, J. A. 
Malloy, W. 

Falconbridge, W. G. 
Campbell, J. (double.) 



FiBST Yeab 

Second «« «« 

Thied «« " «« 

Matriculation... Mathematics 

First Year " 

Second «« «• 

Third " «' 

Second Year Modern Languages wilh ffitt. 

Third " «' 

" " " 2. Tamblyn, W. W. 

Second Year Natural Sciences Morgan, J. C. 

Third " " Thompson, J. B. 

Second Year Metaphysics, ^c Delamere, T. D. 

Third «' " Campbell, J. 

Matriculation... General Proficiency 1. *Coyne, T. ' 

" " 2. spurdy, J. 

" " 8. "Grover, T. M. 

4. Hamilton, A. 

1. Patterson, E. G. 

2. Mewburn, H. 

3. Smythe, E. H. 

4. Yale, H. 

/Campbell, A. P. 

I Fitzgerald, W. 

Foster, S. 



First Year.. 
i< i< 

(I (( 

« i( 

Second Year. 

" «i 

Third " ., 






*l. Pupil of Upper Canada College. 

2. " Brantford Oramtuar School. 

3. « Toronto Grammar School. 



4. Pupil of St. Thomas Grammar School, 
o. " Upper Canada College. 
6. " Upper Canada College. 



PRIZES. 

English Essay. (The Science of Language) Campbell, J. 

French Composition Tamblyn W W 

Agriculture Keefer, W. N. 

THESIS FOR M.A. 

1863 McLellan, J. A. 

1864 MoMurrich, W. B. 



PRINCE'S PRIZE. 
McMillan, J. 



mni\)tvuiw of SToronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1861, 



MATRICULATION. 
FACULTY OF ARTS. 



GREEK. 



Hxamznera:!^^''- J^«? ^^^aul, LL.D. 
\ Thomas Moss, M.A. 



Translate : 

Mera rovrov^ dWo^ aveart], eTTiSeiKVv^ fxev einjdeiav 

Tov ra TTkoia alrelv KeXevovro^, mirep traktv top ctoXjov 

Kipovfirj TToiovfievov, iiriBeiKvi,'; Be oj? evTjOe^ el'i; ^J^fiopa 

aiTeiv Trapa tovtov, <^ Xvfiatvo/ieda rrjv irpa^tv. Et Be 

KaX^ Tw 'nyeixovL TTLarevcrofiev, w &v Kvpo<i BiBS, rl KiaUet 

/cat, ra aKpa rjiuv KeXeveiv Kvpov irpoKaTaXafi^dveiv ; 

Eyoi yhp^ oKvoCriv fiev &v 619 ra TrXola ifijSaiveiv, h rnxlv 

Boi'q, fir) 7]fid^ avraZ^ rah Tpiijpeai KaraBvarj' (f>o^olfir}v 

odvr^ riyefiovL & Bolt), eTreadai, firj ^fia^' dydr/y 60ev 

ovx olov^ re eo-rafc e^eXdelv /3ovXoi/X7jv B" av, ukovto^ 

airmv Kvfiov. XaOeiv avrov aTreXOwv o ov Bvvarov iariv. 

'A\\' eryw <^ixi ravra fiev (f)Xvapia<; eivai- Bokci Bi fioi, 

avSpa^ eXOovTa^ irpo^ Kvpov. oirive^ iirLTTjBeioi. <rvv 

KXeap^rp,^ epcorau CKeivov rl ^ovXerai r/ficu xPW^at. koX 

euv ji^v r) irpa^t^i fi irapairX'qcrta om-rrep koI TrpoaOep 

eprJToroi^ ^evoi<;, eKeadaL Kot ^fia^ koI firj Kadov^ 

eivai Ttav irpoaBev tovt^ avvava^avrav, 'E^y Be fielicav 



.<■! 

^!I|i 



t) TTpa^L^ 7ri<} •jrpoaOev ^alvqrai, koX iTrnrovarepa, koI 
iTTiKivBuvoTepa, a^iouprJTreia-avTa'qp.a^ dyeiv, r} irenTOema 
7r/oo9 (f>i\,iav a<l)tivaL' ovto) yap koI e-rro/xevot hv <f)i\oi 
avTQj KoX TTpoOvfioL tTToifieOu KoX uTTiovTet acr(f)a\co^ &v 
uTrioiixev. 6 ti 8' &v 7rpo<i ravra Xiyrj dvayyelXai Sevpo. 
t)p.a<i 8' aKovaavTa<i vrpo? rama ^ovKevea-Oai. "EBo^e 
ravTa, koI avBpa<; eXofxevoi, avv Kkedp-^fp Trifiirova-iVi 
OL ypcoTwv Kvpov ra So^avra rfj (rrparia. 

Xenopiion, Anabasis, i., c. 3. 

1. aXKo<i. Who is conjectured to have been the speaker ? 
Why? 

2. iiriSeiKvv';. Give principal parts of this verb. 

3. w du Kvpo^ Bm. Explain the construction of ^. 

4. uKpa. Where ? 

5. Tptrjpeai. Decline this noun in the contracted and 
uncontracted forms. 

6. Boirj. Give all the moods of the active voice of this 
tense. 

7. \a6elv avTov uTreXdoov. Mention some other verbs that 
employ the participle in a similar manner. 

8. 'xprjcrdai. Explain the construction of this verb with 
the accusative and the dative. 

9. o'lairep kuI Trporepov. On what occasion ? 

10. fiei^wv. What other form ? Give degrees of compari- 
son. 

11. a^tovV' How governed ? 

12. 7r/309 (pikiav. Supply the ellipsis. 

13. Parse : nroiovpbivov, Sc3, okvoiijv, cuydr/oiyi^ekOelvyXadelv, 
KaKiov^, a(f}L€vai,, eKofjuevoi, Bo^avra. 

14. Derive : TrXota, crroXo?, Tpt^p7]<ij aKavy aa<^aKq<i. 

15. State what you know of Ciearchus. 



Translate : 



11. 



'ETrel B^Karenifii>0v iiro roO 7rarph<i ^arpdTrm Av^ 

Tov Kn) ru^i^ " ^ ' Y^J^cKi TTpoecTtfai. ecpo^ovvTO au- 
rov. Kai yap epy^ eneSe^KuvTo, koX e"\eyezl 6tl o.V 
avrrore '^poono, hre\ dna^ ^tXo, airoc, i^ro oU^l 
ere ^Yecov, yi,o,.ro, he hk kAkcov ^plZ^v tal 
epo, 8 ^., ,al d rl, re dyadhv ^ ,aKhv /o4X atlv 

eyiro roaovrovxpovov ^^v, hre vLK<6r, Ka\roi,rS kI 

ircficopelro. ^^^'^?''. «A.\ ac^ecSearara 7rdvru>v 

Xenophon, Anabaau, i., c. 9. 

1. Karewiiirrer,. Force of Karh here ? 

2. Kao-TwXoO irehiov. Where situate ? 

3. ^pvyia^. How subdivided ? 

4. arreecra^iyov K6pov. What is the construction ' 

cei^b^^tr;rl!nrtit^li^^^^^^ 

6. Trpoo^To. What is the form in common Greek ? 

7. /^6('oi.9. Give degrees of comparison. 

8. Distinguish between Kal d and et Koi. 

^' "^""''P^' ^"^ - T«/,ai/^6.o,. Explain the idiom. 



■ 



1^ 



10. ToaovTov ypovov. Why ftccusativo ? 

11. KaTaye7<''tt^. Supply tho ellipsis. 

12. Parse : ttXc/o rov, /rirciVotTo, uvroo-p^otTO, c'/Xoi/to, yepoiv- 
TO, Trpd^eiau, el'a. 

13. Mci tion any other historical works by Xenophon. 

14. Form the cor narativo and superlative of: rap^i/?, 
ixBpo^, oKiyo^j pnSios, fieyu'i. 






■'1.1 



min\}tt:uit9 of ^Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



MATKTOULATION. 



LATIN. 



Uxaminets:!^^'^' ^^^^i McCaul, LL.D. 
\ Thomas Moss, M.A. 



Translate : 

^ HsDC ubi dixit, pauUulum commoratiH, signa canere 
jubet, atque instructos ordines in looum a luum deducit. 

periculo animus amphor esset, ipso pedes cKercitum pro 

oco atque copus instruit. Nam, uti planit, .s erat in^e? 

8.n. tros montjs et ab dexterarupis aspera, .cto cohortis 

colW^ Ah L"''' ^^^•'^"'^^""^ «igna in sub.idio arctius 
collocat. Ab his centunones, omnia lectos vt evocatos 
pr^terea ex gregariis militibus optumum que, .quearma: 
turn in primam aciem subducit. C. Manlium .n dextera 
Faesu anum quendam in sinistra parte curare j. bet fnse 

belTo rT V^T' P-P'-^uila^n assi i 'qZ 
bello Cimbrico C. Man us in exerciSu habuisseaicebTtu^ 
At> ex altera parte C. Antonius, pedibus ^cr >r m^nA 

pTmhtifTl "^\"''^^ ^- ^«^-- legl"^: Uum 
peiraittit. Illo cohortis veteranas, quas turau i causa 

suSi's'TcIt" t""^^' P"^ '^^ e'etlum^exercuum n 
subsidus locat. Ipse equo circumiens, unumquemaue 

ToZTZT.f-'''' '"''^^"'•' ^°Sat, ut' memrerinTs 
contra la rones inermis, pro patria, pro liberis, pro aris 
atqne focis su.s certare. Homo m litaris, quod anpZ 

SrcurmV"'"l"^-'^"^ P^^^^^^- au^lega^f u 
f'li'l.':!'^. ^^S"^ gJ?"^ ^n exercitu fuerat. plerosoue 
'^^;. x.;;;-.aque eoruiu tortia noverat ; ea commemorando 
mihtum aniraos accendebat. commemorando 

Sallust, Catilina, c. 59. 



1. Parse signa^ pedeSj ah dextera^ ampUua anno8 tngintaj 
prcelio, tumulti causa. 

2. What examples in this extract of " the ablative abso- 
lute?" 

S. Mark the quantity of the penultimate of paullulunty 
deducit, collocate colonis, neguihat, latrones. 

4. Oeto cohort IS. How many cohorts in a legion ? How 
was each cohort divided ? 

5. Centuriones. What was the designation of the chief 
centurion of a legion ? 

6. Fsesulanum. Where was Feesulee ? 

7. Bello Cimhrico. Give a brief account of it. 

8. C. Antonius. What oflSce did he hold ? Who was 
his colleague ? 

9. Distinguish appello and nomino, proslium, pugna^ and 
acies, prsefectus^ legatus^ and prator, tumultus and helium. 

II. 

1. Decline fJia^ domus, hoe, vis, iter, senex. 

2. What is meant by " apposition ?" 

8. Compare pulcher, leviSf similis, parvus^ nequam, 
henevolus. 

4. What deponent verbs govern the ablative ? 

5. Conjugate mordeo, spargo, tollo, pendo, gigno, soleo. 

6. Give a list of verbs Avhich govern the genitive. 



III. 



Translate : 



* Cuncta equidem tibi, Rex, fuerit quodcumque, fatebor 
Vera,' inquit : ' neque me Argolica de gente negabo : 
Hoc primum ; nee, si raiserum fortuna Sinonem 
Finxit, vanum etiam mendacemque improba finget. 
Fando aliquod si forte tuas pervenit ad aures 
Belidse nomen Palamedis et inclyta fama 
Gloria : quern fais^ su' proditione Felasgi 
Insontem, infando indioio, q^uia bella vetabat, 



Bemisere neci ; nunc cassum lumine lugent ; 
Illi me comitem et consanguinitate propinquum 
Pauper in arma pater primis hue misit ab annis : 
Dum stabat regno incoluinis, reguraque vigebat * 
Conciliis, et nos aliquod nomenque decusque 
Gessimus. Invidia postquam pellacis Ulixi 
(Haud ignota loquor) superis concessit ab oris ; 
Afflictus vitam in tenebris luctuquo trahebam,* 
Et casum insontis mecum indignabar amici. 
Nee tacui demens ; et me, fors si qua tulisset, 
Si patrios unquara remeassem victor ad Argos, 
Promisi ultorem ; et verbis odia aspera movi. ' 
Hinc mihi prima mali labes ; liinc semper Ulixes 
Criminibus terrere novis ; hinc spargere voces 
In valgum ambiguas, et quserere conscius arma. 
Nee requievit enim, donee Calchante ministro— 
Sed quid ego haec autem nequi(iquam ingrata revolve ? 
Quidve moror, si omnes uno ordine habetis Achivos 
Idque audire sat est ? jamdudum sumite poenas : ' 
Hoc Ithacus velit, et magno mercentur Atridse.' 

Virgil, uEneid, ii., vv. 77-104. 

1. Parse neci, cassum lumine, afflictus. me, in v. 94, 
terrere^ veht. ^ , , , 

2. Belidee. What is the origin of this name? What 
dimculty as to quantity ? 

3. Falsa sub proditione. Explain the meanintr 

4. Pelasgi. Who ? Why so called ? 

5. Primis ah annis. Of what ? 

6. Argos. In what part of Peloponnesus ? State the 
other divisions. 

7. Write brief notices of Palamedes, Ulysses, and the 
■Atridce, 

^ 8. Calchante ministro. By what name is the figure 

0. Give the laws of the quantity of final as, es, is, os 
and us. ' > > *'«> 



SlnfUctKiiUji of t!rocotito. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



MATRICULATION. 



LATIN. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



ET • f Rev. John McCaul, LL.D. 

■^^^^*^^^*-'i Thomas Moss, M.A. 



Translate : 



I. 



Sic te diva potens Cypri, 

Sic fratres Helense, lucida sidera, 
Ventorumque regat pater 

Obstrictis aliis prjeter lapyga, 
Navis, quae tibi creditum 

Debes Virgilium, finibus Atticis 
Reddas incolumem, precor, 

Et serves animse dimidiura meao. 
Illi robur et jes triplex 

Circa pectus erat, qui fragilem truci 
Commisit pelago ratem 

Primus nee timuit praecipitem Africum 
Decertantem Aquilonibus, 

Nee tristes Hyadas nee rabiem Noti, 
Quo non arbiter Hadrise 

I\/l *i 1 #\*. ^■r\\l f\wr\ (^M«« »^rt»%«*«/\ ^Tiili* T*»rt4'0 
XTXu-jui, luIxClC DCU pOiiClU T UiU llclu. 

Quern mortis timuit gradum, 

Qui siccis oculis monstra natantia, 






.i. 

If: 



P.-t; Ti 



iii 



Qui vidit mare turgidum et 

Infames scopulos Acroceraunia ? 
Nequicquam Deus abscidit 

Prudens Oceano dissociabili 
Terras, si tamen impige 

Non tangenda rates transiliunt vada. 

Horace, Odes, i, 3, vv. 1-24. 

^.fh^^^^^'^ *^® following words governed— ee, CyprL 
hot, fimbus, zlli, Aquilonihus f 

2. State the geographical position of Cmrua, Attica, 
Uadria^ Acroceraunia. 

3. Fratres Helensc ; ventorum pater. What were their 
names ? 

^ 4. Give the Latin designations of the winds from eieht 
points of the compass. ° 

5. Reddas. Why in subjunctive ? 

6. Write a brief account of the Argo. 

7. Hijadas. What was their Latin name ? 

8. Give scales of the metres in this ode. 

9. Give scales of the metres in the Alcaic stanza. 



m 



II. 

1. Distinguish ohlltus and bhUtus, sede and sede, vinci- 
turmd vmcitur, nota and nota, labor smd labor, iacerent 
and jaeerent. '^ 

2. What verbs take a double accusative after them ? 

3. Distinguish os, oris and os, ossis, vas, vadis and vas 
vasts, career and carceres, littera and litterx, opera and 
operse, quccritur and queritur. 

4. Explain the use of the interrogative particles utrum 
auj ne, and num. ' 

5. Distinguish dolus, fraus, and fallacia, segrego, se- 
pono, and sejungo, extemplo, repente, and subito. 

6. What is oratio ohliqua ? How are the moods chanced 
When a speech is transferred to that form ? 



. 1-24. 
'» Oypriy 
Atticaj 
3re their 
>m eight 



, vmci- 
icerent 



or 

d vasy 
'a and 



itrum, 

10, 86- 

anged 



Translate ; 

Netamen ignores variorum jura dierum • 
Ille Nefastus erit, per quem trk v^.l -i 
Fastus erit, pe; quem^i:geteb7tti ''"'"' ' 

Nonarurn tutela deo%aret. Omnibus stis 
Ne fallare cave, proximus Ater er t ^ 

Trnt'TV''-' ^"'^ ^'^ Roma kiebus 
Damna sub adverso tristia Marte tuli 

H^c mihi dicta semel, totis h^renia fastis 
Ne senem rerum scindere cogar, erunt ' 

Ecce tibi faustum, Germanice, nuntiat annum 
Inque meo primus carmine JanSadest' 
Jane biceps, anni tacite labentis orLo * 
Solus de superis qui tua terga vides' 

Ovid, Fasti, i., w. 45-70. 

2. Tna verba. What ? 

3. What are dies intercisi ? 

4. Populum includere seiih'<i a^« , i, . • . 

5 v54 WW ?? ^«^^hat IS the reference? 
^' V. 54. What IS the Latin word for this ? 

o. Jixpress in Latin the Sfifli np q ^ , 
October, the 6th of July °^ September, the 13th of 

7- V. 60. To what is the reference ? 
8. Writfi brief n^'nlj-^.f 



9- What Latin authors wrote Elegiac? 






ft: 



Uni\}tv»it^ of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1804. 



MATRICULATION. 



GREEK. 

HONORS AND SCOLARSHIPS. 



Uxaminers : i ?,?^^ McCaul, LL.D. 
< Thomas Moss, M.A. 



Translate : 

T^i/ Afey 7^^ a{;v vrfc Borj i\!Ka)7r€<i 'Axaioi 
E? Xpvai^v irkii-Kovaiv. cijov^yi hh Ba>pa civaKTt' 
Irjvbe veov KXiairjOev e/Sav KyjpvKe^ ayovTe<i 
Kovprjv Bpiaijo^, Wjv ixol hoaav vle^ 'Axamv. 
y^^i'i '^ Vf ^'^^«°"«'' 7^5 'n-epiaxeo jratSo^ Ojoq- 
^t^ffova- OuXvfiTrSvSe Ata Xlaat, et irore hn tl 
H e-rret (ovrjaa^ KpaSlijv Aw9 ye koX epyo). 
UoWdKi ycip aio irarpo^ ivl fi^ydpoiaiv ^Kovaa 
W//6i^9, ir ecfirjaea Ke\atve^kl Kpovlcovt 
UtT; ev adavaroiaiv ueiKea Xotyhv dfivmt, 
OTnrore^^cvJvvBrjaao 'OUfXTrcoc ^6e\ov dXXoc, 
tiprj r r}8e lioa-eiSawv Kal UaWh^ 'AOtji'T). 
AXXa ai, jhv 7' iXOovaa, Oeh, {jireXvaao Seaacov, 
ilX eKajoyxeipov KaXiaaa e? fiUKpbv "OXvuttov, 
Op Bpiapecov KaXiovat deol, dvhpe^ U re Trai^re? 
Aiyalm • o yhp arke ^ly ov Trarph'i dixdvuiv. , 



Iliad, I. vv. 389-414. 



1. "AvaKTu "Who is meant ? 

2. do. Parse. 






is 



8. Distinguish between o7o^ and oto^. 

4. Lino 404. Parse ov. 

6. Write the common forms of : e^avy uKovaa^ Kovp'qvy vU<:. 

6. Give the derivations of: eXUayne^, K€\aive(f>ii, deiKea. 



II. 



Translate : 

T(o 7 o)<i ^^ovXevaavre BieTfiayev r) fiev cTretTa 
Et9 aXaaXro fiadeiav am alyXTjevro'; 'OXvfiTrov, 
Zev<;8k ebv Trpoj? Swfia. Oiol B" a/xa iravre^ avearav 
E^^eSetov, (r(f)ov irarpo'i ivavrlov ovSi rt? ctXtj 
Metmt itrepyofievov, aXX avrloL ecrrav airavTa. 
n<i fiev kvOa KaOe^er eirl dpovov. ovBe fitu"lipr} 
UyvoLTja-ev iSova on ol cvfilppdara-aTO ^ovXd<{ 
A^yypoTre^a Qhi^, OvyaTqp dXioio yipovro^. 
AvTiKu K€^TOfiLOL(TL Aiu KpoviQJva TrpoarjvBa. 
" Tt9 8' av Toi, BoXofirjTa, Oecov <rvp,(f}pd<7craT0 ^ovXa^ ; 
Aiel rot (f)tXov iarlv ifiev dirovoa^Lv iovra, 
KpVTTTdBia jypoveovra BiKa^e/jLCV ovBi rl irdt fiot 
Tlpot^pfoy jerXrjKa^ elirelv eiro<i o rri votjafj^i" 
„,P^^^ ^' »7/i6t73eT' Gireira iraTrjp dvBpwv re dedv tC 

'iipVf M ^ •n-dvTa'i ijjioix; iTneXireo ixvdov^ 
ElBija-€cv' ;!^aX€7rot roc ecrovr dX6x(^ nrep iovarj. 

Iliad, I., vv. 531-546. 

1. Parse BUriiayev, oXto, rffvoirjcrev. 

2. Give common forms of : dvearav, <rvfi<l>pd(Ta-aTO, dXloio, 
BiKd^cfieVf iiriiXTreo. 

^ 3. Derive : dpyvpoire^a. Keprofiio^, BoXofujTfj^, wpoApwv, 
aXo')(p<i, 

4. Notice any idiomatic peculiarity in lines 536-538. 

III. 
Translate : 

"EvBa Be rrrvp K€iavT€<; i6v(rafiev' r}Be Kot avroi 
TvpSiv alvvfievot ^dyop,ev' fiivofiiv re /xiv evBov 
'^fievoi, 6009 eTTtiXOe vifxcov ^epe 8' o^pifiov dx^oi 
vX7}<i d^aXer]<i, Xva ol TroriBopTriov eir). 
CKToadev S' dvTpoio BaXwv opvaayBoy effntcev 
VM'€i<t Be Bei<TavTe<i direaavp^ed'' e? uv^^v avrpov 



aujhp Sy e,<i eupy cTTrio^ r)\aae irlova p.^\a, 

apvecov, re rpdyov, re. ^aSeir^, Lo0ev ai,\r,,.^^^ ' 

0/ipcf.ov' ovK&u rovye 86co kuI etKoa\a^ac 
eadXal. rerpa^vKXoi Jtt' o{iSeo<i 6x\la-^euiv. 
roaavv vXc^arov 'rrhprjv iTrWrj^e dCpvatu. 
e^ofievo, 8 r)p,eXyev 6c, Kal ^rjKdSa, aL?, 
'rravra Kara ^ocpau, Kal in-' if^^pvop ^k,v kK&crr,. 

Odyssey, IX., vv. 230-245. 
1. Parse: ic^lavre,, Aireaavtieea, o^Beo^:, TfKev. 

3. ^Xl^aro,, Mention different derivations. 

4. Distinguish between ea'a and Ova). 

Translate : 

^ "^n? i<f>diir)v' 6 U p: olp^^a, ^p.e(^€ro uiOtp- 
o) iro-rroL rjpaXalij pe 7raXal6ara 0i<Td>a0' kdveL. 

-T^Xepo, hvpvpcSrj,, 6, pamoaiipr) iK^Kaaro, 
Kat pavr€vop€vo, Kareyi^pa KvKXd>7r€(Taiv' 
09 poc e<hraSe rrdvra reXevr^aea0a, oiriaato, 
X^cpcovep O8v<rno, dpaprr,aea0aL 6ira>'jrri^. * 

ev0a8 eXeyae<r0ac, peydXvv iircupivov dQv 

aXX aye 8eyp 08vaev, ha roi ndp ^eivia Lro 
^opnvv r' 6rp^,co 86pevac KXvrhv ^ElvoaiyaZ 
rovjap eyco rrac, elpc, rrar^p S' i,,^, ei;^ Ja. elvat- 
avro,8, a. k i0iXr,a\Jr^aerac, ov8i rchxXo,, 
ovre 0ecov paKdpmv, oiire 0vr)r&v dv0ptiyirov. 

Odyssey, IX., vv. 506-521. 

1. A tto'tto^ Explain the origin of the exclamation. 

2. Parse : eSiyarjv and iirLeipevoi'. 

3. evvoalyaiov. Who is meant ? 






V. 

1. To -whom is tlio invoiitiou of the Greek alphabet 
ascribed? Viy whojn are adtHtions Baid to have been made? 
Whence were the forms of the breathings derived ? 

2. Wliat do you understand by SiopOcoaei^ ? Distin- 
guish between these, kut avBpa, and these Karh TroXet?. 

3. Mention writers whom you consider representatives of 
the Attic, Ionic, Doric, and ^olic dialects. 

4. Mention three principal cases in which you may cer- 
tainly know that the Digamma existed in a word. 

5. Wlien is a long vowel "V diphtlion^ at the end of a 
word generally/ made short in Homer ? What exceptions ? 

G. Explain the terms : paroxytonc^ propm'oxytone^ and 
propcrispomcnon. 



mnmvHitii Of JCotonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18C4. 



MATKICULATION. 



GREEK-LAW. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



Examiners: IJ^^* '^^^^^' McCaul, LL.D. 

/Thomas Moss, M. A. 



Translate : 



I. 



ItiZH' ^^ A^'^t ^f-^ ^^'^^^ "^^7 e.>tfr 

^t/^i, <rv8 €v AvKiy, 8re Kev rcov 8^aovrKa>aai 



Ill" 

i 



m: 




n? dpa ^(avi'iaavre, Kaff "ttttwu dt^avre, 
\€tpd<; T a\\};Xwf Xa^eriju kuI mcrdiiaavTO, 
"VivO' avre FXau/cro KpofiBrjs' 0ptVa? efe\cTO Zeu?, 
'^0«? 7rpo«? TuBd^tjv Aiofii'jhea T€v')(e d/jL€i0ev 
Xpvaca '^aXKelwv, eKaTOfx^oi evvea^oifov- 

"VjKTMp 8' OS ^Kaid'i TC Trv\a<i koX <f)7)y6v ixavev, 
*Afi(f> dpa fii<f 'Vpcowif d\n\0L d^ou 7j8e 6vyaTpe<i 
'FApofxcvai 7ral?>d<i re Kaaiyvi'jrovs' re tTa<; re 
Kat Trocrta?. 'O 8' tTreira OeoJ.f €V)(^ecr0ai dvar/ei 
Ildaa<i e^eiqr ttoW^cti hk Kt'jBe i^yTTTo. 

Iliad, VI., vv. 215-241. 

1. OiVfcU9. How connected with Diomcde ? 

2. Be'7ra<i d/KfuKVireWov' Explain. 

3. oT kv &>'j(3r](nv, &c. Explain the allusion. 

4. What were the sentiments of the heroic age vrith 
respect to the duties of hospitality ? 

5. ^ptW? i^ikero Zev^. Mention any attempts of critics 
to explain the apparent meanness of this sentiment. 

6. Parse and give the forms in Attic Greek of : i<r<Ti, 
Kd\\i(f)\ Kt'xeico, iira/Meiylro/xev, i^iXero, TroWfjac. 

7. Give the derivations of: dfivficovy ^(oarrjpa, o/ittXo?, 
eKaTOfx^oia, KaaiyvqTO'i. 

II. 

Translate : 

" ZeO dWoi re deoi, Bore 8:7 Kot rovSe yeveedat 
IlatS' ifxov, ft)? Kol iyoi irepy upLirpeiria TpcoeaaiVy 
*il8e ^Irjv T dyaObv, Kol 'iXiov t<^t uvdaaetv. 
Kat TTore rt? eiTrrjai, irarpo^ <y ohe ttoXXov dp>eiv(ov* 
'E« TToXefiov dviovra' (pipoi S" hapa ^poToevra 
KreiVa? S}]L0v dvlpa, %apei7/ 8e ^peva MTrjp" 

''XI9 elTTwv dXoxoto ^iXi]^ iv %e/3(Tif isdijKev 
UalS" koV rj S" dpa /jLIU KrjcoBei Be^aro koXttw 
AaKpvoev yeXdcraaa. lloai^ B' iXeijae vot]aa<i, 
Xetpi re fiLU Karepe^ev, eiro^ t e^xir, €k t ovofxa^ev. 
" Aaifiovir), fX7) fioi rt, XlijvaKaxi^eo Ovfio)- 
Ov yap T19 fi vTrep alaav dvr]p "AtSt Trpoid'^eL' 
Molpav 8' ov Tivd (f>7]/jLi Trecjivy/Jbivov efifievac uvBp&p, 
Ov KUKov, ouBe fi6V i(rdXbv, iv^jv rd irpoiTa yivrjTai, 
'AXX' ek oIkov iovcra rd a avrr]^ epya KoiiL^e, 
*Io"t6j' t' r}XaKdT7]v re, kuI dfi(pLTTo\oi<xt, KeXeve 



*Epyoi> iirot^eaBac- UoXcfio^ S' auSpeaai fieXy^u 
Uaaip^Jfiol 8e /xaXiara, toI '\X{(p iyryeydaaiv." 
''n<i apa <f^' ma-af Kopvff e'lXeTo if)ai8ifMo^"EKT(op 

"iTTTTOVplV aK:)XO<! Ot <f>lX7f olKUV^e /3€J3t]Ket 

'EvrpoTraXi^ofieur}. OaXepov Kara huKpu x^ovca. 
Alyjra 8' tireiO' iKaue B6/j,ou<{ evuaierunuTa^ 
"i:KTopo<{ duBpo(f)uvoio, Ki)^,jaaTo 8" tyZuOt -rroXXas 
' hp.(j)i.'nuXov'^,jfi(Tiv 8e yoou irarTtjcnv ivMpaev. 
Aifihf hi ^a)bif y6ov"KKTopa m tvl oUtp' 
Ou yap fiiv tT tijjavTo virorpoTrov tK TroXefioco 
"l^ea-daij Trpo(f)vyuvTa p,ho^ KaX x^ipa^ 'Axaiwv. 

Iliad, VI., vv. 47G-502. 

1. 'I\tou. Why in genitive ? 

2. 8acfiovc7}. Explain the signification of this epithet. 

3. ra a avrfj^ k'pya. Translate into Latin. 

4. "AiSi. What was the Homeric idea of Hades ? 

5. Distinguish between civjjp ajid avepoiiroK 

6. Line 479 {kuI irore ri^. &c.) Explain the construc- 
tion. 

in. 

1. To whom is the invention of the Greek alphabet 
ascribed ? Bj whom are additions said to have been made ? 
Whence were the forms of the breathings derived ? 

2. What do you understan<l by hiopOcoaei, ? Distinguish 
between these, /car av8pa, and those, Karh ttoXgl^. 

*i, ^- ,¥<^V'''" ^'tI^'""-^ ""^'^'^ ^""'^ consider representatives of 
the Attic, Ionic, Doric and iEolic dialects. 

_ 4. Mention three principal cases in which you may cer- 
tainly know that the Digamma was present in a word. 

5. When is a long vowel or diphthong at the end of a 
word generally made short in Homer ? What exceptions ? 

6. Explain the terms : paroxytone, proparoxytone, and 



Unit^tvmp of Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



MATRICULATION. 



TRANSLATION INTO LATIN. 



Uxaminefs:! I^^^' ^^^.^ ^^^aul, LL.D. 
\ Thomas Moss, M.A. 



^3 

Ufa 



I. 

When Xenophon was performing a customary sacri- 
fice, he learned that the the elder of his two sons, by name 
Gryllus, had fallen in battle at Mantinea; nor did he 
think that the commenced worship of the gods should 
be stopped on that account, but he was satisfied 
merely to lay down the crown. Having enquired in 
what manner he had fallen, when he heard that he had 
died fighting very bravely, he replaced the crown on 
his head, having called the deities, to whom he was 
sacrificing, to witness, that he felt greater pleasure from 
the valour of his son than pain from his death. 

Xenoplion cum sollemnis sacnficium perago, e duo 
filius magnus natus, nomen Gryllus, apud Mantinea 
m prcehum cado cognosco; nee ideo instituo Beus cultus 
omitto puto, sed tantummodo corona depono contineo. 
Percontor quisnam modus occido, ut audio fortiter 
pugno mtereo, corona caput repono, numen, qui sacrijico, 
testor magnus sui ex virtus filius voluptas quam ex 
mors amaritudo sentio. 

11. 

Masinissa, the neighbour of Carthage, who enjoyed 
tlie tavour of the Romans, and seems even to have been 
instigated by them, neglected no opportunity of harass- 



Is!' 



" I. 



V -'.,; 



i>r 



i 1 




a , 1 
1 



ing and annoying the reviving state. The Roman 
Cato, who was infatuated by a blind hatred of Carthage, 
partly perhaps because the Carthaginians had rejected 
his proffered mediation between them and Masinissa, 
and partly from a real, though unfounded fear of the 
growing power of Carthage, urged in every speech he 
made in the senate the necessity of crushing the African 
republic. Masinissa, who well knew the feelings of the 
party at Eome hostile to Carthage, and was sure not 
only of impunity, but of support and protection, increased 
his own dominion at the expense of Carthage, and by 
constant disputes and vexations drove the Carthaginians 
to the necessity of defending their rights by force of 
arms, because Rome, when appealed to, either delayed 
pronouncing sentence, or decided in favour of the 
aggressor. The Romans, gladly seizing the opportunity, 
charged the Carthaginians with having broken the 
peace. The people of Carthage implored their mercy ; 
and to assure them that they had no hostile intentions, 
they not only sent three hundred of their noblest citizens 
as hostages to Rome, but delivered up all their ships 
and arms. This happened in B.C. 149; and when all 
this was done, the Romans further demanded that Car- 
thage should be razed to the ground, and that the 
inhabitants should build a new town for themselves at 
a distance of many miles from the sea. The treacher- 
ous and insolent nature of this demand drove the people 
to despair and madness ; they resolved to perish under 
the ruins of their own houses rather than yield to such 
insolence. A bold patriotic spirit seized all ranks and 
all ages, and the women cheerfully sacrificed all their 
finery upon the altar of their country. The whole city 
was at once changed into a military camp, temples were 
at once transformed into manufactories of arms, and 
nothing was spared that could serve to deliver the 
country from its impending doom. 

III. 

In the high-towering poplar thus swinging, 

My harp! hang suspended at ease ; 
Thy chords at soft intervals ringing, 

As swept by the hand of the breeze. 

The blue vault its luH beauty displaying, 
Not a cloud the pure scther o'ershades; 

While in sighs his soft presence betraying, 
The greeu foliage young Zephyr pervades. 



m 



Thus I leave thee to murmur and quiver 
As waked by the slow-rising wind; 

While here by the side of the river 
I repose, on soft verdure reclined. 

Ah! along the horizon dark scowlino-, 
What tempest-bred shadows appeiu'! 

Clouds! clouds rise incessantly rolling; 
Hark! the storm rushes loud on my' ear. 

Oh ! my harp, ray companion, my treasure, 
Let us rise, let us hasten away ! 

'Tis thus fly the phantoms of pleasure; 
Thus fade our bright hopes in decay. 



J- 






% 

I 



ntmtvm^ oc ^rotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18fi4. 



MATRICULATION. 



GREEK-LAW. 



Examiners :\ S'^^* ^'^"^^ McCaul, LL.D. 
\ Thomas Moss, M.A. 



I. 

Translate : 

airiot ray KXrjpovofirp KaraXtTr^v d7ro\a{>eiv a^TT??, a Jr^e 

raro CO, errraerv, rye,6f.euo, 6 ^al, red.'^^erac, dial 
TOP ^ev evrv^ovvra i-rrl rco Traihl i^elvov '6pa, r^/roO 

o^a? auTco KpoKrj, eKpifiaro. roi,, fxkv rydp -rrepl rtov '6oL 

("^ «7ro. emovrayu dyy^Xcou re. kuX v^^perL. XAP 
V^-avToc, ^apd rhv ^lov, ^) rl i.elvo earcv, o5 Jrll 

Zai^rir"""""^ ^^^^- "^^^ 'y^^'' '"'^^ ^aaCxArj 
Tr T' ' T? '^^^^''f^oviaTaroL elvat SoKOvacv, ^^co rov 

Vhmv rh upcaph evp^aec nrpoa6vTa ai^J,,, c^^/3ov9, koL 



i 
I 



Tapa'xa'it koI fila-rj, koI im^ov\a<i, Kot 6pya<: kuI KoKa- 
Keiar TovTOL'i <yap a7ravre<i ^vimaiv. ew •nevOrj, koX 
voaovi, Koi irdOri, i^ ia-OTifjLia<i BrjXaBi) ap)(pvTa avT&v 
OTTov Be TO, Tovrwv 'TTovTjpa, Xoyl^eaOai Kaip6<i, ola rh rS>v 

IBlCOT&U aV €17]. 

LuciAN, Charon. 




i 



■Sri" 



1. iroii'^a-eiev. What part of the verb ? How used in 
Attic Greek ? 

2. avTrj<;. (line 4). With what does this word agree ? 
Why in the genitive ? 

3. ^OXvfjLTTia. What case, and why ? Mention the 
names of the other great games of Greece. 

4. itcKOfii^ovra. What is the equivalent Latin word ? 

5. Parse the following words, and give the future and 
second aorist active, and the perfects active and passive of 
the verba from which they come : fMcidoi. e^ei, xo^pf^v, hcKev, 
redv^^eraL, opa, evprjcreL. 

6. Parse : iinOd'i, ^7r'o"TaTo, yevo/xiva), dOXrjTov, expi- 
/Liaro, ifKeiw, Trivdtj, IBiwtmv. 

7. Conjugate the present of elfxt through all the moods. 

8. Decline e??? iyco, ovto<;, <rv. 

9. Give the genitives of ovofxa, yvvrj, v7rr]peTi';<j, iJSu?. 

II. 

AHM. Xat/je, w Tifioyv, to fieya 6(p€\o<; tov yevovi, to 
epeicTfia tcou ^AOrjvaicop^ rb mrpo^Xr^jjia rr}<i 'E\XaSo9' koI 
fir)v irdXai ae 6 Brjfiof: ^vveLXeyfievo^i koX at ^ovXaX dficfiQ- 
repai TrepifxivovaL' irporepov Be uKovaov to '^^tj^lc fiat o 
xnrkp (TOV yeypa^a. 'EIIEIAH Tificov 6 ^^xeKparCBovy 
Ko/VvTTei)?, dviip ov fjuovov KoXo'i KayaBo^, dXXcL Kal 
0*0^09, &)9 ovK dXXo<i iv rf} 'EXXdBi, irapa Trdvra ypovov 
BiareXel to, dpiara TrpdrTcov jfi iroXei' vevUrjxe ok ttv^, 
Kal TrdXTjv, Kal Bpo/iov, iv 'OXv/xiria ixia<i r]iJiipa<;, Kal 
reXeifp dpfxari Kal crvvwplBi, ttcoXik^, — TIM. 'AXA.' ovBe 

€0€(!>'^11O'O.- i'^CO TTCOTTOTe €i<\ OXvi-iriaVi AHjVIi T( OVV ' 

6e(opi](Tei<; varepov rd roiavra Be TroXXd irpoaKelaOat 
afxeivov. Kal iplarevae Be virep Tfj<i TroXeci)? irepvai tt/oo? 
*Axapvia<}f Kal KareKo-<^e lieXoirovprjaioiiv Bvo ixoCpa<i, — 



%<! Koi Ko\a- 

TrevBr], koX 

wra avT&v 

, ola T^ T&V 

Charon. 
ow used in 

ord agree ? 
ention the 

in word ? 

future and 
passive of 

'pWV, €T€K€V, 

rjTov, cKpi- 
the moods. 

?, riBv<!. 



[) fyevovii, TO 
Xd8o<i' KoX 
w\a\ d/Jicl>6- 
^r](f)i(rjj,at o 

)(€KpaTL8oVf 

aXKa Kal 
VTa ypovov 
'■rixe Be ttv^., 
]/Mepa<;, Kal 

'AXA.* ovBe 

\J[. Tl n?m • 

— I — - J 

■po(rK€i(Tdat 
'ipvac 7rpo9 
I fxo{pa<i, — 



TIM. Urn; Biayap to fx), ^x'cv 6VXa, odBk Trpoeypd- 
pp ev r<p ^^araXoyor AHM. M^rpca r^ ^epl aavrov 
Xeyei,, yfiec, Be axaptarot hv e^fiev df,v7}fiovodvTe^. he 
be^Kui pcf>La,xaTa ypdcf^cov kuI avfi^ov\e6cou, Kal arparv- 

Kara fvXa,, ^al roc, 8/i^ot, ' IBla, 'Ll Kocvr, •rrda-f 

uKpo-rroXec^ Kepavvov iv rfj Be^ul exovra, Kal uKrlva, i^c 
TV Ke<pa\r}- Kai arecf>avcbcrac ai^rhv xpvaok <TTe6dvoc<i 
eirra, Kai avaKrjpvxdr,vaL Toi>, arecf^dvov, a^^epov Ilovv- 
am, rpayfoc, KaivoW {dxBi^va, yhp Bl avrov Bel 
rvfiepov ra ^tovCa^a). n-rre r^p yv^b^v ^rjuia, 6 
fypTccp, avyyevp, airov dy^carel,, Kal ^^aOyr^T ai^rov 
Z' '^"^W P'/To,^ dpccro, ^Tlfxcou, Kal rd dXXa Trdvra 

Beaoc^ Kac rov mhv i^ovXa^v dyayelv Japl <r% hv%l 
T<p<r<i>ovoiMajil[:iij,a>va^v6ixaKa. ' ^ ' '^^ 

LuciAN, Timon. 

1. ^vvei\ey/jbivo<;. Parse. 

2. at povXal ufi(f)6Tepai. Explain, and give a brief 
account of each. 

. 3. fioc'pa<i. Mention the subdivisions of the Lacedemo- 
nian army. vvv*viuu 

wpi 'fif '°T''u • ^^'""^ ""^'^ ^^^'^ • How many kinds 
lTterature7 "" '°""''''^ ^'^'^ the history of Greek 

f^vi'^^^'P^'^'^. J^® .°^°^^ common modes in which adverbs are 
formed from adjectives in Greek. 



mm^tvms of srovotuo. 



A.N N UAL EXAMINATIONS: 1804. 



MATRICULATION. 



MATHEMATICS, I.-EUCLID, BB. I -IV. 



FOR HONORS. 



Examiner: J. B. Chebkiman, M.A. 



1. If two triangles have two sides of the one equal to two 
sides of the other, each to each, but the ffngle contained by the 
two sides of one of them greater than the angle contained by 
the two sides equal to them of the other, the base of that which 

(Pr'op 24f B^n ^"^^^ '' ^'^^'''' '^'^" '^^ ^^'^ °^ *^^ °^^*'^- 

If two triangles have one side and the angle opposite in 
each equal respectively, examine in what case fhe greater of 
two corresponding angles in each will have the greater side oppo- 
site to it> *■'• 

anLTilliT^/^^^li"?' which join the extremities of two equal 
and parallel straight lines towards the same parts are them- 
selves equal and parallel. (Prop. 33, B. I.) 

Define a parallelogram, and state what additions to the 
definition are sufficient to constitute the figure a squa e an 
oblong, and a rhombus respectively. square, an 

3. Parallelograms on the same base and between Tthe samn 
parallels are equal to one another. (Prop. 35, B. L) 



I 







i 



A B D, A b c df are two parallelograms such that B 
lies in A h, and D in ^1 «/; if point E be taken in a h c so 
that cL\ AD are i'(|ual, the piiralleloH^ram of which EB, Ed are 
adjacent sides will be equal to tlie diflcrencc of the two. 

4. If a straight line be divided into any iwoparls, the squares 
on the whole line and one of the )iarls are equal to twice the 
rectangle conluii;ed by the whole and that part, together with 
the square on the other part. (Prop. 7, B. II.) 

Slate the geometrical propositions which are equivalent 
to the algebraic identities, 

(2) {x-i/y=x'+f-2x7/, 

(3) (a:+3/)»+(a,— ^)'=2x'4-V- 

5. To divide a given straight line into two parts, so that the 
rectangle contained by the whole and one of the parts may be 
equal to the square on the other part. (Prop. 11, B. II.) 

The difference between the two parts is double that 
between the line joined in Euclid's construction and the given 
line. 

6. Equal straight lines in a circle are equally distant from 
the centre; and those which are equally distant from the centre 
are equal to one another. (Prop. 14, B. III.) 

If two equal straight lines in a circle cut each other, the 
segments of one are respectively equal to those of the other. 

7. In equal circles, equal angles stand on equal arcs, whether 
they be at the centres or circumferences. (Prop. 26, B. III.) 

If two equal circles cut each other, and through one point 
of section a line be drawn to cut the circles, the arcs between 
the other point of section of the circles and the points of section 
made by this line are equal, two and two. 

8. From a given circle to cut off a segment containing an 
angle equal to a given rectilineal angle. (Prop. 34, B. III.) 

Also, to cut ofl such a segment by a line which passes 
through a given point. 

9. If from any point without a circle two straight lines be 
drawn, one of which cuts the circle, and the other touches it ; 
the rectangle contained by the whole line which cuts the circle 
and the part of it without the circle, is equal to the square on 
the line which touches it. (Prop. 36, B. III.) 



10. To inscribe a circle 
4, B. IV.) 



in 



a given triangle. (Prop. 



If the points of contact be joined, and circles be in- 
scribed in the three outer triangles thus formed, the centres will 
lie on the circumference of the original circle. 

11. To describe an isosceles triangle, having each of the 
angles at the base double of the third angle. (Prop. 9, B. IV.) 

In what cases can an isosceles triangle be divided by a 
straight line into two triangles also isosceles? 

12. To inscribe a regular hexagon in a given circle. (Prop. 
15, B. IV.) 

This hexagon is half the circumscribed equilateral tri- 
angle. 



fr + 




mni\)tvm» of SToronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1804. 



MATRICULATION. 



MATHEMATICS, II.-ARITHMETIC AND 

ALGEBRA. 

FOR HONORS. 



Examiner : Rev. W. Jones, B.A. 



{Algelraical symbols must not he nsed in the first six questions.) 
1. Multiply together 172814412 and 987654321. 
(Additional marks will he given if this is done in three lines.) 

2. Whence does it appear thata v.ugar fraction may ahvav, 
be reduced enher to a terminated or\ circulatinrdec mal 
Explam how to determine by inspection which kind of decTm J 
any given fraction will produce. Reduce to decimals ^^ t 
and express as vulgar fractions in thei. lowest terms'y&Aj' 
15'6013789- ^-ViJGi, 

3. What is an aliquot part? 

Find by " practicn " the value of 
(i) 1589 bushels at $3.75 per bushel, 
(ii) 1 ton 6 cwt. 2 qrs. 6 lbs. 4 oz. at »17.13 per ton. 



4. Explain what is meant by interest and discount. 

Find the time for which the discount on a certain sum of 
money will be equal to the interest on the same sum for a year, 
the rate of interest in both cases being 5 per cent. 

5. What is meant by saying that gold is at a premium in the 
United States ? 

If the premium on gold be 105, find the discount on 
American treasury notes. 

I purchase in Toronto American silver on which there is 
a discount of 4 per cent., and taking it to New York where 
gold and silver are both at a premium of 80, I there buy 
Americm paper money with the silver; gold falling to 150, I 
buy gold with my paper money, and upon my return to Toronto 
find that I have made just enough to pay my expenses, which 
were 3120 in Canadian currency. What was the sum origi- 
nally invested? 

6. What is meant by "the Funds?" Explainlwhy the 
English funds rose on the birth of the Prince Imperial of 



France 



A person holds stock in the English 3^ per cents, which 
are at 98 to the amount of £1500 sterling. This he transfers 
to Canadian Government 6 per cents, which are at 105; find 
the alteration in his income in dollars, if £1 sterling is worth 




^'[m 



'"■'if 



m 



7. Multiply a;'-7a;+6 by x'+3x^i, and divide the result 
by £c' — 3x4-24. 

o rr J ... tn n m4-n 

». It m and n are positive integers, shew that a ^a ^'a 

Q 
—p ~z 

Establish consistent meaningsTor a , a , a • 

9. Shew howj^o extract the square root of a binomial surd of 
the form a-\- y/b. 

Extract that of 17 + V53 • 

10. Solve the following equations 

x-ir8 a;+5 

-. = 6. 



(i) 



x-S 



X — o 



(ii) 5 + 1 

a X 



n 



(iii) 



X!' ■ 

xy 



= 481 

= 12;- 



xy =s 48 



! I, 



It. 

rtain sum of 
1 fox a year, 

niutn in the 

[iscount on 

lich there is 
fork where 
'. there buy 
ig to 150, I 
I to Toronto 
nses, which 
I sum origi- 

nj why the 
Emperial of 

3nts. which 
he transfers 
t 105; find 
ig is worth 



11. ^ and 5 play a game together for a certain stake- A 
wms the game, and then his money is to B's as m to n Ha i 
won the game, ^'s money would hav^ been to «'«' !^ ^ 
find Che ratio of ^', mone/to ^'s at first '^ '"^ ^' 

12. SiiC'v that if the squares of two numbers which H« 
between 20 and 30 end with the same digit, they wiJI end wi h 
the same two digits. '^ ' ^ ^^^ ^^^"^ 



! the result 



n m-\-n 

a —a 



lial surd of 



i, ' i 



i 


1 
t 1 


' '<'! 


i 


' iL,(ii 


















IP 



nni\)nmij Of sroronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



MATRICULATION. 



MATHEMATICS, III. 

FOR HONORS. 



Examiners: f J* ^' -herriman, M a 



, Employ ihis pronosiimn ,„? . ' "' '" °"« ""■"her 

one-aJ«h\°"="'" '" "^ -»» -g«e„. of a circle are e,„a. ,o 

ori6ed?„;"„tb:r:'rrfir,i°", "'= ^-- -"« of u, are <,... 

"l«a ; from Ae e.x.remi,e?o,l '."!'"= '"■''' """'"I an. es 

Pendicular to ,l,e oppos e ?J "'''' ''""^ "" dra.vn ner 

which bisect the internal an/ l"' ' >]""" """ ""^ sets of ImJ: 

p"P^ndic„ia. pa.r ™iit^i™.t::i';:f„--„od b°; .i;;:: 

•™equal'';r,3! ="''«" -'--fe-nce, that -, .0 divide it into 
i"t-gl°e''"c',^t!''"^^«'«'"al and equiangular ,ui„decag„n 





n 


P 




1 





» 



:w- 











! 


(!■■ 


.1 



Hence inscribe in a circle an isosceles triangle whose ver- 
tical angle is (\) thirteen times each of its hase angles, (ii) one 
seventh of each of its base angles. 

5. The perpendiculars from the angular points of a triangle 
ABC upon the opposite sides meet in ; shew that the circle 
which passes through the middle points of OA, OB, (9C passes 
also through the feet of the perpendiculars, and through the 
middle points of the sides. 

vi. When gold is at 250 in Wall Street, what further rise 
will make a reduction of one cent, in the dollar ? 

vii. The value of the old Spanish dollar (which was the unit 
of ex'chancre between America and England) was 4s. 6d. ster- 
\in<r but <r°old became the standard of the U. S. currency by 
the°'acts ''of 1834-7, which made the gold eagle weigh 258 
grains, being nine-tenths fino. The English coinage is of metal 
22 carats fine, 40lbs. being coined into 1869 sovereigns. With 
these data explain why the bank par of exchange hetween New 
York and London is said to bo 109J. 

viii. Can any meaning be assigned to the algebraic symbol 
a" when n is an incommensurable quantity ? 

By what reasoning is the truth of propositions, which 
have been proved for commensurables, inferred for incommen- 
surables also? 

ix. Prove that [a-l){b-c)(c-a) is a measure of each of the 

quantities 

(a'—py+ib'—cJ+Cc'—a'y, 

^a-hf + ib-cf + (c.—aj\ 

Have these any other common measure ? 

X. Prove that the greatest common measure of any set of 
quantities is the least common multiple of all the common 
measures ; and the least common multiple is the greatest com- 
mon measure of all the common multiples. 

If the greatest common measure of a and h be c, the least 
common multiple of 



{a^hXa^—l^) and {a~h){a?+V') 



a 



5— 6« 



is 



xi. When ^.re throe quantities said to be in arithmetic, 
geometric, or harmonic progression ? 

If (a h,c) are in arithmetic progression, and so also [x,yfi), 



M 



3 whose ver- 
rles, (ii) one 

of a triangle 
lat the circle 
i, OC passes 
through the 

further rise 

vas the unit 
4s. 6d. ster- 
currency by 
weigh 258 
re is of metal 
igns. With 
letween New 

braic symbol 

tions, which 
r incommen- 

if each of the 



X 



f any set of 
the common 
[greatest com- 



3e c, the least 



1 arithmetic, 
10 also {xti/fZ), 



y 



while (axy hi/,cz) are in geometric, and /^, 

\a' b 

monic, then will 



') 



in 



har- 



1--^, 



a'c 



'Zb 



ac 



-1, 



be in harmonic. 

xii. In an arithmetic progression, having given the sum «, 
the last term ?, and the 'common difference c/, determine the 
limitations to which s, I, d are subject, in order that a real series 
may exist. 

If only one such series exist, shew that I must be of the 

form (p — l)d, where p isa positive integer, and _ must be 

d 

the square of an integer. 

xiii. From the series of odd numbers in order 1, 3, 5, 7, , 

groups are taken, commencing successively with the numbers 
next greater than the products 1.2.3, 2 3.4, 3.4.5, , and 

embracing 2,3,4,. ... numbers respectively; prove that the 
sums of the numbers in these respective groups produce the 
fourth powers of the natural numbers in succession. 

xiv. E.xplain what is meant by the limit of the sum of a series 
of quantities in a decreasing geometric progression, and obtain 
an expression for the value of this limit. 

Also obtain an expression for the limit of the sum of the 
series found by taking the products of every two terms of the 
above series. 

XV. Solve the equations 

/x\x-\-y ?y* x-{-y 



xvi. 



If 



then will 



^y 



a — b -j- c — d 

ac — hd 
a — b+c — (/ a — b — c-{- d' 



a + 6+ c+ d 
ad — be 



xvii. There are (n+l) vessels which contain each the same 
quantity (a) offiuid. The contents of the first are distributed 
equally among all the others ; then those of the second are dis- 
tributed in the same way ; then those of the third, and so on. 
Prove that when the last vessel has been thus treated, the 
quantity of fluid contained then in the r\\\ is 



Unlittvms of SForoHto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS. 1864. 



MATEICULATION. 



ENGLISH-ARTS AND MEDICINE. 



HxaminemtV''^,^^^ Wilson, IL.D. 
I J. A. Boyd, M.A. 



irrL .*^'?i ^^ ;J<"-'vation and meaning of the following 

the .'™ stnifi^tioS^tttr'""" "' " ^'y"""°gy." -d 
statL^lT^ '!■' ."'"■'''. "'' P™«t"»'ion commonly in use 

epithets? °°''"""'="»" "'"' tlie reason of tlie 

iniieti„rot:i: t'zi-i '"'''"°"'' -"^ '» ■""' ^-^ ^o 

the tendency of the £f 1^ ■"".r'' "' P''"'™' ' ^h^' " 
of the chief points of difM-^ff- '" ,""' "'V^ ' State some 
grammar ^ distinction hetmen Latin and English 

prontrtotoinLVrvi:h?„V'''r"r^'.'™^ 'y>"« «f 'he 
the prince hlhZT^wlTihlo,^''''"^ ? P°'^l'?»'' "=' 

t-y Expose thefaisit;of':^o'th:'<^/r:;rti'oV'"'p"" 

a ""galar, and some without a plural '^ ""' *""'°"' 



,4- 






7. The following phrases are in use in conversation and 
in literature : many men, many a man, a many men. If 
these expressions are all correct, reconcile them in parsing. 
If not, point out which are proper, with reasons. 

8. What etymological peculiarities do you note in the 
words childreuy chickens, songstress, whilom, twain ? 

9. Dr. Witherspoon, in his Lectures on Divinity, has this 
passage : " What I chiefly mean is to repeat, and endeavour 
to bring you to enter into the great and leading view which 
you ought to have in your studies, and which I desire to have 
still before my eyes in teaching. This may bo expressed in 

one sentence : to unite together piety and literature to 

shew their relation to, and their influence one upon another 
and to guard against any thing that may tend to separate 
them, and set them in opposition one to another." 

Point out the syntactical faults of the last period, and 
re-write it correctly. 

ADDITIONAL FOR STUDENTS-AT-LAW. 

10. What do you understand by the term " orthographical 
expedient ? Give examples thereof. 

11. Give examples of what Latham styles the erroneous- 
ness and redundancy of the English alphabet. 

12. Explain fully the force of the word the in these 
phra^ses "^Z^ the more,'' ^^ All the better." How oriei- 
nated this pecuharity of employment ? 




nnmvniU) of ^Toronto, 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1804. 



MATRICULATION. 



ENGLISH. 

HONORS. 



1,1 



UxaminerscI^^^.^^It Wilson, LL.D. 
\ J. A. Boyd, M.A. 




1. Punctuate, and state reasons for the distinction in the 
use of semicolon and colon : — 

" God will render to every man according to his deeds to 
them that are contentious and do not obey the truth 
but obey unrighteousness indignation and wrath 
tribulation and anguish upon every soul of man that 
doeth evil of the Jew first and also of the Gentile." 

2. Re-construct or amend the following, with reasons :— 
a. " Buonaparte, as well as Charlemagne and the Fifth 

Charles, were re-modellers of Europe." Alison, 
h. " He was under no small confusion to find that what 
he thought was a new conceit, and had appropri- 
ated to his own use, had appeared in print before." 
Addison, 

c. Human is what every man is, humane is what every 
man ought to be ; but he is only rarely found to 
combine the two. 

8. Write all tense-forms of the verb to strike, and state 
how many of them arc, ctymologically, truu tenses ; with 
reasons for the answer. 



■i 



ion in the 

(leeda to 
tho truth 
nd wrath 
man that 
Gentile." 

asons : — 

the Fifth 
i-lison. 

hat what 

appropri- 

before." 



at every 
found to 



md state 
Bs; with 



4. "Tho logical dlfTorcnco botwoon a noun nnA „ . / • 
less TTjarked than tho «raunnatical one " Zlllhf fV''^ '? 
give illustrations. J^xpiain this, and 

5. ^<'«^ wo/ is correct French Am .v • . . , 
correct English ? Give reasons. ' '' '' ""'' ' '' *' ^">'» 

C. What is indicated in ichitlnn t.^ ,..„ .• . 

must fl,.,t ,,,.30 it." Explain ^Zt:^'^.:^:^^ ' 

womar of Sam i" ?" ' ^ '"^'' "™ •■' 

t>. "Prevent m O T ,rrl in ..ii i ■ 

graeioua .u.-our/' ' ""' ''""'S'' ■■'"' "'J moBt 



(?. 



This is Flias which was for to come." 



i» town b^°.i.^fS"""'"' ""'• '"■' '■■"" S™'' ; f- "- tree 

casc:-of";i!l-rt";e™?„! "t'^r Thlr^ -;"..no™„„,,e 
tions. ^ -i-xpiam this, and guo illuatra- 

10. In tho Latin, hio (this) rofoi-s tn th^ i . 
cedent, and ille (thit) to the fii^t' c g ' "'"""^ ^'"'^- 
Quocunquo aspicies nihil est nisi pontus et ae.- 
Hunndus /.. tnmidus, fluctibus il mZ:^''''n,,cl 
e.am^f''' ^--^Ponding rule in English? Give an 

11. Define the difference in tho following •- 
a. He ]3 a better soldier than scholar. ° 
6. He IS a better soldier than a scholar 

tracS-n^^:::^^^^-^-^ of the English race can be 



Wini\t$vms of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



MATRICULATION. 




,llli(iti!!!l 



I ■' 



m 



HISTORY AND GEOGRAPHY. 



Examiners: l?^f ^^ ^^^^on, LL.D. 
/ J. A. Boyd, M.A. 



ANCIENT HISTORY. 

1. Under what circumstances did the Tarentines apply 
for aid to Pyrrhus ; and with what results ? 

2. Explain the difference between Municipia, Oolonioe, 
and FrtBfectura. 

3. State the circumstances under which the naval victo- 
ries of Salamis, Mylce, and Actium, were gained. 

4. What course was pursued by Octavianua after the 
assassination of Julius Ctesar ? 

5. Sketch the Roman conquests in Britain by Agricola. 

BRITISH HISTORY. 

1. Sketch the history of the Long Parliament. 

2. What order of succession was disturbed by Queen 
Anne's accession to the throne ; and with what results ? 

3. Name the chief victories of Marlborough ; and define 
the terms of the treaty of Utrecht. 



4. State the claims, (1) by constitutional right : (2) bv 
x, ujr- Huieu tno iiuuuvunan uynasty suc- 



her 

ceeded to the English throne. 






0. 



ay. 



GEOGRAPHY. 

Neva; Volga rinrsVioSd":/ Khone; Elbe; Tagu,; 

2. State the boundaries of Wft]1iir.T.;o . -d x , ^ 
gi»m; Brazil; and the chLf dties of etch.' '"«*'' ^^'- 

3. Name the chief colonies of thr^ TJrJfioi, t? • 



.D. 



sntines apply 

pea, ColonioBf 

) naval victo- 
sd. 

Lus after the 
by Agricola. 

nt. 

d by Queen 
results ? 

; and define 



ght ; (2) by 
ynasty sue- 





^niHeriSfti? of ^otonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



MATRICULATION. 



HISTOM-ARTS. 

HONORS. 



« . f Daniel Wilson, LL.D. 



t ■ 



1 

t • 

I) 

3't 


* 


f 


fe..,. 



1. Shew by genealogical tables tho several titles to the 
throne of the Houses of Tudor and Stuart respectively. 

2. Hamilton says that "Henry VII. endeavoured to 
strengthen his family interest by matrimonial alliances vrith 
the continent." Specify what marriages were thus con- 
tracted, and discuss in how far their ultimate results an- 
swered the king's expectations. 

3. When did England first exercise an important influ- 
ence in European affairs ? Under what circumstances did 
this influence arise, and how was it manifested ? 

4. What difficulties as to the succession to the throne 
arose in Edward VI. 's reign? How were these difficulties 
resolved? 

5. Sketch the circumstances connected with the disgrace 
and death of Sir Walter Raleigh. 

6. 5'v.vo some account of the cbrr ictsr and policy of the 
v.ar\ n\' : ,rafford. 



7. How many Convention Parliaments assembled during 
the Tudor and Stuart period, and under what circumstances 
were they convoked ? 

8. Name and give the position of all the insular colonies 
and dependencies of Great Britain. Specify the dates when 
each was acquired or established. 




TK 


:, i 


1 'ir* 

1 ' 


■v;v:! 


•■ 




t " 


n 



]:■: 







r 
fw 



mni^itvniis of Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



MATRICULATION. 



HISTORY-LAW. 

HONORS. 



Examiners : ] ?^f ^^ Wilson LL.D. 
J J. A. Boyd, M.A. 



1. Justify the use of the appellatives, '-Age of Augus- 
tus" and " Age of Pericles ; contrast the characteristics of 
these two periods. 

2. Define the limits of the Periclean era, and mention the 
representative men who flourished therein in architecture 
sculpture and painting. ' 

3. Name the most eminent prose-writers of these two 
periods and their productions ; point out the distinguishinff 
excellences of each Avriter. 

4. Sketch the foreign and domestic policy of Pericles. 

5. Trace the successive steps whereby Augustus ascended 
to the height of power and managed to centralize all authority 
in himself. Show by a genealogical table his relationship to 
Julius Csesar. ^ 

6 Describe fully the developements of the drama in the 
hands of JEschylus. 





"^ 



$■ 



SInCberfiifts of STotonto. 



AN; L EXAMINATIONS: 1804. 



MATRICULATION. 



FRENCH .-ARTS AND MEDICINE. 

. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



Exp miers'l^^^^^^ Forneui, LL.D. 
' \ Robert Sullivan, M.A. 



I. 

Translate : 

On s'dtait adresse ti cette regcnce de Vienne, parce 
qu'alors I'empereur d' Allemagne, Charles, Buccesseur de 
Joseph ler, dtait en Espagne, ou il disputait la couronne 
^ Philippe V. Pendant que I'envoye allemand ex^cutait 
't Vienne cette commission, Ic grand vizir envoya trois 
bachas au roi do Su^de pour lui signifier qu'il fallait 




son h* leur et lui manquer d .c-spect, il les ferait 
pendre t( ^ trois sur I'heure. Le ba " !e Salonique, qui 
portait irole, ddguisa la duret<j de s j, commission sous 
les term* les plus respectueux. Charles finit I'audience 
sans daigne^ sculement rdpondre : son chancelier Mul- 
lern, qui res vec ces tr is bachas, expliqua en peu de 
mot^ •« rt as do son maitie, qu'ils avaient assez con.^ris 
par son silence. 






jC grand vi«ir no se rcbuta pas ; il ordonna k IsmacK 
Baoha, nouveau sdraskier lie Bender, de monacor lo roi 
do I'indi^nation du sultan s'il no sodotcrminait passans 
ddlai. Co seraskier dtait d'un tcrapi^ramont doux et 
d'un esprit conciliant, qui lui avait attird 1r bionveillanco 
de Charles et I'junitid do tous Ics Sm^dois. Lo roi entra 
on conference avec lui, mais ce fut pour lui dire qu'il no 
partirait quo quaiid Achmet lui aurait accordo doux 
choses, la punition do son grand vizir, et cent raillo 
honimi's pour retourner en Pologno. 

VoLTAiKE, Charles XII., o. 6. 

1. Oil il disputait. Explain the use and meaning of the 
imperfect tenso in this passage. 

2. Leur fit d'ahord dire. Explain the meaning of this 
phrase. 

3. Ltd rien pro^wser. What is the signification of rien 
here ? 

4. Qui lui avait attir^. What is the antecedent of qui f 

5. Lui aurait accordo. When docs the active past parti- 
ciple agree with the object of the verb ? 

6. When does mille take the mark of the plural ? 



GRAMMAR. 



1. What is the general rule for the formation of the plural 
of substantives ? Give the plurals of chapeau, hiboUy 
clou, sou, gouvernail. 

2. How many degrees of comparison of adjectives ? How 
are they formed ? 

3. What is the difference between the superlative relative 
and the superlative absolute ? 

4. When do vingt and cent take an s in the plural, and 
when not ? 

5. Where do the personal pronouns generally stand in 
relation to the verb ? Mention the exceptions to the general 
rule. 



6. f^xphin the use o( celui-ci and celui-ld in referrinff to 
two or more object*. * 

8. Explain the use of tlio word j)er8onne as a pronoun 
and as a noun. ^ 

arler"* '^"^''"^'' ^^'"^ 'mporfcct subjunctive of vendre and 

10. What is a neuter verb ? Give an example. 

11. Translate into French, " Thin hook is miner 




l-t 



I-;*.. 




Wini^itvnit^ df Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



MATRICULATION. 



FRENCH-LAW. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



^ . > James Fornert, LL.D. 
Uxannners: ^ ^^^^^^ Sullivan, M.A 



I. 



Translate : 



Les patriciens voulant erapecher le retour des rois 
clierchcrcnt a augraentur le mouvement, qui etait dana 
I'esprit dupeuple; raais ils firent plus qu'ils nc voul- 
urent ; a force do lui donner de la haine pour les rois ; 
ils lui donnerent un desir imnioddre de la liberie. 
Comme Tautoritd royalc avait passe toute entiere entre 
les mains des consuls, le peuple sentit que cette libertd 
dont on voulaitlui donner tant d'amour, il no I'avait pas: 
il chcrcha done a abaisser le consulat, a avoir des magis- 
trats pldbeiens ; et Ti partaker avec les nobles les magis- 
tratures curules. Les patriciens furent forces de lui 
accorder tout ce qu'il demanda ; car dans une ville ou 
la pauvrete dtait la vertu publique, oil les richesses, cette 
voie sourde pour acquerir la puissance, etaient mepris^es, 
la naissance et les dignitds ne pouvaient pas donner de 
grands avantages. La puissance devait dune revenir 
au plus grand nombre, ct I'aristocratie se changer peu a 
peu en un dtat populaire. 

Grandeur des Romains, c. viii. 

1. Parse chercherent, firent. voulurent. 

2. De la haine. Why is the article used I 



S. Lui donnireni. What part of speech is lut ? 

4. Dont on voulait. What part of speech is dont, and 
by what other French words col'M you express the same 
meaning ? 

5. Oil les richmes. What part of speech is oH, and liow 
would you otherwise express the same meaning ? 

Q. Be grands avantages. Why is the article not used 
here? 

7. Se changer. Why is changer in the infinitive mood ? 



ar des rois 
etait dans 
Is ne voul- 
ur les rois ; 
la liberie, 
itiere entre 
ette libertd 
I'avait pas: 
des ma£;is- 
5 les magis- 
rces de lui 
ine ville on 
esses, cette 
t meprisdes, 
5 donner de 
jnc revenir 
mger peu a 



;«, c. viii. 



GRAP-IMAR. 

1. What is the general rule for the formation of the plural 
of substantives ? Give the plurals of chapeau, hibou, 
clou, sou, gouvernail. 

2. How many degrees of comparison of adjectives ? How 
are they formed ? 

3. What is the difference between the superlative relative 
and the superlative absolute ? 

4. When do vingt and cent take an s in the plural, and 
when not ? 

5. Where do the personal pronouns generally stand in 
relation to the verb ? Mention the exceptions to the general 
rule. ° 

6. Explain the use of cclui-ci and oelui-Id in referrintr to 
two or more objects. ^ 

7. Translate into French, " The man of whom you 

8. Explain the use of the word personne as a pronoun 
and as a noun. *^ 

9. Go through the imperfect subjunctive of vendre and 
parler. 

10. What is a neuter verb? Give an example. 

11. Translate into French, " This book is mine." 



I 



i^ni\}tv»ltiit of ^Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS .• 18G4. 



MATRICULATION. 



NATURAL HISTORY-MEDICINE. 



Uxaminers: \ ^^''' P/ofessor Hincks, F.L.S. 
I Tiios. J. Cottle, Esq. 



BOTANY. 



1. Explain the term Monocotylcdonous. In -what other 
particulars respecting the structure of the stem, the venation 
of the leaves, and the prevailing number of parts in the 
floral circles do Monocotyledonous plants differ from others ? 

2. Stomata, their structure and probable use, where occur- 
ring, and in what number. 

8. The difference between definite and indefinite annual 
growth, and between deliquescent and excurrent trunks. 

4. The exterior two circles of parts forming the flower, 
with the terms applied according to their degrees of combi- 
nation or separation, regularity and irregularity, compara- 
tive development and tendencies in respect to figure. 



ADDITIONAL QUESTIONS ADDRESSED TO CANDIDATES FOR 

HONORS. 

5. Chemical composition of plants, their food and the 
sources from which it is obtained. 

6. The ovule, its structure and parts, varieties in its 
position in respect to the carpel. The four kinds of ovule 
named and defined. 



te annual 
unks. 

iG flower, 
of corabi- 
compara- 
e. 



^ES FOR 
and the 



7. Modifications of the receptacle or torus, and terms 
expressing its relation to the circles of the flower. 



E. 



I.St 



COMPARATIVE PHYSIOLOGY. 

9. Name the functions of animal and vegetative life. 
10. Describe the process of aeration or respiration and 
the pnncipal varieties in the methods bj which it is effected 



hat other 
i venation 
'ts in the 
tn others ? 

3re occur- 



ADDITIONAL QUESTIONS ADDRESSED TO CANDIDATES FOR 

inlL'^M^Lri^^^^^^^^ ''-'' ^^^^^ -^^ "!> '^^ ^-in 

12. Describe the development of medusfn, and the manner 
m whicn numerous animals are produced f;om a singTe egg' 

13. D ,Mhe gemmiparous and fissiparous re-production. 



BS in its 
of ovule 



ai 



mni\^tvuit» of ^ovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



FIEST YEAE. 



GREEK. 



JExaminersJ^^"^- ^^^^^ McCaul, LL.D. 
i Thomas Moss, M.A. 




I. 

Translate : 

"Hv yovv roi,9 ^acCKia^ % t«9 alr&v, o'^ep eiBaiao- 
vedraroL uvai^ Sokovctiv, ^^co tov d/3e,^al'ov Kai <h^ L^ 
a^<f>i^o\ov rrj, r^xn^, 'rrXetay tw ^8eayu tA dvcap^ 
evprjcret ^poaovra avrol,, ^6^ov, koI rapax^^ koX aUrr, 
/cat eni^ovXa^ Kac opya<i kuI KoXaxelar rorhoKi y^o 
anravre^ ^vveiaiv. e& TreydTj koX v6crov<; kuI irddv iP 
icrorcfMia, S^XaBr, apxovra aircov ottov Bk rd ro^rcol 
TTovvpa Xoyc^ecrdac Kucpb, ola rk r&v IBccot&p hv dri. 
fXcoBovvaoc, oy E/,^^, el-rruv, <Ltcvl ioLKevat fioc 
ebo^av ot avdpa>iroL Ka\ o ^io^ dira^ airS^v. A irork 
'TTOf.^oXvya, euvBarc eOedaco V7rb Kpovv^ tlvl Kctrapdr- 
TovTc avLaraiieva^; raj <f>vaa\iBa^ Xiyco, d<i> d>v Pwa- 
ye.perac o ac^po,' eKecvcou rolvvv nvk fih fivKpai elac 
Kac avTiKa eKpayetcrac airia^rjaav, ai 8' eVl -rrXiov 
diapKovac^ Kai irpoaxyovaiov airac^ rcov dXXcov a{rrac 
v7repfva<o^evac e, /Meycarov SyKov atpovrat, etra fikvroL 

IZfX ''"'^^'"'' f^'PPVr^^,'^-''^' ov yhp oUv re dXXa^, 
yeveatfai. tovto eanv o dvOpdirov ^io<i. 

LuciAN, Charon. 
2. TOV d^e^aiov. What i«i the construction ? 




if 



H 


i 


\ 


■ :■.-* . 




' »*- 


iii 


yyf , . ' 


1 


^KiitH^ 





1 


1 












' 


?p 




8. Tovrot«. Why in dative ? 

4, What are tlie laws regulatinc^ the position of the 
circumilex ? 

5. olov T€. Explain this form. 

II. 

Translate : 

Tavra en Xeyovcrrjq avTr}<i ov Trepifieu i? ('vw to reXoq 
rwv Xoycov dvaara'i d7re(fyr}vd/j,r)v, Kai Tr)v afiu^jbov €Keiv7)v 
KoX ipyaTiKrjv uiroKiTrtav fiere^atvoi Trpih. rtjv UaLheiai 
fiaKa yeyrjOo)^, kul fidXiara iireC fioi t\ . povv r/ cKvrdXr} 
KUL oTL irXrjyd^i ovk 6\Lya<i evdv<i up^oixivtp /xot v^e? 
ivejpiy^raro. i) he dTrdXeKpOeicra to /xev irpoyfov 'jyavdKret 
Kol TO) %et/)e (TweKporeL koI rov<i ohu-ra^i vveTrpte' reXoi; 
Be. Mcnrep ttju ^lo^rjv dKovofiep, eireTrifyei k-oX ek dov 
fiere^i^XTjTo. ei Se TrapdSo^a errade, fxif < "■ qre' 
OavfiaTOTToiol yap o'l oveipor i) erepa h> pu^ fie 
aTTiSovaa, Toiyapovv djueiylrofiai ere, e(f)r}. , rSe t*;? 
SiKatO(TvvT}<:, on KaXw<i rrjv Blkt^v ehUau %l eXde 

ijSi), iiridrjdt tovtov tov ox^P'aTOf. — Sei^acrd n 0)(7)fia 
vtroTTTepaiv 'ittttcov nvtov rep Ilrjyda^ eoiKorwv — 07ra)9 
elSfjq, ola Kol TjXiKa fxr) dicoXovdriaa<i ep,ol dyvoijaeiv 
efieXXe^. 

LuciAN, Vita. 

1. Parse dTre(f)r)vdfj.7}v, aTroXiirdiV, yeyr}0(o(;, iverpCy^ajo, 
dirdXeLt^Oelaa, eTreTr/jyei, and /nere/Si^XijTo. 

2. Te\o9, I. 7. In what case, and why? 

3. Nio^Tjv. Write a brief account of Niobe. 

4. KaXm. Give the comparative and superlative. 
6. Urjyda-o). Write a brief account of Pegasus. 

III. 
Translate : 

"^X2? 0aTO, yrjOrjaev 8e ^orjv dyado<i AiofjbijSrjii. 
"E7Y09 fiev KareTrij^ev e-jrl ')(6ovl TvovXv^oreiprf, 
Avrap 6 ijLeLXi')(ioL(TL TrpocnjvSa Troifxeva Xacov. 
"*H pd vu fioL ^etvo<i 7raTpco'i6<i eaaL 7raXai,6<{' 



n?..-..\ 



t 



vj'tfct/'v "/up -iiutc vtu; tt/if^urtx. UL,\/\.cpo(poVT7]V 

'p,€Lvia evl fieydpoicriv eeUoaiv rjfiar ipv^U'i. 
0/ Be Kol dXXriXot(7V Tropov ^eivrjia KaXd' 
Oivev^ fiev ^(aarfjpa BiBov <\)oivi,m (paeivbvf 



osltion of the 



I? ('yo) TO TeXo9 
tfiujj b>ov €Keivr]v 
s Tijv Haiheiav 
vovv r} (TkutoXt] 
^h(p fioL x^^^ 
'jiyjov i)'^/avdKTei 
vveirpte' Te\o9 
et Kal eh 6 op 
■^ < '^ r)T€' 
a S> pos' fie 
I)?;, T,,/Se T//9 
lOi , at eXOe 
^aad rt o^Vfia 

OlKOriCV OTTO)? 

Ifiol wyvorjaeiv 
CIAN, Vita. 

?, iverpiyJraTo, 



lative. 
isus. 



reipTi, 

'TTjV 
2?. 



f 



^J 



BeX\epo<^oinri79 Se ypvceov ^ v, au<hiKwr€\\ov, 

>v ta>< "• a<r ep.ot(nv. 

IIoMEi Viat?, VI., vv. 213-221. 



Kat " ^7a) KariXecTrov iun "'• ao-' ifxoia-iv 



p.tv. 



1. Aiop,i]87}q. Write a brief account of Diomede. 

2. .'arse Kariwrj^ev, irpocrrjvha^ ia-ai, €pv^a<;, tropov, and 



3. Derive irovkv^ord , % fieiyixtoitri, tind dpcfyiKvireWov. 

4. Give the hiws regulatin? th. uantity of final a. 

5. Distinguish the use < .di the genitive, dative, 
and accusative. 



A V 



Translate : 

^" AaipovLi], pr'i poi TL Xlr)v uKaxi^eo Oufito- 
Ovydp Ti? fM virep alaav dvi]p "AiSt irpold^fL- 
Molpavh' ov Ttm </)7//ii irecfivyp^evov "€p,p.€vaL dvBpcov, 
Ov KaKov, ovSe pei^ eaOXov, iiryju rd irpcora yev7)Tai. 
^AX\' 649 oIkov lovaa rd a avr?}s epya Ko/xi^e, 
ItTTov r 't]XaKdT7]v re, Kal dp(f>c7r6Xotai ntXeve 
Epyov eTToipaeai. UoXepo^ 8' dvBpeaat peXijaei 
^a(Tiv,Jfxol Be p-dXtara, rol 'JX/w eyyeydaaivy 

"n? dpa j)Oivr](Ta<i KopvO' eiXero (f)ai8ipo^ "EKTCOp 
"iTTTTOvpiv dXo^o<i 8e (f)iXr} oIkovSc ^e/StJKec 
'EvrpoTraXi^opevT}, OaXepov Kara SdKov yeovcra. 
lUyjra 6 eireiU iKave bopov<i euvaierdovTa'i 
"E«Topo9 dv8po(f)6voio,^ Ki^rja-aro S' €v8oOl iroXXd^ 
AptfuTToXovi, rfjcnv Be yoov Trdarjcnv evcopaev. 
Alpev ert ^coov y6<v"EKTopa m d'vl oI'km- 
pi/ ydp piv er echai>ro vTroTpoirov eV noXepoLo 
"l^eadai, irpod jovra. ptvo^ Kat ;^et/ua9 'AxaiMv. 

Homer, Iliad, VI., vv. 486-502. 

I'S'^^n^ '^^i>^f^^^ov, yeprjrai^iyyeyc'iaaiv, evcopaev, Uavro, 
and t^eadai. r ■> t » 

2. ^e^rJKei. What is the force of the tense ? 

3. Give the ordinary forms of any dialectic varieties in 
this extract. 

4. What changes in the Greek alphabet ? 

6. State the different opinions, and the grounds thereof, 
as to the age of Homer. 






.0^,. V> "^^x^ 




IMAGE EVALUATION 
TEST TARGET (MT-3) 




// 




Mil'/ ^^^S^ ^y^Jk 




S 



1.0 



I.I 



11.25 



■ 50 



^ ill 






12.2 



2.0 



1.8 



U llllli.6 



<^ 



/A 



7 



'*> >/ 



^ ^ '^r ^'^ 



// 





f 




'#■ 



7 




Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 



23 WEST MAIN STREET 

WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 

(716) 872-4503 





,\ 



4? 





'^' 



\ 



\ 



% 



.V 



^> 



™^u- 







;\ 



«r..j«> 



rv 



-9,^ 



mmvmti ot ^otonto. 



'^u'^^y 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



FIEST YEAR. 



LATIN. 



JSzaminers.'f^^^- John M^q^^j^^ j^j^ j^ 
i Thomas Moss, M. A. 



Translate : 



I. 



Ecce gubernator sese Palinurus agebat : 
gui Libyco nuper cursu, dum sidera servat, 
^ixciderat puppi mediis effusus in undis. 
Hunc ubi vix multa maestum cognovit in umbra. 
Sic prior alloquitur: " Quis te, Palinure, deorum 
±iripuit nobis, medioque sub aequore mersit ? 
gic age. Namque mihi, fallax baud ante repertus 
Hoc uno responso animum delusit Apollo, 
Qui fore te ponto incolumem, finesque caJiebat 
Venturum Ausonios. En haec promissa fides est ?" 
Ille autem : « Neque te Phoebi cortina fefellit, 
Dnx Anchisiada, nee me deus sequore mersit. 
Kamque gubernaclum multa vi forte revulsum 
Cui datus haerebam custos, cursusque regebam, 
Prsecipitans traxi mecum. Maria aspera iuro, 
Jjon ullum pro me tantum cepisse timorem, 
Quam tua ne, spoliata armis, excussa magistro, 
Deticeret tantis navis surgentibus undis 
Tres notus iiibernas immensa per sequora noctes 
Vexit me violentus aqua ; vix lumine quarto 
I'rospexi Itaham summa sublimis ab uada. 



Paulatim adnabam terroe : jam tuta tenebam; 
^1 gens crudehs madida cum veste gravatum, 
Prensantemque uncis manibus capita a^pera montis, 
i^erro invasisset, praedamque ignara putasset. 

Virgil, JEneis vi., 337-361. 

2. Anchiaiada. What other form ? 
stru'ction! ^''^'''^^'^ oursusque regeham. Explain the con- 

Tut; fZ teek™'' ""'"^^ ^' '^' "^''^ ^^^^^^ ^^P^^««^^^ ? 

5. iVow ullum cepisse timorem. Give different con- 

structions, and translate accordingly. "^nerent con- 

6. Ignara putasset. What other reading ? 

7- Summd subUmis ah undd. Quote Homeric phrase. 

imft'atldT ""^"^ '°'^^'"' ''^''^*'^ ^y ^""'^ '' tM« P^s'^age 

9. Give the derivations of 'puppis, prsecipito, maqister 
hems, subhmis, tutus, uncus. "^ ^^ * ^ ^ V ''"ff^^^^^y 

II. 

1. Mention any minor poems of Virgil. 

2. How do you account for the fact that in the middle 
ages Virgil was considered a wizard ? 

8utunTtive%'^''' ^''""' '"^"''' *^' indicative, and when the 
4. Explain the terms arsis, thesis and csesura. 



Translate : 



III. 



Ti. Gracchus regnum occupare conatus est, vel 
regnavit IS quidem paucos menses. Num quid simile 
populus Komanus audierat, aut viderat? Hunc etiam 
post mortem secuti amici et propinqui, quid in P. 
Scipionem effecerint, sine lacrymia nm an,>n Aio-.. . 



autem tribunatu, quTd ^"^^^^^^^^^ ,?« C. Gracchi 

semel cc«pit, labi J tt nli^^^?^"^' ^""^ 
quanta sit facta labes, primo >?' a ■ *^^^P* J"°^ »«te 
autem post, C7a.m. 7ide"e iam Tl '^'' ^^'^"'^ 
senatu disjunctum multitudinisVue arh ? • ' ^^^"^""^ «» 
agi. Plures enim discent 2^'.^^^^^^^^ 
quam quemadmodum his resltXr "o ™ ^""^ ^"*' 
Quia sine sociis nemo quLuam fn^I' ^."°''"'° ^«^° ? 
endum est igitur bon?s uf ^ • '°"^*"'- ^^*<^'Pi- 
ignari casu aliquo i„dder L '" ''^"''^^^^ ^"^^^i^ias 
alligatos, ut ab amici n ma ^na ^lln"''^^ ^^* «« 

non discedant: improbis S^ ."^"* '^ P'^^^ntib"^ 
nee vero minor iis mii l! .• P^""? statuenda est : 
qui ipsi fuerinl im^ttirdSces""' ^^'"""^^ ^^^^ -> 

i>e Amicitia, ch. 12. 

fir,t-appt".edt ^"^'^ "■•" "''^'"''anoes were tribm,es 
4. m..,. « .oM. Mention variou. V- .«J.««n'.. 
<^''*»'«i''y- ^tat was the purport of this law? 

IV. 

neaV^trt:\-'<^^«:ip^^^^^^^^^ 






ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 
FIRST YEAR. 

GREEK. 

HONORS. 



JExaminers : I 5^^' '^^^^ McCaul, LL D 
5 Thomas Moss, M.a! 



Translate: 

. IIAOTT. O^^ ^,1 roOro, & 'Epav ^XV ' ' 
2i%r^P,- rem ^e^cf>eek'MZ\Toirol^"^''^' 

eWor/rw,- 0ear&7' ''^''^'""' '""'■"^^'O" oiSUS6:^Jp 

0^09 iTT^n^e Wore ^T' ^^^^«^-o^ra9, oh odSe Khv 

'rrepcep^ovrac oiB' airol Zre^Zt^olaa^ ^P^-o^^e, 
'rrXovTova-ip. j^TtvovT€<i olfiai on fifj Svap 

HAOTT. 'Erepocov rovr' icrrlv & 'Fo -^ ^ . s 



TWovTwv airoffreXXei /J>e trap* avrov^ &re TrXotn-oSori;? 
KoX fi€yd\68a)po<i kuI auT09 wy 8r)Xol yovv koI to) ovo/xari. 
eTreiB^v roivvv fieroLKiaOrivai Sirj fie Trap* erepov tt/so? 
cTepov, 6? BiXrop ifjb^a\6pT€<i fie koX KaTaa-rjfnjvdfievot 
€7rt/A6\&>9 (f)op7)Bbv dpdfievot fieraKOfii^ouai' koI 6 fiev 

V€Kpo<i iv (TKOTeiVM TTOV T^9 OLKiaf TTpOKClTai VTTep T^ 

yovara iraiXaia rfj odovy aKeirofievo'i, irepifid'^TfTO^ Tat9 
yaXal<ij ifie Se oi eVeXTr/cai/Te? ev ttj dyopa Trepifiivoven 
K€)(7)v6T€<i &<nT€p TTfv '^eXiBova irpoaTrerofievrjv Terpirfore^ 
oi veoTToL 

LuciAN, Timon. 

1. Parse eXeX^f^et?, dirioi, Trpoyr}pdaavTo<}, etrecevy i(r)(i)- 
#fOTa9, fieroiKia-drjvai, Kexv^ore^;, T€Tpiy6T€<;. 

2. What is the diflference between oTrore and ottotuv ? 

3. Explain vaTfKTfy^ and (ndBiov. 

4. What is the difference between k&v ovo^ vvrjp^e, and 
6vo<i inrrjp^e ? 

y 5. ovap. Decline. What is the construction? 

6. are. What is the corresponding Latin word ? 

7. BeXrov. What ? Why so called ? 

8. T^9 olKia<i. Why in genitive ? 

11. 

1. Give a list of prepositions governing one, two and three 
cases. 

2. What classes of verbs take a double accusative ? 

3. What are the laws for the formation of compounds, 
especially as to the vowel ending the first part or beginning 
the second ? 

4. Explain the use of the moods after conjunctions of 
time. 

III. 
Translate : 

' O^p 6 76 TavT eiTovelro iBvlrjau irpatrlBea-CLVf 
T6(f)pa 01 iyyvOev ^Xde Bed 0eTt9 dpyvpoire^a. 
Tr]V Bk iBe trpofioXovcra X.dpi<; Xi'irapoKpy,Befivo<i 
KaX^, T^v (airvie 'irepiicXvTo<i * AfK^uyvrfU^}, 



i^<r< Trap «m€T« ;^;<jA^e„o„ &.«aXa ^o\XA 

Hfe. „„. e,C. ofre ev^&y dv0pZrZ ' 

AXXa @iTK re koX EdpWu« Icrlv ID • ' 

O4.P & iy& ^i^a, ,,^,,^„4. ktatti^ar 

Homer, Aa^, j^jy^^ ^^ 380-409. 

thiL'^Ji;."""'"""^'"™' «f "-o ^-'ectio varieties in 

tinf; o^Hlr;''' """ "■" "■■=— ~ -unded i„ the 

4. What instances of the nse of ..«,-, ;„ y, ^^^^ ^ 

5. Where does he admit hiatui ? 

• ^\ ^"^ *''« dialectic vari^t;.., „f .1, 

">fin.tive and imperative ofX? " P""'^™' indicative, 

T. R.p.ain the meaning and use of the suffix ^. „r ^.. 
o. What indicator- -V 'i. —• , ^ 

original poem ? ^" '^^ ^^^^^ ^^ additions to the 




T] 



8ainitiet«f(3? of ^rovonto. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



FIEST YEAR. 



LATIN. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 

Examiners: I ^^^- John McCaul, LL.D 
I Thomas Moss, M.A. 



I. 



Translafce : 

Haec ubi dicta dedit, solio se tollit ab alto- 

Post hinc ad navIsSL^ .„ •''•'"'™'"'- 
Quorum de numrro^aut!"' °T,'?™ "■'"«'»! 

Ooius ire eq„i.L K„ra7ter '•''^'"' 
Turn pater Euandrua d^^tL^ »«paret imago. 

Qualis eram, cum Brimlm f„- ^ b ■■ '""«'«' 

|ravi ...oJum^nS^^^^^^^ .ub ip. 

|pn|o"un^~r^:-^S^^^^^^^^ 

Horrendum dictu— dederaf fJrrTo 

ueaerat, terna arma movenda; 



>i 



U.' 



Ter leto sternendus erat ; cui turn tamon omnia 
Abstulit haec animas doxtra, et totidem exuit armis : 
Non ego nunc dulci amplexu divellerer asquam, 
Nate, tuo ; ncque finitimo Mezentius umquam 
Huic capiti insultans tot ferro saeva dedisset 
Funera, tam multis viduasset civibus urbem. 

JEneid, viii. 541-571. 

1. Herculeis. What diflSculty in this reading ? Explain 
the reading, Herceis, 

2. Lares, Penates. From what sources was their worship 
derived ? 

3. Propius periclo it timor. Give different explanations. 

4. Praeneste. What is tho modern name ? What cele- 
brated temple in the town ? Why were the people nick- 
named Nuculce? 

5. Scutorum. How did the scutum differ in form from 
the Clipeus ? What is the corresponding Greek term ? 

6. Tyrrhenis. What is supposed to have been the origin 
of this people ? Give a brief sketch of their political con- 
stitution. 

7. Nate. When is the form gnatus inadmissible ? 

8. Give the derivations of ara, hesternus^ macto, cetera, 
pronus, nuncius, imagot letum, aegnis, acies, sopor. 

9. Distinguish between inter csedes Rutulorum and inter 
csed^m Rutulorum. 

11. 

1. Point out differences in epic treatment between the 
Iliad and the JEneid. 

2. Prove from the 8th Book that interdum dormitat Vir- 
gilius. 

3. Under what restrictions is the hiatus admitted by 
Virgil? 

4. Give biographies of Ennius and Livius Andronicus. 

III. 

Translate: 

Age vero, ilia res quantam declarat ejusdem hominis 
apud hostes populi Romani auctoritatem quod ex locis 



tarn longinquis, tamquo diversis, tarn brevi tempore 
omnes uni huic so dediderunt ? quod Cretensium leLti 
cumm eorum insula noster imporato- exercitusque esset! 
ad tn. lompeium m ultimas propo terras venerunt 
eiquese omnes Cretensium civitates dedere vello dixl 
erunt ? Quid idem iste Mithridates ? nonnc ad eundem 
tn. I ompeium, legatura usquo in Hispaniam misit ? 
eum quem Pompeius legatum semper judicavit • ii 
quibus semper erat molestum, ati oum potissimum esse 
missum, speculatorem, quam legatum judfari maluerunt. 
Potestis igitur jam constituere, Quirites, banc auctori- 
tatem, multis postea rebus gestis, magnisque vestris 
judicus amplificatam, quantum apud illos reges, quantum 
apud exteras nationes valituram esse existimetis 
^ Reliquum est, ut de felicitate, quam praestare de se 
ipso nemo potest, meminisse et commemoraro de altero 
possumus, sicut aeauum est homini de potestate deorum 
timido et pauca dicamus. Ego enim sic existumo.' 
Maximo, Marccllo, Scipioni, Mario, et ceteris magnia 
imperatoribus, non solum propter virtutem, sed etiam 
propter fortunam, saepius imperia mandata, atque exer- 
citus esse commissos. Fuit enim profecto quibusdam 
summis viris quaedam ad amplitudinem et gloriam et 
ad res magnas bene gerendas dirinitus adjuncta fortuna- 
de hujus autem hominis felicitate, quo de nunc agimus* 
hac utar moderatione dicendi, non uf in illius potestate 
tortunam positam esse dicam, sed ut praeterita memin- 
isse, rehqua sperare videamur, ne aut invisa diis 
immortahbus oratio nostra, aut ingrata esse videatur. 

Cicero, pro leg. Man., c. 16. 

1. Cretensium legati. Give the true statement of this 
affair. 

2. Noster imperator. Who ? 

3. What was the exact technical meaning of imperium 2 
How only could it be conferred ? ^ 

4. Usque in Hispaniam. In what was Pompey then en- 
gaged ? *^ '' 

5. Iste Mithridatesi. Mpnf.ion *^^ »^».;t,-: — i „ • 

Which iste is used. 

6. Vestris judiciis. Give instances. 










* 'llH M 



H ' 

if , 



'* ..*'! 






7. Maximo, Scipioni. Write brief notices of these com- 
manders. 

8. Nunc agimus. Translate agere cum populo, 

IV. 

1. Who were the principal opponents of the Manilian 
law? 

2. What was a rogatio ? Explain the formulae with which 
it always commenced and terminated. What was adrogatio ? 

3. How does Sallust describe the character of Pompey ? 

4. Distinguish between the gerund and the gerundive ; 
and explain the origin of the latter. 

5. Give a sketch of the second Mithridatic war. 






nnmvuitp of srotronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



FIRST YEAR. 



EUCLID. 



Examiner: Rev. W. Jones, B.A. 



1. On the same base and on the same side of it there 
cannot be two triangles which have their sides which are 
terminated in one extremity of the base, equal to one 
another, and likewise those which are terminated in the 
other extremity. 

the^'thtZsidl! ^'^^^ ""^ "" *"''''^^' ^'' *'^'*^'' ^'"^*'' *^^" 

nf fe/i??'/''"^ any proposition beyond the first book 
of Euclid, that two circles which have not a common centre 
cannot cut one another in more points than two. 

,2' ^V\*';r^^'? ^^^^ ^''^ angles of the one equal to 
two angles of the other, each to each, and have also those 

^inl? T '^'''^.^'^ f^J^^ent to equal angles in each, then 
hall the other sides be equal, each to each ; and al o the 
third angle of the one to the third angle of the other 

i> and E are the middle points of AB, AC sides of a ir\ 
Fd'^ FE^n^o'd " ?^ -^^ produced, any poi^; FVLken ; 
^P in ? ^It ^''^ ?•'' •'' ^T '^''^^'^ *'"ough A parallel to 
iiC m (x, H respectively; shew that GH is equal to BQ. 

4. If a side of a triangle be produced, the exterior angle 

LTlf • ^^^ '"'"/'"' ^"^ ^PP*^'^*^ ^"g^«« ; ^nd the 

right an iT' """^ ^'"'^ *"''"^^' are equal to two 

If from two of the angles of a triangle perpendiculars be 
drawn upon the opposite sides, the third angle of the tri- 



if 




n 


'1 






it 


■J. it 
'1 




' g''g1 


<^f' 












it' 



ti 






angle is equal to the sum of the angles contained bj the side 
opposite to it and the two perpendiculars. 

5. To divide a straight line into two parts, so that the 
rectangle contained by the whole and one of the parts may 
be equal to the square on the other part. 

If a line be thus divided, shew that the rectangle con- 
tained by the difference of the parts and the greater part 
equals the square on the other part. 

6. The angle at the centre of a circle is double of the 
angle at the circumference on the same base, that is, on the 
same part of the circumference. 

Two lines which cut a circle intersect ; shew that the angle 
between them equals the semi-sum, or semi-difference of the 
angles subtended by the intercepted arcs at the centre of 
the circle, according as the point of section falls within or 
without the circle. 

7. The angles in the same segment of a circle are equal 
to one another. 

Construct a triangle, having given one angle, the side 
opposite to it, and the point in which the bisector of the 
given angle meets the given side. 

8. If from any point without a circle two straight lines are 
drawn, one of which cuts the circle, and the other touches 
it; the rectangle contained by the whole line which cuts the 
circle, and the part of it without the circle, shall be equal 
to the square on the line which touches it. 

A straight line BC of given length is intercepted between 
two straight lines AB, AC given in position, and two circles 
are drawn touching each of the three ; shew that for all posi- 
tions of BC, the part of AB intercepted between the points 
of contact of the circles is constant. 

9. To describe an isosceles triangle, having each of the 
angles at the base double of the third angle. 

In the figure of this proposition, let the two circles meet 
in D and E, and let ABD be the triangle required shew 
that if a tangent at A meet BD produced in F, AFD is a 
triangle having the required property. 

Shew also that if BA bo produced to meet the circle 
again in G, and GE be joined and produced to meet BD in 
K, GBK is another such triangle. 

10. If the vertical angle of a triangle be bisected by a 
straight line which also cuts the base, the segments of the 



IT.^M! ^T *^' ""V^^'^ ^^^^^ *^« ^*^er sides of the 
triangle have to oiv mother. 

op^rlt^aSja^^^X; tto^ ^^^ «^^^ 

ratl^onS^r;!:^^:?,:^^^;^^ ^"^^'^^ ^^ *^^ ^^p"-^^ 

Through a point in the side of a triangle draw a line 
cutting off a quarter of the triangle. 

r;in\!; Jfl^ rectangle contained by the diagonals of a quad- 
rila eral figure inscribed m a circle is equal to both the rect- 
angles contained by its opposite sides. 



29nftiev0U|l of SToronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



FIEST YEAR. 



ALGEBRA. 



Examiner : J. B. Cherriman, M.A. 



1. State the reasoning by which the truth of the following 
formulas ia established : 

ah = ba; a(p-\-c) — ah + ac ; a^^.a"* = a»H^». 

What are the values of the quantities Q >c a,~ . a\ 0" for 


different values of a ? 

Find the values of 

first, when w = ^, a = 0, 6 = 1; second, when w = 1, 6 = — 1. 

2. Investigate Horner's method of division, and show how it 
may be used in finding the value of /(a), where fix) is any 
rational and integral function of x. 

Shew that whether we divide /(a;) by aa; +6 or by » + ^, 

a 

the remainder in either case will be the value of /(— - ). 

^ a' 

3. Prove the rule for finding the least common multiple of two 
or more Algebraic quantities. 

If a, 6, c be three quantities, having respectively the factors 
a, ^, 7 such that no two have any common measure, and L^, L ^L 
be the least common multiples of (6, c), (c, a), (a, h) regnectivelv* 
prove ^ ^' \ ' i J 7 



«A = /5A=7A' 




J* * 






4. Shew how the magnitude of a fraction is altered by increasing 
or diminishing both its terms by the same quantity. 

Show that a j^roper fraction is less diminished by adding the 
same quantity to both its terms than it is increased by subtracting 
that quantity from each term. 

Trace the changes of magnitude of y^j and y-rj as w 

changes from 4- CO to — CO. 

5. Prove that every quadratic equation has two roots, and 
investigate a rule for finding them. 

Find the condition that the equation (a -r x) {b — x) = c' 
may have its roots equal. 

6. If a : 6 :: c : d. then will 

pa + qb:ma-{- nh '.: pc ■{■ qd : mc+nd ; 

and m» + qab I mab + nb^ :: \ J^ I — f 

7. Explain the notation called " Variation." 



If a'+i" CO be, and ac vz b\ then -. + _ is invariable. 

6" 6 

8. When are three quantities said to be in arithmetic, geome- 
tric, or harmonic progr'^ssion 1 In each case, given two of the 
quantities, show how to find the remaining one. 

The equation aa;" + 2 i.c + c = 0, will have its roots real 
and unequal, equal, or imaginary, according as «, 6, c are in the 
above progressions respectively. 

9. Investigate a formula by which the sum of n quantities in 
arithmetic progression can be found. 

The sum of the successive odd numbers, commencing with 
2p + I, and ending with 2q - 1, is q^ - p^- 

10. Shew how to find the sum of a series of quantities in 
geometric progression ; and tL o limit of this sum when the series 
is prolonged indefinitely, the ratio being a pro[)er fraction. 

This ratio being — shew that the sum ad inf : can be 
bi 
relied upon as giving correctly the first n figures for the sum of n 

terms, when (-)" > 100 001, (w zeros.) 

^a * 

11. (a) Multiply together the following : 

a' _ 3 a; _ 1, 2a;^ 4- 4a; + I , ■:>? - ^a; - 3 ; 

and extract the square root of the product. 



\ 



(0) Divide, by Homer's method 

1 + a: + 45x« + 135x' by 1 + 3a; + 4aj», 

and continue the quotient as far as a;", giving the finite remainder 
tiien leit. 

(y) Find the greatest common measure of 

1 — a? + y + « ^xi/ + i/z — zx — xyz, 
and '^—x^y — z+xy+yx + zx — xyz; 
and shew that their least common multiple is a complete square 
if a; = y» + «" — y V. 

12. Beduce to lowest terms : 

(a;— 1 3:4.3 

1-a: 2+a; ^ 

(^) -7J-, o ., , ^jrr + anal + 

13. Solve the equations : 

(a) h{x - 1) - Ka? - 2) = \{x - 3) - ^(cr — 4) ; 

(/9) (10* - xy + 10*(a:* + 1) «^ a;' + 100000001 ; 

(7) (a: + «)(« + *) = (« + c) (6 + c) ; 

(8) Va-+6J- v^+^= 7^~r-^^«'. 

V a + c 

14. Sum 

« -(i+|)-(2+!i^')-(3 + !l^% 

to w terms; 

, f/3) (1+ vi) + i 4- H 1 - ^/D + 

to n terms. 

w 7f-VI+7l- 

to infinity. 

15. A pamphlet, when set up in type, is found to contain 2000 
lines, and will make a certain number of pages ; but by closing 
up the lines so as to get into each page one-fifth more and one 
over, the number of pages can be diminished by 20. How many 
were there ? 



M >'■<'« 

^;;j*^ 



I 4; 






WinmvuHsi Of SToronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



FIKST YEAR. 



TRIGONOMETRY. 



Examiner : J. B. Cherriman, M.A. 



1. State the rule for finding the characteristic of a logarithm 
and prove that the maiitissa is unaffected by any chanrof th^ 
position of the decimal point in the number. ^ ^ 

characYeiStV^ri "^ u> ' T*"?" °^ logarithms were such that the 
cMracteiisticof log 10 is 2, what may the characteristic of lo- 100 
be,^and what must be the least value of the base thatlfmay 

byyoTCrithm: '" ^"^'^'"^°^ multiplication and involution 
Given log 2 and log 3, find the logarithms of 
0-5, 60, 0-8, 250, 4-5. 

2 «n/n^f.i!°° ^^'^^ " ~ ^°o^' ^' ^^y ^^^« "'^'^ the logarithms of 
jS and 0-5 the same mantissa 1 ® 

3. Perform the following operations by logarithms: 
(«) Multiply 123-45 into 5-4321 ; 

(i3) Find the value of (±?^)' ' 

67059 ' 

(^> ^'-^-^I- , 

4. Define the trigoaometrieal ratios of an angle less than 90° 

900 a^dirtltlsoof "*"'^*'""'^'' '■""'""8"' S'-**^*""^ 
"Why need not the tables be ext- ^d beyond 90° 1 



%\ 


' "' H'xt 


'i;| 


'"' i'^'^ 




'''"$% 




^ ' •*' vS 




'■ '^*"^''«i 




i^^ 




' "^ ^ 







'-" N^ 












Vi.- * 



[if "' ■ 






Write down the five independent relations connecting the 
ratios of an angle. 

5. Find tan 45^ and sin 30O. 

Deduce from them sin 45° and tan Z0°. 

Write down the tabular logarithms of these quantities. 

Having given the tabular logarithms of the sines of all 
angles up to 90°, shew how those of the other ratios of these 
angles can be found. 

6. State the different cases that arise in the solutions of right- 
angled triangles, and solve one of them. 

A ladder rests between a wall and the ground at an angle 
of 45^; if its foot is moved halfway towards the wall, through what 
angle will the ladder have revolved 1 Shew that the top will 
have moved ( y/f — 2) times as much as the foot. 

7. Prove the formulas : 

{a)\ sin {A-{-B) = sin J. cos JB + cos A sin J9; 

(j3) ,.. 2 sin'^ = 1 - cos 2 ^ ; 

Bin J: 4- sin J? _ tan \ { A-\- B ) . 

^^' sin A ^ain H " t^^ {A-B)' 

(5) sin -4 cos 2 -S + cos 2 .^ sin B = 

sin f (A+B) Cos ^ {B-A) + cos | {A-B) sin I {B-A). 

8. How many independent relations connect the six parts of a 
triangle ] When three parts are given, in what cases may they 
fail to give a distinct triangle ? 

If the angle A be obtuse, shew that no triangle can exist 

unless "' > --°^---. , where A' is the supplement of A. 
h coaB 

9. In any triangle, prove the relations : 

, . sin A Bin B sin C . 

(o) = — f — = , 

^ •' a c 

(^) c = 6 cos^ + acosB; 

A-B a-b . G . 

('y^ *^^-T- = m:6 '°'t' 

(8) tan ^ = ^(i^^.^, (. the semiperi- 

meter.) 

A BO 

((£\ cos -^ cos — cos -- (cot A+coi i?+cot C) 

___ (a±h+c) (g' +y+c*) ^ 
Sabo 



10. Solve the following triangles : 

(o) a = 209-88, 6 = 333-33, C= 122© 26'. 

(3) « = 753.09, 6 = 333-33, c = 66666. 

(7) A = 57034', a = 54-32]. b = 87-654. 

(^) A = 57034', a =: 47-979, b = 54-321. 

11. A person coming straight down an incline notes the dia- 
tance between two points of his descent. On reaching the foot of 
the incline, he walks straight on along the horizontal plane for a 
known distance, and then measures the angles of elevation of the 
two points. Shew that he is able to calculate the angle of the 
inchne, and the heights of the two points above his level. 



Num. 


Log. 


Angle. 


Log. 




12345 


09149 


7° 07' 


tan 


9-09639 


15000 


17609 


13"08 


tan 


9-36795 


20000 


30103 


15"18 


sin 


9-42139 


20988 


32197 


21"40 


cosec 


10-43273 


30000 


47712 


31 "07 


tan 


9-78077 


42755 


63099 


45"45 


tan 


10.01137 


43269 


63618 


49"34 


sin 


9-88148 


47979 


68105 


57"34 


sin 


9-92635 


50000 


69897 






10.07365 
9-73987 


54321 


73497 


61"13 


cosec 
cot 


60000 


77815 


69"18 


cos 


9-54836 


67059 


82646 


72"52 


sin 


9-98029 


87654 


94277 








94105 


97361 











1. 

whicl 



Sol 



2. I 

ber "wi 
of 5 ai 

J 
by th( 
that it 
is so d 

3. ] 

tional. 



(l+x- 



^o""^- 



im 



tliutievjeifti? of ^oronio. 



Annual examinations • i864. 



FIRST YEAR. 



ALGEBRA AND TRIGONOMETRY. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



Uxaminer: Rev. W. Jones, B.A. 



1. Find by means of indoteminate multipliers the value of z 
whicJx satisfies the simultaneous equations, 

«i^+*i y+Ci 2r = f/j 

Solve the equations : 
(i.) {x+a-\-b)* + {x+b+cy + {x+c-\-af 
=3 (x+a+b) {z+b+c) (cc+c+a). 

2. Shew how to (\-pres3 a given mixed number iu any scale. 
Express 7593 7 in the scale whose radix is G. What num- 
ber will be expressed by the same two digits in each of the scales 
of 5 and 71. 

If a number, exppressed in the common scale, be denoted 

by the digits p p^,p,^, beginning with the unit digit, shew 

that it will be divisible by 12, when Po—2p, +4,(p + p + ) 
is so divisible. i \i-2 j 3 "-j 

3. Investigafo the general term of the expansion of {%-\-a 07+ 

f?*+ )"' where n is positive or negative, integral or frac- 
tional. 



If c,Cj, c be the coefficients in the 



(l+a;+a;V', tli 



en 



expansion of 



CoCft.-C,6- . + c„c„_„— 



+ (-1/ ''^.+iC.-i=J{i-H'"-.} 



5s! 




r 



m 



4. If the denominators of the fractions -tS f-S ••• r" have all the 

same sign, shew that the fraction ^1+^2+ ••• +^>» Ues between 

the greatest and least of the original fractions. 

Shew also that if there be n positive quantities, a, hj c, ... 
which are not all equal, then 

^+^+"+ - > {aba ...f' 

5. If A-\-Bx-{-Cz^+ ... = a+bz-{-cx^ -\- ... for all values 
of X, shew that A=:a, B—b, <5*c=<j-c. Employ this principle 

^ 2a; 

(i.) To separate into partial fractions r \8 / 1 o\ 

(ii.) To sum to n terms the series 1.2+2.3+3.4+ .... 

6. State and prove Format's theorem. 

n— 1 m— 1 

If m and n are prime numbers, shew that m ■\- n — 1 is 
divisible by mn. 

7. Prove by a geometrical construction that 

, . , „> tan A + tan B 

tan (A + 5) = i_tanA teO- 

Prove also the formula 2 sin -'^ x — vers — ^ 2a;', and shew 
that if sin (0— a) sin (0—^9) ~ sin a sin ^, then 

tan 6 = tan («+yQ), unless =1 nir. 

8. Shew that if be the circular measure of an angle less than 
90°, sin ^ < and > — ^ • 

Q R ff 

Shew that the limit of cos ^. cos ^ ...cos ^,, when m is 

sin 



infinite, is 



e 



:f%'> '• 



If / (0) be a function of given by the equation / (2^)= 
(1 — tan'^)/(0), and if/(0) = m, shew that /(^) = mO cot S- 

9. Find a formula which will include all angles having a given 
sine'. Solve the equation cos — sin 5fl = cos 3 — sin 3 0. 

10 Define the base of the Napierian system of logarithms, and 
expand log, (l+») in ascending powers of x. 



11. Obtain exponential expressions for the sine and cosine. 
From the equivalence of the expansions of 



log(i. 



■X e 



"•'-') + log (i+.7'^') 



and log -j 1— a; (2 y/1Il sin + x)l 

obtain the expansion of cos 2nB and of sin (2n+l)0 in terms of 
powers of sin $. 

12. Sum to n terms the series 

cosa+cos («+i3)+cos (a+2l3)+ , 

and shew that 

sin o+sin 3a+sin 5a -\- .... to w terms = ^^^' ^° . 

sino 






t'i 








centi 
pend 



ABC 
inter 
and • 

the s 



scrib 
poini 



tions 



and i 
cube. 



Unibtvms ot Zovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



FIRST, SECOND, AND THIRD YEARS, AND 
CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



PROBLEMS. 

HONORS. 



Uxaminers : \ ^' ^' S?\^^™^^ ^'^' 
I Rev. W. Jones, B.A. 



1 . If a trapezium be inscribed in a circle, the line joining the 
centre of the circle with the intersection of its diagonals is per- 
pendicular to its parallel sides. 

2. The middle points U and F of AB, BC aides of a square 
ABCD, being joined with D and A respectively, ED and FA 
intersect in G ; shew that a circle may be described about EBFG, 
and that the length of a tangent drawn to it from D is equal to 
the side of the square. 

3. Upon the sides of a triangle as diameters circles are de- 
scribed : shew that their three common chords intersect in a 
point. 



4. If 



x^ — y. 



2/2 — x^i 



X 



xyz 



tions, is equal to 



y 

xy 



xyz 



shew that each of these frac- 



111 

-, to a; + 2/ + z, and to .—f - + — 
xyz xyz 



5. Eliminate x, y, z from the equations 

ax = c'y + b'z \ 
by =. a'z ■\- c'x I • 
cz = b'x 4- o,'y j 

6. If aoi? '+ 3 iaj'' + 3 ca? + t/ contain acc^ -j- ^hx + c as a factor, 
and the latter be a complete square, the former will be a complete 
cube. 



'*8 ■ ».'»| 



■J.1 




7. If 



'it- 



S i 



, <(» 



r. 



T?«; 



A 






X = 


6« + 


cy 


} 






2/ = 


ex + 


az 








ay + 


bx 




prove 












/i\ 


1 «2 


1-&2 




]- 


-C2 


(0 ••• 


a;'^ 


y^ 

-ft* V 


-b' 


+ 


i ' 


(ii) ... 


V 1 a' 
a 


c 


VI 


a' Vl- 


'1- 


-c" 





a 



8. In any scale of notation, radix r, the (r — 1) digits are 
formed into any number of numbers, oach digit being used once 
and only once ; given that the sum of these numbers lies betfl^een 
^r and (p+l)r, shew that it is pr-\-s, where s is the number 
which must be added to the sum of the digits in the lower limit 
to make it divisible by ^ — ]). 

9, A train in consequence of meeting with an accident is 
obliged to lessen its speed ; had the accident occurred a miles 
further back, the train would have been p minutes later than it 
was in arriving at the terminus ; and if h miles further on, it 
would have been q minutes earlier. Shew that the difference of the 

times of ninning a mile before and after the accident is Vj±l 

a + h 
minutes. 



10. Prove, 



(i) 
(ii) 



u y.i8 



4- :iL_l.__ 4- ad inf: 

9.18.27 "^ 



1 



01 



~l . (n-l)(n-2) __ (n-.l)(n-2)0z-3) + 
3 ^ 3.4 3.4.5 



2 



n a positive integer . 



11. 



m 



If '<'!±m}±l)'i:-^j:.^:^^^^^ be denoted by /(«,,.) , 
a,,d ■^(^^-1)(^^-2) lorjactor^ ^^^^^^ , 

prove /(w, 2r) +/(n, 2r— 1)(^(«, 1) +/(7i, 2r— 2) ^ (w, 2) + 

= </.(2w, 2/-)4-(^(2w,2r— 2)/(«,l) + ^(2«,2r-4)/(M, 2)+... 

12. A number and its ?*th power will end with the same digit 
when r is any power of 5. 

13. Each person of a given party puts his gloves into a bag, 
and a pair is then distributed to each at random ; find the chance, 



(1,) that every person gets liis own ; (2,) that a specified indi- 
vidual does so. 

14. Prove that in any triangle 

a + b — c 

'^ = anal= 



. A . Ji 

sin -r sin — ■ cos — 
2 2 2 



= « 4- J 4- c 



ABO 

cos -2 cos _ cos -- 



15. If i?, r, rj, r^, r, be the respective radii of the circum- 
scribed, the inscribed, and the three escribed circles of a triangle 
shew that tlie area ot the triangle is equal to V^^^T;^ ; also that 
the area of the triangle formed by joining the centres of the 
escribed circles is equal to 

2i2{(6-fc)sin^ 1 +(c4-«)sin^-^- + (a+i)sin^-|- j. 

16. A person walking along a road observes that two trees 
have their greatest angular elevations a, a' at the same point ; 
after walking on a certain distance, he again observes their ele- 
vations to be ^, B' respectively ; if A, h' be their respective heights 
shew that ' 



h f cof 13— eot'a \ — | 

h' ~ \ cot'W— cot^tt' j 



■:'I3' 

17. Two circles of radii a, b intersect, 2 h being the lenorth of 
their common chord, and c the distance between their centres 
shew that the area common to both is equal .to 



a'sin— 1 



a h 



he 



18. lip, q^ r ; p', q\ /, be the respective distances from A,B,C, 
the angular points of a triangle, of the intersection of the perpen- 
diculars from those points on the opposite sides, and of that of 
the bisectors of the angles of the triangle ; shew that 

pa+qh+rc = 2 (p'q' cos ^ +q' r' cos ^ + r'p' cos -4") * 



19. Sum to n terms the series 



sin 3 A 



cos^Acos'2A 
also prove that 

tan^a — 



+ 



sin 5 A 



+ 



sin 7^ 



cos'2^ cos'3^ ' cos'3.4 cosH^ 
tan*a , tan^a 



4- 



2 



4- 



. .i , siu*a , 
= sura 4- ■ + 



sin^a 



+ 



both series being continued ad infinitum. 








■ i. 




nnmvmp of a^oronto; 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4. 



FIRST YEAR. 



ENGLISH. 



^:r«mm.rs;/?- Wilson, LL.D. 
\ J. A. Boyd, M. A. 



*^* Answers to all the questions are not indispensable ; but 
FULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can be over- 
taken within the time. 

1. Define and give examples of the relations of English 
orthography, 1st, to etymology ; 2nd, to euphonic changes 
in compound words. 

2. Latham states that the differences between the English 
alphabet, and those from which it is derived are referable 
to: — (a) ejection, (6) addition, (c) change of power, {d) change 
of order. Illustrate each ; and trace the history of the 
alphabet in relation to the diverse sources of the English 
vocabulary, and its imperfect adaptation to the sounds in 
the language. 

3. Explain, and illustrate by examples, wherein modern 
English differs from the language in its earlier stages, in 
the use of prefixes and suflSxes. 

4. Explain and give the derivation of metropolitan, 
infinitesimal, euphonic, czar, redeemer, contraband, anthro- 
pomorphism, parthenogenesis, colophon, rhyme, materialism, 
romance, epic. 

5. Define clearly the varying shades of the same termina- 
tion in the following words : chronology, mythology, theology, 
geology. 



ENGLISH LITERATURE. 

1. In what forms and languages did the ecclesiastical and 
profane literature of England appear prior to the reign of 
Jidward III.? Name examples of each class. 

2. Give a concise sketch of the authors and literary works 
of the reigns of Edward III. and Richard II. 

3. State the era of Caxton, and give a concise account of 
the poets of the school of Chaucer, to the date of the 
introduction of the printing press. 

4. Give an account of English literature of the reign of 
Henry VIII.; and specify minutely the characteristic 
differences between the writings of the poets of his reign, 
and those of the previous era. 

5. Give an account of the successive steps in the process 
of development from the Miracle Play to the true Elizabethan 
Drama. 

COMPOSITION. 

^ "Letters, which, as ships, pass through the vast seas of 

time, and make distant ages participate in the wisdom 
illumination, and inventions of the past." ' 

Bacon. 

Illustrate this idea concisely^ writing with care, aa a 
specimen of composition. 



♦ . 



vi 




"t; 



w ••**>'-*i 



f^f*fy ."» ■♦ •V*' 1^5 



^^;gj»fe's4';- 



mnmvuiis of ^Toronto. 






It''* 



I/* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1804. 



FIllST YEAR. 



IIISTOllY. 



IT . f D. Wilson, LL.D. 



iiu.1 



*^* Answers to all the questions are not indispensable ; hut 
FULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over- 
taken within the time. 

I. Outlines of Ancioat History, 

(1.) What led to the Hegemony of Sparta over the rest of 
Hellas, and what consequences resulted from this Hegemony? 

(2.) Givo some account of tho battle of Marathon, and 
estimate its importance. 

(3.) Mention tho circumstances connected with tho estab- 
lishment and the abolition of the Deccmvirates. 

(4.) Give the character and chief incidents of Vespasian's 
reign. 

(5.) What chief points of distinction existed between the 
Germanic conquests of Roman provinces on the continent 
and the Saxon invasion of England. 

II. British history to Henry VIII. 

(1.) Give a summary of the advantages derived by Eng- 
land from the Norman conquest. 

(2.) Writo brief notes upon the lives and influence of 
Wickliffe, Thomas a Becket, and Archbishop Langton. 



(8.) "With the reign of Stephen," says Hamilton, 
CI0808 the pen. ! which maybe emphatically styled the 
era of the conqueBt." 

(a) State the reasons from which this conclusion is 
drawn. 

(J) Trace the lines of descent of the immediate suc- 
cessor of Steph n. 

(4.) Relate the circumstances connected with the con- 
quest of Wales. 

(5.) What causes contributed to the extension of royal 
prerogative during the reign of Henry VIII ? 



letween the 
) continent 




s 

I 



Wini\>tvnit!J! of STovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18G4. 



FTllST YEXn. 



*' % ■■-'» 



ENGLISH. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



■p ' f D. Wilson, LL.D. 
■^^^^^'^^^^•^•ij.A.BoYD,M.A. 



B** 




I. Prosody. 

(1.) Give an example of " Service metre," and of 
" Gay's stanza." Name the measures which we 
have borrowed from Italy, and characterize each. 

(2.) Give an account of the introduction and naturaliz- 
ation of Hexameters as an English measure. 

(3.) Analyse the following rhymes, stating which are 
perfect and which imperfect, with reasons : — 
Aiuay and sway ; made and strayed; go and 
flow; light and satellite; remained and land; 
path and faith; hosanna and banner. 

(4.) Discuss the advantages or disadvantages which 
h:\ve accrued to English prosody, owing to the 
various verbal and inflexional changes of the 
language which have taken place since the time 
of Chaucer. 

(5.) Sketch the history of the English sonnet. 
II. History of the English language, 

(1.) Shew, by a table, the relationship which exists 
n Encrlish and other lano^uasres '^anoient 



bet\ 



and modern) of the Teutonic Stock. 



-Q \- 



(2.) Specify some of the chief peculiarities of Chau- 
cer's English. 

(3.) Classify the various accessions to our vocabulary 
from the Latin, and give examples of each class. 

(4.) Latham says : " The determination of the amount 

of Danish in Engliyh is difficult A few years 

back the current opinion was against the doctrine 
that there was much Danish in England. At 
present, the tendency is rather tlie other way." 

Shew wherein consists the diiHculty, and give 
reasons in support of the more modern opinion. 

(5.) Compare and contrast English prose as exhibited 
in the following authors: Hooker, Addison, Swift, 
Johnson, Lander and Trench. 



* '/' -rf ' *.*ym 










' >l i ,. U^JBgW 



Unmn'tiitu Of Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



FIEST YEAR. 



HISTORY. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



Examiners 



••{ 



D. Wilson, LL.D. 
J. A. Boyd, M.A. 




*^* Answers to all the questions are not indispensable ; hut 
PULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over- 
taken within the time. 

1. Describe the character of Pope Nicholas V., and the 
course pursued by him in relation to Turkish aggression. 

2. Trace to their sources the claims of the houses of 
Anjou and Aragon on the kingdoms of Sicily and Naples ; 
and give a sketch of the proceedings of Charles VIII. of 
France in asserting his Italian claims. 

3. Describe the character of Pope Leo X., and trace his 
personal influence on European History. 

4. State the circumstances of the fall of Granada ; and 
account for the successful aggression of a Mahommedan 
power in tho east of Europe, and the fall of another in the 
west, within so brief an interval. Give the two dates. 

6. Define the influences at work towards the close of the 
16th century, which led to the decline and extinction of the 
commercial republics of Italy. 



i?A ^' ?r%%^ *^^ genealogical relations of Henry VIII. to 
Jidward III., and assign the causes which rendered England 
indifferent to the fall of Constantinople. ^ 

7. Specify the prominent historical events connected 
mth J^ ranee and Germany at the commencement of the 
loth century. 

8. Describe the characters of Cardinals Xavier and 
Adrian; and assign to each his share in the development of 
the character and the fortunes of Charles V. 

9 Compare Constantine XL of the Eastern Empire, 
and Boabdil of Granada, in personal character, conduct 
and influence on the events which closed the career of each. 

10. Describe the personal character of Henry VII.- and 
trace his influence on English domestic and foreign policy 
and on maritime enterprise. ^ ^* 

11. What peculiar circumstances tended to keep alive the 
crusading spirit in Spain down to the 15th century, when it 
had died out elsewhere throughout Christendom? 



TransL 

to 
nu 
In 
fei 

lOi 

if 



Transk 

Et 
M 
Je 



M 
D' 

Ls 
J'l 
Tc 



wmmvnits of Eovonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS a 1864. 



FIRST YEAR. 



FRENCH. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



Uxaminera.'ii'''^^^ Forneri, LL D. 
(.Robert Sullivan, M.A. 



I. 

Translate into French : 

Fear seizes man in his cradle and accompanies him 
to hi8 grave. Scarcely is he born, when he fears his 
nurse. As a child he fears him who brings him up. 
In his youth he fears his superiors ; in his manhood he 
fears a multitude of evils, the reverses of fortune and the 
loss of all that is dear to him, sickness, shame, death; 
if he IS good he fears the wicked ; if he is bad the laws. 
Lastly, in his old age he trembles at eternity. 

Translate into English : 

Ah? qu'dtait-il sans toi? qu'ai-je aim^ que toi mgme ? 
±it qu est-ce auprt:>s de toi que ce vil univers ? 
Mon ^me va te suivre au fond de tes deserts* 
Je vais seule en cea lieux, ou 1' horreur me consume, 
Languir dans les regrets, s^cher dans I'^mertume, 
Mourir dans le remords d'avoir trahi ma foi 
D'etre au pouvoir d'un autre, et de brfiler pour toi. 
i ars, emporte avec toi mon bonheur et ma vie • 
LaiBse-moi les horreurs du devoir qui me lie. ' 
J'ai mon amant ensemble et ma ^loiVfi k sanvor 
Tous deux me sont sacr4i; je les veux conserver. 

VoLTARiE, Alzire, Act iv., Scene v. 



r' ^:i\ 









mut ' 



m 



f'##'* 



1. Qu'^tait-tlfSanstoi? What does i7 refer to ? 

2. Qu'ai-je aime que^ ^c. Fill up tho ellipsis. 

3. Et qu'eit'CCy 8fc. Destroy the pleonasm in this lino. 

4. Auprcs de toi. Give the true force of aupres hero. 

5. Oil V horreur me consume^ (j-e. Where ? Explain. 

6. D' avoir trahi ma foi. To whom ? and how ? 

7. D'Slre au pouvoir d'un autre^ et de brUler pour toi 
Explain this line. 

8. JDii devoir qui me lie. What duty ? 

9. J'ai mon amant. Et ma gloire a sauver. How ? 

III. 

Translate into English : 

Capitaino renard allait de compagnie 
Avec son ami bouc des plus haut encornds : 
Celui-ci ne voyait pas plus loin que son nez : 
L'autre etait passd maitre en fait de tromperie. 
La soif les obligea de descendre en un puits : 

\A chacun d'eux se d^saltere. 
Apr^s qu'abondamment tous deux en eurent pris, 
Le renard dit au bouc : Que ferons-nous, compare ? 
Ce n'est pas tout de boire, il faut sortir d'ici. 
L^ve tes pieds en haut, et tes comes aussi ; 
Mets-les centre le mur : le long de ton ^chine 

Je grimperai premi^rement ; 

Puis, sur tes comes m'^Ievant, 

A I'aide de cette machine, 

De ce lieu-ci je sortirai, 

Apres quoi je t'en tirerai. 
Par ma barbe, dit l'autre, il est bon ; et je loue 

Les gens bien senses comme toi. 

Je n'aurais jamais, quant h moi, 

Trouv6 ce secret, je I'avoue. 
Le renard sort du puits, laisse son compagnon, 

Et vous lui fait un beau sermon 

Pour I'exhorter a; patience. 
Si le Ciel t'efit, dit-il, donne par excellence 
Autant de jugement que de barbe au men ton, 

Tu n'aurais pas, d la leg^re, 
Descendu dans ce puits. Or, adieu ; j'en suis hers : 



Tfi,cho de t'en tirer, et fals toua tea efforts ; 

Car pour moi j'ai certaine affaire 
Qui ne me permet pas d'arr^ter en chemin. 

En toute chose il faut conaiderer la Jin. 

LaFontaine, Livre iii., Fable v. 

1. Dea plua haul encomia. Form a relative sentence, 
and state what part of speech is plua haul ? 

2. Plua loin que son nez. Give the force. 

3. Toua deux en eurent pris. What does eti refer to ? 

4. Ufaut aortir d'ici. Resolve aortir by a conjunction, 
tense, and mood. 

5. Aprea quoi. Suppress quoi and give the equivalent. 

6. Je t'en tirerai. What does Ven refer to ? 

7. Par ma barbe. What does this expression mean, or 
what part of the speech ? 

8. 11 eat bon. Suppress il and give the equivalent. 

9. Lea gena bien senaSa comme toi. Form a compara- 
tive of equality. 

10. Ce aecret. Give the force. 

11. Et voua lui fait un beau aermon. What is voua ? 

12. Que de barbe au menton. Fill up the ellipsis. 

13. Ala legere. Give the force. 

14. Tdche de t'en tirer. Suppress en and give the equiv- 
alent. 

15. Faia toua tea efforta. Add the complement. 

16. Qui ne me fermet, ^c. Suppress me^ turn arreter 
into a reflective verb, and resolve it by a conjunction, 
tense, and mood. 

17. lljaut conaiderer la fin. Make it definite. 






I 


.'wm 


\> ' 


mk 


'A 


-li 


- 1 » 


Wk 


J. ^ 


' ' *'w 


i 


Mfi 


> 


'■} 1 



1' 
-f. 



*tf 











'b 








'\ 


^t, 










* 










1 




1 


.L..^1L. 




1 
1 




1 




■ 


1 


V 


^fr^ 


V ■ . , ■■ 


i 




^Iniiietfiiita? of Toronto; 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



FIRST YEAR. 



FRENCH. 



Uxaminers'f'^^^^^ Forneri, LL.D. 
Ji^xammers, | ^q^^^,j, Sullivan, M.A. 



I. 

■Translate : 

Tous les gens qui avaient eu des projets ambitieux 
avaient travaille ^ mettre une esp^ce d'anarchie dans la 
republique. Pomp<5e, Crassus et C^sar y r^ussirent k 
merveille. lis etablirent une impunitd de tous les 
crimes publics; tout ce qui pouvait arrSter la corruption 
des moeurs, tout ce qui pouvait faire une bonne police, 
ils Fabolirent; et comme les bons le'gislateurs cherchent 
k rendre leurs concitoyens meilleurs, ceux-ci travail- 
laient a; les rendre pires : ils introduisirent done la 
coutume de corrompre le peuple a prix d'argent, et 
quand on <?tait accuse de brigues on corrompait aussi 
les juges ; ils firent troubler les Sections par toutes 
sortes de violences, et quand on 6tait mis en justice on 
intiraidait encore les juges; I'autorite m^me du peuple 
etait aneantie : temoin Gabinius, qui, apr^s avoir retabli, 
malgre le peuple, Ptolomde ii, main arme'e vint froide- 
ment demander le triomphe. 

Qrandeur et JDScadence des Bomains. 

1. Tousles gens. Give the various construction s of ^^ms. 

2. Y reussirent. Suppress y^ and give the equivalent. 

8. lis Vaholirent. Give the antecedents of ils and V. 
What figure do you perceive in V ? Suppress it, and 
re-arrange the sentence in regular order. 






m 



ambltieux 
ie dans la 
issirent si 

tou3 les 
lorruption 
le police, 
cherchent 
li travail- 

donc la 
irgent, et 
pait aussi 
>ar toutes 
justice on 
du peuple 
lir retabli, 
nt froide- 

jmains. 

3 oi gens. 

ivalent. 

s and V. 
3 it, and 



Unif^tvutita of Eovontoi 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



FIRST YEAR. 



FRENCH. 



Examiners .'liZllI'^^''^^'' ^^m\ 
\ Robert Sullivan, M.A. 



I. 

Translate : 

Tous les gens qui avaient eu des projets ambitieux 
avaient travaillc^ a, mettre uno esp6ce d'anarchie dans la 
republique. Pompee, Crassus et C^sar y r^ussirent ^ 
merveille. lis etablirent une impunitd de tous les 
crimes publics ; tout ce qui pouvait arrSter la corruption 
des moeurs, tout ce qui pouvait faire une bonne police, 
ils I'abolirent; et comme les bons le'gislateurs cherchent 
k rendre leurs concitoyens meilleurs, ceux-ci travail- 
laient d les rendre pires: ils introduisirent done la 
coutume de corrompre le peuple a prix d'argent, et 
quand on ^tait accuse de brigues on corrompait aussi 
les juges ; ils firent troubler les Sections par toutes 
sortes de violences, et quand on 6tait mis en justice on 
intimidait encore les juges; I'autorite mSme du peuple 
etaifc aneantie : temoin Gabinius, qui, apr^s avoir re'tabli, 
malgre le peuple, Ptolomee il main armee vint froide- 
mcnt demander le triomphe. 

Cfrandeur et Decadence des Romaim. 

1. Tous les gens. Give the various constructions of ^ews. 

2. Y rSussirent. Suppress y, and give the equivalent. 

3. lis Vaholirent. Give the antecedents of ils and V. 
What figure do you perceive in V ? Suppress it and 
re-arrange the sentence in regular order. 



4. Ceux'ci travaillaienU What does ceux-ci refer to ? 

5. Travaillaient, Why the imperfect ? 

6. i?« introduisirent. Why the preterite definite ? 

7. (?Mawc? on etait. What sort of pronoun is on. From 
what IS It derived ? Give its peculiarities. 

8. L'autorite mSme. What part of speech is me'me. 

9. Apris avoir r^tdbli. Resolve by tense and mood, 
and^v ^^^^ *^^ primitive Um^^oi r6u88ir,pouvoir, corrompre, 



ir. 

GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS. 

1. Before what countries is the definite article omitted ? 

2 Name some substantives which are masculine in one 
signibcation, and feminine in another. 

3. WV ; do proper names of persons take the mark of 
the plur r!d vhen not? 

4 Mention some of the compound substantives, and state 
how they form the plural. 

.;v.f ■ T^''""'' '' an adjective placed after two or more substan- 
t^ives, to agree wi^h the last only, and when only with the 

before ?^^^° ^' ^^^jective or participle past take en 

govJ;n7n'FS''^^'''"°"^ ^''' ^ ^"P^^^'^^^^^ ^^^^-^ 

8. With what verbs are disjunctive pronouns, or pro- 
nouns preceded by a preposition, used ? 

.vn?' ^T^ '"""^ collective general, and some partitive, and 
explain their respective agreement with the verb. 

dif^'tn^rj".-'^-^'''*^'^' ^i '?,''^^'^^^ number be an antece- 
sentences : ''' "^^ ^'"''''^ ^^^""^*^' '^' *'^"^^^»S 

iVbws e^<20«* c7^w3 ?w^ ^<a/m« c?w wjeVwe at,^^ : vou8 
■punez comme un homme qui entendez la matiere. 



n,. 



.'.;.'■ 



,|•;^^ 



« 








i 

1 

8 

9 

1 
and 



sign 

the 

how 

tivei 
first 

{ 
befo 



gOV€ 

nour 



expli 

IC 
poin 

dent 
senti 



4. Oeux-ci travaillaient. What does ceux-ci refer to ? 

5. Travaillaient. Why the imperfect ? 

6. Il8 introduisirent Why the preterite definite ? 

7. Quand on etait. What sort of pronoun is on. From 
what IS It derived ? Give its peculiarities. 

8. L'autorite mSme. What part of speech is m^me. 

9. Apris avoir rStabli. Resolve by tense and mood. 
aufieni^.^ *^' ^'™'''''' tensesof /•^Mas^r,i).Mz;,i>, comm;>r., 

II. 

GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS. 

1. Before what countries is the definite article omitted ? 

si JfipfZ' «°"J^/'^^«!^»t!ve3 which are masculine in one 
signitication, and femimne in another. 

3 When do proper names of persons take the mark of 
the plural, and when not ? -lu. ui 

4 Mention some of the compound substantives, and state 
how they form the plural. ' 

5. When is an adjective placed after two or more substan- 
^ives, to agree with the last U, and when only wiT the 

befor'e ?^*''" ^''' ^" '"^J''^''' "' P'^'^^^'P^^ P^^^ *^k« '^ 

govI;n7n'FSr "'''"'"' '°" ^ ^^P^^^^'^^' -^^^-^ 

.n„f ; ^'"'^ /if ''^'^' '''^ disjunctive pronouns, or pro- 
nouns preceded by a preposition, used ? ^ 

.^nfnJn^.W^ """' Collective general, and some partitive, and 
explam their respective agreement with the verb. 

41^'is'owVatr'" " "'^'' *'' "^^""^^" ^'^^^ "^"^ 
A.lh ^""^ an adjective or cardinal number be an antece- 
s^ntL^r^^"^ P""°"" • ^""^*' ^^'^-^^^' ^^^ following 

Mus e'tions deux, qui Staient du meme avi. • .,«, 
panez comme un homme qui entendez la maUei'l ' 



■5 1. 1 



. .4-1 







J 




^a 




. 


''1 


ft\ t I tf 


ti 


m. 


r 1 


1 


^^^^1 




ai 



g€ 



K= 



Wini\>ttuitp of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



FIEST YEAR. 



ELEMENrARY CHEMISTRY. 



Examiner: Henry Croft, D.O.L. 



1. What changes accompany chemical action ? 

2. Explain the nomenclature of the oxides. 

3. What is a neutral salt ? Give instances. What is 
an acid salt i Give instances. 

4. What are the oxy-acids and hydracids? Give the 
general formulas of their salts. 

5. Describe the preparation and properties;^of oxygen. 

6. In what forms may carbon occur ? 

7. Give the general properties of the metals. 

8. Give the methods of forming metallic oxides. 

9. What metals are not acted on by nitric acid ? 
Kia'g^si'ie 0=8^ equivalent of bisulphate of potassa: 



•" * 'if' 









fli^Ei^ 


MttM^aiMMfli 


'■.pt-^}'t ■-'I... 


■iji^^B^M 






\^- 


■ -^^H 


E. ■ 


nM 






\-f- ■ 


'"- m 




;: mi 



an 



gei 



1 



WLnmtmn of Zovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



FIRST YEAR. 



ELEMENTARY CHEMISTRY. 



Examiner: Henry Cbopt, D.CL. 



1. What changes accompany chemical action ? 

2. Explain the nomenclature of the oxides. 

3. What is a neutral salt ? Give instances. What is 
an acid salt ? Give instances. 

4. What are the oxy-acids and hydracids ? Give the 
general formulas of their salts. 

5. Describe the preparation and properties'of oxygen. 

6. In what forms may carbon occur ? 

7. Give the general properties of the metals. 

8. Give the methods of forming metallic oxides. 

9. What metals are not acted or by nitric acid ? 

10. Calculate the equivalent of bisulphate of potassa: 
K=39 S=16 0=8. 



BnmvultVi of ^Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



FIEST YEAR. 



ELEMENTARY CHEMISTRY. 



Examiner : Henry Ckoft,' D.C.L. 



1. What changes accompany chemical action ? 

2. Explain the nomenclature of the oxides. 

3. What is a neutral salt ? Give instances. What is 
an acid salt ? Give instances. 

4. What are the oxy-acids and hydracids ? Give the 
general formulas of their salts. 

5. Describe the preparation and properties'of oxygen. 

6. In what forms may carbon occur ? 

7. Give the general properties of the metals. 

8. Give the methods of forming metallic oxides. 

9. What metals are not acted on by nitric acid ? 

10. Calculate the equivalent of bisulphate of potassa: 
K=39 S=16 0=8. 



1. 



'i'i ■■ ■» 




rt 



\ . 



WLnmvnit^ of Zovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



FIRST YEAR. 



ELEMENTARY CHEMISTRY. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



AK 



Examiner: Henr\ CaoF , D.C.L. 



1. What is meant by single and double elective affinity ? 
Give instances. 

2. What circumstances favour chemical action ? 

3. Give the laws of combination. 

4. Show by formulas the different modes of preparing 
oxygen. 

5. Give the preparation and properties of hydrosulphuric 
acid. How does it act on metallic oxides ? 

6. Give the preparation and properties of sulphurous 
acid. What is its action on vegetable colours ? 

7. Give the sources and properties of boracic acid. 

8. Give the preparation and properties of potassium. 

9. How does carbonate of lime occur in nature i 

10. Mention the principal minerals in which alumina is 
found. 

11. Give the ores and oxides of lead. 

12. Give the ores and oxides of tin. How are the latter 
prepared r 









". ''K^^t^r:,: ■?^:i*^1 



.» . 

• * 




Wini\}tv&itp of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



FIRST YEAR. 



ELEMENTARY NATURAL HISTORY. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



^^a'niner.l^llZi^^^^T'^-^-'- 



i t 






1. Sketch of vegetable anatomy, an accosnt of the 
elementary parts of plants, with their principal variations. 

2. Food of plants, with the means of obtaining it. 

3. When a plant is removed from one place to another, 
what are the causes of danger, and what are the precau- 
tions proper to be employed ? 

4. General structure of Lamellibranchiate Mollusks— 
points of chief importance as affording useful discriminating 
characters. The five orders, with the families under each. 

5. Proboscidean Gasteropoda: the families, with their 
distinguishing characters. 

6. Analysis of Raptorial birds, distinguishing the families 
and sub-families, with the habits peculiar to each. 

7. Family Magapodidae : their relations with other birds, 
and their peculiar habits, especially in respect to the pro- 
duction of their young. 



* -m 



ft.- AT. 



c I' l'^?•'!'®® ""i Grallatorial birds, with the sub-families 
of the RalhdaB, and their distinguishing habits. 

9. What are the characters which have caused the family 
Columbidae to be placed among Rasores? What are the 
objections to this view ? 

10. Insessores : the sub-orders with the families of 
Firsirostres, and particulars of their mode of life. 





ij:<v: ji- 



mnmmitu oe 3:ototfto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864, 



FIRST AND SECOND YEARS. 



■ * ■<*■ i 

■t • : 



' -J- 



f Tt ' 



ELEMENTAKY NATUEAL HISTOEY. 



r-mfu"^'S ' J ^^^- ^^°^- HlNCKS, F.L.S. 



J. Cottle, Esq. 



il:^.- '.j-'l.' vV -.'■ 



1. Give examples of consolidated forms of vegetation. 
How are the leaves represented homologically and function- 
ally ? To what kind of climate are such plants adapted ? 

2. Describe some anomalous forms of leaves, or appen- 
dages to leaves. 

3. When the outer flowers of a cyme or umbel are 
enlarged and barren, what is the explanation ? Give some 
examples. 

4. What is meant by aestivation ? Name the principal 
varieties. 

5. Explain the differences in nature between appendages 
to the seed for its conveyance through the air, and similar 
appendages to the fruit. Give examples of the several kinds. 

6. What is the primary element of animn t'ssues ? and 
what are the chief varieties under which ther appear ? 

7. What is !-•-:? difference of structure 'r^Treen the volun- 
tary and invoIuiiUry muscles ? Give ei^s, ipiea of each. 



8. Of what different parts does blood consist ? Exnlain 

fhesTfact??'* ' ' '=™'='»8ions have been drawn from 

nit!'„f,l"""°'P''?','- "'^»"™'''» = gi^e examples from several 
parts of the animal kingdom. 



b-'-'^^y 







1 



1 ^.■t 



*?:* 



ll' ■ 


, i1 


'I • 

1*. 


V 



l., ' 



' H 




If .¥7i;i 



1^ 
i 



Wini\)tvuits Of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: IFCI. 



B* 



i'ixvST YEAR. 



METAPHYSICS l^T]^ !^.THICS. 



Examiner: Rev. James Beaven, D.D. 



fi ft r.i 1 I 



3. 



4. 



5. 



PALEY'S NATURAL THEOLOGY. 

a. What illustration does Paley employ to shew the 
sense in -vvhich rational creatures are the causes 
of the existence of their offspring ? 

h. In what respect are they not adequate causes, and 
what inference do we draw from this fact ? 

a. Describe the position and effect " the sartc nus 
muscle. 

h. How does this bear on ^he general argument it is 
inten'l-^d to illustrate ' 

a. To meet what objection does Buftbn bring forward 
his hypothesis of "internal moulds? and how 
does he jm^doy it ? 

b. What objection to this hypothesis ? 

a. Illustrate the relations of aii- to li'i-ht. 

b. What is the object " t' ns: those rcl 



.'Uis 



a. Why was it important that in the Cii^e of the 
earth the axis of rotation should be fixeu ? 

h. Shew that it is fixed in the best manner, and 
point out the !)earing of this fact upon the 
general argument. 



^' m ^^" ^^^ occasion to d^sci be instruments of tor- 
ture, * This engine,' you would say, ♦ is to extend the sinews, 
this to dislocate the joints, &c.' " 

Explain the object of this illustration, with the connexion 
in which it stands. 



4 






■ ' "V 



1. 



a. 



h. 



2. a. 






h. 



C. 



PALEY'S EVIDENCES. 

How does the nature of the case afford a strong 
proof that the original teachers of Christianity 
must have entered upon a new course of life ? 

Show from their own and other writers that thev 
actually did so? '^ 

rutheiticu;!""'"" '"'"'"" genuineness and 

0^ what Christian writings does Paley think it 
necessary to prove both the genuineness and 
authenticity, and with what object ? 

Give the several heads of proof, classing them 
respectively under genuineness and authenticity. 
" It :t6 been said that, if the prodigies of Jewish 
histcrvhau boon found only in fragments o^f Maltho r 
Ber. , we shouM have paid no regard to them " 
J es Pal adn t this ? What distinction does he draw 

p:Su-stor.:^^---^-^"^^^^^-^^^ 

^1 ^^r ""r-^ *^® learning and labours of the early Christian 
wnters be shown? and what inference is drawn^ fro" Ihe 

5. a. Give any particulars ,f the testimony of heathen 

wnters to the rapid spread of the gospel. 

^' ^otf il!!;^!'''^ f '^' ^ "^Sress of Mahometanism, 
oth directly and as comj ared with ( hristianity. 

6. Shew that C^ '^^^^nit^ ^s not justly ho^aea hie with fl,. 
.er...uing laws .vhich hav'e ' een Lde^in u fupporT 



i 1 

J- 



"■':'n 









1 





Bni^^tvnitS! of Eovonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



GREEK. 



I Thomas Moss, M.A. 



I. 

Translate : 

'H fiiv (xiv vv/x<pr]v ye virjv KarekelTTOfxev r^fxeh 
^Ep'xpfievot TToXefjLovSe' Trai"? 8i ol yv eVt fxa^oi 

NT^TTtO?, 09 TTOV VVV 76 jieT UuSpCOV 'li^GL upidflU), 

"OX^tor V l^P 'Tov ye Trarijp (f)i\o<i 6\jre7ai iXdwu, 
Kal K€Lvo<i Traripa irpoairTv^erai, r) Oefii^ iarlv. 
'H h ifirj ovhe irep uto? ivnrXr]a6r]vai cckoiti^ 
Oi^OaXixolcnv eacre' irdpo'i Se fjue ire^ve Kal avTov. 
["A\\o Be TOt epeo), av B' evl (f)peal ^dXXeo a-fjaiv. 
Kpv^Srjv, firjS" dva(f>av8a, (jJiXrjv e? TrarpiSa yatav 
Nrja KaTca-xefievat, iirel ovKerc irKnh, yvvai^iv.'] 
AXX aye fioi roBe elire koI drpeKew^i KardXe^ov, 
Et irov en ^coovTO'i aKovere 7raiB6<i e/xolo, 
' H TTOV €v 'Op-)(Ofiev(p )) ev TlvXto rjfiadoevrt 
'H TTOV Trap Mei^eXaro evl ^Trdprr} evpeir)' 
Ov ydp TTW redvrjKev e-rrl Xdovl Blof; 'Opecrri;?.' 

^ "' n? ejiar, avrap iydo fiLV dfiei^ni.i€vo<; Trpoa-eeiirov' 
' 'ArpelBr], rt fie ravra Bielpeai ; ovbe n 618a, 
Zcoei oy rf redprjKe' kukov 8' dvep,(oXia /Sd^eiv.'' 

" Nwt fiev W9 eireeaaLv ofxei/3o/j,ev(o cnvyepo2<nv 
"Earaixev d^xyvp^evoi, daXepov Kara BuKpv %eovT69' 
H\^e 8* eirl -^v-^^rj YlrjXr^ldBp.')'' ^A')^iXrjo<i 
Kat UarpoKXijo^ Kal dphvp^ovos ^AvriKoyoto 
AiavTOfi tf , 09 apiaro'i erjv fciOo9 re 8efia<} re 
ISiv dXXwv Aava&p /a6t' dp,vficva UrjXeiQiva. 
"Eyvco 6e 'fvxn /^e iroBcoKeo^ AcaKiBao, 
Kal p oXocpvpofMev)) eirea irrepuevTa Trpoa-TjvSa. 

Homer, Odyssey, B. XI., vv. 447-472. 






1. Kariaxefievai. Account for the use of the infinitive as 
an imperative. 

2. Triard. What d'-tlnction in meaning between verbals 
in T09 and Teo-i ? 

3. el TTov aKovere. Give the force of ttov, and its 

Latin equivalent. 

4. 'Opxo/Mev(Z, IIvXm. Write notes upon these words. 

5. Avrdp. What otlicr form docs Homer use ? 

6. AiavTo<;. What two persons of this name in Homer? 

7. Tcov aWcov Aavacbv. Notice any peculiarity. Quote 
English parallels. 

8. Give the derivations of v^7rto<;, a,KoiTi,<;, dva^avBd, 
drpeKeca, tJixaOcevri,, d/xvfMcov, vroSw/ceu?. 

9. Parse o^erai, vto<;, irc^ve, TedvrjKe, eara/Mev, ejvm, 
TTTepoevTa. 

II. 

1. Explain the terms Biao-Kevaarai, x^copi^ovTS';, and 
o^eXi^eiv. 

2. Who is said to have collected the Homeric poems ? 

3. What is meant by saying that the Homeric form of a 
word is dialectic for the ordinary form ? 

4. What is the Digamma ? Who finst discovered its use 
in the explanation of the Homeric metre ? Give instances 
of its occurrence in the middle of a word. 

5. What reasons are there for believing Homer to have 
been an Asiatic Greek ? 



III. 



Translate : 



Ta fiev Sr) rore TrpaxOe^^Ta ovk dv a\Xw? c^oi' vvv ^ 
eripov iroke^ov Katpo^ yKet ri^, 81 ov koI 'mpl tovtcov 
€fX}n]ad7]v, iva ^r/ ravT'\ 'rr'WrjTe. ri SJ) XPV'^'^I^^^^, ^> 
dvBpe^ ^Adrivaloi, tovtm ; el ydp /x?} f-^o'tjO/jGere ttuvtI 
crdevet Kara to hvvarov, Oeo.oacrOe ov rpoTrov vfieh earpa- 
rTjyrjKora iruvja eaeaOe v-rrep <i>i\L7r7rov. virijpxov 
^GXvvdioi BvvafJLiv rtva KeKTrjfxepoc, koX 8ie/cei6' ovtco to. 
Trpdy/JbaTa' ovre ^I'tAtTTTro? iOdppet rovTovi ov9' oiiToi 



iiv'-i 



^CXiTTTTOv.^ eTrpd^afzev r)fieh KUKetvoi irpo^ r)fia^ €ipi]vr}v. 
WrcvTO coa-rrep ifnr68iapLdTi rrp ^tXiWw Kai ^vayeph 
TToXiv fxcyd\7)u €(f)opfielv rot? iavrou Kaipol^ ScriWay'- 
fievTjv 7r/309 77/itt9. €/ciro\€fii](7at 8uv fpofieOa roix} dvOpd}. 
TTov^ iK Travrb^ rpoirov koX S iravre^ hdpvXovv riay^ 
TOVTO ireTrpaKTat vvvl OTrcDaSi^Trore. ri o^u VTroXoi-rrov, & 
avbpe^ Mvvaioc, ttXtjv ^o'qdelv ippcofiivco^ Kal 7rpo0t)ua)<;; 
67C0 fxev ov^ \opS>' x<opk yhp tt}? irepiardar}^ hv ^lam 
atc7^W779 ei KaOvcf^elfieed re rcov irpayfidrcop, ovSk rbv 
(Pol^ov, CO avZpe^ AOr^valoi, fiLKpov 6pcb rov rtov uerd 
ravra, ^xovr^v fikv 0,9 eVouo-t @rj/3alcov 7)fxip, d7reipr,K6rcop 
d€^ Xpr]fiaai fPwKecov, firjBepo^ S' ifiirohwv ovro^ ^Lkiiriroi 
ra irapovra KajaarpefafMeva, 7r/>09 ravra iiriKXivai r^ 
'Trpajfiara. 

Olynthiac, III. 

1. Xprjcro/xeea rourtp. Supply the ellipsis. 

2. eddppet. What is the difference in meaning between 
tfappetv riva and Uappetv rivt ? 

3. KdKelvoi. When is the iota subscribed where Ka\ is 
thus united with another word ? 

4. Kal hvaxepk. Explain the construction. 

5. icpop/xelv. Give the full force. 

6. €0pv\ovv, What other form of this word ? 

7. Kaducpeifxeda. Parse. 

8. eTTiK^ivai. What is understood ? 

9. T»]9 7repL(7rd(Tv^ Up. How is dp used with a participle ? 

rv. 

r/•^,?f•''^i^^!^^ geographical position of Olynthus. How 
did Philip finally succeed in capturing it ? 

rev'eniJI?''* ^^^° '^^ princii.4l sources of the Athenian 

3. What is meant by the trierarchy ? 

4. Who was the real founder of the Athenian democracy? 



1 "« 



r-f ,i 





?•.:; A 



Translat 

omt 
vasi 
atqi 
est, 
sev( 
si t( 
jura 
exic 
pen 
dub 
."aci 
rogj 
con£ 



1. Dig 

parietes, 

2. Qu 

What? 

3. Gi\ 



Winii^tvuitS! of Toronto* 






ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



LATIN. 



Examiners .'i^^""' "^Tt^^'^.V^' ^^•^• 
\ Thomas Moss, M.A. 



=ii 



I. 

Translate : 

Templa Deorum imraortaliura, tecta urbis, vitam 
omnium civium, Italiam deniquo totam, ad exitium et 
vastitatem vocas. Quarc, quoniam id, quod primum, 
atque hujus imperii disciplinccque raajorum proprium 
est, facere nondum audeo; faciam id, quod est ad 
severitatem lenius, ad communem salutem utilius. Nam 
si te interfici jussero, residebit in republica reliqua con- 
juratorum manus : sin tu (quod te jumdudum hortor) 
exieris, exhaurietur ex urbe tuorum comitum magna et 
perniciosa sentina reipublica). Quid est, Catilina ? num 
dubitaa id, me imperante, facere, quod jam tua sponte 
.aciebas ? Exire ex urbe consul hostem jubet. Inter- 
rogas me, num in exilium ? non jubeo ; sed, si me 
consulis, suadeo. 

Cicero, in Oatilinam^ I., 5. 

1. Distinguish templwm and delulrum, muri, mania and 
parietes, exilium and relegatio. 



2. Quod primum. What is meant? Wi 



What? 








3. Give list of verbs governing two datives. 






Mj.: 



■ 


IP 


t:' 


hF 




i'>i 


1 


' *'' 


' -hI 






■1 


rf. .'- 


>* ;"i 


? 


''.'• 




i 


1 ij'i 


^ 




bE-^"' 


,s ^ 




Ik 


ii4r 


r . 




II. 

Translate : 

Ergo illi alienum, quia poeta fuit, post mortem etiam 
expetunt : nos bunc vivum, qui et voluntate et legibus 
noster est, rcpudiabimus ? prcesertim cum omne olim 
studiiinj, atqne omne ingenium contulerit Arcbias ad 
populi Romani gloriam Laudemque celcbrandam ? Nam 
et Cimbricas res adolescens attigit, et ipsi illi C. Mario, 
qui durior ad bscc studia videbatur, jucundus fuit. 
Neque eiiim quisquam est tarn aversus a Musis, qui 
non mandari versibus ccternum suorum laborum facile 
prteconium patiatur. Themistoclem ilium, summum 
Athenis virum, dixisse aiunt, cum ex eo qusereretur, 
quod acroama, aut cujus vocem libentissime audiret, 
ejus, a quo sua virtus optime prsedicaretur. 

Cicero, pro ArcJua, 0, 

1. On wbat grounds was tbe citizensbip of Archias im- 
pugned, and on Avbat defended ? 

2. Write brief notices of C. Marius and Themistocles, 
introducing dates wbcre you can. 

3. Give tbo otlicr degrees of comparison of facile and 
libentissime. 



III. 



Translate : 



Diversce voluntatos civium fucrunt, distractrequo sen- 
tential Non enim consiliis solum et studiis, sed armis 
etiam et castris dissidebamns. Erat auiem obscuritas 
quredam, erat certamcn inter clarissimos duces : multi 
dubitabant, quid optimum esset ; multi, quid sibi expe- 
diret ; multi, quid dcccret : nonnulli etiam, quid liceret. 
Perfuncta respubiica est hoc misero ffttalique bello : 
vicit is, qui non fortuna inflammarct odium suum, sed 
bonitato leniret; ncc qui omncs, quibus iratus esset, 
eosdem etiam exilio aut morte dignos judicaret. Arma 
ab aliis posita, ab aliis crcpta sunt. Ingratus est, 
injustusque civis, qui armorum periculo libcratus, ani- 
mum tamen rotinet armatum ; ut etiam illo sit melior, 
qui in acie cecidit, qui in causa animum profudit. Quaj 
enim pertinacia quibusdam, eadein aliis constantia videri 
poteiSt. 

Cicero, pro MarcellOf 10. 



1. What classes of verbs govern the ablative ? 

2. Inflammaret. Why in subjunQtive ? 

3. Give examples of nouns used only in the plural. 

4. What other extant spoccli ^vas delivered by Cicero in 
the same year with that for Mavcellus ? 

Translate : 

Septimi, Gades aditure mecum ot 
Cantabrum indoctum juga ferrc nostra et 
liarbaras Syrtes, ubi Maura semper 

iEstuat unda ; 
Tibur Argeo positum colono 
Sit mcae sedes utinam sencctce, 
Sit modus lasso maris et viarum 

Militiaeque ! 
Undo si Parcse prohibent iniqujc, 
Bulce pellitis ovibus Gala33i 
Flumen ct regnata petam Laconi 

Rura Phalanto. 

Horace, Odes, II., 6. 

1. Give scales of the metres. 

2. What is the construction o? maris and of ovibus P 

3. Write explanatory notes on Omitabrum to nostra, Tibur 
to colono, and regnata to Phalanto. ^, -tibur 

V. 

Translate : * ' 

Delicta majorum immeritus lues, 
Romane, donee templa refeccria' 
iEdesque lobcntcs Deorum ct 
Focda nigio simulacra fumo. 
J) IS te minorcm quod gcris, imporas : 
ILnc omne principium, hue refer exitum. 
Di muUa /lo^lecti dedorunt 
Hesperip;^ mala luctuos!>3. 
Jam bis iij. ureses et Pacori manus 
Non auspicates contudit impeius 
Nostros et adjecisse precdam 
■* •-•i-^v.iuuo caI^uis iuniuet. 

Horace, Odes, III,, 6. 





If*! 







>i- 



I** 



ril 



1. Give scales of the metres, 

2. Write explanatory notes on Jam bis to nostroSy and 
Torquibus exiguis. 

3. Give scales of the Epichoriambics found in the odes. 

VI. 

Translate : 

Ne forte credas interitura quse 
Longe sonantera natus ad Aufidum 
Non ante vulgatas per artes 
Verba loquor socianda chordis : 
Non, si priores Mseonius tenet 
Sedes Honierus, Pindaricse latent 
Ceseque ot Alca3i minaces 

Stesichorique graves Camense. 

Horace, Gdes, IV., 9. 

1. Explain natus ad Aufidum^ Mceonius^ and Cese. 

2. What were the birth-places of Pindar^ Alaseus^ and 
Stesichorus ? 

3. Give examples of Grcecisras used by Horace. 

4. What were the circumstances of Horace's introduction 
to Msecenas ? and what the probable date ? 



i. S- i 1' ■. 1 



mnmtms ot jKototuo. 



J •'nr * 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4. 



SECOND YEAR. 



GREEK. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



^xami7iers : J ^^'^' ^0"^ MgCaul, LL.D 
1 Thomas Moss. M a 



Moss, M.A. 






*.'.«^ 

.'>■; 



n 



Translate: 

ypd^f^ara; ""Ap^^^.o'" cbX^Pu'ffA ^4^'' ^^ 

-^ ^^ S.^o.a rco. rare 'AZ^^XTara?! ' " ^^ 




<pn 



I- 










:» ^V' 




/eii ryevo^!, Kol arlfiov;. rovro 8' ea-rlv ov)( r)v ovrwai Ti? 
Siv <j>i](Tec€V uTifMiav rl yap tgj ZeKelrr}, rcou ^Adrjvaicou 
Koivoiv el fj,r] fieOe^CLV efieXkev ; a\X' ov tovto \eyei, aXX! 
iv Tot? (jjoviKoli; yiypairrai vofioL'i, virep wv av fxr) ciSo) 
^ovov BiKaaaadaL, dXV evayk y to diroKTeluai,, " ml 
drLfjLo^" (fiTj^rl " redvarco." tovto 8)) \iyei, KaOapov tov 
rovToyv tlvcl airoKTeivavTa ehac oukovv evo/xi^ov gkuvol 
rr}? TrdvTcov TOiv '¥Jk\i]V(ov a(OTripia<i avToU iTnfieXrjTeov 
elvat. ov yap av avToh e/xeXev el rt? iv Ile\o7rovvi](r(p 
Tiva<i wveiTaL Ka\ BiacjideipeL, yu,?; touO' vTroXa/x^dvovcnv' 
CKoXa^ov S' ovTco Kol eTificopovvTO oi)? aicrOoLVTO wo-re /cat 
a-Tr]\LTa<; TTOceiV' 

Phillipic, III. 

1. Brjirov. Give the full force and Latin equivalent. 

2. Translate : (nrovBd^etv 7rpo<? riva and cnrovBd^eLv nrepi 
Tiva. 

o. ZeXeiTTj?. Where was Zelea ? 

4. uTifio^;. How many kinds of aTi/jLia at Athens ? 
Mention the consequences of cuch kind. What is meant by 
KaOdira^ aTifioq ? 

5. Ue\oir6vvT](Tov. Name the principal states of the 
Peloponnesus in the time of Demosthenes. 

6. "Apdfito^ UvOcouaKTo^. What is the ordinary idiom ? 

7. XP^^^°^- ^^'^^ ^ ^'^^ ^^ ^^^^ principal terminations of 
diminutives. What is the rule for the accentuation of 
diminutives in lov ? 

8. i^ovLKoh vo/xoi^. What was necessary to entitle a per- 
son who had committed involuntary homicide to a restitution 
of his civil rights ? 

9. Explain and illustrate the most common usages of 
the middle voice. 

10. Under what circumstances was the third Philippic 
pronounced ? What extant speech does it follow chrono- 
logically ? 

11. Give the geographical positions of 'Eeppecov, ^opicTKo^^ 
'Upov opo^, 'Afx^paKia, UopOfio^, and Nrti-VaxTo? ; and men- 
tion important historical events connected with any of them. 



^«jM 



Translate 



II. 



XO. (O'TToXv^eiuo^ KoX iX€vd6po<i dvdpb^ dei ttot oIko^. 

ere rot koX 6 WvOio^i r ".{,pa'; 'A-rrokXcov 

i^^iwae vaietv, 

erXa Be aolat fM7]\ov6/jLa<i 

iv S6fJioi<i 'yeveadai, 

ho)(^fiiav Sea kXctvcov 

^oaK^/iiaai a-oicrt avpi^eop 

7roifiviTa<i vpLevaiovi. 

aiiv 8'^ eiToip.aivovro xapa fie\e(Ov /3aXiai re \vyK€<: 

e/3a 8e Xiirova "Odpvo<i vdirav XeovTcov 

a Ba(f)oivo^ tXa' 

Xopevae S' uficf}! aav Ktddpav, 

^ol/Se, rrroiKiXodpt^ 

ve^po^ v-yfriKOfifov irepav 

^alvova iXarav acfivpo) Kovcjifo, 

Xai'povcr' €V(f}povi /xoXira. 

Totyap 7roXvfj,r)XoTdrav 

eanav ocKel irapd KaXXlvaov 
I Boi^iav XljjLvav dporot'^ Be yvau 

/cal ireBiwv BaireBoi^i opov dfi(})l fiev deXiov Kvecjialav 

iTTTToaTaaiv aWepa rdv MoXoaaajv riderai 

irovTiov S' Acyaicov' irr' dKrdv 

d\ip,€vov n.r)Xiov Kparvvet. 

Kttt vvv Bofxov dixirerdaa^ 
Bipro ^elvov vorepm ^Xecfjuprp, 

Ta9 ^tXa? KXatcov dX6-)(ov veKvv ev 

Bcoixaatv dprtdavyr To 7^^ evyevh eK^f^eperac 'jrph, alBcv. 

ev TOL<i^ayaUoi(TL6eiTavr evea-rw (xo({)ia<i. 

TT/Jof S' ifia yp-vxa ddpao^ yarac 

deoa-e^rj ^cora KeBvd irpd^eiv. 

Euripides', Akestis, vv. 5G8-G05. 

1. TToXyfetm Kal iXe{,eepo^. On wl.at principle do 
these adjectives agree with oIko^ instead of dvBp6^ ? 

2. xopevae. When do the tragedians allow the omission 
or the augment : 

3. irepav. Distinguish between irepav and irepa. 

4. aWepa. What peculiarity in the gender of this word ? 

f). Derive ^Xov^^ia, -rroifxvira^^ ^dXm. 7rocKiX60pc^, 
froKv/MTjXo'i, aXip^evov, uktciv, KeSv6<i' 




* I i 




i 

"1 



MR. '•^m 


HBP 


pt^-- •-? ' 


nHN^HR9HH 






h^^Jk 




ppi§l 


I^^^^^^He 


' .1 


t^^^K^ 


1 


I^^^^^^Hh 




^I^K' 


" ^ 


^'' gi 


tn 



-m 



\ -f 



! ■ ■:• 



I'- 



vi 



(->, 



m 



I \ 



I 



■ ■•■ »8 




6. Parse Bo^^fitaVf /MeXicoVj a/jLTrerdaa^f Be^eroj '^a-rat. 

7. Accentuate tlip following words according to their 
different significations : oposr, </)ft)9, dWa, oIkoi,, k€i Jt, f^vv. 

8. Scan and give the metrical names of the fit six 
lines of the extract. 

III. 

Translate and give different readings of: 

(a) ov fjirjv e'joeif 76 fi w? aTCfid^oiv to 

yijpwi 6aveu' irpov^coKd ct', ocxTt? alB6(fipo)v 
TTpof a rjif fidXta-Ta, kuvtI tmuBb fioi ■)(dpiv 
roidvhe koX cv ■)(r) rexova ijWa^drrjv. 

(h) XO* 670) fiev oi/K e^ifi &i> ev Xiyeiv Tvyqv' 
')(pV B\ ocTTi^ eta-i, Kaprepdv 6eov Soaiv. 
HP. el fydp roaaurrju hvvajXLV el-)(ov coaTe ai]v 
e? (pco'i TTopevaai vepTepcov ex Bco/xdrcov 
ryvvatKa^ Kol aoi rrjvBe Tropcrvvai %a/3ty. * 

IV. 

1. Howij t'litj partially comic character of this drama 
accounted for \* 

2. Whai r. 'igious meaning is supposed to be involved 
in this legend ? 

3. What restriction upon the use of the Iambic 
syzygy in choriambics ? 

4. When is a verse called dvaK\cofievo<; ? 

5. Give instances of lonicisms used by the tragedians. 

6. Give a brief biographical sketch of the inventor of 
Greek tragedy. 

7. Mention any extant specimen of a Greek historical 
tragedy. What other is known to have existed ? 

8. Quote instances of the sophistry of Euripides. 



ttnflif tfiifti^ of SToronto* 



At UAL 1 WIINATIONS : 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



vr 



Examiners : 



LATIN. 

HONORS. 



T Rev. John McCa 
\ Thomas Moss, M 



D. 






.v^ 






I. 

Translate : 

Ergo ipsas qnamvis angiisti terminus SBvi 
Excipiat, (neque enim plus septima ducitur sestas), 
At genua immortale manot, multosque per annos 
Stat fortuna domus, ct avi numerantur avorum. 
Praeterea regem non sic iEgyptos et ingens 
Lydia, nee populi Parthorum aut Medus Ilydaspes 
Observant. Roge incoluini mens omnibus una est ; 
Amisso, rupere fidem constructaque mella 
Diripuere ipsoc, et crates solvere favorum. 
Ille operum custos ; ilium admirantur, ct omnes 
Circumstant fremitu dense, stipantque frequentes 
Et ssepe attollunt humeris, et c rpora bello 
Objectant, pulchramque petnnt per vulnera mortem. 

His quidam signis atque oc exempla secuti, 
Esse apibus partem divinac mentis et haustus 
iEtherios dixere : deum namque ire per omnes 
Terrasque tractusque maris coelumque profundura ; 
Hinc pecudes, armenta, viros, genus omne ferarum, 
Quemque sibi tenues nascentera arcessere vitas ; 
Scilicet hue reddi deinde ac resoluta referri 
Omnia ; nee morti esse locum, sed viva volare 
Sideris in numerum atque alto succedere coelo. 

Virgil, Qeorgics, iv., vv. 206-20T. 




* ;. 




IMAGE EVALUATION 
TEST TARGET (MT-3) 




4. 



1.0 


L£|2.8 

1.4 


HmSSSs 




IP 


I.I 


1.25 





— 6" 



V] 



<^ 



/] 









7 




>^ 







(9 



/ 




Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 



23 WEST MAIN STREET 

WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 

(716) 872-4503 







^ 







Irii' 






f w ft 



!;*>■ 



;-^- ■ !«# 



1. When is finaU-* long ? When short? 

2. P/Ms sf^^ewza ^sto5. What is the construction > 

3. Distinguish mdnet and wawef. 

4. Distinguish avi, abavi, atavi, and proavl 

5. 7/i^.ns Zyc^ea. What is the meaning of the epithet ? 

6. 7psa?. What is the force ? 

7. Eis signis. In what case, and why ? 

thiL^Sr'""^"'' ^'- ^^^'' ^^^*^ ^f philosophers held 

II. 

Translate : 

d,vl*!S?''°'' f ^'''!.' "^^ *"'P" '^*' P^<> fortissimo viro 
dicere incipientem, timere; minimeque deceat, cum 
1. Annius ipse magis de reipublic^ salute, quam 
de sua perturbetur, mead ejus%ausam parem aTm^ 
magnitudmem afterre non posse; tamen hL novi iud 
icii nova forma terret oculos ; qui, quocumque inciderint 
veterem consuetudmem fori, et pristinum morem iud ! 
ciorum requirunt. Non enim corona consessus vester 
cinctus est, ut solebat; non usitata frequentia stipati 
sumus. Nam illa prjesidia, qu^ pro templis omnrus 
ta^n Vf .'T^.r^ ^.o^ocata"^ sunt, non affe un 
tamen oratori aliquid; ut in foro etinjudicio, quan- 
quam pr^sidiis salutaribus et necessariis septi slu^ 
tamen ne non timere quidem sine aliquo timore poss ! 
mus. Qu^ SI opposita Miloni putarem, cederem temper 
judices, nee inter tantam vim armorum existimlS' 
oratori locum esse. Sed me recreat et refia cT 
Pompeii, sapientissimi et justissimi viri. consilium: qui 
profecto nee justitiae suae putaret esse, quem reum sen 
tentns judicum tradidisset, eundem teli's militum rdere 
nee sapient!^ temeritatem concitat^ multitudinis auc- 
toritate publica armare. Quamobrem ilia arma cen- 
tariones, cohortes, non periculum nobis, sed pr^es dium 
denunciant: neque solum, ut quieto, sed etiam^irmaZ 
ammo simus, hortantur; neque auxilium mode defen- 
sioni meae verum etiam silentium pollicentur. Reliqua 
vero multitude, quae quidem est civium, tota nostra est- 
neque eorum quisquam, quos undique intuentes ex hoc 
ipso loco cernitis, unde aliaua nara fnr,' o.7a«;«; ^^.._. 



et hujus exitum ju(3icii expectantes, non cum vlrtuti 
M, onis favet, turn de se, de liberis suis, de patria de 
fortums, hodierno die decertari putat. ^ ' 

Cicero, 'pro Milone. 

1. Eeec novijudicii nova forma. What is the meaning ? 

2. Corona consessm. Explain each of these terms. 

3. Tamen to possimus. Give the meaning fully. 

plated'^rt tf:S '' ^'^^ P^^"^^^^ circumstances was he 

5. Quidem. What is the force ? 

6. i)....^.n- What is the effect of de in composition^ 
n. aldefof cfodiuf """"^ ^' *^^ '''' '' ^^^ before the 

8. Discuss the question as to the date of the murder. 

m , III. 

Translate : 

Quando repostum Coecubum ad festas dapes 

Victore iaetus Ccesare ^ 

Tecum sub alta, sic Jovi gratum, domo, 

Beate Mascenas, bibam, 
Sonante mixtum tibiis carmen lyra 
Ilac Dorium, illis barbarum ? ' 
Ut nuper, actus quum freto Neptunius 

JJux funrit ustis Havibus, 
Minatus Urbi vincla, qua) dctr.-^xerat 

teervis amicus perfidis. 
Romanus, eheu, nosteri ncgabitis, 

iliraancipatus ferain^ 
Fert vallum et arma miles et spadonibus 

teervire rugosis potest, 
Interque signa turpe militaria 

Sol adspicit conopiura. 
At hoc fremences, vcrterunt bis mille equos 

balli, canentes CcGsarem, 
liostiliumque navium portu latent 

■^ "PPcs sinistrorsura cita3. 
lo Trinmr)lip tn mor"T"'- -.i,-. 

tarrus et intactas boves ? 



» h 






i.' 




amsimtliiiiiM 



L 



lo Triumphe, neo Jugurthino parem 

Bello reportasti ducem, 
Neque Africanum, cui super Carthaginem 

Virtus sepulchrum condidit. 

Horace, UpodeSj ix. 

1. Give a scale of the Iambic Senarian, as used by Horace 
in the Epodes. 

2. Freto. What ? NeptuniuB dux. Who ? 

3. Feminse. In what case, and why ? 

4. Potest. Give the corresponding Greek term. 

5. Oonopium. What ? Whence derived ? 

6. Hoc. In what case, and why ? 

7. (}aU{. Who ? Describe the position of their country. 

8. Sinistrorsum. What is the meaning ? 



», IZ. 



Horace 



ountry. 



' ni 



_S*_iAi"* 1_ ..*». j , 



Uni\}tvuitu of ^iToronto, 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



TRANSLATION INTO LATIN PROSE AND 

VERSE. 



Examiners • / S^^' "^^"^ McCaul, LL.D. 
•^^^'"*"^'^*' \ Thomas Moss, M. A. 



I. 

I have assisted your commanders with naval forces, so 
that not one of your allies can equal me ; I have furnished 
supplies by land and and by sea; I have been present at all 
the naval I ittles, that have taken place; I have no where 
spared my labour or my risk. I have suffered that which is 
most wretched in war, a siege, having been shut in at Pergamus 
with the utmost danger at once of my life and of my king- 
dom. Afterwards having been freed from the siege, I met 
your consul with my whole fleet at the Hellespont, that I 
might assist him in getting his army over. After your 
army had crossed into Asia, I never departed from the 
consul ; no Roman soldier was more regular in your camp 
than I and my brother. No expedition, no cavalry engage- 
ment took place without me. 

Navalis copia, ut nemo vester socius ego cequiparo 
possum f imperator vester adjuvo; commeatus terra mareque 
sUppedito ; navalis proelium, qui jio, omnis adsum ; nee 
labor meuSf nee periculum usquam parco. Qui miser sum 
in helium^ ohsidio patior, Pergamus includo cum discrimen 
ultra simul vita regnum que. Libera deinde obsidio, totus 
classis ad Sellespontus consul vester occurro, ut is in trajicio 
exercitus adjuvo : postquam in Asia exereitus vester trans- 
gredior^ nunquam a consul abscedo : nemo miles Romanus 
magis assiduus in castra vester sum, quam ego frater que 
meus. Nullus expedition nuUus equestris proelium sine 
egofio. 



II. 

How happy had it been for him to have died in that sick- 
ness, when all Italy was putting up vows and prayers for 
his safety ! or if he had fallen by the chance of war, on the 
plains of Pharsalia, in the defence of his country's liberty, 
he had died still glorious, though unfortunate : but as if he 
had been reserved for an example of the instability of human 
greatness, he who a few. days before commanded kings and 
consuls, and all the noblest of Rome, was sentenced to die 
by a council of slaves ; murdered by a base deserter ; cast 
out naked and headless on the Egyptian strand ; and, when 
the whole earth, as Velleius says, had scarce been sufficient 
for his victories, could not find a spot upon it at last for a 
grave. His body was burnt on the shore by one of his 
freedmen, with the planks of an old fishing-boat; and his 
ashes being conveyed to Rome, were deposited, privately, 
by his wife Cornelia, in a vault of his Alban villa. The 
Egyptians, however, raised a monument to him on the place, 
and adorned it with figures of brass, which being defaced 
afterwards by time, and buried almost in sand and rubbish, 
was sought out and restored by the Emperor Hadrian. 

III. 

The wind, that beats the mountain, blows 

More softly round the open wold, 
And gently comes the world to those 

That are cast in gentler mould. 
And me this knowledge bolder made. 

Or else I had not dared to flow 
In these words toward you, and invade 

Even with a verse your holy woe. 
'Tis strange that those we lean on most. 

Those in whose laps our limbs are nursed, 
Fall into shadow, soonest lost : 

Those we love first are taken first. 
God gives us love. Something to love 

He lends us ; but, when love is grown 
To ripeness, that on which it throve 

Falls off, and love is left alone. 



1 



UWym 

< - '> 5 ••'sSiL 












Unmvuitp of STotonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



STATICS AND DYNAMICS. 



Examiner : Rev. W. Jones, B. A. 






■f 






1. Enunciate the parallelogram of forces, and assuming its 
truth as regards the direction of the resultant, prove it for the 
magnitude of the resultant. 

Also assuming its truth for the magnitude of the resultant 
prove it for the direction of the resultant. 

2. State and prove the triangle of force. 

Two forces act at, a point. Their magnitude and the an»le 
made by one of them with a fixed line being given ; shew tbat^in 
general equilibrium may be maintained by either of two forces 
acting at the point in a direction parallel to the fixed line. 

Point out the exceptional cases. 

3. Enunciate the condition of equilibrium of a rigid body capa- 
ble of turning about a fixed point, when actad on by any forces 
in a plane passing through that point. 

State the different propositions which must be proved in order 
to establish this condition of equilibrium. 

A uniform wire is formed into a triangle ABC, right angled at 
C, and is suspended from C, ^ is the angle which the side AC 

makes with the vertical : shew that tan fl = r • t-^ 

6 6+c. 

4. Shew that every system of heavy particles has one, and only 
one centre of gravity. 

Investigate the position of the centre of gravity of a triangular 
lamina, and shew that it coincides with that of three equal heavy 
particles placed at the angular pointa of the triangle. 



5. When a rigid body ia suspenJed from a fixed point, shew 
thatthe point of suspension and the centre of gravity of the bodv 
must lie in the same vovtical line. o j « uuuy 

A triangle ABC, light angled at C, is suspended successively 

T ft ^""^3 '• 1^' ^ ^t ^^^ .*"«^^« "^^^^ ^y AC, BC respectil.i? 
with the vertical in each position ; shew that cot $. cot = 1 

ated. ^^'"'^® *^® common steelyard, and shew how it is gradu- 

7. Desciibe that system of pullies, in which each hangs bv a 
separate string, the last puUy supporting the weight, ^i^d the 
relation between P and W for this system, (i.) when the wethte 
of^the pulhes are neglected, and (ii.) when\hey are 41^ 

Shew that if the weight of each of the pullies equals P no 
mechanical advantage is gained or lost by the systel ^ ' 

8. Explain how velocity and acceleration are measured 
(1.) when uniform, and (ii.) when variable. "measured 

,- ifi'i /?»rT'''^ ''{.^^'^ °^ *^« «y°»^ol« i° the formula 
» = «« + */^' ? Prove this formula. 'ormma 

9. Two bodies P and Q are connected by an inextensibln .,tr,-r.« 
whjch passes over a smooth fixed pully ; U tL acceS^^^^^^ 
each body, and the tension of the string. acceleration of 

JJ'J'^^y tbe range, time of flight, and the greatest elevation 
of^a particle projected in any direction from a pit in a W^ 

Shew that the tangent of the inclination of the direction of 
motion to the plane at any time = ^^''^^^al velocity^ 
Tf fl , , . , , horizontal velocity. 

fn!l^' ^.u ?^ ^°^^^^ "^^^^^ ^t^ *lie horizon by the tan«Pnf« 
to he path of a projectile at the points P and Q the tLl J ^ 
aonbmg the arc P Q is proportional to (tan ^ I' tl ^^ 

I Jihe-rXlr^^^^^^^^^^ ^^^^*^^ -^^ ^-- vdocities, 

I 4"ai A, moving with the same velocity and in the same 
jdirectioD, each move with a velocity u ; shew that §• =. J±ii 

lutukstlt^^^ obliquely upon a ball B at rest, their 
ffterLpact *^ ^ '' ^^*«^^^«« *^« "Motion of each ball 



! 
«;« 



^ , 



■ 1 , «r »' 



.' ' Aid 






'i >'| 



^ni\^tvuitp of tsotonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



Examiner: Rev. W. Jones B. A. 






y ■ 



VTVPT 



1. Define the locus of an equation. What are the looi of the 
following equations 1 

(i.) {Ax+ByJrCy+{A'x+B'y^Cy=(i 

(ii.) {Ax-irBy^C) {A'x+B'y->rC')=.0 

(iii.) /(|) = (iv.) /(0=0 (V.) /((9)=0. 

2. Shew how to find the equation to a line which passes 
through the intersection of two lines whose equations are given, 
and also through another point. 

Shew that the lines which pass through the origin, and the 

CC 'U »Xj f/ 

intersection of the line l ^ = 1 with the lines H v = 1 

■' * p ah 



a 



and — + — - = 1 will be at right angles to each other, if 
6' 



a 



3. Find an expression for the area of a triangle in terms of the 
polar co-ordinates of its angular points, and deduce the expres- 
sion in terms of the rectangular co-ordinates of its angular points. 

Shew that the area of the triangle made by the three lines 
whose eauations are eriven in Question 2 is 



+ h 



{ 



aa' 



{h-hj 



ah' 



•a I 



+ 



a' 



a {h'-^y aa (/3-&) 



a 



'|3~a6' 



'- + 



ab—aB ) 



4. Obtain the general equation to the circle in the form 

is a fixed point from which any straight line is drawn 
meeting a fixed straight line in P ; in OP a point Q is taken such 
that the rectangle OP. OQ is constant, shew that the locus of Q ia 
a circle, and find its centre and radius. 

5. What is the test by which we determine whether the general 
equation of the second* degree represents a central curve or net 1 
If it represent a central curve and be reduced to the form Ax'-{- 
Bf-\-2Cx7/-{-F=0, shew how it may be further reduced to 
the form Ax^+B>/^+F=0 by a proper choice of axes. 

6. Investigate the equation to the tangent to the ellipse 
-7+ -XT = 1 at the point x'?/\ and express it in the form 

X coso:,-\.i/ sina - v^o*cosV+6^sin^ • 

If two tangents drawn through an external point h, h make with 
the major axis the angles a, «', shew that cot a 4- cot a' = 
'ihk 

~ h'-Ic'. 

7. Shew that the points of the intersection of a tangent to an 
ellipse with the perpendiculars on it from the foci lie on the cir- 
cumferen e of the auxiliary circle. 

Hence obtain a geometrical construction for drawing the tan- 
gents to an ellipse from an external point. 

8. Shew tihat the polar equation to a conic section is 1 = 1 

r 
+ e cos^, and that the polar equation to its tangent at the point 

whose angular co-ordinate is a, is-= co3(^— a) + ccos^. 

r 

9. Define pole and polar. Shew that the polar of a point x^, y^, 
with respect to the ellipse ?! i J^ _ i i« £5a. Vh _ i 

If from any point in a line at right angles to an axis of the 
ellipse a hne be drawn perpendicular to the polar of the point it 
will intersect that axis in a fixed point. ' 

10. Define conjugate diameters and supplemental chords in an 
elhpse, and prove that diameters drawn parallel to a pair of sup- 
plemental chords are conjugate. 

11. Find the equation to a hyperbola when referred to its 
asymptotes as co-ordinate axes. 

What is the general equation to a hyperbola having two given 
straight hnes as asj^mptotes 1 ° 



1 


i 






^i 






t' 


t^#^!^wH||ii 


^- 


- -»•. 


'vV.^^lli 






i^i 


'<. 


'« ', H 




*\ 


■*-^m 





1 . '■■;.A'M 



'•. ■• 11-4 



* n 



. A f'i 




•^.> 




-> rT^^^^^^^^^En^S^^I 




« 


" '^^^H^l 


itOBSL 




'-^^^^H 


■ 


mi 


ij^i^L i "i^ji^^^^^^^^^B^^^^^B 


• *■-■ 


*■ 




V 






, '_" 


! ^ ' 


ftf ^^^^^^^^^HSSJ^lnd^^^^^H 



I!!'*-;: 



2.* 



1. Shew 

proaches, a 
negative or 

Defiui 
those of lo^ 
figure that i 

2. If y = 
Differ 

(i: 

(iii: 

3. Find t 

(i) 

4. Prove 

the conditio] 



I^ni^tvuitp ^t SToronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



SECOND YEAE. 



DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



Examiner: Rev. W. Jones, B A. 



1. Shew that the limiting value to which A -f. 1. )* ap- 
proaches, as a; is increased indefinitely, is the same whan x is 
negative or fractional as when it is a positive integer. 

Define a differential co- efficient. From your definition find 
those of log(aa:), and a^ with respect to x. Also find from a 
figure that of tan 6 with respect to Q. 

2. If y = J\z) and z = <hlx\ find ^L . 

dx 

Differentiate with respect to x 

(i) (tan a;)*''''" ^ , (ii) ^ cosec x, 
(iii) log (versa;), (iv) log 



! 



3. Find the r^ differential co-efficient of 

1 



(i) eP* Bmqx, 



(ii) 



d'+x^ 



4. Prove the formula. ^(^±R = ^!fct:^). st^mc. .Ipn.W 
the conditions tinder which it holds. 






^s 






^ ..r 



' 5. Investigate a method o2 determining tte maximum and 
minimum values of a function ot ^ne variable. 

If a; + 2/ = 2c, shew that x = y makes f{x) X f{y) a 
maximum or a minimum, as fie) X /"(c) is less or greater than 

\fip)Y' 

6. Shew how to find the asymptotes to an algebraic curve 
(i) which are parallel to, (ii) which are not parallel to the axes. 

Find the asymptotes of the curves 

(i) xy {y — xY— ahj = a*, 

{vi) a? — xy" + ay^ = 0, 

7. Define the circle of curvature at any point of a plane curve, 
and prove that if s be the length of the arc measured from a fixed 
point, the angle of deflection of the tangent from its initial 
position at the fixed point, shew that the radius of curvature 

p = T-. Hence deduce the expression for p in rectilinear co-ordi- 
nates. J 

*8. Define the polar subtangent of a curve r =/(0), and shew 

thatitisequaltor''-— . 
dr 

Shew how to find the rectilinear and circular asymptotes of 

a polar curve. 

Find the asymptotes of the curve, - = ^ "^- . 

9. Shew how to find the envelope of a series of curves given 
by the equation y(a;,2/, a) = 0, a being a variable parameter. 
Find the envelope of the lines 

cos o sin ct 



10. ShewthatyJc'*-'! (a+bx^y dx can be immediately integra- 
ted, if — be a positive integer, or -^ -f- -^ be a negative in- 

n q n 

teger. 

11. Investigate the formula for integration by parts, and apply 



— 1 



— 1 



it to integrate the functions tan _. , cc sin x. 

a 



11 Integfate tte following fivictibns : 
1 (ii) 



(i) 



1 



0"> Zi 






-=_i 



ind a formula of reduction for /- — - — „ . 



Find 



a+6 cosx * 
(iv) cos^0. log cos . 
dx 



i' l-L.^ j, 



lit: 



^ntt^tvMtip ot Sotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



NEWTON, SECTIONS L, II., III. 



Examiner: J. B. Cherriman, M.A. 



1. State and prove Lemma 2, Section I. 

If the equal bases be each divided into n equal parts, and 
on these as bases two series of parallelograms be constructed as in 

the Lemma, the difference between these two series will be - of 



n 



that in the Lemma ; how then can each of the four series have 
the same limit 1 

2. Define "similar" curvilinear figures, and prove that similar 
conterminous arcs, which have their chords coincident, have a 
common tangent. 

At corresponding points of two similar curves, the tangents 
are equally inclined to the radius-vectors, and the curvatures are 
proportional. 

3. Obtain Newton's expression for the radius of curvature. 

If a curve pass through the origin, touching the axis of ?/, 
(coordinates rectangular.) the radius of curvature there == 

- Lt : ^ ; or if the curve be referred to polar coordinates, a point 

in the curve being pole and the tangent being initial line, the 
radius of curvature then = - Lt : - . 

2 e 

4. Prove Prop, 1, Section XL 

If impulses be communicated, as in the proposition, along 
parallel and equidistant lines, the timea of the body moving from 



« 



^ '''"■• J 



Jt* 








i 
1 
•Si 






i,»U 


^p:^ 


. -,: .. 


-L..,^^ 





:t1 
* 1 t'wS 



>'< 



•,1 






one line to tke next are the same, 
limit 1 



Wliat cloes tills become in the 



5. If J^Q be an arc of a plane orbit de.v»ribed by a body in 
time T, and QH be the subfense jmrallel to the direction of the 
resultant force at P; then, when FQ iind T are diminished 
indefinitely, 



ForceatP = 2Lt: 



ma ' 



Deduce expressions from which may be found the law of 
force tending to a fixed centre by which a given orbit may be 
described, and the velocity at any point. 

If the whole acceleration at P be resolved into two, one 
along the tangent and the other along the normal, and QR be 
the perpendicular subtense, shew that the latter component ia 

2 Lt : 2? , but the former is not 2 Lt : ^. 

6. A body revolves in the circumference of a circle, to find the 
law of force by which it is attracted to a given point. (Prop. 7.) 

If the centre of force be an external point, what part of the 
circle will bo described ? 

Deduce the law of force when it acts in parallel lines. 

7. A body describes a hyperbola round a centre of force iu 
its geometrical centre, to find the law offeree. (Prop. 10.) 

In all similar hyperbolas described under the same force 
tending to the centre, the times of describing a given angle from 
the apse are the same. 

8. A body revolves in an ellipse or hyperbola, to find the law 
offeree tending to a focus. (Props. 11, 12.) 

A particle at an assigned point, moving in a given direction 
with given velocity about a fixed centre of force which varies as 

I may be describing either of two distinct hyperbolas, 

(Dist)" 

according as the force is attractive or repulsive ; shew that the 

latera recta of these hyperbolas are the same, but the lengtlis of 

the transverse axes are not. 

9. Obtain an expression for the angular velocity at any point 
in a central orbit. 

In an ellipse round the focus, excentricity being -— , the 

v2 

difference between the greatest and least angular velocities h 
eight times the mean angular velocity. 



10. State Kepler's laws o^che planetary motions, and examine 
what inferences can be ft awn therefrom by aid of the propositions 
in these sections. 

How is tJie third law to be extended so as to include the 
cases of parabolic or hyperbolic orbits 1 

Shew how the force of gravity at the earth's surface may be 
compared with the force, tending to the earth's centre, which 
retains the moon in her orbit. 



» * 

■■ if! 



■'". m 




1. : 

n dim 
a 



mnfiierfiiftj? of Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1804. 

SECOND AND THIRD YEARS, AND CANDIDATES 

FOR B.A. 



PROBLEMS. 

HONORS. 



ExaminerB: \ i ^' Cherriman, M.A. 
I Rev. W. Jones, B.A. 



rifs 



I 



1. If yt«) be a rational and integral function of x of less than 
n dimensions, and a, 6, c, .... be w quantities, prove 

M. . 1 ,Mi 1 

a (a — 6)(a~c) . . ."^ 6 ' (b—a) (A— c) . . .+ ' ' ' 

a6c. . . 

2. In a fixed line AB, any point M is taken, and ^ J/ is 

A^'j, ^^ * ^^^^ '^'^^^ ^ ^' tJirough J/ a perpendicular to 
^ ^ IS drawn, and in it a point P is taken such that AP + AN 
IS constant. Shew that the locus of P is a conic. 

3. In a rectangular hyperbola, the length of normal intercepted 
by the axes is bisected by the curve, and is equal to the length 
ot the corresponding tangent intercepted between the asymptotes. 

4. C is the centre of a hyperbola, and C7P, CD are conjugates : 
1 n IS produced to cut the axes, and perpendiculars to them are 
erected at the points of section. Prove that these perpendiculars 
meet the intermediate asymptote in the same point aa the tangent 

5. In a central cojiic, (excentricity e, conjugate axis 2 6,) the 






■'. ->>J 



: n 












i f'r. 



I:, r . 






;■•♦ 



tangent of the angle betwoou the tangent »t a point (ar,y,) and 
the central mdiuB vector, is 

. 1 6' 

the princii)al axes being axes of co-ordinutcH. 

6. If PF be the perpendicuhir dropped from anv jMjint /* of 
an ellipse upon the conjugate CD produced, and another oliipse 
bo constructtd with F m centre, FP m one Hcnii-axis, and the 
other Bemi-axis equal to CD; shew that the two ellipses will cut 
off equal chords from any line drawn parallel to CD. 

7. Pornbolna are described with the same vertex and all touch- 
ing the p;ime straight line ; find the locus of their foci. 

8 Through each of two points of a curve a line is drawn 
equally inclined in the same sense to the tangent there ; shew 
that as one of these lines ajjproaches to coincidence with the 
other, their ultimate intersection is the foot of the per{)endicular 
drop[)ed on the latter from the centre of curvature at the corres- 
ponding point. 

9. Find the value for a; = 0, of -j-j- (x cot a); and shew that 



dx' 



dr 



if the value of -j- (x cot .t) for cr = 0, bo denoted by \j^ u^^ 



then will, for values of n gieater than 1, 

2/1-1-1 , , 
— - — u = u u-{-u u + 

2 2n 2n— 2 2 2«— 4 4 

+ U 

n+1 

1 , 

+ 2^' 



u , (n odd) 



n-l 



(n even). 



10. Two given points A, £, lie outside a circle, (centre C); P 
is a point on the circumference such that the path APB is a 
minimum : shew that CP produced will bisect the angle APR 

1 1 . No parallelogram inscribed in an ellipse can exceed half 
the rectangle under the axes. 

12. Two similar and equal conies are placed with their 
vertices and the direction of their transverse axis coincident, their 
concavities being turned in opposite directions : one remains fixed, 
and the other rolls ufion it ; sh» w how to find the locus of a 
point whose position relative to the rolling curve is fixed. 

If the curves are parabolas, shew that the locus of the 
focus of the rollinc curve is the directrix of the fixed curve j also 
find the locus of the vertex of the rolling < urve. 



iff!" -Vf 



13. Show how the ^mac^mj, r.=3 2a cos 0—a, in generated by 
taking points upon conterminous chordH of a circle, and explain 
tjie reason tor its name. 

Tract .ae curve completely, and shew that the area between 
the Circle and outer branch of the curve exceedei that between 
the circle and the inner branch by the area of the circle. 

14. Two forces acting at a fixed point are represented by 
chorda of a given ellipse, drawn i);irallel to pairs of conjugate 
diameters ; show that their resultant is constant in magnitude 
aud direction. 

15. A lino moves so as a' "ays to form wi*h two fixed straight 
lines a triangle of c< tstant rea ; shew t'lat the locus of the 
centre of gravity of tht .>u)gi>' is hyperl a. 

16. From a pouit in • her ol two confocal ellipses a perfectly 
elastic ball is pro/'cted ih a dir' otion which would pass through 
one of the foci, and after imi>ingi ' {2n — 1) times on the ellipses 
returns to the point of pr^ nction ; shew that the length of its 
path is n times the differei f the major-axes of the ellipses. 

17. Parabolas in the ^ 
particles projected from tht 
but in different directions 
tangent to one of the para 
through the point where thu 
that the locus of P is a circle. 



vertical plane are described by 

ame point with the same velocity 

P k & point in which the initial 

IS meets a vertical which passes 

arabola meets a fixed line ; shew 



18. If S, R, be two centre, f force round which the same 
orbit can be described se[)aratei by a body in the same periodic 
tine, and SB meet the tangent u P in T; the duplicate ratio of 
the forces at i' in the two cases is 

RT*RP: -^.'SP, 



i . 



*--*..v 



I. 

«• 




H*M 



r. 



■ 1 




1 


1 






If'' ^ 


II 


• * 





SUmtietrttiti? of SToronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864 



FACULTY OP LAW, FIRST YEAR. 
FACULTY OF ARTS, SECOND YEAR. 






ENGLISH. 



-i&^ar.r../«:/?-W^i«ON,LL.D. 
\ J. A. Boyd, M.A. 



%*Answer8 to all the questions are not indispensable; hut 
FULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over- 
taken within the time. 

L He was the bravest that Home sent forth. 
He was the first that came. 

There is an elliptical form hero, involving ambiguity • 
define all possible meanings, and re-construct the 
sentences so as clearly to express each. 

(a.) " I was never yet once, and commend their resolu- 
tions who never marry twice." 

Religio Medici. 

{b.) "If it were done when 'tis done, then 'twere well 
It were done quickly." 

Macbeth. 

(<?.) " 0, it is monstrous ! monstrous ! 

Methought, the billows spoke, and told me of it ; 
The wmds did sing it to me : and the thnndpi- 
That deep and dreadful organ-pipe, pronounced 
Ihe name of Prospero." 



Ti 



'e; 



npest. 






*t-H;fei 







:... "M 









i '« 






(d.) " After the most straightest sect of our religion, I 
lived a Pharisee." 

St. Paul. 

(e.) " It was prettily devised of -^sop : The fly sate on 
the axle-tree of the chariot wheel, and said : What a dust do 
I raise ! So are there some vain persons, that, whatsoever 
goeth alone, or moveth upon greater means, if they have 
never so little hand in it, they think it is they that carry it." 

Bacon. 






:J 



(/) " 0, pardon me, though piece of bleeding earth, 
That I am meek and gentle with these butchers ! 
Thou art the ruins of the noblest man 
That ever lived in the tide of times. 
Woe to the hand that shed this costly blood ! 
Over thy wounds now do I prophecy, 
Which like dumb mouths, do ope their ruby lips, 
To beg the voice and utterance of my tongue." 

Julius Ccesar. 

{g.) " Not on thy sole, but on thy soul, harsh Jew, 
Thou mak'st thy knife keen." 

Merchant of Venice. 

2. What syntactical peculiarities in «, d, and e ? Is the 
structure in accordance with modern usage ? 

3. Point out and define all the rhetorical figures used in 
the above sentences. 

4. Name the author of the '' Uuphues;' and state what 
influence it exercised on English literature. 

6. Name the works of Sir Phillip Sydney, and describe 
their peculiar characteristics. 

6. Seeing that the Faerie Queen and the Paradise Loit 
are both Epics, define the significance of the term, and point 
out wherein the essential differences between the two 
consist. 

7. To what class of works do the ^'■Shepherd's Calendar,"^ 
the ''Mape of Lucrece;' ''The Tempest;' ''Lycidas, 



^^Qomus" and the ^^Ahsolom and AchitopJietj*' belong? 
Give reasons for the classification, and name the author of 
each. 

8. Composition. — " Bacon's Advancement of Learning^ 
and his Novum Organum^ have more in them of the spirit 
of poetry than of science ; and we should almost as soon 
think of fathering modern physical science upon Paradise 
Lost as upon them." 

Craih. 

Maintain^ or refute this, concisely ; writing with care, as 
a specimen of correct composition. 



f JH 


■Hi 


^MVn 


'T'^fHwi 




':'^l 








^r'isM 




'Jl 



'':h ^^,i 



8 




is 


-P^^^H 




' 9 


• 


^ *^^^l 
"'-^^1 












'fl 




if]^^ 


.,;,. . ,;'^ 


< t . #^ >^^| 








h^'-3j1 


1 




gH^il 


ffill 



j. .'W 



3'3f'' •J.'i 



» 



^ ■■<■ 







s.. ,.••* 





Cttsaawuu^Eii. JT*bi%jn 



jiH 



It i ' 



Unititv^ittjf of tElotontn. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



HISTORY, 



Examiners • i ^' Wilson, LL.D. 










*^* Answers to all the questions are not indispensable ; hut 
FULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over- 
taken within the time. 

I. Outlines of Mediaeval History. 

(1.) What events mark the beginning and the close of 
Mediaeval History ? Apportion and characterize the periods 
into which it may be divided. 

(2.) What causes contributed to the extinction of feudal- 
ism ? Explain generally how it was that thereafter a free 
constitution was established in England, but absolute 
monarchies arose on the continent. 

(3.) Describe the character and historical importance of 
Gregory VII. 

(4.) Sketch the establishment and progress of the Swiss 
confederacy, and the manner in which it maintained its 
independence. 

(5.) Sketch the history of the Hanseatic League. 

II. British History, from Henry VIII. to the Revolution. 

(1.) Contrast briefly the Reformation in England and 
Scotland, as regards its introduction, progress, and results. 






(2.) State the circumstances which led to the downfall of 
the Earl of Essex, in Elizabeth's reign. 

(3.) "When Elizabeth came to the throne," says Lingard, 
"England ranked only among the secondary kingdoms; 
before her death it had risen to a level with the first nations 
of Europe." Detail the chief causes whereby this was 
effected. 

(4.) What differences of opinion existed as to Elizabeth's 
successor, and what considerations ultimately prevailed ? 

(5.) When and by whom was the " Declaration of Rights " 
drawn up and confirmed? What are its most important 
provisions? 



:: T'-n i r/i-.i v<: 






k 



'• I » 'f 







. * 'in 
11 






■"'■'•-■ ^ ''^ 




• an 



t "i«S- * 



fc-f : 






-vf'» ?' 



Winii)tvniti!! of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



FIKST YEAE. (In Law.) 



HISTORY. 



Examiners • / ^' Wilson, LL.D. 
■^^'^^^"''^^•tj. A. BoYD,M.A. 



' . f« 



"^^^ Answers to all the questions are not indispensable ; hut 
FULL ANSWERS are required to to as many as can he over- 
taken within the time. 

I. British history, Charles I. to William III. 

(1.) Trace the descent of Charles I. from the house of 
Tudor. 

(2.) When and by whom was the Declaration of Rights 
drawn up and confirmed? What are its most important 
provisions ? 

(3.) What great constitutional principle was settled by 
raising William III. to the throne? Give some account of 
the parliamentary discussions which preceded this event. 

(4.) What do you understand by the " Act of Settlement "? 
Set forth its most important enactments. 

II. Salic law and Feudal system. 

(1.) What contributed to the extinction of feudalism? 
Explain how it was that thereafter a free constitution ws 
established iu England, but absolute monarchies arose on 
the continent. 



(2) Whit was the c lef object of the Salic Law ? Why 
so called ? In what manner was its observance established 
as a constitutional principle in Franco ? 

(3.) In what respects did feudalism, as it obtained in 
England, differ from continental feudalism? State the 
causes of this difference. 

(4.) Give some account of the feudal incidents of escheats, 
aids, and wardship. 






Vf' I 



•M 



« . * 'i'. 



i'.'^mir A 



USBit? 



^^ >M 




-iil 





11 

1^ 







Wini\^tvnitt}! of Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



ENGLISH. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



[t5Sf- '•* ' 



IT . > D. Wilson, LL.D. 
Jbxavuners : j j^ j^ ^^^^^ ^^ j^ 



■«5:, 



" Merchajit of Venice ;" Etymology a?id Synonyms. 

(1.) Set forth the peculiarities of structure in this play, 
and give the sources ^herefrom the plot was dra^vn. 

(2.) Describe and contrast the characters of Antonio 
and Shylock, of Portia and Jessica. 

(3.) Cite passages which refer or allude to circumstances 
of English history contemporaneous with the date 
of the play. 

(4.) Give the origin and meaning of the following 



(( 



(5.) 



OS- 



words: "vailing," '' eanlings," " sonties, 
tent," "peize," "tranect," "patines." 

" Lor. The moon shines bright. — In such a night 

as this, 
When the sweet wind did gently kiss the trees, 
And they did make no noise ; in such a night, 
Troilus, methinks, mounted the Trojan walls. 
And sighed his soul toward the Grecian tents, 
Where Cressid lay that night. 

Jes. In such a night 

Did Thisbe fearfully o'crtrip the dew ; 
And saw the lion's shadow ere himself, 
And ran dismayed away, 



r 



Lor. In such a night, 

Stood Dido, with a willow in her hand. 
Upon the wild sea-banks, and waved her love 
To come again to Carthago. 

Jes. In such a niglit 

Medea gathered the enchanted herbs 
That did renew old iEson." 

(a.) Point out all the figures (syntactical and 
rhetorical) in the foregoing passage. 

(6.) From what sources did Shakspeare draw his 
classical references therein ? Mention the vari- 
ations made by Shakspeare upon his originals. 

{c.) G ive an epitome of the classic stories referred to. 

{d.) Give groups of synonyms for the italicised 
words, distinguishing between the shades of 
meaning of the words in each group. 

(6.) Give the derivations of, and where applicable, the 
transmutations of meaning in the following words: 
"JoMw/cer," '^anon," '^ renowned suitors," '' r)<^- 
gan," ''usance," ''bankrupt," " Jcnave," " un- 
bated" "rnoiety," " shreivd" and " gossip " 

(7.) Parse the following phrases : — 
''He falls straight a capering." 
" I do know a many fools." 
" I scant this breathing courtesy." 



■•ill 



••■ ' 'c 



.; i'f in-jl; iliai 



■ T. -, » ' 



fit 

/I 






^ , 



-5', 



i 







^ 



iM' 




\i *•* 



■ 




1 


ffcV 



Uni\}tvniW of STotonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18G4. 



SECOND YEAR. 



HISTORY. 



HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



ET . ID. Wilson, LL.D. 
^xa7mner8:jjj^^ Boyi, M.A. 



*i^.* Answers to all the questions are not indispensable ; hut 
FULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over- 
taken within the time. 

1. Define the territorial sovereignty of Charles V., and 
the basis of his claims in each case ; and compare the 
political sub-divisions of Europe at his abdication, with those 
at the death of Louis XIV. 

2. Taylor says: 'Two monarchs contemporary with 
Charles V. were almost equally bound by their interests 
to check the preponderance of the house of Austria." 
Name them ; define the obligations of interest in each case ; 
and show how far each accomplished the object. 

3. The results of the battle of Pavia are said to have 
" made Charles V. master of Italy, and arbiter of Europe." 
Show the grounds of this statement ; and the causes which 
deprived the emperor of any substantial advantages from it. 

4. Trace the causes which led the Guise party of France, 
and the Catholic party of England, to favour Mary Stuart's 



"''-tim'm^ 






;j» T 



claims to the English throne ; and define, and account for 
the policy of Philip IT. and Catherine do Medici in reference 

to this. 

5. State the parties in the struggle, and the principles 
involved, which were settled by the peace of Westphalia. 

6. Construct a genealogical tree, showing the descent of 
George I. from Ilonry VII. ; and point out every interme- 
diate departure from the regular succession to the English 
throne, with the causes. 

7. Trace t? . means by which Prussia was raised to the 
rank of a monarchy ; and define its acquisitions of territory 
under Frederick the Great. 

8. Compare in detail the influential relations of England 
to continental powers, under Cromwell, Charles 11. and 
William III. 

9. Specify the parties and the terms of agreement of the 
Peace of Ryswick, and of Utrecht ; and trace the influence 
of each on subsequent European history. 

10. Trace the causes, and results, of the rivalry of Peter 
the Great and Charles XII. of Sweden. 






'. J 



» 5 Jl'S 






•i 



"1 





61,^.14 



1 


i ■ 


V^ 31 


i[ 


lHll 


■ 




'-' <■ t 1, S'l. ) 



ar;i 



■im 



.¥ 



, ^-i 



'#*» 






••'11 



*» i 






■•i^ '-Vi.,- , 7< 



«M6i<»nir«.i^ Brail iSiIarfci'iaiia 









ml 



i* ;* i„ * 



' M 


II 






limi 


1, ,•: ...; - . '% 


pHhir 


1 


w\ 





li 1' . .f '. 



Vt , 




<!Knfber0ftj^ of SToronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1804. 



FIRST YEAH (LAW.) 



HISTORY. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



^xamtner8'i^' Wilson, LL.D. 
^*'*'"*"^'^*-tJ. A. Boyd, M. A. 



*^*An8iver8 to all the questions are not indispensable; hut 
FULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can be over- 
taken within the time. 

1. What three kingdoms became predominant in the 
Saxon Heptarcliy prior to the fusion of the whole into one 
kingdom ? 

2. Hallam says : " It was the glory of Alfred to rescue 
the Anglo-Saxon monarchy, yet he never subdued the Dane?. 
nor became master of the whole kingdom." Explain aii 
that is implied in those statements. 

3. Explain the rank and privileges of Thanes and 
Ceorls, and the nature of the Witenagemot. 

4. What was the law of frank-pledge, and what succes- 
sive stages did it pass through ? 

5. What public burdens affected the tenure of the free- 
hold lands of England prior to the conquest; and T\rhat 



Tenures? 






by the introduction of Feudal 



Iff ' » 



0. Give the history, and deHno the object and character 
of the Domesday Book. What is the object and meaninjr of 
its name? * 

7. ITallam says of the accession of William of Normandy 
to the English throne, " The state of the country induced 
'Jlf'^'^i not j"«tify, the mcusuro of tendering the crown to 
William, which he had a pretext or title to claim." Explain 
all that is implied in those statements. 

8. " Five kings out of the seven that followed William 
the Conqueror were usurpers, according to modern notions." 
bet forth the grounds of this statement of Ilallam, and trace 
out the establishment of the hereditary right of succession. 

9. Give the history of Magna Charta, and state the 
most important rights guaranteed by it. 

10. Explain the nature of Baronial Tenure, and its 
relation to the English parliamentary system, and trace the 
origin and progress of parliamentary representation. 

11. Explain the nature of charters of incorporation, and 
the influence of the growth of burgal privileges on the 
development of free institutions in England. 

12. State the proceedings of parliament, temp. Richard 
n., against the Chancellor, Michael de la Pole, Earl of 
Suffolk, and trace their influence on the development of the 
resource of parliamentary im[.eachment. 

13. Construct a genealogical tree, showing the relations 
ot the rival claimants to the Crown from Edward III. to 
Richard III. 



■PpI 



;v^5 



' ♦ 




'^nm 



.%,i' 



k- 



^ ^^m^. 



^Unftietsfti) of STovontd. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1801. 



FliiST YEAH. (LAW.) 



ENCLTSH. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



XT . f D. Wilson, LL.D. 

Examiners :< t * n-,„J at a 
!_ J. A. Boyd, M.A. 



'■'■ Henry K.;" Etumoloijij and Synonifms. 

(1.) AVhat are the peculiarities of i^tructurc in this play, 
and for what purposes ;ii o they employed ? 

(2.) Give an analysis of Henry V.'s character as de- 
picted by Shakspeare. 

(3,) State the causes which Shakspearc assigns for the 
French wars of Henry V., and discuss in how far 
he is confirmed by history. 

(4.) Give the meaning and derivation of the italicised 
words in the following passages of Henry V. : 
" We fear the main intendment of the Scot ;" 
" Do but think you stand upon ihe'rivage ;" 
" Grapple your minds to sternage of this navy;" 
" Let it pry through the portage of tho head ;" 
*' Whose blood h fet from fathers of Avar-proof ;" 
"Willing to march on without impeachment ;'' 
" Such a hilding foe ;" 
" Soaked in mercenary blood ;" 
" Deracinate such savagery ;" 






^ "IH 



'til 



(5.) " K. Hen. And what art thou, thou idol ceremony ? 
* * * K. "^ 

' Tis not the halm, the sceptre, and the ball, 
The sword, the mace, the croivn imperial. 
The inter-tissued robe of gold and pearl. 
The farced title running ' fore the king. 
The throne he sits on, nor the tide of pomp 

That beats upon the high shore of this world, 

No, not all these, thrice-//or</fOM« ceremony^ 

Not all these, laid in bed majestical, 

Can sleep so soundly as the wretclied slave ; 

Who, with a hody Jllkd, and vacant mind, 

Gets him to rest, crammed with distressful bread ; 

Never sees horrid night, the child of hell ; 

But, like a lackey, from the rise to set. 

Sweats in the eye of Phoebus, and all night 

Sleeps in Elysium." 

{a.) Point out and name all the figures, rhetorical 
and syntactical, in this extract. 

(6.) What is the meaning of the 5th line ? 

{e.) Paraphrase the last six lines, so as to exhibit 
their meaning in ordinary prose. 

(d.) Collier proposes to read ''distasteful for 
'' disiressfuV in the 12th line; discuss the 
propriety of this " emendation." 

{e.) Give one or more synonyms for the words in 
italics. 

(6.) Show the connection which exists between this 
and other dramas of the same author. ' 



^■m 






I*; 




Translate 

In 

thoui 
from 
thirt 
leagi 
artill 
whicl 
he re 
happ 
dang 
on ai 
with^ 
to ha 
were 



1. Wha 

and how c 



2. T 



in j 



is the plac 






i^ni\^tvuitp of ^Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



h. 



■ % 



FRENCH. 



' ij 



Examiners • \ "^^^^^ Forneri, L.L.D. 
* I Robert Sullivan, M.A. 






I. 



Translate into French : 

In 1589, Henry the IV. who had only five or six 
thousand men, was attacked at Arques, a village not far 

from Dieppe, hy the Duke of M who had ahout 

thirty thousand. That prince, suspecting that the 
leaguers would turn their principal efforts against his 
artillery, placed there the Swiss regiment of Glaris upon 
which he relied much, and Colonel Galaty upon whom 
he relied still more. What he had foreseen having 
happened, he flew, according to his custom, where the 
danger was greatest, "my comrade," said he to Galaty 
on arriving there, "I come to die or to acquire honour 
with you ' ' These words had the success they were meant 
to have, they decided the fate of the battle, the leaguers 
were repelled on all sides, and completely beaten. 

II. 

GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 

1. What do you understand by grammatical construction, 
and how does it differ from syntax ? 

2. In sentences briefly interrogative-affirmative, where 
is the place of the subject, be it a noun or pronoun ? 




r-i 






> nil 









■C-Lj 1 .1 * m 


I 


MR?7^^^^ 


n 




^ 


Elil ; IL^iss 


yyii 


pv^inpi 


^ 


M\: •., 


TI^Hl 




3. Where is the verb and where arc the pronouns placed 
in phrases imperative-affirmative, and in the negative ? 

4. What is the order of the words in sentences expositive- 
affirmative ? In what do negative sentences differ ? 

5. Illustrate each answer by an example. 

III. 

GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS. 

1. What difference between elle a gardS le lit and elle a 
garde son lit ? 

2. Explain the use of the possessive pronouns in French, 
when connected with any part of the body, or physical and 
intellectual faculties. 

3. In what case or cases can the relative bo separated 
from the antecedent ? 



4. When is 



distributive ? 



5. When d^Ly .d Vun nt I'antre govern the verb in the 
singular, and when in the plural ? Give examples? 

6. When are sortir, demeurer and perir conjugated in 
the compound tenses with the verb avoir and when with the 
verb Stre ? Give ex ^^os ? 

7. When does si c on, take the future and when 
the present tense ? 

8. Give some examples in which the suppression of pas 
and point is obligatory ? 

9. What participles past are never declined in the feminine. 

10. Name some of the prepositions always repeated, and 
state the difference between en and dans in point of time ? 

IV. 

Translate : 

Tel autre fait la satire de ces gens qui s'engagent par 
inquietude ou par curiosity dans de long voyages ; qui 
ne font ni memoires, ni relations ; qui ne portent point 
de tablettes ; qui vont pour voir, et qui ne voient pas, 
ou qui oubiient ce qu'iis ont vu; qui desirent seulement 
de connaitre do nouvelles tours ou de nouveaux clochers, 



et de passer des rivieres qu'on n'uppclle ni la Seine, ni 
la Loire ; qui sortont do lour patrio pour y retourner, 
qui aiment a etro absents, qui vculcnt un jour gtro 
rcvenus do loin : et co satiriquo parle juste, et so fait 
dcouter. 

1. Tel autre. What part of the speech is tel, can it be 
used for quelque que ? 

2. De ces gena. Give the various constructions of gens ? 

3. Ni menoires ni relations, wliy not an article ? 

4. Point de tablettes, why not des tablettcs ? 

5. Nouvellea tours, nouveaux clochers, what difrorence in 
meaning if nouvelles, nouveaux are placed after the substan- 
tives ? 

6. What is the antecedent of the various qui in this 
extract ? 

V. 

• French Literature to the 17th century. (Sismondi's.) 

1. When was the first establishment formed in Paris to 
amuse the people by regular entertainments, and by whom? 

2. By what name was the company formed of that es- 
tablishment called ? 

3. Which is the most ancient dramatic work of modern 
Europe ? 

4. To whom are we indebted for the invention of the 
comedy, and how did the comedy originate ? 

5. What era is assigned for the commencement of the 
French literature? 




^ 



rrf? 






-Ci 



K, 



.<»#r f'l 



fl 
^1 



hm 


L 








' . 5* ■ nffli 



tUnmvms^ ot tRotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



FRENCH. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 







U^i 



*«).. 



i 



Examiners: ] i^^^^^ Forneri, LL.D. 
3 Robert Sullivan, M.A. 






Translate into English : 

Vous ne d6mentez point une race funeste; 
Uui, vous etes le sang d'Atrde et de Thyeste • 
Bourreau de votre fille, il ne vous roste enfin ' 
Que d en faire a sa mere un horrible festin. 
Barbare ! c'est done la cet heureux sacrifice 
Que vos soins preparaient avec tant d'artifice ! 
yuoi ! 1 horreur de souscriro a cet ordre inhumain 
^ a pas, en le tra^ant arr^te votre main ' 
Pourquoi feindre a nosyeux uno fatisse tristresse ? 
±^ensez-vous par des pleurs prouver votre tendresse ? 
uu sont-ils ces combats que vous avez reudus ? 
Que s flots de sang pour elle avez-vous rdpandus ? 
Quel debris parle ici de votre resistance ? 
Quel champ couvert de morts m.^ condamne au silence? 
Voila par quels temoms il fallait me prouver, 
^ruel ! que votre amour a voulu la sauver. 

; •i<viy%,niQ^ ^xut, IV., ocene iv. 





*iii':maisaamB 



^:IM' 









2. :En faire d sa mire. What does en refer to ? 

3. C'est done Id. Give the force, especially of Id. 

4. A cet ordre inhumain. Explain what ordre. 

5. Un le tragant. Resolve by a conjunction, tense, and 
mood. 

6. Pourguoi feindre. Prefix a verb to feindre. 

7. Rendusy repandus. Why declined ? 

8. Voild. Resolve it by the demonstrative verb c'est, Avith 
temoins as subject, and followed by the relative quels. 

9. 11 fallait me prouver. Resolve me prouver into a de- 
finite idea. 

10. Que voire amour a voulu la sauver. Point out the 
very words of Agamemnon to which these are an answer. 
(Read the foregoing speech.) 



Translate : 
Monsieur... 



II. 

ALCESTE. 



K *-^ '' ' 



ORONTE. 

L'dtat n'a ricn qui ne soit au-dessous 
Du m^rite eclatant que Ton decouvre en vous. 

ALCESTE. 

Monsieur... 

ORONTE. 

Oui, de ma part je voua tiens pr^f^rable 
A tout ce que j'y vois de plus considerable. 

ALCESTE. 

Monsieur... 

ORONTE. 

Sois-je du ciel ecrasd si je mens ! 
Et, pour vous confirmer ici mes sentiments, 
Souflfrez qu'^ coeur ouvert, monsieur, je vous embrasse, 
Et qu'en votre amitife je vous demande place. 
Touchez la, s'il vous plait. Vous me la prometez, 
Votre amiti6 ? 

ALCESTE. 

Monsieur... 

ORONTE. 

Quoil vous y r6sistezj 



i.. ,1 iJi 'if 



, Viitli 



ALCESTE. 

Monsieur, c'est trop d'honneur que vous me voulez faire ; 

Mais I'amitie demande un peu plus de mystere, 

Et c'est assurement en profaner le nom 

Que de vouloir le mettre a toute occasion. 

Avec lumitire et choix cette union veut naitre ; 

Avani que nous lior, il faut nous mieux connaitro ; 

Et nous pourrions avoir telles complexions), 

Que tous deux du marchd nous nons repentirions.) 

L'MrsANTiiROPE, acte i., scene ii. 

1. A tout ce que fi/ vois. What does y refer to ? 

2. Sois-je du del eerase. Turn it into an active verb, 
governed by pouvoir. 

3. Pour vous cofijirmer ici. Eesolve confirmer by a 
conjunction, tense, and mood. 

4. Touchez Id. Explain. 

5. Vous me la prometez, voire amitie. What figure ? 

6. Quoi ! vous y resistez ? What does y refer to ? 

7. Un peu plus de mystdre. Give the force. 

8. M c'est aisur^mentj ^o. Destroy the pleonasm, re- 
arrange the sentence in a regular construction, and give the 
equivalent of ew. 

9. Avant que nous lier^ il faut nous mieux connattre. 
Resolve both Her and connaUre by conjunctions, tenses, and 
moods. 

10. Et nous pourrions avoir. Change et into a causal 
conjunction, and give the term of condition. 

11. Du mareh6. Gi/e the force. 

12. Nous nons repentirions. Turn it into an infinitive 
with a preposition, suppressing que. 

13. Point out the two most strikmg inversions. 



»■ 




'^\ 






4'i 



,'4- y >■-■,'• 







■J} 



.^» 1^ 




E, 



Translate ir 

Inl 

sand m 

Dieppe 

thousai 

League 

artiller 

which i 

he reli( 

happen 

danger 

Galaty, 

honour 

were n 

battle. 

complet 



Translate in' 

Monsiei 

L*] 
Dumer 



(■Ijyaiijiiiit' 



Uni\}tvmp ot Sovdnto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



FIRST YEAR, (LAW.) 



FRENCH. 

HONORS. 





1 




i 




1 


III 


i 


-• '':, 


k% 


' \ 


1 




t 




a 


' .• ''! 


'■■i 


V ' 


i 



Examiners: [i^^'"^^ Forneri, LL D 
( Robert Sullivan, M.A. 



Translate into French : 



I. 



In 1589, Henry IV., who had only five or six thou- 
sand men, was attacked at A , a village not far from 

Dieppe, by the Duke of M , who had about thirty 

thousand men. That prince suspecting, that the 
Leaguers would turn their principal efforts against his 
artillery, placed there the Swiss regiment de Glaris upon 
which he relied much, and Colonel Galaty upon whom 
he relied still more. What he had foreseen having 
happened, he flew, according to his custom, where the 
danger was greatest. "My comrade," said he to 
Galaty, on arriving there, " I come to die or to acquire 
honour with you." These words had the success they 
were meant to have; they decided the fate of the 
battle. The Leaguers were repelled on all sides and 
completely beaten. 



Translate into English : 
Monsieur... 



11. 



ALCESTE. 



ORONTE. 

L'Etat n'a rien qui ne soit au-dessou3 ^ 
Du merite eclatant que Ton ddcouvre en vous. 





■e'-^i 



li.' 



•,»ti 




' ! 



mil 



4i 






*! 






Monsieur... 



ALOESXti. 



ORONTE. 

Oui, de ma part, je vous tiens preferable 
A tout ce que j'y voia de plus considerable. 



ALCESTE. 



Monsieur... 



ORONTE. 

Sois-je du ciel dcrase, si je mens ! 
Et, pour vous confirmer ici roes sentiments, 
Souffrez qu'a cocur ouvert, monsieur, je vous embrasse, 
Et qu'en votre amiti^ je vous demande place. 
Touchez la, s'il vous plait. Vous me la promettez, 
Votre amitie ? 



Monsieur. 



ALCESTE. 
, ORONTE. 

Quoi ! VOUS y r^sistez } 

ALCESTE. 

Monsieur, c'est trop d'honneur que vous me voulez faire; 
Mais I'amitie demande un peu plus de myst^re ; 
Et c'est assurdment en profaner le nom 
Qne de vouloir le mettre a touto occasion. 
Avec lumiere et choix cette union veut naitre ; 
Avant que nous Her, il faut nous mieux connaitre ; 
Et nous pourrions avoir telles complexions, ^ 
Que tons deux du marchd nous nous repentirions. 

MOLIERE, Le Misanthrope, Act i.. Scene ii. 

1. Que py vois. What does y refer to ? 

2. Sois-je du ciel eerase. Turn it into an active verb 
governed hj pouvoir. 

3. Pour vous confirmer. Resolve confirmer by conjunc- 
tion, tense, and mood. 

4. Touchez Id. Explain what he means. 

5. Vous me la promettez, votre amiti6. What figure ? 

6. Quoi! vous y r^sisiez. Give the equivalent oiy. 



W.' Ail 



7. Vn peu phi de myithe. Oive tlie force. 

8. Et o'ett asaurementf ^c. Destroy the pleonasm, re- 
arrange the sentence into a regular order, and give tho 
equivalent of en. 

9. Avant que nous lievy il faut nous mieux connattre. 
Resolve both Her and connattre by conjunction, tense, and 
mood. 

10. M noua pourriona avoir. Turn et into a causal con- 
junction, and give the term of condition. 

11. Du marc1i6. Give the force. 

12. Nous noua repentmons. Turn it into an infinitive 
with a preposition, suppressing que. 

13. Point out the two most striking inversions. 






,'f' 



M 









• • » * -il 




■i ,M2mfii 



? "j; 



^'^: 

mw 



mnih(Vf$its rit Eoiont0. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS. 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



GERMAN. 



\ Robert Sullivan, M. A. 



Translate : 



I. 



Qintx ot>et bcr 51 n be re. 



^ 3ur 3ett ^cimidf^ IV., mnlo,^ yon gfranfrcfc^, rttt 
etnmal etn S3ducrlcin vonfctncm 3)orfe nac^ faxi^, ^i6)t 
nic()r mit ^on ter ®tabt ki^ecinctc cr etncm flamfdjeit 
3ficitcr. Q^ mx tcr mnic^. ©em ©cfolge war abftd;tltd^ 
m cmtficr Gntfcrnung (^cbliebeit. „2Bo!)er m SSeg^, metit 
greunb V Jpaht t()r C^kfc^ciftc ju ^artg r 
//3a/' antwortcte bcr 33uuer; ,,aurf) miJd[)te td; gent einmal 
unfcrn gutcn ^iJntg fcbcit/ bcr fcin ^Colt fo jartltd^ ^'fbt." 

3)er ^^am'.q ladjcUc unb fagtc: ,/2)aju fann u4 Dlatb 
werbcn." 

/'^ber ttjciin id) nur waffte, njelc^cr e^^ tft unter ben 
»ielcn ^(Jflingcn, »on bencn er umgeben fetn loirb." 

j,3)ag tt)tU trf) md) fai^en: 3^r biirft nur M)imc^ gekn, 
wclct)cr ben ^ut auf bem ^opfc be^a en wtrb, wann aik 
allc 5(nbern ftcl; e^rerbiettg raerben entbiapt ^aben." 

m\^ rtuen fte mtt etnanber tn ^art^ l)min, unb ..vflr 
bag ^auerlem auf bcr retc|)ten @ette beg OliJnt'ag: benn was 
bie itebe ixinfalt, eg fei mi't M\id)t ober burd) 3ufalC 
llngcfc^tcftcg t^un fann, bag t^ut [tc. 

Adlei,, p. 46. 
1. Koniga von Franhreich. Tn what relation ? 







W"'i: 










2. JRiV^ einmal. Give the infinitive and participle past 
of ritt. 

3. J57m Bduerlein. What do c^ew and lein denote at 
the end of a noun ; and why is lein here employed ? 

4. Begegnete er. Give the antecedent of er. 

5. Einem stattUehen Reiter.. What case and why? 

6. Cfeblieben. Give the infinitive and imperfect. 
Woher des Wegs. Fill up the ellipsis. 

7. Bazu kann euch Rath werden. What is the aubject 
of hann ? Give the force. 

8. Aher wenn ich nur wilsste. Give the infinitive and 
participle past of ivUsste. 

9. Welcher es ist. Give the various constructions of es. 

10. Ihr dilrft. Give the infinitive of durftj imperfect 
and participle past. 

11. Benn was. Set all this sentence in a regular con- 
struction, taking in zwar^ and making it emphatic. 

12. Bie liele Einfalt. What is liehe., what is its meaning, 
and in what sense is it here employed ? 

13. Ungeschicktes. Turn it into a relative sentence. 

II. 

GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS. 

1. When is of omitted, and by what preposition is it 
rendered when expressing locality or tendency ? 

2. What preposition do adjectives take referring only 
to a part of the whole ? Translate, the bird has beautiful 
feathers. 

3. When a relative pronoun refers to a whole sentence, 
what gender does it take ? 

4. What is the peculiarity of zu after the verb to be ? 

6. How ia the English participle present rendered after 
the word kommen ? 

6. Name some verbs which require the genitive case, and 
some which govern two accusatives. 



t ' > 



7. By -what verb ia rendered to he before an infinitive ? 

8. What participles past are turned into infinitive when 
they govern an infinitive ? 

9. By what verb is would rendered in the sense of used ? 
Translate thus he would sit and talk for hours. 

10. What case does the impersonal gehen govern ? and 
when is the participle past worden and when geworden used ? 

11. When are iiber durch wieder urn separable and 
when inseparable ? and what verbs must take an impersonal 
form in their passive voice ? 





Til. 

HISTORY OP GERMAN LITERATURE, PERIODS 1, 2, 3, AND 

4, (GOSTICK'S) 

1. Why did Ulphilas in his translation of the Scriptures 
into the Gothic language omit the book of Kings ? 

2. What remains now of this translation ? 

3. What do you perceive in the work of Ulphilas with 
regard to the German tongue ? 

4. Give the character of the German language. 

5. What does the 1st period comprehend, and how 
far does it extend ? 

6. How far does the 2nd period extend, and what does it 

contain ? 

7. What title can you give to the 4th period, and how 
far does it extend ? 

8. What character did Luther impress on the literature 
of the 16th century? 

9. How far is Germany indebted to Luther with regard 
to the German tongue ? 

10. What difference can you draw between the literature 
of the north and that of the south of Germany ? 



m 



J- 11 



4 
I 



V . ''»S' 



■^WBDJI^: 



*" 




Tranglate : 

Tw< 

pond ■' 
the ic 
where 
from 1 
and W 
were e 
Byde, 
he waj 
breaks 
too bri 
conseq 
love fc 



M\tx unb f 
3flmmer»on 

Die er oft u 
^kx mfci) t) 
^tegt bfe txf\ 



2infli(tfiiit|? of ^Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 






GERMAN. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



SJxaminers.'f ^-^^^^ Forneri, LL D. 
\ Robert Sullivan, M.A. 



I. 

Tranglate into German. 

Two boys went together, one winter morning, on a 
pond which was frozen. Many people were skating on 
the ice. At the end of the pond there was a place 
where the ice did not bear. Every body stood aloof 
from this place in order not to be drowned. Charles 
and William (these were the names of the two boys) 
were scarcely ta the ice when they hastened to slide. 
By degrees W. always came nearer the dangerous spot ; 
he was too thoughtless to ob'^erve it. Suddenly the ice 
breaks under him ; Charles lii to his assistance ; he 
too breaks in, and both are ned — the former in 

consequence of his thoughtlessness, the latter out of 
love for his friend. 

II. 

^If m{(| bag m&t^tn txUidtt, fo trat fic ben ^ferben flelaJTcn 
mtx unb fofltc ju mtr: 9?tc|t I'mmer mx eg mtt xim fo 
3ammer»oH, dg 3t)r ung Ijeut' anf bi'efen mc^m crbltcfct. 
|o(| ni^t bin i6) flewofjnt, um 3remben bte @ak ju I^etfil^cn, 
2)te er oft unflcrn m^i, urn log ju werben ben 5(rmen; 
^m rnicl) bvancjet bie moil) ju rcben. ^ter auf bem etvo()c 
Vtegt blc erft entbunbenc grau beg retd)en 53cftijerg, 













'- ' 3J 



-H 



'^^^' 




^ ^ 'rl 





T)k id) mil (Sttcrcn unb 2Bfl(^ctt noc| U\m, b(c fc^njancjrc, ^crettet. 
Spiit nur fpmmeu mx md), itub faum ta^ Seben cr^ielt fie. 
9^un Itcgt, ncui-jcborcn, ba^ ^inb tt)r nacfcnb tm 5lrme, 
Hub mif Sentflcm nur »ennOgm btc Unfcrn p f)elfen! 
®cnn wix tm nad)ftcn Dorf, wo wix l)eute ju vaftcn j^cbcnfen, 
5lud; ftc ftnbcn, wtewel)l tc^ fuvd)tc, fte [inb fd)on ijorubcr. 
2Bar Gud) trqenb you SciniDanb nur wag gntbef)rltd)cg, wcnn 3^r 
.^tcv aug bcr" ^ladjbarfdjaft [epb, fo [penbct'g flfittg ben 5lrmen. 

Goethe's Herman und Dorothea^ pages 16 & 17. 

1. ^0 irat sie. Explain the discordance of sie. 

2. Den Pferden. What case, and why ? 

3. G-elassen. What is it? 

4. Nicht immer so jammervoU. Give the force. 

5. Als Ihr. What difference in meaning between Ik 
and ihr? 

6. Die er oft ungern giebt. Give the antecedents of 
die and er ; and state what case geben, when impersonal, 
governs. 

7. Um los zu werden. Give the force of lo8 zu werden; 
and state what cases it governs. 

8. Den Armen. What case, and why so ? Would de« 
Armen, or der Armen be good German ? Why spelt with 
a capital ? 

9. Aher mid drdnget die JSFoth. Why the subject after 
the verb? 

10. ffier auf dem Stroke Uegt, &c. Why avf with the 
dative here ? 

11. Die erst entbundene Frau. Give the force of ent 
and turn entbundene Frau into a relative sentence. 

12. Die schwangre gerettet. With what word, and in what 
relation does die schwangre stand ? Fill up the ellipsis. 

13. Spat nur kommen wir nach. What is nach here? 

14. Das Leben erhielt sie. Give the antecedent of sie; 
and point out the subject of erhielt. 

15. 2hr im Arrne. Explain the rule affecting these 

words. 



16. Liegt neugehoren, das Kind naekend, &c. Turn 

neugeboren and nackend into adjectives, qualifying dfas kindf 
and re-arrange the words. 

17. Die Unsern. Who are they ? 

18. Wenn wir, &c. Suppress ivenn, and re-arrange the 
sentence. 

19. Schon Voriiler. Fill up the ellipsis. 

20. War' euch, &c, Prefix wenn, and re-arrange ; but 
turn war into an active verb, with euch as a subject. 

21. Was Enthehrliches. What does was stand for? 
Turn Enthehrliches into a relative sentence, and state by 
what is von Leinwand governed. 




^-if't^fciMfaTCi!.. .1., - ' ■'^■^*-. IM 



Xi 



Wini\^tvuit^ of ^ovonto. 



'H 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



SECOND YEAR 



EXPERIMENTAL CHEMISTRY. 



Examiner: Henry Croft, D.C.L. 



'.■m 






1. Describe the construction of a mercurial thermometer. 
What is its range ? 

2. Bj what means may the conducting power of bodies 
be determined ? 

3. How may the radiation of heat be proved ? 

4. What is meant by a magnetic meridian ? 
6. Describe a galvanometer and its action. 

6. Describe the diflferent frictional electrical machines. 

7. Give the preparation of ozone, iodine, bromine, chloric 
acid and hydrofluoric acid, with their general properties. 

8. Give the principal ores of silver, arsenic, mercury, 
copper and platinum, and the formulas of their oxides. 

9. Give the general principles of organic analysis, and 
the general composition of natural organic bodies. 

10. Give the preparation, properties and formulas of 
acetic acid, cyanide and ferrocyanide of potassium and 
fultaiuating mercury. 



g ,#^5t>. 



U5 



Am 




* 




>• n 



Kf 



M 




/fg 



1 -'S 



-i'laiSi 



-f-is 



1>-'>.W," 



.1 ** 



nni\}tvnit^ of vonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



EXPERIMENTAL CHEMISTRY. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



Examiner: Hent Croft, D.C.L. 






t 






- « • 



# 





1. Describe the principles and construction of the com- 
pensating pendulum, and of Breguet's thermometer. 

2.^ V is meant by thcrmometric equilibrium? and 

explain ma bu-called radiation of cold. 

J. Whnt is the law of the diffusion of gases? How 
a&oertaiD " 

4. Menuoi e relative powers of lamp black and pol- 
ish' d silver as regards absorption, radiation and reflection 
of heat. 

5. What is meant by 'ho magnetic equator, ^ ^y 
isoclinal lines. 

6. Describe an inductioi joil, and explain the effect o» 
introducing a coil of wire in- o tl o circuit of a weak battery. 

7. E. plain the action of a Ticyden jar, and show how 
several can be charged n* 

S. Give tl preparation of proto. anl binoxideof 
nitrogen, phosplmretted h iogei! cijfi gas and ter- 



9. Give the preparation of arsenic acid, chromic acid, 
permanganate of potassa, binoxide of tin, and corrosive 
sublimate. 

10. Give the sources and preparation of light carluretted 
hydrogen, methylic and cetylic alcohols, formic and pal- 
mitic acids. 

11. Give the sources and preparation of benzole, and 
mention the substances obtained from it by the action of 
i.itri'" acid, giving formulas. 

12. In what substances are fibrine, albumine and caseine 
found ? What are their characters. 






ll 



'ih 



'.•11 



■< i^^Kf ^Jt^ 



•ii 



* f A" 









■\ 




f 


* 


s 




uni\^tvmtt of STotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



MmERALOGY AND GEOLOGY, 



Examiner: T. Sterry Hunt, M.A., F.R.S. 






1. Explain briefly the scale of hardness, and give the 
hardness of albite, of epidote, and of galena on the scale of 
Mohs. 

2. By what chemical and physical characters would you 
distinguish fluor-spar from apatite ? 

3. Give the mineralogical characters and composition of 
the constituent minerals of syenite. 

4. Describe the four most important ores of iron. 

5. Describe the sulphuretted ores of copper, and their 
composition. , 

6. Name the mineral species corresponding to t\iG fol- 
lowing characters: 

(a) Vitreous lustre; hardness 7, gravity 3.35, color 
pale green; monoclinic. 

(6) Vitreous lustre; hardness 4, gravity 3.16, color 

yellow; monometric. 
(c) Metallic lustre; hardness 3, gravity 11.10, '^olor 

white; monometric. 



7. Muiilion some of the characteristic genera of the ani- 
mals in the Devonian period. 



f^n^ I I'l 



8. By what marks may deep-water deposits be distin- 
guished from those of shallow seas ? 

9. Give the sub-divisions of the tertiary system in 
Europe, and Lyell's names for them. 

10. Explain what is meant by unconformable stratification. 

11. Mention the prominent facts in the history of fossil 

fishes. 

12. Describe common and magnesian limestones, and give 
some of the peculiar characters of the latter. 





'*!» 
4 



i 

'i ■ 






rfll 



■"■■■ ;Vik# 



'ull 




Uni\^tvniip of ^otonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



SECOND YEAK. 



GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : T. Sterry Hunt, M.A., F.R.S. 




1. Explain what is meant by hemlhedrism, and illustrate 
it by monometric and hexagonal forms. 

2. Describe the cleavages of calcite, and those of chlorite, 
and show how they are in both cases related to the hexagonal 
prism. ° 

3. What are the chemical and mineraloglcal differences 
between hornblende and pyroxene ? 

4. What are the principal silicious minerals found in 
granitic veins ? 

5. Describe the miner«.logical differences of arragonite and 
calcite. and give other examples of dimorphism. 



6. in what form Ho/iS does coal occur, and what are the 
conditions of its production ? 

7. What are the principal genera of crustaceans and bra- 
chiopods in the Lower Silurian rocks ? 



8. What are most remarkable geological and mineralo- 
gical characters of the Salt-bearing rocks. 

9. What are the differences between granite, trachyte, and 
and gneiss, and vrhat their geological relations ? 

10. State the principal phenomena presented by volcanic 
mountains. 








*■■■ 



il 






'm 




.»-.ii 






■■ 


1 '' .« 


1 




• 


H 




HilHHH 




flfflKlffll^^^l^H 


■■ 


l^ffl^^^^B 




^M^^^H 




H 


m': 


■1 



Winl\)ttuits of Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



METAPHYSICS AND ETHICS. 



■ ■ ! ♦ 



Examiner: Rev. Professor Murray. 







WAYLAND AND LOCKE. 

1. a. In what two senses may the term law be employed? 
b. In which of these is it employed in ethics ? 

2. How would you prove that our notion of the moral 
quality of actions is derived neither {a) from an act of judg- 
ment, nor {h) from association, nor ic) from the idea of the 
greatest amount of happiness ? 

3. What answer would you give to the arguments against 
the existence of a moral faculty, founded on the difference 
in the moral judgment of the diiferent nations? 

4. a. What is meant by self-love^ and what is the rank 
which it holds in relation to passion on the one hand 
and to conscience oh the other ? 

5. a. What are the two general divisions under which 
the duties to man are arranged by Wayland ? 

h. What are the main classes into which these gene- 
ral divisions are subdivided ? 

6. In what sense is the word idea used by Locke ? 

7. a. From what two sources does Locke derive all our 
ideas ? 






^ *a 






h. Which of these does he regard as the source of our 
first ideas ? 

8. a. What does Locke mean by a simple, what by a com- 
plex idea ? 

b. Mention some of the simple ideas which he derives 
in the first place from each of the sources separately, 
and in the second from both conjointly. 

9. How does Locke explain the origin of our ideas (a) of 
space and [b) of time ? 

10. State and criticise Locke's account of what constitutes 
personal identity ? 



m 






K ' 



;,' w^ 




^'M 



11 







I p- p^ ,,. . 



:\j 




fXh ! 



*.* 



KisVivW 



*^:i 



M 



mil 



•^* "J^ 




^ 




IMAGE EVALUATION 
TEST TARGET (MT-3) 








/.^ 







1.0 



I.I 



1.25 



■ so "^^ 

'^ US. 



1.4 



2.5 
2.2 
20 

1.8 



1.6 



^ 



V] 



^;. 



"s 







y^ 







'/ 




Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 







23 WEST MAIN STREET 

WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 

(716)872-4503 






Winmvm^ of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



MURRAINS LOGIC. 



Examiner: Rev. Professor Murray. 



a. Explain the fi7e predicables. 



a? w"» 



l>-''^ 



3. 



4. 



b. 

a. 
h. 
c. 

a. 

h. 
c. 



a. 



h. 



Illustrate the five predicables, by giving an exam- 
ple of each as a predicate to the subject hone. 

What is meant by the quantity, what by the 
quality of a proposition ? 

Hov^ many species of propositions are there, 
divided according to both quantity and quality? 

By what symbols are these species severally 
denoted ? 

What is meant by the conversion of a proposition? 

Explain the three modes of conversion. 

Convert the following propositions, and state by 
which of the three modes each is converted. 

All negative propositions distribute to the pre- 
dicate. 

No aflSrmative propositions distribute the pre- 
dicate. 

Some propositions are true. 

Some propositions are not true. 

What is the difference between the opposition of 
contradictories and that of contraries P 

Of A, E, I, 0, state which are contraries, which 
coatradigtories ? 



5. a. What constitutes the figure of a syllogism ? 

b. How many figures are there, and by what are 
they distinguished from each other ? 

6. Why are (a) only negative conclusions possible in the 
second figure, (6) only particular conclusions in the third ? 

7. In hypothetical syllogisms what are the two legitimate, 
what the two illegitimate modes of drawing a conclusion ? 

8. State to which of the figures Cameatres, Featino. 
dmmi8, Bramantip belong, and explain the meaning of 
their symbolic letters. ° 

9. Throw into Felapton the following argument, and 
reduce it to its corresponding mood of the first figure • 
"Some animals have not the power of locomotion, for 
sponges are animals." 

10. Name and point out the fallacy of the following 

arguments : ° 

a. Whatever is universally believed is true. 

The existence of God is not universally believed • 
Therefore it is not true. 

b. What one troweth is not eternal and unchangeable; 
Truth is what one troweth ; 

Therefore truth is not eternal and unchangeable. 



, ' ! 



,'■<*.)) 









1 5^ 












. » 


. ~ ' ti 


' 




'"A 












-ftpt^j^plfl 


«»•'; 


''-4 





UniMtvnit^ of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



METAPHYSICS AND ETHICS. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



If 



I* 






i ; 



^■SV' 



ft ■ 

iff . 
it 



Examiner: Rev. Professor Murray. 



1. a. What was the earliest school of philosophy in 

Greece ? 

h. What is the problem with which the specula- 
tions of that school began ? 

<?. What is common to all their solutions of that 
problem ? 

2. a. State the main principle of the Eleatics, and 

point out its antagonism to the earliest philosophy 
of Greece ? 

h. What philosopher of the Eleatic school was cele- 
brated for his demonstration of the impossibility 
of motion ? 

3. a. What are the three parts into which Epicurus 

divided philosophy ? 

h. Explain the relation J^in which he placed these to 
each other. 

4. a. Into what two schools is the Academy usually 

divided ? 

h. By what character was the later school distin- 
guished ? 



5. a. What waa the other Platonio school, which arose 

in Alexajidria ? 

b. What were the general tendency of its specula- 
tions, and the influences by which that tendency 
was determined ? 

6. What is the difference between Cartesian doubt and 
scepticism ? 

7. What is the fact which, according to Descartes, must 
be accepted in doubting every other ? 

8. What is the sense in which Descartes uses cogitatio 
[pensee, thought) ? 

9. a. On what ground does Descartes deem it necessary 

to prove the existence of God in order to the 
possibility of being certain with regard to any- 
thing else ? 

h. State explicitly any of his arguments for the 
existence of God. 

10. a. What does Descartes regard as constituting the 

essence of mind and that of matter respectively ? 

h. On what does he found his belief iu the existence 
of material things ? 






■■-'■^ 






M 



^nii^tvnitti of ^otonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



LOGIC. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



.rtz 






1 1 






Examiner: Rev. Professor Murray. 



1. What is meant by the extension, what by the intension 
of a conception ; and what is the law of their relation ? 

2. What are the two logical processes by which the exten- 
sion and intension of a conception are severally resolved ? 

3. Into what classes are judgments divided (a) as to quan- 
tity, (b) as to quality, (c) as to relation ? 

4. a. What are the six classes of judgments recognised 

by Thompson ? 

In what respects does this classification of judg- 
ments differ from that of the older logicians ? 

What are the two judgments recognised by Ham- 
ilton in addition to those of Thomson ? 

On what grounds does Thomson reject these two 
additional judgments? 

6. Explain the judgment, man is mortal, according to its 
(a) extension, (b) intension and (c) denomination. 

6. On what ground is the fourth figure of the Byllogism 
rejected by Thomson, as only an indirect mode of the first ? 



h. 



c. 



d. 









• is-' 



,*r-l 



jillit*;; 




E, 



Translate 

M< 

iraaa 
fiera 

KaKOl 

Ipa, 7, 

^eada 

airoSi 

ovpd, 

Trepac 

hepoL 

fievov 

fjbvpcd 

oe e<Y) 

Kara 

"JToWt 

yap fi 

XWov 
Biica t 

al TTU/ 

eavTQ. 
'/I paf. 



mmt^tvuits of Eovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



GREEK. 



THIRD YEAR. 



\ Thos. Moss, M.A. 






i.'li 



Translate : 



I. 



Mexpi^ fiev vvv 'Pafifivlrov ^aaCkio^ ehac iv Alyvirro) 
iraaavevvoiiirjv eXeyov, kuI eWjivieiv AtVyTrro- ue^d'xm* 
fiera Se tovtov, ^aaCkevaavra a(f)6(ov Xeoira, 'is^ iraaav 
mfcoTTjra iXdaai. KaTa/cXrjtcravTa ydp fiiv irdvra ra 
ipa,rrrp(OTa fiev <7(f>ea^ Bvaiiwv ciirep^ar /j^era Se, ipyd- 
^ecreatJQjvTa) KeXeveiv irdvTa^ Alyvrrrcov^. rotai fieu Sh 
UTToSeSexOai, €k t&v XiOoToixiewv t&v kv too 'Apaj3ico 
ovpei, €K rovrewv eXKCiv \idov<i fxexpi rov NeiXov Sia- 
TTe^atoidevra^ U top iroTap^hv r-\oioi<n roix} XWov^ 
eTcpoiai kra^e eKhUeaeai. koX 'irp>^ to AijSvkov KaXev- 
fievovopo<i, 7r/jo9 rovro 'dXKeiv. ipryd^ovTO Bk /caret BeKa 
fivpiaha^^ avBpcoTTcov aid r^v rpifirjvov kKdarriv. 'Xp6vov 
he eryevea0at rpL^ofiivrp rw Xarp, BiKa fih hea rn^ oSov 
Kara rrjv cIXkov roixj XlOov?, ttjv eZetfiav epyov ihv ov 
TToXXo) rem €Xa<T<7ov rrj^ irvpafxiho^, w? ipioi hoKeeiv (rm 
yap fir^Ko^ fj^kv el<TL irkyTe ardScor etfpo^: Bk, Bifca opyviaC- 
vfo^ be,Trf v^TfXordr'n iarl avr^ icovrrj^, dKToy opyvial- 
A£6/oy re ^ecrroy Kal ^o>wv iyyeyXvfifiivfov) Ta{,Tr) re B^ rh 
teKa erea yeveadai, Kal rwv eTrl rov X6cf)ov, eV odiaracn 
at TTvpafiiBe^^ rdv inrbyrjv olK^fidrav. r^^ eiroiiero e/]Ka<: 
e(ovT(pev vrjam, Suopvxa rov NetXou eaarvarycov. t« B^ 
''" P^f^^^'' ^^'^V XP^^ov yeveaBuL eeUoai erea TroievfLevr)' 



" / ^ 









ft'.: 






^.^j ^^'- 



'■.H-'- 






T»)<j ean iravraK ) fiirioTrov ^Kaa-rov OKTta rrXiupa, iov(Tr}<; 
T€Tpaya)Vov, koI v^lfo<i tcroV \l6ov he. ^earov re Kal apfioa- 
fiivov rh fidXia-Ta' ovBtU t&v 'KiOwv Tpi,i]KovTa irohm 

iKdaaav. 

Herodotus, B. II., c. 124. 

1. Give the Attic for the Ionic forms in this extract. 

2. Kara BUa fivptdSaf;. Explain this use of kut^, and 
give other examples. 

3. ^^/aovovS^ to eSei/xav. Translate literally and explain 
the construction. 

4. w? ifiol hoKeeiv. What is the construction ? 

6. (TTuBioi, op^vLoi, TfXkdpa. Explain these measures. 

6. jr) v^'kordTT) eVrl avTrj €(0VTrj<i. What is the con- 
struction ? 

7. Whence did Herodotus ohtain his information relative 
to Egypt ? At what time was he there ? 

8. What other ancient authorities for its history ? 

9. Give instances of the confirmation or correction of the 
statements of Herodotus by modern investigations. 

10. Point out peculiarities of the dialect of Herodotus, as 
regards apostrophe, crasis, the rough breathing, the augment, 
and the difference of vowels and consonants. 

II. 

Translate : 

01. Kov fif) crr€pr]6^<i j e? too-ovtov eKTriBoyv 
ifiov ^e^<oTO<i. TO) yap av Kol fiel^ovi 
Xi^aifjb av rj aol La Tw%i/9 TOiaah' leov ; 
c/JLol Trarrjp H'^v HoXv/So? ?V KopivSto?, ^ 
firjT'np 8e MepoTTTj AwpiV riyofiriV 8'^ dvrjp 
daT&v fiiyia-TO^i rS)V eKel, irpiv fioi rvxv 
T0ta8' iirkcTT), dav/jidaai fxev d^ia, 
CTTTOuS?)? ye fjbivTOL Tf;<? e/u,?)? ovk d^ia. 
dvrjp yap iv SeiTTfot? fi virepirXTjadeh fieOr) 
KaXei Trap oivto, TrXao-To^ m e'lTjv irarpL 
KaycD ^apvvdei<i ti)v fiev ovaav rjfiepav 
/xoXt9 Karea-xoV ddrkpa 8' iuiv TreXa? 
firjTpo^ irarpof r i'^Xeyyov ol Se 8u<j06pa)9 
vovvcioo^ Tiyov tus fiivs.v~i TOP Xoyov. 

Sophocles, (Edipus Bexy vv. 771-784. 



1. Give a scale of the metro. 

2. iXiriBcov. Why in genitive ? 

^. T^ ycLp &if Kal fiel^ovi. Explnin. BaTipa. Whatcrasis? 

4. oi Bk Bv<T(f)6pm to 'Koyou. What ia the construction ? 

r>. Give a list of Greek Tragic authors, introducing dates 
where you can. 

III. 

Translate : 

Beivov 8' diia-a^, &><? vcprfynTov Ttfo?, 
-TTuXat? SiTrXai? kvr'jkaT' €k Be TrvOfiivcav 
€K\ive KOiXa K\j}9paj KufnrUTei aTeyO' 
oh Br) KpefiaaTTjV jr)v yvvaiK eaelBofxev, 
TrXcKTak ioopai^ efnreTrXeyfievrjv 6 Be 
OTTW? opa viv, Beiva ^pvxriGe\<i raXa^, 
va\a icpefiaaT7)V apTavrjv. eVet Be yjj^ 
eKCiTo TXrjfioiv, Belva B" ^v TavBivB' opav. 
aTTocnrdfTa^ yap elp^aTOiV ')(pvariXarov<i 
Trepova^ air avTrj<i, alaiv e^eareXXeTo, 
dpa'i eiraicrev apOpa twv avrov kvkXwv, 
avB5)v roLav6\ oOovuck ovk oy^oivTo viv 
ovO' 61 eiraa'xev ovff oiroV ehpa kuko,, 
aX\' iv a-KOTW to Xolttov ot)<i fiev ovk eBet 
oyfroiaff, ov<i expvi^v ov yvcoaolaTo. 
ToiavT ecfyvfiv&v 7roXXdKi<i re kov)(^ aira^ 
r^paaa eiraipoiv ^Xe<l>apa. (boiviac 8' ofiov 
yXi)vai yeveC ereyyov, ou8' avieaav 
i^ovov ixvB(i>aa<i crarfova^, dXh! ofjLov p,eXa<i 
' 6/Jb^po^ yaXaXjui & alfiaTovaa ireyyeTO. 

Sophocles, (Edipus Rex, vv. 1260-1279. 

1. StTrXat?. What is the meaning? Ilepom?. What? 

2. odovveK to yvaxTolaro. Translate literally and explain 
the meaning. 

3. V. 1279. Give an account of this reading. 

4. Give scales of Tragic Trochaics, and Anapsestics. 

5. Describe the places set apart in the theatres for the 
actors, chorus, and audience, and give their designations in 
Greek. 






- ".^lllPI 



■'d 



m 









^•^'^^r 






k 




- ; » 


i 


'n 


' * . 


■"-li 




,? 


g 






•■ i 


Wk^*- 




Wl'.v 


- ' ' t 


,^K"sr 


'-■ * 


l^pt,' 


:. J 


^^sT" 


. -,^ 




.' <t 




:4 







Transli 

Demitt 
Quum i 
"Si be 
NonV; 
Aut cil 
Molliuf 
Interpi 
Cognal 
Omnes 
Confic( 
Quod I 
Hunc ] 
Nee la 
Garrul 
ISi sapi 
Ventui 
Praetei 
Debeb 
"Si me 
Aut vi 
Et pro 
"Tem 



mmttvuit^ of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



THIRD YEAR. 



JExaminers: 



LATIN. 



Rev. John McCaul, LL.D. 
Thomas Moss, M.A. 




I. 

Translate : 

Demitto auriculas, ut iniquse mentis asellus, 

Quum gravius dorso subiit onus. Incipit ille : 

" Si bene me novi, non Viscum pluris amicum, 

Non Varium facies ; nam quis me scribere plures 

Aut citius possit versus ? quis membra movere 

Mollius? Invideat quod et llermogenes, ego canto." 

Interpellandi locus hie erat : " Est tibi mater, 

Cognati, quis te salvo est opus ? "— " Hand mihi quisquam. 

Omnes composui."— " Felices ! nunc ego resto. 

Confice ; namque instat fatum mihi triste, Sabella 

Quod puero cecinit divina mota anus urna : 

Hunc neque dira venena nee hosticus auferet ensis 

Nee laterum dolor aut tussis nee tarda podagra ; 

Garrulus hunc quando consumet cunque ; loquaces, 

ISi sapiat, vitet, simul atquo adoleverit aetas."^ 

Ventum erat ad Vesta), quarta jam parte diei 

Prseterita ; et casu tunc respondere vadato 

Debebat, quod ni fecisset, perdere litem. 

"Si me amas," inquit, "paullum hie ades." "Inteream, si 

Aut valeo stare aut novi civilia jura ; 

Et propero quo scis.'' "Dubius sum, quid faciam," inquit, 

" Tene relinquam, an rem." " Me, sodes." 

Horace, Sat I., 9, vv= 2041, 



?' I'A 



Ml 




WMi.wi>^i.^'d 






















- :. ^ 



1. Quum gravius dorso suhiit onus. Give the construc- 
tion. 

2. Membra movere. Give different explanations. 

8. Invideat quod, ^c. What is the construction of quodf 

4. Quarta jam parte, ^c. What hour of the day? 

5. Caau. Give different explanations. 

6. Notice any metrical peculiarities in the p'',ssage. 

7. Sodes. Whence derived? 

8. Distinoruish between agnati and cognati, dolor and 
luctus, perdere and amittere, amare and diligere, properare 
and festinare. 

II. 

Translate : 

Quis tamen exiguos elegos emiserit auctor, 
Grammatici certant et adhuc sub judice lis est. 
Archilochum proprio rabies armavit iarabo ; 
Hunc socci cepere pedem grandosquo cothurni, 
Alternis aptum sermonibus et populares 
Vincentein strepitus et natum rebus agcndis. 
Musa dedit fidibus dives puerosque Deorum, 
Et pugilem victorem et equura certamine primum 
Et juvenum curas et libera vina refer-e. 
Descriptas servare vices operumque colores 
Cur ego si nequeo ignoroque poeta salutor ? 
Cur nescire pudens prave quam discere male ? 
Versibus exponi tragicis res comica non vult ; 
Indignatur item privatis ac props socco 
Dignis carminibus narrari cocna ThyestfB. 
Singula quaeque locum teneant sortita decenter. 
Interdum tamen et vocem comocdia tollit, 
Iratusque Chromes tumido delitigat ore ; 
Et tragicus plerumque dolot scrmono pedcstri 
Telephus <?t Peleus, quum pauper et exsul uterque 
Projicit ampullas et sesquipcdalia verba. 
Si curat cor spectantis tetigisse querela. 

HoRAC3, Ad Pisones, vv. 77-98. 

1. Exiguos. Discuss the meaning of this epithet. 

2. Auetor. Mention different poets to whom the inven- 
tion has been ascribed. 






ff 

3. Proprio. Give different explanations. 

4. Socci — cothurni. '\ what do they respectively 
refer ? 

5. Populares vincentem strepitus. Explain. 

6. N'atum rebus. Cite other instances of the use of 
natus in this sense. 

7. Nequeo ignoroque. Give the force of each. 

8. Ccena Thyestse. To what particular play has this 
been supposed to refer ? 

9. Sesquipedalia. Give the derivation. 

10. Distinguish between Greek satyra and Roman satira. 

III. 

Translate : 

^ Veiis interim non animi tantum in dies sed etiam 
vires crescebant nee Romanis eo convenientibus ex 
agris, qui aut proelio adverse aut clade captse urbis 
palati fuerant, sed etiam ex Latio voluntariis confluen- 
tibus, ut in parte prsedae essent. Maturum jam videbatur 
repeti patriam eripique ex hostium manibus, sed corpori 
valido caput deerat. Locus ipse admonebat Camilli, et 
magna pars militum erat qui ductu auspicioque ejus res 
prospere gesserant: et Caedicius negare se commissurum, 
cur sibi aut deorum aut hominum quisquam imperium 
finiret potius, quam ipse memor ordinis sui posceret 
imperatorem. Consensu omnium placui. ab Ardea 
Camillum acciri, sed antea consulto senatu qui Romse 
esset: adeo regebat omnia pudor, discriminaque rerum 
prope perditis rebus servabant. Ingenti periculo trans- 
eundum per hostium custodias erat : ad earn rem Pontius 
Cominius impiger juvenis operam pollicitus incubans 
cortici secundo Tiberi ad urbem defertur : inde, qua 
proximum fuit a ripa, per proeruptum eoque neglectum 
hostium custodijB saxum in Capitolium evadit, et ad 
magistratus ductus mandata exercitus edit. 

LiVY, v., ch. 46. 

1. Give (ierivations of maturus, auspicium, polliceor, and 
secundus. 

2. M Cadicius negare se, ^c. Turn this into direct 
narration. 




iti- 









t. 



W^'-*^!'}!' 



.1 



"V? i,'* vV* 









3. Senatus. Trace the changes in the constitution of 
the Senate 

4. Consultum. What was the difference between aenatus 
eonsultum and decretum plebis ? 

5. Pontius Cominius. Why do sc \e editors read Cominus? 

6. Explain the Roman system of naming. How was the 
circumstance of adoption denoted ? 

7. What defects have been attributed to Livy as a his- 
torian ? 

8. What is meant by Patavinitas ? 



mni\)tvuitp of Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1804. 



THIRD YEAR. 



GREEK. 

HONORS. 



Examiners: l^^^' ^^"^ McGaul, LL.D. 
/Thomas Moss, M.A. 



S«r 



■ V •'k' 



f- ' ... : 



I. 

XO. CTevco a-€ Td<; ovXofiivaf Tvxa^, Upofirjeev. arp. a- 
SmpvaiaraKTov avr oaawv pahivS)v[h' ei^ofieva] peo^ irapeikv 
vorioL<i erey^a irayah- 
aixeyapra yap rdSe. Zeu? 8' l8ioi<: vofioi^ Kparvvtov 
vireprjijiavov deol^ rot? irdpo^ ipBeUvvaiv atx/Jidv. 
irpoiraaa 8' ijSTj arovoev XeXa/ce x^pf^i ^vt. a. 
fieyaXoa-xwovd r dpxaioTrpem) [SaKpyKxieq (xrevovaa 
Tav aav 

^ ^wofiaifiovwv re rifiav, 
OTToaoi T eiroiKov dyva^ "Kala^ eSo? ve/LLOVTai, 
fieyaXoaruvcia-c a-ol<: irruxaa-t a-vyKufivova-t OvaroL 

iEscHYLUS, Prometheus Vinctus, vv. 405-421. 

1. Give the different readings and translate accordingly. 

2. Arrange this strophe and antistrophe, so that all the 
verses except the last, shall be dimeters, and scan according 
to both arrangements. What readings and arrangement 
ao you prefer, and why ? fa « »< 

3. Give scales of Glyconics Antispastic and Choriambic. 
iichi^rh''^ ^^^ meaning oi scazon, meiurus, anaolomenus, 



i: 




'':i\ 



^-'.•'•ffi»Hify» 






-. ' .. . ^ i' 









it 









1'?"^ 

iiw.%- 



1^ 



6. How many actors wore employed in the performance 
of this Tragedy ? Explain your answer. 

<>. Give an account of tho duties of the choraguSy the 
author, and tho judges in dramatic contests. 

II. 

Translate : 

'jre/nTrTr} 8' air ainov yevva irevrrjKomaTrai'i 
TTuXiv Trpo<i "Apyofj ov^ eKovtr eXevaeraL 
OijXvairopo'i, (j)evyov(Ta avyyeinj ydfiov 
ave\ln6}V' ol 8' eirTOtjfievoi <f>peva^, 
KipKoi Trekeiow ov ixaKpav XeXeifjLfMevoi, 
i'l^ovai OijpcvaoVTe^; cv drjpaa'iixov^ 
rydfjbov<;, ^Oovov he crcofxaTOiv e^ei 0eo'i' 
lleXaajia Be Be^erai, drjXvKTovM 
"Apet BafievTMV vvKTi^povm]r(p Opdaei' 
ryvin] yap civhp eKacTTOV atMvo<i arepet, 
BWqKTOP ev atpayalat ^dylraaa ^i(f)0^. 
ToidS" eV ex^^povii TOV<i e/Aou? e\9oi KuTrpt?. 
fxiau Be iraiBwv Yfiepof: OeX^ei to //.j; 
Krelvai ^vvevvov, dX}C dtrajx^XwO^cTeraL 
yv(t)/xT]v' Bvolv Be Odrepop jiovXtjo-eTaty 
kXv€IV dvdXKi<i fidXXov i) fitai(f)6vo^' 
avrrj Kar "A/070? ^aatXiKov re^et yevo<i- — 
jxaKpov Xoyov Bti tuvt etre^eXQelv ropm' — 
a7ropd<i ye firjv e/c jijaBe ^vaerai 0pa(TV<i, 
ro^ouTi KXeivb^, 09 irovwv eK twi/S' e'/te 
\i;cret. ToiovBe ^(pTjafMov 1) iTdXaiy€vi]<t 
/x^TTjp ifiol BtrjXde TnavU ©e'/xt?' 
OTToi'i Be %w7r7;, ravra Bel /xaKpov Xuyov 
elirelv, av r ovBev iKfxaOovaa KepBaveU. 

iEscuYLUS, PromctJieiisVinctus, vv. 872-81*7. 

1. Trifxirrr) yevva. Explain. 

2. 6t]Xvkt6vm to dpdaet. Give different readings ami 
translate accordingly. 

3. ^iav. Give the name, and cite the illustrative passages 
from Horace and Ovid. 

4. KXveiv. In what sense ? Give similar examples in 
Latin and English. 

5. <nropd<: e« rrja-Be. Trace this genealogy. 

6. Explain the principles of the Porsonian canons relative 
to the third, fourth and fifth feet. 



- 1 ' n?i 



.. III. 

Translate : 

To fih fjirj ayavaKTCip, & dv^pe'i ^AOrjvaiot, iirt rovrtfi 
TW yeyovoTiy on fiov KaTeylrr]<f)i(Taa6€, dWa re fioi iroWa 
^vfi^dWerai, koI ovk dveXTriarov /xoi yiyove to yeyovot 
rovTO, dWcL TToXu fidWov Oavfid^oi) eKarepwv TOiV y^iq^cov 
lov yeyovoTa dpidfiov. ov yap atfnjv e^wye ovTOi Trap 
oKiyov eaeaOaii dWd irapd ttoXv. vvu Be, to? eoiKev, el 
rpel<i fiovai ixereTreaov twv ylrijcjicov, diro'Tre^evyri dv. Me- 
Xt/toi/ ixev oTiv, tu? ifiol Sokm, kuI vvv uTroTre^evya. Koi 
ov fiouov aTTOTre^evya, dXKd iravrl ^yXov rovro ye, on 
ei /MT} dve^T} "Ai/uto? koI Avkmv KaTijyop^o-cvre^ ifiov, Kdv 
S)^\e ^tX^a? hpa^d^, ov p^eraka^oiv to ire^iirrov fJLepo<i 

Plato, Apolof/y, xxv. 

1. Write notes on to fir) dyavamelv, eKarepuiv tmv y^r'jt^oiVy 
trap oKiyov, rpeh fiovai fiereTreaov, dTTOTre^evyr], and Kav toc^Xe 
to -y^ri^wv. 

2. Explain the meaning of the judicial terms : nvaKpiai<i, 
vTrwfioa-la, irapaKUTa^oXr], eirw/SeXia, dywud dTi/jLi]Toi, diraai 
Tifiav fiaKpav. 

3. Give a brief account of the Sophists, introducing names 
and dates. 

4. "What were the peculiarities of the Socratic philosophy, 
as compared with the teachings of his predecessors ? 



■i 



lijiiiBilihifei 



.^ 



^^■l III 



' ■ ^m 



1 • ' H 



IV. 

Translate : 

212. XKoirei rocvvv, w X(t)KpaT€<;, <f)aZev dv tcro)? oi 
vofMoi, ei r)fiei<i tuvtu d\r}6rj Xeyofjuev, on, ov BUaia rjfid^ 
eTTLx^ipel'i Bpdv a vvv eTrixetpeU' rjfiek yap ae. yevvi]- 
(Tavre^, eKQpe^avTe'^^ TraiBevaavre'!:, fieTaB6vT€<i dirdvrwv 
Q)V oloi T Tjixev KoXSiV crol Tol<i dWoi<i irdat TroXiTat?, 
o/AW? wpoayopevofxev tm i^ovalav ireTvoiy^Kevai AdTjvaicov 
no fiovXofievcp, iiretBdv BoKifxaa-dfj koX iBrj rd ev rf} iroXei 
'rrpdyp.ara koX 7)fid<i T0v<i vo/xovi, m dv firj upeaKWfiev 
rjfiei^, i^eivai, Xa^ovra Ta avrov dvievat otroi dv ^ov- 
Xr]rai. koX ovheh rjfiwv rwv vofjLwv ifiTroB^v eanv ovB' 
dirayopeveL, edv re n<i ^ovXrjTai vfiMv ek diroiKiav 
UvoA, el f.ir] dpia-icoLfiev 'qp.eh re Kol rj ttoXi'?, eav re 
fxeroiKeiv dXXoae rroi eXdJav, Uvai eKeiae, ottoi dv ^ovXtj- 
rai, e^ovra rd avrov. o? 8' dv vfi&v TrapafMelvrj, 6p<av 
ov rpoTTOV rjfieh rd<i rs 8tAca9 BiKu^ofiev Koi rdXXa rr]v 





• -U 



i,ii 



. i^ 



■j"«^4*- ^i- 1- 



!• ■ ',1 ♦ 



iV>*. . 






yoXt^'^ SiotKovfxev, ijSr} (f)afi€U tovtov wfioXoyrjKevai epym 
rifuv a av rjfiel^i KeXevcofxev Tronfjaeiv tuvtu, koL rhu 
fiV Treidofievov rfjixfi (pa/xiv dSiKelv, ort re jevv7]Tai^ 
qZ(tiv f]iilv ov 'jre'idcrai, koI otl jpo^evat, kuI on 6/jlo- 
\o<yrjaa<i 7) fxf)v ireiOeadai ome neiOet rjfia^, el fif) /caXw? 
TiTTOtov/xev, 7rpoTi6evTa)vri/j.MV, Kol ouK dypico^i eirtjar- 
TovTwv TTOielv o, uv KeXevcoficv, dXXa iipievTwv Sueiv 
Odrepa, rj TreiOeiv Vf^d'i, rj iroielv, roinwv ovSerepa irnm, 

Plato, Crito^ xiii. 

1. What peculiarities in the Attic use of augments ? 

2. What are the rules for the place of the augment in 
compound verbs ? 

3. What peculiarities in the Attic use of reduplication ? 

4. Explain the use of koX By Kal, ov ya»> aXXa, Kaiirep, 
KULTOi, dfieXei, ryviKU. 

5. Give an account of BoKiixaaia ek avhpa^. 

6. State briefly what you know of Athenian colonies. 












mni\)tvult» of ^otonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G1. 



THIRD YEAR. 



LATIN. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



Examiners • i ^^^- ^^^^ McCaul, LL.D. 



I. 



Translate : 



Nominatse jam antea consulibus provincise erant, turn 
sortiri jussi : Cornelio Hispania, Sempronio Africa cum 
Sicilia ovenit. Sex in eum annum decretse legiones et 
socium quantum ipsis videretur, et classis quanta parari 
posset. Quatuor et viginti peditum Romanorum millia 
sunt scripta et mille octingenti equites, sociorum qua- 
draginta millia peditum, quatuor millia et quadringenti 
equites : naves ducentse, viginti quinqueremes, celoces 
viginti deductse. Latum inde ad populum, vellent 
juberent populo Carthaginiensi bellum indici : ejusque 
belli causa supplicatio per urbem habita atque adorati 
dii, ut bene ac feliciter eveniret quod bellum populua 
Romanus jussisset. Inter consules ita copiae divisae : 
Sempronio datae legiones duse — ea quaterna millia erant 
peditum et treceni equites — et sociorum sedecim millia 
peditum, equites mille octiugenti, naves longse centum 
sexaginta, celoces duodecim : cum his terrestribus ma- 
H ritimisque copiis Tib. Sempronius missus in Siciliam, 

ita in Africam transmissurus, si ad arcendum Italia Pae- 
num consul alter satis esset : Cornelio minus copiarum 
datum, quia L. Manlius praetor et i" cum haud inva- 









■: '^m 



4' . 









p5 " --• ' -' ''■ {.' 






<h 



^■'.* 



V ' ' ", ■ 






lido prcesidio in Galliam mittebatur: navium maxime 
Cornelio numcrus deminutus : sexagintia quinqucremes 
datac — ncquo enira mari vcnturum ant ca parte belli 
dimicaturum hostem crcdebant — et dune Romana) le- 
giones cum suo justo equitatu et quatuordecltn millibus 
bociorum pcditum, equitibus millo sexcentis. Duas 
Icgiones Romanas ct decern millia sociorum peditum, 
mille equitcs socios, sexcentos Romanes Gallia pro- 
vincia oodcm versa in Punicum bcllum habuit. 

LiVY, B. xxi., c. 17. 

1. Provinicce. What was the first Roman province? 
Into what two classes were the provinces divided under the 
emperors ? Describe the form of government of each. 

2. Socium. What general class of 'nouns of the second 
declension take this form of the genitive plural ? 

3. Ipsis. Explain. 

4. Socii. Explain the phrase socii 7iomen Latinum. 

5. Supplicato. For what two different reasons might one 
be decreed ? 

6. Praetor. Explain the distinction between proetor and 
proprcetor ? When there were two praetors, what were they 
respectively designated ? 

7. Ju%to equitatu. Explain. 

8. Duas legiones: Jiahuit. Give different interpre- 
tations. 

9. Expand the numerals : IC, IqC, CIq, Iqq. What is 
the rule for the case of the objects specified, where smaller 
numbers follow millia ? 



Km 






II. 

Translate : 

Romam tantus terror ex hac clade perlatus est, ut 
jam ad urbera Romanam crederent infestis signis hos- 
tem venturum, nee quicquam spei aut auxilii esse, qua 
portis moenibusque vim arcerent : uno consule ad Tici- 
num victo, altero ex Sicilia revocato duobus consulibus 
duobus Gonsularibu.s exercitibus victia — nuos alios duces, 
quas alias legiones esse quae arcessantur ? ita territis 
Sempronius consul advenit, ingenti periculo per eflfusos 
passim ad praedandum hostium equites, audacia ma- 



gia quam consilio aut spc fallondi rcsistcmlive, si non 
fallcret, trangressus. Iil quod unum maxinio in praj- 
sentia desidcrabatur, comitiis consularibus habitia in 
hibcrna rcdiit: crcati consulcs Cn. Servilius ct. C. 
Flaminius. 

Caeterum no hibcrna quidcm Romanis quieta crant, 
vagantibus passim Numidis cquitlbus ct, quicquo iis im- 
pcditiora crant, Celtibcris Lusitanisquc : omnes igitur 
undiquo clausi eommcatus crant nisi quoa Pado naves 
subveherent. Emporium propo Placentium fuit et 
opere magno munitum ct valido firmatuiri pr;x!sidio : 
ejus castelli cxpugnandi spc cum cquitibus ac lovi 
armatura profectus Hannibal, quum plurimum in ce- 
lando inccpto ad effcctum spei liabuissct, nocto adortus 
non fcfellit vigiles : tantus repente clamor est sublatus 
ut Placcntioc quoquc audiretur : itaquc sub lucom cum 
equitatu consul adcrat jussis quadrato agmine legio- 
nibus scqui. 

LiVY, B. xxi., c. 57. 

1. Give the derivations of: clades, -infestus^ siffnum, 
passim, fallo, comitia, commeatus, vigil, sequor. 

2. Write notes upon : infestis signis — qui a portis — uno 
consule — Ticinum — com itiis consularibus — quxque iia — 
quadrato agmine — Placentia. 



m 



> ■ 



=- 1 



.1! 






, r.i 



■ ^1 



III. 

1. From whom did Livy borrow most of his account of the 
passage of the Alps ? 

2. Who composed the so-called supplements to the books 
of Livy ? Characterise them. 

3. Who was the first Roman historian ? In what language 
did he write ? IIow is he connected Avith the subject of the 
21st book of Livy ? 

IV. 

Translate : 

Postremo, promptis jam et aliis seditionis ministris, 
velut contionabundus interrogabat : 

Cur paucis centurionibus,, paucioribus tribunis, in 
modum servorum obedirent ? quando ausnros exnoscere 
remedia, nisi novum et nutantem adhuc principem pre- 
cibus vel armis adirent V satis per tot annos ignavia 
peccatum, quod tricena aut quadragena stipendia senes, 



^1 

1 




1 vl 






.^i ■ )-i' 









ct I truncato ex vulnoribua cornoro, tolerent : 

^% diuiissi quidem finern <?8so rnilitino, sea apnd vexillura 
r^tontos alio V'ouabulo cosdein iabovcs pcrferre. Ac si 
quia tot casus vita yupcraveiit, tra'a adhuo divorsas in 
tprrns, ubi per iiomcn agrorum uligincs paludum vol 
iuculta montium m 'ipiant. Enimvero inilitiam ipsam 
Ifravetn, infructuosaiii ; dcnin in diem assibus aniinain 
i4 co)p'J3 tv^dtimari : liinc vest, n, arum, tcntoria, hinc 
sajvitiaij ccnturionum et vacationes inuncruni redirai. 
At herculo verbera et vulncra, duram hiemcm, exercitag 
it'statcs, belliim atrox aut stcrilcm paccni scmpiterna ; 
ncc aliud Icvamcntuiii quam si ccrtis sub logibus militia 
inirctur, ut singulos dcuarios mercrcnt, sextns decumus 
stipendii annus fincm aflferret ; no ultra sub vcxillis 
tcnerentur, scd iisdcm in castris premium pccunia sol- 
veretur. An prretorias coliortos, quaj binos denarioa 
acceperint, qua) post sedccim annos pcnatibus suis rcd- 
dantur, plus pcriculoruni suscipere ? Non obtrcctari a 
86 urbanas oxcubias: sibi tamcn apud horridas gentese 
contuberniis hostcm aspici. 

Taoitus, Annahy B. I., c. 17. 

1. Write brief notes upon : 2^^omptia Jam et aim — 
ausuros — stipendla — alio vocabulo — singulos denarios — 
prsetorias cohortes— contuberniis. 

V. 

1. What works of Tacitus have been preserved to modern 
times ? 

2. Who first gave the name of " annals" to that from 
which the preceding passages arc selected ? Discuss the 
appropriateness of the term. 

3. Give the names of other authorities for the history of 
the early emperors with particulars of each. 

4. Mention peculiarities of Tacitus in the syntax offinoi, 
potiri, adipisci, and praeaidere. 

5. Give peculiar modes adopted by him of writing : quo- 
tidie, epi -ola, soevum, toties, decimus, transmittere, and 
inclitus. 



r^Mf; 



. 31 



Pi] 



(nnfbetofti; of rototito* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS . 1864. 



THIRD YEAR. 



GREEK AND LATIN. 

HONORS. 



4' 



« _ . f Rev. John McCaul, LL.D. 
■^^^'^^^^^^-tTiioMAsMoss, M.A. 



.' * 



pi 



I. 

XO. o<TTt9 Tov rrXeovo^ fiipovt 
XPV^^^ T^oO /xerpiov irapeU 
fcoetv, (TKaioavvav ^vKaaarwv 
iv €/xol Kardhrfko^ ecrrai. 
eirel ttoWo, fxev al /xaKpal 
afxepai KariOevro Br) 
XuTra? eyyvTepo), ra rip- 
irovra 8' ovk av thov^ ottov, 
orav ri<; i<i ifKeov rrrear) 
TOV 6ekovTo<i' 6 8' eirlKovpo^ laoTeXearo'i, 
"AtSo? oTe Mot/j' dvvfiivaio'i 
a\v/309 a-)(ppo^ dva'7recl>7}V6, 
0avaTO<s e? reXevTav. 

Sophocles, (Edip. Colon., vv. 1211-1223. 

1. Mark the quantity of each syllable, scan, and give 
the metrical name of each verse. 

2. Notice different readings, and translate accordingly. 

3. Explain the construction of tov fieTpiov irapeh ^(oetVf 
anc^ « TjrXeov Tricrrj tov deXovTO^, 



.; 



■,r\ 





' n 


:;,iJ^^^^^B 


^ J__ 


■ 1- ' *t- ., ■' ^, ,' 


j'"*^^^^^B 


mii 


■■■H^ 


'i- ''flH^B 




1' 






s - - 


'si^^^H 



4. What are the arrangements denominated EpodicA, 
Meaodica, Proodiea, Periodica, Palinodiea^ koto, TrepiKoirr^v 
avofjboio/xeprj, and d-rroKeXvfj^iva ? 

6. Give examples of words differing in quantity in the 
Epic and the Attic writers. 

6. What are the metres called JEolic, Logaoedic, P'-osodiac, 
and Anacreontic ? 



li^iiii. 




II. 

Translate : 

AN. alai, ecTLV ecri vwv Bfj 

ov TO fXev, dXko Be firji Trarpof; efi^vrov 

aXacrrov al^a Bvar/Jiopoiv arevd^eiv, 

(Ltlvl tov itoKvv 

aXkore jxev ttovov efiireBov elypiiev, 

ev Trvfidro) 8' d\6yLara nrapoiaofiev 

ihovre kol TraOovaa. 
XO. Tt 8' €(TTiv ; An. ecxTiv fiev eiKaaaL, (ptXoi, 
XO- l3i^r)Kev; 
AN. CO? fidXicT av el irodm \d^oi<i> 

Tt 'fdp, OT(p fir)T "Apr)'; 

firjTe ir6vT0<i dvreKvpaev^ 

ddKOTTOi he ifkdKe^ efjbap>^av 

ev d^aveZ tivl fiopw ^epofievov. 

rdXatva' vwv 8' oKedpia 

vii^ eV ofji/jLacriv ^i^uKe. 

TTw? fydp r/ riv diriav ydv 

7} TTOVTiov kXvScov d\u}fievai l^lov 

BvaoiaTOV e^o/xev rpoijydv : 
l2. ou KdroiBa. Kara [xe ^ovio^s 

'AtiSa9 e\oL Trarpl 

rdXatvaV 009 efMoiy 6 fiiWwv /3to9 ov ^i(OTO<i. 
XO. CO BiBvfJia reKvcov dpicrra, 

TO <f)epov eK Oeov koKw^ 

in}Bev dyav (fyXiyeaOuV ov tol Kard/jbeTrr e^tjTov, 

AN. 7r66o<? KOL KttKWV dp* rjv Tt<i. 

Kol yap b firjBafid Brj to (piXov, (jjiXoW 
oTTOTe 76 Kot rov ev %e/30ty Ka7el')(pv. 
<o Trdrep, w ^iaov, 
w Toy del Kara yd<i (tkotov elfJieuo<i' 
ovB^ yap (OV d(j)l\r]ro<; ifiot irore 
Kal raBe fir) Kvpri<Trj<i. 

Sophocles, (Edip, Colon., vv. 1670-1703. 



- ■■^'■m*i?-^ 



1. pistinguish Oolonus Hippius and Colonus AgoraeuSy 
and give an account of each. 

2. Write notes on Ihovre koI iradovaai eanv /xev iiKcicrai, 
0)9 jiakKTT dv elf aniav ydv, e^rjTOV. 

3. Distinguish d7rd\oyela9ac and aTroXoyi^earOat,, dpn and 
aoTimi arifiovTai and ari/j,d^€Tai, 'ivhov and ecrci), ipcoTr]at<;, 
irev(Ti<;, and dvdKpicn<i, Kaipo<i and ■^^povo'i, oXlyov and iiticpbv. 

4. Give examples of Synseresis and Sijnaloeplie, dis- 
tinguishing crasis, eethlipsiSf and aphecresis. Wiiat reasons 
for believing that there is no essential difference between 
gynseresi^ and synaloaphe ? On what grounds has the rule 
of Person and Dawes relative to the subscription and 
omission of the iota in certain cases been impugned ? 

5. State briefly what you know of any dramas that 
were represented before the time of iEschylus, introdu- 
cing names and dates where you can. 

6. Explain the meaning of inOovyia, avrocr'xeBida-fiaTa, 
hucdhov, (TTaaifiov, i/xfJieXtia, CKorKeva, and vTroKoXiria. 

III. 

Translate ? 

Ph. Itane patris ais conspectum veritum hinc abi- 

isse ? Ge. Admodum. 
Ph. Phanium relictara solam ? Ge. Sic. Ph. Et 

iratum senem ? 
Ge. Oppido. Pn. Ad to summa solum, Phormio, 

rerum redit. 
Tute hoc intristi: tibi omne est exe^endum. Ac- 

cingere. 
Ge. Obsecro te. Ph. Si rogabit. Ge. In te spes est. 

Ph. Eccere ; 
quid si reddet ? Ge. Tuimpulisti. Ph. Sic opinor. 

Ge. Subveni. 
Ph. Cede senem: jam instructa. sunt mihi corde 

consilia omnia. 
Ge. Quid ages? Ph. Quid vis? nisi uti maneat 

Phanium : atque ex crimine hoc 
Antiphonem eripiam: atque in me omnem iram de- 

rivem senia ? 
Ge. vir fortis atque amicus. Verum hoc saepe, 

Phormio, 

nique. Ph. Ah, 









i'.* 



pf 



liOn ita est : factum e8t periclum, jam fpedum vi- 

sast via. 
Quot me censes homines iam deverberasse usque ad 

necem, 
hospites, tum cives ? quo magis novi, tanto sae 

pius. 
Cedodum, en unquam injuriarum audisti mihi scrip 

tam dicam ? 
Ge. Qui istun ? Ph. Quia non rete accipitri tendi 

tur neque miluo, 
qui male faciunt nobis: illis qui nil faciunt, ten 

ditur : 
quia enim in illis fructus est, in istis opera lu 

ditur. 
Aliis aliunde est periclum, unde aliquid abradi po 

test; 
mihi sciunt nil esse. Dices, ducent damnatum do 

mum. 

Terence, Phormio, Act II., Scene 2. 



If. 



••'• 









m ■ 



'1 



1. Write brief notes upon the following words and 
phrases: Admodum ; summa rerum ; intristi; eccere; si 
reddet ; iram derivem ; nervum ; scriptam dicam ; ducent 
damnatum domum; cedodum. 

IV. 

Translate': 

• 

An. Quid hie coeptat, aut quo evadet hodie? Ge. 

An legibus 
daturum poenas dices, si illam ejecerit ? 
Iam id exploratumst. Heja, sudabis satis, 
si cum illo inceptas homine : ea eloquentia est. 
Verum pono esse victum cum : at tandem tamen 
non capitis ejus res agitur, sed pecuniae. 
Postquam hominem his verbis sentio mollirier ; 
soli sumus nunc hie, inquam ; eho, quid vis dari 
tibi in manura, ut herus his desistat litibus : 
haec hinc facessat, tu molostus ne sies. 
An. Satin illi di sunt propitii ? Ge. Nam sat scio, 
si tu aliquam partem aequi bonique dixeris, 
ut est ille bonus vir, tria non comrautabitis 
verba hodie inter vos. De. Quis te istaec jussit 

loqui ? 
Oh. Immo non potuit melius pervenirier 
eo quo no3 volumus. An. Occidi. Ch. Perge eloqui. 



GrE. A primo homo insanibat. t)E. Cedo, quid po- 

stulat ? 
Ge. Quid ? nimium. Ch. Quantum libuit, die. Ge. 

Siquis daret 
talentum magnum. De. Immo malum hercle : ut nil 

pudet ! 

Terence, PhormiOj Act IV., Scene 3. 

1. Heja. Whence derived? 

2. Verum pono. What other readii^g ? 

3. Talentum. Why called magnum ? Give ita sub- 
divisions. 

4. Explain : fl Plaudite ; Calliopius recensui. 

5. Mention the principal varieties of Trochaic verse used 
by Terence. 

6. What do you consider the true explanation of the 
so-called eomio licenses in the Terentian metres ? 

7. State any reason for supposing that the Phormio was 
familiar to the Roman public before it was placed on the 
stage by Terence. 

8. Explain fdbulse prcetextatse, togatse, planipedes and 
Atellana. 

9. Translate and explain : Modos fecit tibizs paribus 
dextris et sinistris. What were the tibise dextroi and tibise 
sinistra^ also called ? 

10. What Avriters of the New Comedy does Terence prin- 
cipally imitate ? Give instances. 

11. Compare and contrast the styles of Plautus and 
Terence. 



■ * %4 



I . 







'H\H 




■ ' t rijlft-iiir'ftiv 1^ 


ii 


1 1 ff -^Ip 


1 



ai;4is.i/.;,.[;:|,s 







Unii^tvmn of Sovonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18G4. 



THIRD YEAR 



HYDROSTATICS AiNl) OPTICS, 



Examiner: Rev. W. Jones, B.A. 




, Sft i.'" -*ij 



1. Define a fluid and shew from your definition that the 
pressure of a fluid upon a rigid surface in contact with it is 
entirely normal to the surface. What is meant by the pressure 
at a point in a fluid ? How is it measured ? 

2. Define specific gravity, and explain the meaning of the 
symbols in the equation IF^SF. What is the unit of weight 
implied in this equation ? 

Find the weight of a cubical block of iron whose edge is 
10 inches, having given the specific gravity of iron 7.844, and 
the weight of a cubic foot of water 1000 ounces. 

3. Investigate an expression for the total normal pr< ssure on 
a plane surface immersed in a fluid. 

A rectangle immersed in a fluid, with one side in tiie surface, 
is divided by horizontal lines into 7i such parts that the pressures 
upon them are all equal ; shew that the breadth of the r^^ i^ 
to that of the (r+l)tb part as ^JZ. yj'r-l is to y/V-yi—^r . 

4. State Boyle's law regarding the pressure of an elastic 
fluid, and describe an experiment by which it is verified. 

A cylinder is placed with its axis horizontal, and a 
closely fitting piston is in equilibrium at a distance a from the 
bottom of the cylinder. A certain force will pull it out through 
a distance i; find how far the same force acting the other way 
would push it in. 

5. Describe and explain the working of Smealon's air-pump. 
Shew that if A, B be the respective volumes of the 

receiver and of the cylinder, and h the height of the latter, the 



- ( 



listance 



/> 



}. 



valve, supposerl weightless, will open during the (n-|-l)t'» 
stroke, when the piston has nscencied through u di 

{'-(if^)" 

6. Upon what property of bodies docs the principle of the 
thermometer depend ? Describe how Fahrenheit's thermome- 
ter is filled and graduated. 

If F, C, R indicate the same temperature on Fahrenheit'tJ, 
the centigrade, and Reaumur's thermometers respectively. 

shew that — =_- = — . 

9 5 4 

If a certain temperature be indicated on the centigrade 
and Fahrenheit's thermometers respectively by numbers in the 
ratio of 1 : 2 ; find the number which indicates it on Reau- 
mur's thermometer. 

7. Distinguish between physical and geometrical optics. 
State the laws of reflection and refraction of light. 

A circle which reflects lighi from its inner surface has two 
holes in it ; determine the course of a ray, which, entering at 
one hole, after four reflections passes out at the other. 

8. A luminous point is placed between two parallel plane 
mirrors; find the distances from it of its successive images. 

Ifi^be the point, -Pj. ^^,, /*,... its successive images, 
shevv thai l\l\ = Fl\, 1\F^ = I\P^ , 1\1\ = PJ\ . . . 

9. What is meant by the critical angle of a medium ? Define 
the refracting angle of a prism. 

Shew that a ray refracted through a prism denser than the 
surrounding medium, in a plane perpendicular lo its edge, will be 
turned towards the thicker part of the prism. 

If the refracting angle of a prism be equal to the critical 
angle of the medium of which it is formed ; prove that an inci- 
dent ray nearly parallel to one face will pass out of the prism at 
right angles to the other face. 

10. Find the geometrical focus of a pencil of rays directly 
incident upon a concave mirror. 

Shew that the conjugate foci move in opposite directions. 

11. Describe the Astronomical Telescope, and trace the course 
of a pencil of rays through it. 

12 Explain the formation of the primary rainbow. 

How must a person be situated m order to see it ] She \V 
that the order of colours in tlie secondary bow is the reverse of 
that in the primary bow. 



i-'-J 






: . *l 






. ■^1 



■^1 



•" ' ,' h' > 



' l| 



>, 



. «4 




■X 



IM 



'4 



1. Stat 
couples, 
directions 
two direci 
and tlie oi 

2. Fine 
rigid syst( 
couple. ] 
z) be all 
shew that 
single for( 

and in caa 

3. Inve 

system is 

Iftl 
be paralle' 

Und 
at rest ? 

4. Slie\ 
the centre 
density at 
point Iron 

5. Whe 
given fore 
any point 



Wini\)tvuit» of Eovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



THIKD YEAE. 



m 

i;il 



STATICS AND DYNAMICS. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: J. B. Cherkiman, M.A. 



1. State and prove the principle of the parallelogram of 
couples. Having given the components of a couple in two 
directions, at right angles to each other, find the components in 
two directions, one of which coincides with one of the former, 
and the other is inclined at a given angle to this. 

2. Find the conditions that a given set of forces acting on a 
rigid system may be reducible (1) to a single force (2) to a single 
couple. If the forces (of which the type is i^ at the point Xy y, 
2) be all parallel to the line whose direction cosines are /, w, n, 
shew that in case (1) the equations to the line of action of the 
single force are 

and in case (2), find the moment of the resultant couple. 

3. Investigate the conditions of equilibrium when a rigid 
system is kept at rest by assigned forces. 

If three forces keep a rigid system at rest, they must either 
be parallel, or pass through the same point. 

Under what circumstances will three couples keep a system 

at rest? ^ 

4. Shew how to find the centre of gravity of any body. Find 
the centre of gravity of a circular oblique cone, in which the 
density at any point varies as some power of the distance of the 
point from the base. 

5. When a flexible string is kept at rest under the action of 
given forces in one plane, obtain an expression for the tension at 
any point 



■| : 



^■''/•'^.a 






.it 1 



Kl 



■^ 



iJt:?'^ 



If the forces be all parallel, and t be the tension at a point 
where the tangent makes an angle yjr with the direction of the 
forces, prove that t sin -x^ id the same throtighout. 

G. Show how to find the increase of length in an elastic 
string, when sti-etched by any forces in direction of its length. 

A string which is slightly extensible (X, the constant of 
.Hooke's law, being small) is kept upon a smooth plane curve, 
being fastened at one point of it, by a uniform force / acting at 
each point along the tangent, shew that the pressure of the string 
upon the curve at a point where the radius of curvature is p, 
and 8 is the length of the arc measured from the free end of the 
string, is 

- (A + h^f^') 

7. When one body rests upon another fixed, having a point of 
their surfaces in contact, and the surfaces being sufficiently 
rough to prevent sliding, shew how to find whether the equili- 
brium is stable or unstable. 

A segment of a uniform paraboloid of revolution, cut ofi" 
by a plane at right angles to the axis, and at a distance from the 
vertex equal to -j latus-rectum, rests (vertex downwards, and 
axis vertical) within a fixed spherical bowl whose radius is equal 
to the latus-rectum. Determine the nature of the equilibrium. 

8. Find the attraction of a uniform circular arc on a point 
situated in its median line, the law of attraction being that of 
the inverse square of the distance. 

If a particle move freely under this attraction from the 
centre of the circle to the chord of the arc, find the velocity 
acquired. 

9. A particle describing a plane orbit, obtain expressions for 
the velocities and accelerations of velocities along the radius- 
vector, and perpendicularly to it. 

If the acceleration perpendicular to the radius-vector lo 
always proportional to the velocity in that direction, the areas 
swept out will increase in a geometric progression as the timefi 
increase in an arithmetic. 

10. Force varying as the distance from a fixed point, determine 
the position and dimensions of the orbit when the circumstances 
of motion at an assigned point are given. 

If e be the excentricity, /a the absolute force, t the time of 
moving between two points where the directions of motion are at 
right angles, and for which the vectorial angles mea.sured from 
the apse-line are a, /3, shew that 

imQ — tana = e^ V 1 — s'- tan ( v'/T 0- 



11. I'orce to centre varying as (distance) —*, find the orbit 
where the velocity at an apse ia e(inal to (1), the velocity in a 
circle at that distance ; (2), die velocity which would be acquired 
by falling freely from an infinite distance Lat point under the 
action of the force. 

'"12. A particle moves on a smooth fixed plane curve under 
given forces, determine the velocity at any point, and the pressure 
on the curve. 

A rigid parabola is fixed in a vertical plane, with its axis 
vertical, and vertex upwards, 4 m being its latus-rectum. A 
particle is projected from the vertex along the curve, and acted 
on by gravity ; shew that it will not leave the curve, whether it 
be moving on the upper or on the under side, if the height due 
to the velocity of projection lie between ^3 wi and ^m. 



^r.i 




i^-S^^.<~'' 







an 



Bniiitv&iti} of STotonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



THIRD YEAR 

HYDROSTATICS AND OPTICS- 

HONORS. 



Examiner : J. B. Ciierriman, M.A. 



1. Investigate an expression for the pressure at any point of a 
fluid kept at rest by given forces. 

A sphere is filled with a heavy incompressible fluid which 
is acted on by a reinilsivc force tending from the centre and vaiy- 
ing as any function of the distance, as well as by gravity ; shew 
that if the pi-essure at the highest point be equal to the weight 
of a column of fluid whose height is equal to the radius, the pres- 
sures upon the upper and lower halves of the sphere are as 3 to 5. 

2. Obtain the co-ordinates of the centre of pressure of a plane 
surface exposed to a heavy incompressible fluid. 

How could it be ascertained whether a curved surface has 
a centre of pressure 1 

If a hemispherical surface be just submerged with a tangent 
to its base in the surface of the fluid, the normal at the centre of 
pressure makes an angle cos ~^ l with the base. 

3. Obtain the conditions of eipiilibi-ium when a body floats in 
a fluid (1) freely, (2) under constraint. 

A thin uniform rod (length, 2a) supported by a string at 
one end floats in a heavy fluid where the density varies as the 
nth power of the depth, the rod being inclined to the vertical at 
an angle Q and having its centre in the surface of the fluid. 
Shew that if the rod floated freely in a vertical position, the 
length immersed would be 



a cos d 



1 
n+l 



+ 



1 \-L 



n 



+ 2 



n+l. 



■v ■ 




iitii 




"9 


^^ffi 


■'".*'■ . , •-' 
■ --'t '' ' 
i ■_ • '. 

1 


v;^^H 


1 


f';M 


II 


1 




4H • 



U n"^^ 



4. Explain accurately -what is meant by the »neiacew<re, and 
stew how the nature of the equilibnum depends on its position. 

An clli])tic lamina floats vertically in a fluid of double its 
density, And the character of the equilibrium in its two positions. 

5. Investigate the relation 

p = kp(l-\-at) 

stating accurately the nature of the constants involved ; and if 
the values of k, a for a certain gas be given with reference to the 
centigrade thermometer, determine their values for Fahrenheit's. 

Given volumes (T, V) of two gases at different tempera- 
tures and i)reasures are put into a closed vessel (V-{- V), and the 
tt'.mi)eratui*e is then reduced to ; determine the pressure of the 
mixture. 

6. When a pencil of light is incident directly on a spherical 
reflector, determine where the extreme ray cuts the axis after 
reflection. 

If the pencil consist of parallel rays, and its breadth be 2y, 
which is small comijared with the radius (r), shew that the longi- 
tudinal and lateral aberrations are 

^-- and -^ . 

7. When a small oblique pencil is incident on a plane refracting 
surface, explain the formation of the focal lines. 

If a straight line, below the sui'face of water and parallel to it, 
is viewed by an eye above the surface somewhere in the vertical 
plane containing the line, find the form of the image constituted 
by secondary foci. 

8. Find the position of the focal lines Avhen a small pencil is 
obliquely refracted through a i)rism, the axis being near to the 
edge, and shew under what circumstances the foci will coincide. 

What is the bearing of this latter observation upon New- 
ton's experiment 1 

If i be the angle of the prism, yu- the refractive index for 
mean rays, dfi the difference of fx for the extreme rays, and a ray 
pass with minimum deviation, shew that the whole dispersion of 
the ray is 



V { co^ec' |_;x» I 



9. Investigate the position of the geometrical focus of a pencil 
after direct passage through a thin lens. 

When a convex huj, is used as a simple microscope, having 



given the least distance of distinct vision, find the greatest angle 
under which a given straight line can be seen. 

10. State the different conditions which require to be fulfilled 
in forming an achromatic combination according aa it is to be 
employed as an object-glass or an eye-glass in a telescope. 

Find the distance between two given lenses on the same axis 
which will render the pair achromatic in the two cases respectively, 
retaining only first powers of the differences of refractive index, 
and supposing the incident rays to be parallel to the axis. Shev/ 
that in the first case the two lenses cannot be of the same name ; 
and in the second case, both cannot be concave, but they may be 
convex unless they are of the same substance and of equal focal 
length. 

11. In the common astronomical telescope, find the angular 
magnitude of the field of view when the ragged edge is stopped 
out. 

For a short-sighted person, will thjs field be larger or smaller t 

12. When a full pencil of parallel rays falls on a refracting 
sphere and emerges after any number of internal reflections, 
shew that there are two rays which undergo a minimum deviation. 

Shew how this result is applied in the explanation of the 
rainbow, and having given the magnitude of this deviation, and 
assuming that it is least for the red and greatest for the violet 
rays, shew how to determine which color is nearest the sun. 









^"". a 




t~ 



'il 



~ 41" .4 *' .• » 



mm. 



EOl 



1. : 

of an 



2. ] 

how i 
functi 

equati 
(i 

(" 
(iii 
3. 

1 

4. 
equat: 
auxili 
satisii 
the gi 



mnmvuits of SToronto, 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



THIRD YEAR. 



EQUATIONS, INTEGRAL CALCULUS, AND 

GEOMETRY, 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



Examiner : Rev. W. Jones, B.A. 



,i !»•.:■ 



1. Investigate the relations between the coefficients and roots 
of an equation. 

Find the sum of the cubes of the roots of the equation 
cc' — ;?x* -{■ qx — r = 0. 

2. Having given a, b, c the roots of an equation, explain 

how to obtain an equation whose roots are given symmetrical 
functions of a,b, c 

The equation a^+qx+r—o has roots a, b, c ; form the 
equations whose roots are 

(i.) be, ca, ab ; 

be ac ab 
(iii.) a»+6'-a6, A^+c'-Jc, c'-irO^-ca. 

3. Resolve a;^"— 2 a;« cos 0+-1 into its quadratic factors. 

2 TT 

Hence shew that (x'»-l)'=(x-l)x(x'-2a;cos - + 1) 

X(x'-2a:cos-+l) (a;»-2a;.cos — ^^+ 1/ 

4. Describe fully Sturm's method of separating the roots of au 
equation. Shew how the process will be simplified if one of the 
auxiliary functions have no real root. What condition must be 
satisfied by the series of functions in order that all the roots of 
the given equation may be real 1 



m 



■*' ^^i-* 



5;?!-: 



W^ 


*'9^^^^^E 




r'^^^H 


^ 


^-. J 


H 


^^'Miu ^^^1 



has. 



Find how many real roots the equation a*— Sx'+Sa+l-o 



5. Integrate the following functions 
vJ :r-r-i-~z-» v."-; -, (m.) 



(ii \ tancB ... N cos 'x 

a + bcoH X '' ./ 1 a. „an if* ^ '"^ 1 + rt sin x * 



•v/ 1 + sec a; 

and find a formula of reduction for the integration of ^^^ "^ 

^ cos »"^ • 

6. Shew how to change the variables in a double integral. 
Cha nge th e order of integration in the expression 

V Vdxdy; also change the variables to r and i 

in the expression ^ J V dx dy, having given a« + yj=j. 
and ?^= t. 



a; 



/2a /»« 

/(a;) dx^2j f (x) dx, or = 0, according 

M/(2a-.a:) = ±/(x). 

8. Prove the following 

(i.) J ^ log (sin x)dx = ^ log ^, 

/OO aaj 5 

c sin bx dx = ^rpj, 

/OO — » n 
c a; f^a: = L!i. 



9. Find the equation to the plane diametral to the chords 

a* 1J 2 
parallel to the line _. ^ i- = for a surface of the second 
I m n 

degree. 

Find it when the surface is the ellipsoid — + ?^ -|- _* =1. 

d^ b* c* 

Find also the direction of the chords of this ellipsoid which are 
bisected by the plane Ix + wiy + nz = 0. 

10. Describe a method of finding the equation to a cylindrical 
surface which has its axis parallel to a given line, and which 
envelopes a given surface of the second degree. 

Shew that the equation to the cylindrical surface whose 



axis is parallel to the line, and which envelopes the surface, whose 
equations are gaven in question 9, is 

11. If p, p,' and H be the respective radii of curvature of the 
principal and normal sections of a surface, shew that 

i =-i cos' e + --, sin' 9, 
Ji p p' 

where is the angle between the planes of one of the 
principal and of the normal section. 

Define a line of curvature of a surface, and investigate the 
differential equation to the lines of curvature. 

(^VdW^WdV) dx=(WdU-^UdW) dy^iXJdY-^ VdU) dz. 




\ , 






hA 



> * k ' 

* '■■. 




il 
'm 

'^#11 

s ■ 



^! 




'■'Iff* 



iinibetrfiifti? of ^ovonta. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



THIRD YEAR 






1 r» 



i Rl 



CO-ORDINATE GEOMETRY AND DIFFEREN- 
TIAL CALCULUS. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



Examiner : J. B. Cherriman, M.A. 



1. Shew how to find the centre and axes of the curve repre- 
sented by the general equation of the second order between rect- 
angular co-ordinates. Examine the geometrical signification of 
the conditions under which a parabola, a circle, or a rectangular 
hyperbola may be represented liy the equation 

&+D(J-i-o+(^■■I) (!'+!■ -o=«- 

2. Explain the method of expressing the eqiiation to a straight 
line in trilinear co-ordinates, and find the condition that two lines 
whose equations are given may be parallel. 

3. Investigate the harmonic projierties of a complete quadrila- 
teral. If a conic be described having the third diagonal for the 
chord of contact to the other two as tangents, shew that the points 
of intersection of this conic with two o})posite sides of the quad- 
rilateral lie, two and two, on lines which meet in the intersection of 
the other opposite sides. 

4. If a, /3, 7, be trilinear co-ordinates of any point in a line, 
and a', B', 7', be those of another ])oiiit in the line at distance 
T from the former, shew tliat 

^-«' ^ ^^z^ ^ 7-7' ^ J. ^ 
t m n 

h w, n being constants connected by a certain relation. 



'A 






»' 














.' 


I 


^4¥ 


! 


t»- 




1 


t4 






^ i 


\ 


'■»; 


1 




^ 


*. 


»- 






*• '->'-.H. 




VT, 



.m 



Find the intersections of this line with the conic whose equa- 
tion is ^ (« j3, %) = 0, being a homogeneous function of the 
second order, and shew that the centre of the conic is given by 
]_dp 1 dtp _ }_ d<l> 
a da ~ b (^ ^ ~c~ d-y ' 
where a, h, c, are the sides of the triangle of reference. 

5. State Lagrange's Theorem, and deduce Laplace's. 
Expand x in ascending powers ofy from the equation 

i/:^x{A+Bi/+Cf+Df+ ) 

6. If a plane curve roll on a fixed straight line, shew how to find, 
(1.) The locus of any given point in its plane. 

(2.) The envelope of any given straight line in its plane. 

The rolling curve being a circle, find the above when the 
given point is on the circumference, and the given line is a 
diameter of the circle. 

7. To find the maxima and minima values of a function of 
several variables. 

Find when xi/z is a maximum or minimum, where 

i-^r + ii-r + (f )- = '• 

Is there any way of ascertaining in this case or in the 
general one whether the value determined is a maximum or a 
minimum 1 

8. Find the angle between two planes whose equations are 
given in rectangular co-ordinates. 

Find the equation to a plane containing the two sti'aight lines, 



/ on n 

(ii)^x+Sy-f-a=0. 



A'x+B'j/+az=.0. 



9. Find the general functional and the differential equation to 
cylindrical surfaces. 

A. thin wire in the form of a helix is laid on the ground 
with its axis due north and south ; find the form of its shadow 
at noon. 

10. Trace the form of the hyperboloid, 

Shew that through any point of it two straight lines can 
be drawn wholly coinciding with the surface, and find the locus 
of the points where these two Hi 
other. 



are at right angles to each 



i ,'tl ■ 



11. Find the locus of the middle jwlnts of chords In an ellipsoid 
which pass tlirougli a jfiven j)olnt, and the locus of the centres of 
the sections made by planes ])asHiug througli a given line. 

12. Shew how to discriminate the species of the surface repre- 
sented by the general equation of the second degree between three 
rectangular co-ordinates. 

Examine the surface 



Ml 

r fc'I 



' 


(t 




♦ 


. S\f.\ 


.!•, 


•5 ■ 












% 




u 


! 1 


'l 

I 








:\l 


V 






• -'.f 




1 ^* 






• •'» '4 


;C 


V, 




, ' 





\ri 



Mi 




asyi 
of ii 
beti 



refe 
thai 
froc 



whe 
the 



the 

COIT 

froD 



bes 



C%nfiiet0ft|? of rovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4. 



THIRD YEAR, AND CANDIDATE8 FOR B.A. 



PROBLEMS. 



\ Rev. W. Jones, R.A. 




• •». 



i,ifi 



1. The axes of a hyperbola are given in direction, and its 
asymptotes revolve about two fixed points ; prove that the locus 
of its centre is a rectangular hyperbola whose centre is midway 
between the two fixed points. 

2. If a circle and a rectangular hyperbola be described, with 
reference to which an assigned triangle is self-conjugate, shew 
that the centre of the circle is at 1 .,, rsection of perpendiculars 
from the angles on the sides of yi« triangle, and the centre of the 
hyperbola is on the circumHcribing circle of the triangle. 

3. It is said that there will be a point of ii/'exion in a spiral 
^^^^ dr ~^ ^^ °° ^^^^^ changes sign. Shew that such is not 
the case at the j)ole wlien the spiral passes through it. 

For instance, take the spiral of Archimedes, r=a0. 

4. If r, 2c be the radius- vector and chord of curvature flu ough 
the pole at any point of a spiral, and r', 2c' be the same for the 
correspondmg point in the locus of the foot of the perpendicular 
from the pole on the tangent, prove that 

5+^ = 2. 
r d 



5. Every equation of the form x*+2pa?+qx''-\-rx+s=i0 can 

be solved by mftflns nf a nnnrlra+i'^ oniio+i/^r. if /«3 „,„ I A ..--1 

6. On the surface of a sphere n equal particles are placed so 



•m 



II" ,: 



that their centre of gravity is the centre of the sphere; ii a he 
the angle subtended at the centre by the chord joining any two of 
them, prove that 

S cos a = "~ o • 

7. A smooth surface of revolution standing with its axis 
vertical, find its form in order that a heavy elastic ring may be at 
rest when placed round any horizontal section of it. 

8. The centre of the circle, radius r, inscribed in a triangle 
ABC is an origin of light; a ray of light after reflection at the 
sides '^i?, ^C returns again to the origin; shew that the length 
of its path is 4 r cos A. 

2 

9. Li"ht admitted into a darkened room through a very 
small hole in the shutter is received upon a vertical screen ; 
examine the nature of the curves which bound the illummated 
portions of the screen when it is placed (i.) perpendicular, (u.) 
obliquely to the window. 

10 A luminous point aS' in the side ^i? of a triangle ABC 
equally illuminates the other two sides; HAS, BS subtend at C 
the angles 0, (p respectively, shew that 

sin (^— ^) = cos J. sin 0— cos B sin 6. 

11 The respective specific gravities of two fluids, and of the 
atmosphere are <r„ o",, and /o; a body floats in the first fluid with 

1 *^ and in the second withl- *^ of its volume immersed; shew 



n 



m 



that wio-j— w<Tj=(m— w)/>. 

12 If a plane area be totally immersed vertically in a heavy 
incompressible fluid, and X, x be the depths of its centre of 
pressure and centre of gravity below the surface, and P the 
pressure on the surface; shew that when the area is made to 
descend without rotation through a small distance c, the mcrease 

of pressure will be P -, and its centre of pressure will descend 

X 

through a distance 

2c c . 

X 

13 A cylindrical diving bell descends in water ; the heights of 
a water barometer in the bell are h, h', before immersion and 
when the top of the bell is just Mubmerged, respectively ; shew 
that the length of the bell is 

'/ {h' - h) . 



» » 'j.'l !- 



14. A uniform paraboloid terminated by a plane perpendicular 
to its axis, rests with its vertex on a rougb fixed plane in neutral 
equilibrium ; shew that the equilibrium will also be neutral if 
the paraboloid be scooped out into a thin shell, and filled with a 
heavy fluid to the same depth of axis, the weight of the fluid 
being half the weight of the shell, and the centre of gravity of 
the shell being at the focus. 

15. A cone floating freely (axis vertical and vertex downwards) 
in a fluid has an elastic string (without weight) attached to its 
vertex, the other end being attached to the centre of gravity of 
a flat disk, (also without weight,) which is lying in close contact 
with the horizontal base of the vessel containing the fluid, the 
string being in its natural state and vertical. Prove that (if the 
area of the disk lie between certain limits) when the level of the 
fluid is raised by the addition of fluid, there is a position where 
the length of the ^tring will not be altered by a small change of 
level, and determine in the general case the depth of the fluid 
when the disk will be lifted, if it ever will be. 

16 Prove that 

{I + ,'(.)}»«=.-*'.(!)». 



u. 



17. A parabola (latus-rectum 4a,) is described under two 
accelerations, one to the focus, and the other along the tangent, 
their respective values at focal distance r being / and F; prove 

that 

^+¥= j: 

dr r 'sjr^—ar 

18. Shew that the cycloid is tautochronous when the resistance 
of the medium is constant, and the successive heights to which 
the oscillating particle rises, are in arithmetical progression. 

19. At all points of an ellipsoid which are equidistant from the 
centre, the sum of the curvatures in two perpendicular normal 
sections varies as the perpendicular from the centre on the tan- 
gent. 




, ■ 1! 






1 $•*■ 



***] 










kixif$tvuit^ of ^orotfio* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



THIRD YEAR. 



HISTORY. 



Uxaminers : ] ?' f ^^^ON, LL D. 
5 J. A. Boyd, M.A. 



*** Answers to all the questions are not indispensable • hut 
riTLL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over- 
taken within the time. 

I. Outlines of modern history. 

(1.) Enumerate the events which mark the commence- 
nf^J °^°^?X^,^story ; and contrast the characteristics 
of modern, with those of mediaeval and ancient history. 

1 P.i} ^^' ^'■''^^^ f-y' •* " ^^^ undoubted tendency of the 
last three centuries has been to consolidate what were once 
separate states or kingdoms into one great nation." Men- 
tion the most important changes, in chronological order 
which serve to confirm this statement. ' 

nnJtl ^^^^""^ fi^ ^^'^' P;°g^ess and termination of the 
contest between the Girondists and Jacobins. 

^ ^(^O Oi^ejome^ account of the war that began in 1812 
uesween ine umteU states and England. 



-^M 



It British history from the reyolutiou to the present time. 

(1.) What historical importance attaches to the career of 
John Wilkes ? 

(2.) What led to the impeachment of Dr. Sacheverel ? 
What were its results, political and constitutional ? 

(3.) Enumerate those historical facts which shew the 
great personal influence of George III. in determining the 
course of events during his reign. 

(4.) Give some account of the prosecution of Home 
Tooke, and its results. 

(5.) When, and how, arose the influence of the periodical 
press ? Trace its developement to the end of the eighteenth 
century. 

(6.) Sketch the career of the Duke of Wellington as a 
statesman. 



.': m 




' i» 



Itf^, 



S?'^ ^ l"^ 



. 'A - 

IS -14. •. * I 



- , * 



^rm 



-«j-:g£*fr-i. 



■M 






yl<''>, 1'. 







i ■ ■ ' ■ .' ■■■;■■ ' 










I 



r^ii 



T5^ 



ittfi'S 



Unibtvmt} of ^ovomo. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18G4. 



THIRD YEAR. 



ENGLISH. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



-Examiners :f^- ^ii-SON, LL.D. 
\ J. A. Boyd, M.A. 



"JULIUS CiESAR;" ETYMOLOGY & SYNONYMS. 
(1.) From what sources did Shakspeare draw the materials 
lor this drama i Discuss the questions as to its hero, 
and the object with which it was written. 

(2.) What ^ anachronisms and deviations from historical 
accuracy do you note in the play ? 

(3.) '^Metellus Most high, most mighty and most 
puissant Cjesar, 
Metellus Cimber throws before thy seat 
An humble heart. — 

CfBsar. I must prevent thee, Cimber, 
These coucUngs and these lowly courtesies' 
Might fire the blood of ordinary men ; 
And turn pre-ordinance anH first decree 
Into the law of children. Be not fond 
To think that Caisar bears such rebel blood 
That will be thawed from the true quality 
With that which melteth fools ; I mean, sweet words. 
Low-crook' d curt'sies and base, spaniel fawning. 
Thy brother by decree is banished ; 
If thou dost bend, and pray, and fawn for him, 
I spurn thee like a cur out of my way. 
Know Cscsar doth not wrong ; nor without cause 
Will he be satisfied." 



(a.) Point out all the figures, rhetorical and syn- 
tactical, which occur in this extract. 

(6.) "Prevent," "ordinary," "quality," "satisfied:" 
Give groups of synonyms for each of these words, 
and distinguish between the shades of meaning 
of the words in each group. 

{c.) What is the derivation of these words : 

"Courtesies," "decree," "thawed," "banish- 
ed,'' "wrong." 

{d.) Discuss the various readings proposed in respect 
of the words in italics in the above passage. 

(«.) Paraphrase in ordinary language the first nine 
lines of Caesar's speech, so as to exhibit the 
meaning of the author. 

(/.) How were the last two lines of Caesar's speech 
originally written ? To what celebrated criticism 
did they then give rise? What is their meaning 
as they now stand ? 

(4.) Give the origin and transmutations of meaning and 
application of the words in italics in the following 
passages : — 

" What you would work me to, I have some aim." 
" The repealing of my banished brother." 
" To be resolved if Brutus so unkindly knocked.'' 
* " Be content; speak your grief softly." 

" Every nice offence should bear his comment." 
" Such rascal counters." 
" Old men, fools, and children calculate." 
" Upon my knees, I charin you." 

(5.) Elucidate the force of the following phrases :— 
''Conned by rote;" "our wildness shall no whit 
appear;" "7W2/ life is run his compass;" ''take 
thought^ and die for CjBsar." 

(6.) Craik says : "It is evident that the characteristics of 
Julius Coesar and his history had taken a deep hold 
of Shakspeare's imagination." 

Is this a correct or incorrect position ? Give reasons 
for your answer. 



« 1 



f ' . . 



• *'• , ' .4. 
't » •"'I 






■■tl}A i*tX%-- 









.'.,V 



": ) -* 






^1 W,."'',-k 

'l-^k't^i^ -I 






.mm 



i.l* 



h:l 



!■ 



anftiersftj? of Eotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



THIRD YEAR. 



HISTORY AND ETHNOLOGY. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



Examiners: J ^' iJ^^^soN, LL D. 
\ J. A. Boyd, M.A. 



'^^* Answers to all the questions are not indispensable ; hut 
FULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over- 
taken within the time. 

ki \ x?®^1® ^^^ *^® causes, direct and indirect, which ena- 
bled Napoleon to establish the empire on the ruins of the 
trench republic. 

2. State the gains and losses, material and moral, of 
prance and England, from the struggle terminated by the 
Treaty of Amiens. ^ 

3. D. Hamilton says of the war of England against 
France, begun m 1793, " In one aspect thiJ was a war of 
principles ; m another, it was a war of self-defence ; but in 
both It was just and inevitable." Define what is implied in 
each of those assertions; illustrate them by reference to 
details of the war ; and assign reasons for maintaining or 
rejecting the conclusions stated. 

4. Name the leaders, and compare the circumstances and 
results, of the victories of Corunna and Toulouse. 






ETHNOLOGY. 

1. Define the system of classification of Retzius ; and 
explain what is implied by designating the Anglo-Saxons : 
orthof/nathioldolieocephalce. 

2. Explain the terms : aptotic, j^aurosf/Uabic, pohjsi/n- 
thetic, amalgamate and agfjhitinate, as applied to languages ; 
and specify an example of each. 

3. Max Muller says : " We know that grammatical termi- 
nations, as they are now en led, were originally independent 
words, and had their own ]) irposo and meaning." Explain 
this, and illustrate it from English examples. 

4. Schlegel asserts, as a fnnd on al proposition, that 
"Names of things and terms o^ e ipres' " )n are transitory ; 
but the system of grammatical 30i'!itruc m is permanent." 
How far is this compatible with ^hc ch...ages the English 
language has undergone from its v igmal condition as an 
inflexional language ? 

5. The theory of a Pelasgic stock conntituting the prehis- 
toric occupants of all Italy, has been maintained by assuming 
that the Tyraeni of the north were Pelagi, on whom llhoctian 
Rasena intruded ; and that the CEnotrii in the south were 
also Pcla^^gi, on whom the Hellenes intruded. Define what 
is implied in this theory, and discuss it in all its bearings. 

6. Define the ethnological changes implied in the adoption 
of the names France, England, 'Wales and Scotland, for 
those applicable to the same countries when first invaded by 
the Romans. 

7. Indicate the changes on the commercial and political 
institutions of Italy, subsequent to the dismemberment of the 
Roman empire ; and show to what extent they are traceable 
to ethnological changes. 

8. Trace all the ethnological changes which the Iberiam 
peninsula has undergone ; and sliow the inlluence of those 
changes on subsequent history. 

9. Give the derivation and strict meaning of the terms : 
aborigines, autochthones, prehistoric, primitive, allophylian, 
primeval. 

10. Define and illustrate the difference between ethnologi- 
cal absorption and extinction. 




r: 



4 1 



M! 



- \ i . 

w( ... 







Subi 



Trai 



1. 

inde 

2. 
3. 

Trai 



unii$tvuiitj! of STotonto; 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



THIRD YEAR. 



FRENCH. 



Examiners : | J^^^^ Forneri, LL.D. 
( Robert Sullivan, M. A. 



I. 

Subject for French composition: "Education and culture of 
the mind, necessary to women." 

II. 

Translate : 

Un effroyable cri, sorti du fond des flots, 
Des airs en ce moment a trouble le repos ; 
Et, du sein de la terre, une voix formidable 
Rdpond en gdmissant k ce cri redoubtable. 
Jusqu'au fond de nos coeurs notre sang s'est glac^ • 
Des coursiers attentifs le crin s'est herisse. ' 

Racine's Phedre, Act V., Scene VI. 

1. Why no longer was the imperfect, but the preterite 
mdetinite employed by the poet ? 

2. How many inversions ? Point them out. 

3. How many hiatHs; specify their effect. 

III. 

Translate : 

JOAD. 

Jdhu, qu'avoit choisi sa sagesse profonde, 
Jehu, sur qui je vols que votre espoir se fonde, 



' i J f > ., 






■HHr 



^ 1 




'nI 


< 4 v/ ,^^H 


'» N ' tiii^^l 






.^^BHnl^H 



D'un oubli trop ingrat a payd ses bienfaita: 
J^hu laisse d'Achab I'affreuse fille en paix, 
Suit des rois d'Israel les profanes exemples, 
Du vil dieu de I'Egypte a conserve les temples ; 
J^hu, sur les hauts lieux enfin osant offrir 
Un temeraire encens que Dieu ne peut souffrir, 
N'a pour servir sa cause et venger ses injures 
Ni le coeur assez droit, ni les mains assez pures. 
Non, non : c'est d Dieu seul qu'il faut nous attacher 
Montrons Eliacin ; et, loin de le cacher, ' 

Que du bandeau royal sa t^te soit ornee : 
Je veux mSme avancer I'heure determinde, 
Avant que de Mathan le complot soit form^. 

Racine, Athalie, Act III., Scene VI. 

1. Jehu. Who was he ? 

2. Sa sagesse j^rofonde. Give the antecedent of sa. 

3. Sur qui je vols. When is qui exclusively said of 
persons ? '' 

4. D'Aehah Vaffreme fille. Name her. 

5. Suit des rois d'Israel. How? 

6. Bu vil dieu de VEgypte. Name him. 

7. Siir les hauts lieux. Explain. 

8. Qu'il faut nous attacher. Give a more definite form 
and destroy the pleonasm. ' 

9. Point out the two most striking inversions. 

IV. 

Mais ce qu^unsagc g<^neral doit le mieux connaitre, c'est sos 
soldats et ses chefs ; car de hi vient ce parfait concert qui fait 
a^r les armies comme un seul corps, ou, pour parler avec 
TEcriture, " comme un seul homme :" Egressus est Israel 
tanquam vir unus. Pourquoi comme en seul homme? 
Parce que sous un meme chef, qui connait ct les soldats et les 
chefs comme ses bras et ses mains, tout est egalement vif et 
mesure'. C'est ce qui donne la victoire; ct j'ai oui dire ^ 
notre grand prince qu'a la journde de Nordlingue, ce qui 
I'assurait du succ^s, c'est qu'il connaissait M. de Turenne 
dont I'habiletd consomm^e n'avait besoin d'aucun ordre pour 
faire tout ce qu'il fallait. Celui^ci publiait de son gOte qu'il 



agissait sans inquie'tude, parce qu'il connaissait le prince, et 
ses ordres toujours surs. C'est ainsi qu'ils se donnaient 
mutuellement un repos qui Ics appliquait chacun tout entier 
b. son action : ainsi finit heurousement la bataille la plus 
hasardeuse et la plus disputde qui fut jamais. 

BossuET Oraison Funehre de Louis de Bourbon. 

1. O'est ses soldats et ses chefs. When is the demonstrative 
ce repeated before est f Why not ce sont ? 

2. Car de Id. Suppress de Id^ and give the words 
referred to. 

3. Fait agir. Resolve by a conjunction into a tense and 
mood. When is it that faire cannot be followed by an 
infinitive ? 

4. J'ai ou'i dire d notre grand prince. Under what 
grammatical rule is this expression ? Explain. 

b. Pour faire. Resolve into a (?e/?m*fe form. 

6. Et ses ordres *ouj^urs surs. Fill up the ellipsis. 

7. Qui les appliquait. Give the antecedent of ?e«. 

8. Qui fut Jamais. Why in the indicative, after i super- 
lative relative ? 

V. 

History of the French literature in the 17th century 
(Chouquet's.) ^ 

1. Give a biographical sketch of Fontenelle, and state what 
are his true titles to literary glory. 

2. Who has been surnamed, on account of his manly 
eIo(iuence, the Bossuet of the Protestant chair? Charac- 
tense his style. 

3. Write a short biographical notice of D'Aguesseau, and 
state in what he can be fully compared to Cicero. Give the 
character of his style. 

4 When and where was for the first time played 
L Mourdi, and le B6pit Amoureux, de Moliere, and what 
are his best chefs d'oeuvre ? 





ip 


m 


m 


- '1 


*', 


"' - '■ 'li 


'ipf 



fi'. i 



lilt 



iiil' 
liijl 



i.i.l 



i 







Trai 



of 

Btn 



ii^nmvmv^ of sTotottto. 



I 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



THIRD YEAR. 



FRENCH. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



— . ( Jambs Fornbri, LL.D. 
Hxammers : I rqbert Sullivan, M.A. 






Translate : 

ladislas. 

S'il est temps de patir, mon Sme est tonte prSte. 

VENCB8LAS. 

L'^chafaud Test aussi ; portez-y votre tete : 

Plus condamn^ que vous, mon coeur vous y suivra ; 

Je mourrai, plus que vous, du coup qui vous t^ra, 

Mes larmes vous en sont une preuve assez ample : 

Mais d I'etat, enfin, je dois ce grand exemple ; 

A ma propre vertu, ce gdn^reux efFort ; 

Cette grande victime, a votre frbre mort. 

J'ai craint de prononcer, autant que vous d'entendre 

L'arr^t qu'ils demandaient, et que j'ai dil leur rendre. 

Pour ne vous perdre pas, j'ai long-temps combattu; 

Mais, ou I'art de rdgner n'est plus une^ vertu, 

Et c'est une chimere, aux rois, que la justice ; 

Ou regnant, si I'^tat je dois ce sacrifice. 

RoTiiON, VenceslaSj act v., scene vi. 



of quite ia declined and when not. Explain also its con- 
struction before gens. 



'4" 



■J 1 



s hi 



i 



2. Plus cor damns que vous. Fill up the ellipsis. 

3. VousyBuivra. Give the antecedent of y. 

4. Fill U:) .ijc ellipses in verses 3, 6, 7, 8. 

equivalent" " ""' ''''' P''""''' ^^"PP^^^ ^^ -cl give the 

in t^ £Lbf' ^^^^ *^^ P-*-P^- past not decided 
7. Zewr rew(^re. What does Uur refer to ? 

8 Que la justice. What is this que crilpd ? T^.-^ 
the pleonasm in this line. ^ ^ * ^^'^^^^ 

^^^9. Megnant Resolve it by a conjunction, t..se, and 
10. Je dots ce mcriflce. Give the force. 

Translate : 

Le theatre, fe^^jle en censeurs pointilleux 
Chez nou. pour .e produiro est un champ ptrilleux 
Un auteur n> fait pas de faciles conqugL • ' 

II trouve a le siffler des benches toujours prates • 
Chacun lo peut traiter de fat et d 'igiorant * 

C est un droit qu'a la porte on achfte en entrant 
11 faut qu'en cent facons nour nln,v^ ;i *^"^'^*,!?^- 

«.. en nobles sentiments il soit partout fdoond • 

Olir^^f' '°"''^' "g^-^^ble/profond; 

Que Je traits surprenants sans cesse il nous rfiveill^- 

Et „ irr.'^™' ^?^™''' ^^ "erveilleen merveU le ' 
Et que tout ce qu',1 dit, facile a retenir "™"° ' 

i>e son ouvrage en nous laisse un lon» souvenir 

Amsi la trag,idie agit, marche, et s'expUqne '' 

reMVe^Tntocr """"™ ^'"■'"«-- ^"n it into a 

aco^juilrn!'-^'''""''"''- «^'»'^-'i"'<". definite sensory 
3. Un auteur n-yfaitpa,. Give the antecedent of u. 
'^''" "" *""• S W^^^s ce, and give the equivi^.i. 



5. Qu'd, la parte on aohete. Give the force. 

6. B faut. Explain by examples the five constructions 
of this verb. 

7. Pourplaire. Resolve it in a definite sense by a 
conjunction. 

8. II 86 replic. Give the force. 

9. Que tantdt il s'^leve. Destroy all the ellipses up to 
the last verse. 

10. Ainai la tragSdie. Introduce a pleonasm. 






im. 



Wif 



3F7-6 








Tra 



moo 
and 
of a 

the,] 

lowe 
heca: 



' ' '1 



l^ntt^trnitu of ^Toronto* 



.?j 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



THIRD YEAR. 



GERMAN. 



Examiners :ii''''^' Forneri, LL D. 
\ Robert Sullivan, M.A. 






'{^ 



I. 



Translate into German : 

The celebrated Doerfling, the son of a Bohemian 
peasant, learned in his youth the business of a tailor ; 
he afterwards changed the needle for the sword, and 
entered the service of several heroes, and was appointed 
at last, by the grand elector, who knew how to appreciate 
and reward merit of any kind, whatever, Major-General 
and Governor of the Duchy of Ulterior Pomerania. 

GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS. 

1. Mention the peculiarity of the auxiliary verbs of 
mood, and give an example. 

2. Explain the difference between German intransitive 
and neuter verbs ? Give examples. 

3. By what case do you express the state or condition 
of a neuter verb, and the action of an intransitive verb ? 

4. What auxiliary does an intransitive verb take when 
the manner of moving is expressed ? 

6. What does da combined with a preposition and fol- 
lowed by dass represent ? Translate, by reading muck he 
became learned. 



% 



m 






6. "When aro halb, gam to bo declined awl •wliennot? 

7. How is tho passive voice of neuter verbs expressed in 
German ? 

8. Translate, he 18 feared , the child 18 dressedf ^am- 
plifying both the passive and nen*'cv vi^rbs. 

9. Exphiin Oratio ohUqda, and ;. natructio ad sensum, by 
examples. 

III. 

SET INTO ailAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION THE FOLLOWING 

LINES. 

Translate : 

3ufl. Sltnn* ctu pcvfcftcr Sciufcr tft tv, bag ifl c^mi^. 
SBcnn il^m Ux |)crr fiinfjtf; ®d;rittc i>ou\ah, fo fonntc cr t^n 
mtt j'cincm Initcn ^mux nid)t cin^olcn. gr(l) ^inj^cgen 
fcinu tern ©alflcn taufenb ®d;rtttc i^ovj^ckn, unb td; bette 
nicin Sebcn, cv l)olt t^n cin. 



IV. 



Translate 



3)cr Stvtl). .<:at c5 3I)r trt^ cjnabfi^c gvauleiit ntd;t 
crjo^lt ? — %l^ id) 8ie, inctn fd;i5nc^ ^tnb, iinten fu tcr 
^itd;c »ciTicp, [o fain trf; ypit ungcfa{)i mcHx l)icr tn ten 
@aal — 

granci^fa. 53on unQefaI)iv in bcr 5H)[td;t, em wcr 'i 511 
l^ovd)cn. 

3)cr SBtrtI). (St, mei'n ^inb, jvfe faitn (3tc bad yon intv 
bcufcn? (Smem 2QirtI)c (a{;'t nirfUiS uMciv Id 9?cu(iiicrbe— 
3d) ivar ntd)t lanc^c l)ier, ■> pvcKt.' mif imil t^ Xt)ure 
bci bcm pcibtijcn graulcin auf. 2)cv a}ta;or ftiivjte Ijcraitd, 
tad gmulctn i\)m nad; ; bcttc in ciner 33cn)cflun(;i, mit 
SSlicfcn, m emcr (SteUung- iV wad la|3t ftd; nur^fl^m. 
®tc crgviff t^n ; cr rip ftd; lod ; ftc cn^rtif tl)n nnebcv. 
Stdlljeim! — grciulem! laffen etc mid)! — ?Po^tnV ©o 
jog cv fie W an tie J.cppc? SOiiv wax [ibon knge, cr 
tt)urt>c ftc mit l^tnabreipcn. %kx cr n^ ib ftd noc^ lod. 

Lessing, Minna von J irh n, p. 62. 

1. Unten in der KUche vcrliess. What part of the 
speech is unten P 

2. Von ungefahr in der absicht. Give a synonym of 
in der absicht and j&Ii up the ellipsis. 



3. Paavonmir denkenP Suppn daa and give tnd 
equivalewt. 

4. Mnem Wirthe Idast, ^c. Give a synonym to 
lUsst. 

6. Ich war nicht lange hier, add a verb, 

6. Das Frdulein ihm nach, fill up the ellipsis, 

7. Beide in einer Bewegung, mit BUckerif in einer 
Stellung. Add the complement. 

8. So was lasst sich nur sehen. Give the force. 

9. Ur ri»s sich los. What case or cases does lo% as 
adjective govern ? 

10. Wohin V Add a verb. 

11. Mir war schon hanqe. ^ivc a synonym of this 
expression by a single word. 

12. Er wUrde sie mit. Add the regimen to mit. 

V. 

GERMAN LITERATURE, (GOSTICK'S.) 

1. Wlnt -w- '9 the 5th period \yith respect to poetry ? 

2. Wlm error does Lcssing expose in his "Lackoon" ? 

3 ,/hat production was once esteemed as the German 
" VLar of ^' efic i " and by whom was it written ? 

4. Wlio ^^..a nsidered the greatest writer of the 6th 
period ? Name some of his best works. 



i 




m^^-. 








Subj 
Witl 



smiuetttUi^ oc 3:oironto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS ; 1864. 



Tirmn year. 



GERMAN. 

FOR HONORS. 



-, . f James Founeri, LL.D. 

•^^^^»'»^^« • \ Robert Sullivan, M.A. 



T. 

Subject for German composition : 

" The Horse." 
Within thirty lines at least. 

II. 

Unb eilcnfciJ cjingcu fcic Slbbcritcn I;in, uub mad)ten m 
(SJefel): bap fc(u'3lttcntcn[ol)u Ijinfovt wcitcraliSH^ nnbcn 
^^ormtl){fd)cn 3ftl)mu^, Kiiuicv fit^ cin 3af)r, wnb anfccrsJ 
aliJ untcr ber 2tuf[icl)t turn bcial)itcii i)ofmciftcvg »on 511= 
tafcbmti[d)cv 3lbfunft, 3)cutavt uub Zittt, [oUtc vcifcn burfen. 
„3uncic .^cutc milficu jwav bic 3BcU [cl)cn, frtj^ic bci^ 3)ccret : 
abcr cbcn barum [oUcu fie ftcl) an jcbcin £)vtc ntdjt langev 
aufl)alten, al^ W fie aUc^, m& mil %nc\tn ba ju fel^cn ift, 
gcfc^cn l)aben. 33cfunbcr^ foU bcv .<^ofmctftcv <^cnau bemcrfcn, 
m^ filr (^5aft()iJfc fie aiu^tvoffcn, wie fie Ciccjcffcn, uub mt 
m\ fie bci^l;lcu milffeu ; camit t(;ve SOUtbiirocr fid) in bcv 
golge biefe cvfprte§Itd)en ®c{)eimnad;rtd)tcn ju nu^e mad;en 
!5nncn. gerner foil (wie bc^ T ■ vet ivettev facjt), ju (Jvfpavung 
bcr Unfoften cinc^ allju lanf^cn 5tufentl)alt<J an ginem £)vte, 
bev ^ofmciftcv baljin fel)en, bajj bev jungc 5l0bcvit '\\\ feinc 
^(i^i^(<tj\i(icn S^cfanntfcl^aftcn ycrmicfclt itscvbc* 

Wieland's Cf^esohichte der Abdei'iten, chap. ix. 







* 


W 


A 


' ^1 




'^' '.^1 






-l\{ijjy 


^1 


' l^Xm^^Ki 


1^1 


.;.H| 


{^^^^1 




^iw^^^^^l 



1. ^in aesetz. Add a relative and a verb, on which 
the following Dass may depend. 

2. Solltereisen dilrfen. State what rule is applicable 
to these words. ^^ 

3. Aher ehen darunu Suppress danm and give the 

4. Da zu sehen ist. Explain the rule. 

d.J'nfi' ''''^flfT \'v ''' Oege^'^n. Give the anteco- 
dent ot ue and fill the ellipses. 

5. Zu nutze machen. Compress it into a verb. 

7. Ferncr soil With what infinitive can sollen be used 
elliptically? I shall do it, ich soil es thun ; is it 3 
German ? If not correct it. ^ 

8. Daliin sehen. What does dahin refer to ' What 
figure do you perceive in this word ? 

9. Verwiclelt werde. What tense and what mood k 

10. Eill up all the ellipses not mentioned before. 

III. 

Translate : 

Orcfl. * 

^cnn fic bcm S}?cnfd;cn frcl^ Z{}Ci{ ficfd;crcn, 
2;a§ cr cm Unl)dl mm t^nx ecincn n?cntct 
2)a{;' cr [ctn W\^) ycnncbrt, tic 0rcn,n'n ftrijcrt, 
lint) flltc ^cmtc falfcii otcr f(tc()ii ; 
Jamt inai] cr tanfctU tcim tl)in l;at ctn @ott 
4;c^ i?cbcn^ crftc, IctUc I'uft qci]i)mu. 
a)hif) (;aku ftcsinn ^d)larf)tcr^auiicrforcn, 
3um 9)?ort>cr mctncr bod) ycicl)ftcii iDhittev 
Utib etnc @d)anttl;at fd;aublicf; rad;cn^ jjiicfi 
2)itrd; tl^rcn Stnf ,^u Wmnb' ncrt\t)tc.\ ©Uu&c, 
(£ic l)aben ci3 auf XaiUal'i^ .*^au^ ncrirf;t.'t ' 
Unt tc^, ttr Scj^te, [oU iild)t [d)u(HW, m 
vl\i)i el;ren»oU »ergct)n. 

Goethe's IpMgenie auf Tauris, Act ii., Scene i. 
1.^ Wenn sie dern Menschen, &c. Give the anteceden 



of ilr 



2. Fill up all the ellipses of this extract.* 

3. Von den Semen. Suppress the capital initial S in 
tSeinen and add a noun. 

4. Dann mag er danJcen. Dankcn, whom ? 

5. Bann denn. Compare. 

6. Zum SoJddchter auserkoren. Give the rule applicable 
to this expression. 

7. ScMndlich rachend. Express the adverbial idea of 
^ehandhchhy Weise, and resolve rachend by a conjunction. 

8. Ich, der Letztc. Turn it into a relative sentence. 



L 4| 

iiiij 



-^ii?'« 



^1 




ei 



9' 



no 



/» 



WitiititvuitSf of ^otonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



THIRD YEAR. 



•* r ,.w';s 



ITALIAN. 



IS . 






Examiners • \ ^^^^^ Forneri, LL.D. 
■ \ Robert Sullivan, M.A. 




I. 

GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS. 

1. In what are the verbs fare and stare idiomatically 
employed ? 

2. Translate, 1 am neither tJiirsty nor hungry. 

3. When is il che used ? 

4. Point out the difference between questi, cotesti, and 
quegli. 

5. When is the definite article omitted ? 

6. What is the plural of milk and thai of cento ? 

7. What numbers are employed for the date of the 
month ? 

8. Translate, It was last week that I spoJce to your 
friend. 

9. W.^en is mezzo invariable ? 
10. How * ' ago expressed ? 





II. 

Translate into English: 

GiA. Che strepito h questo ? Che piazzate son queste ? 

Leo. Signora, le piazzate, non le fo io : le fanno quelli 
che si burlano de' galant' uomini, che mancano di parola, 
che tradiscono suUa bwona fede. 

GiA. Chi ^ il rec ? Chi ^ il mancatore ? (Con caricatura.) 

FuL. Parlate voi. {A FiHppo.) 

FiL. Favoritemi di principiar voi. [A Fulgemio.) 

FuL. Orsii, ci va del mio in quest' afFare. Poich^ il dia- 
volb mi ci ha fatto entrare, a tacere ci va del mio, e se non 
sa parlare il signore Filippo, parlerd io. Si, signora : ha 
ragione il signor Leonardo di laraentarsi. Dopo avergli 
dato parola che il signor Guglielmo non sarebbe venuto con 
voi, mancargli, farlo venire condurlo in villa, ^ un' azion'e 
poco buona, e un trattamento incivile 

GiA. Che dite voi, signor padre ? 

FiL. Ha parlato con voi rispondete voi. 

GlA. Favorisca in grazia, signor fulgenzio : con qud 
autoritcl pretende il signor Leonardo di comandare in casa 
degli altri ? 

Leo. Con quell' autorita che un amante... 

GlA. Pordoni, ora non parlo con lei. [A Leonardo.) Mi 
risponda il signor Fulgenzio. Come ardisce il signor Leo- 
nardo pretendere da mio padre e da me che non si tratti chi 
pare a noi, e non si conduca in campagna chi a lui non 
piace ? 

Leo. Voi sapete bcnissirao... 

GiA. Non dico a lei ; mi risponda il signor Fulgenzio. 

FiL. (Oh ! non S3va vero dcgli amorctti, non ijurlercbbe 
cosi.) 

FuL. Poiche volete che dica io, diro io. II signor Leo- 
nardo non direbbe niente, non ^)retenderebbe niente se non 
avcssc intenzione di pigliai vi per moglie. 

GiA. Come il signor Leonardo ha intenzione di volermi in 
ipposa? {A Fulgenzio.) 

Leo. Possible che vi giunga nuovo ? 

GiA. Perdoni. Mi lasci parlar col signor Fulgenzio. {A 
Leonardo.) Dite, signore, con qual fondamento potete voi 
asserirlo ? {A Fulgenzio.) 

FuL. Col fondamento che io medesimo, per commissione 
uci Signor xiconaruQ, ne ho avanzata testu a vostro padre la 
proposizione. 

Leo. Maveggendomi si maltrattato... 



d-iA. t>i grazia s* accheti. Ora tion tocca a lei ; parleri 
quando tocchera a lei. {A Leonardo.) Che dice su di cio 
il signer padre ? 

GOLDONI, La Villeggiatura, Atto iii., Scena xiv. 

1. Che piazzate. Give the force. 

2. Favoritemi di principiar voi. Turn favoritemi into a 
deprecatory adverb, and principiar into an imperative. 

3. Orsil. Give a synonym in French. 

4. Ci va del mio in quest' affare. Translate it into 
French, adding a noun to mio. 

5. Mi ci ha fatto entrare. Suppress ci and give the 
equivalent. 

6. A tacere. Resolve it by a conditional conjunction, 
tense, and mood. 

7. Dopo avergli dato parola. Resolve by a conjunction, 
tense and mood, adding the subject. 

8. Che un amante. Supply the reticence. 

9. Da mio padre. Why not dal 7nio padre ? 

10. Non si tmtti chi. Resolve chi. 

11. Ohi a lui non piace ? What does a lui refer to ? 

12. Begli amoretti. Prefix a governinj;, word. 

13. Dicay dird. Change dire into parlare^ and conjugate. 

14. In isposa. Why in isposa and not sposa ? 

15. Possibile che, S^c. Supply verb and subject. 
"iZ. Asserirlo. Suppress lo and add the equivalent. 

17. Ne lio avanzata, ^c. What does ne refer to ? 

18. Ora non to.-'ui a lei. Give the force and translate it 
into French. 



'-' ' '• ft'. I 






^ ^U 




' '►'•■a 




Bni^tt:uitp of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



THIRD YEAR. 



APPLIED CHEMISTRY. 



r-::%^i 



Examiner: Henry Croft, D.G.L. 



3 sl^i-ai 



•nx 



1. How may the presence of organic matt#r in the air 
be detected ? 

2. What salts of lime can be easily removed from ffater, 
and how ? 

3. Explain the ciir.:eiice between spring, river, and 
rain water. 

4. Give the preparation of nitric rcid. How is the 
residue utilised ? 

5. Give the preparation of aluiii-, aoL-i its uses. 

6. Describe the manufacture of giae, and the uses of the 
residue. 

7. Describe the extraction of lead from galena. 

8. Describe the manufacture of shot. 

9. Describe the process of alkalimetry. 

10. What are the uses of chlorine in the arts, and in what 
forms is it employed ? 



•i ! 



sp 
an 



ac 



ar 



H. 



ca 







pe 



Bni^tvHitp of Eovonto, 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



THIRD YEAR. 



APPLIED CHEMISTRY. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 






Examiner: Henry Croft, D.C.L. 



^ . t 
#1 



1. Describe the preparation of common salt from brine 
springs, and from sea water. What other salts are obtained, 
and how ? 

2. Describe the manufacture of gunpowder, and its 
action. 

3. What salts of barium and strontium are used in the 
arts ? How are they prepared ? 

4. Describe the method of refining sugar. 

5. What proporty renders copper ineligible for castings ? 
How is the objection obviated. 

6. Mention the economical uses of coal tar. 

7. Describe the manufacture of candles of all kinds. 

8. Describe the process of block printing as applied to 
calico. 

9. Give the diflFerent methods of preserving food, and 
the principles on which they depend. 

10. Give an outline of the processes by which gutta 
percha is utilised. 



'"^hr 



i, I 





IMAGE EVALUATION 
TEST TARGET (MT-3) 




Y 



m 




/. 





/. 




^ 

^A' 



5/ ^ ^^ i^^^ 



t/j 






^ 



1.0 



I.I 



^4i 12.8 

1^ 1^ IIIIIM 



2.5 



1.8 





1.25 1.4 1.6 




^ 6" 


► 




Hiotographic 

Sdences 

Corporation 







23 WEST MAIN STREET 

WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 

(716) 872-4503 






<b 



[ I 



Unmvuits of Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



THIRD YEAR. 



NATPRAL HISTORY. 



IIxaminers:(^^\' S^^^- Hinoks, F.L.S. 
i r. J. Cottle, Esq. 



f' 
lit 



1. Or what parts does an endogenous vascular hiinHl« 
consist, and m what order do they occur in reference tn^^^^^^ 
centre and circumference of the stem ? ^^^^'^^^^^ to the 

.r.A^' w *^!i,«'®°^ ?f a vine what does the tendril renresent 
ZitZ r ''' "^^ ^^*"" ^' ^^^' wears to iThe S 

3. Give some account of the laws of Phyllotaxis. 

fln ^' ^^^A '® *^®.'"®*^ explanation of the organs of the 
flower called nectaries by the Linnean botanists ? 

5. Order Orchidaceae, its characters, examples of con 
Sr e'air '' '''' --*ry-P-vailing habit's o" tfopTcal 

ampL?'"^"' I-obeliace^, character, properties, native ex- 

fl,A \.fvT ^\?T^^ i agreement and difference between 
the Palhobranchiate and Lamellibranchiate Mollusks the 
means by which these animals procure food, and tb't;.!,' 

SrWng oTatntr" '' ^^^^^^^^^ '^^^ which .em;:t 



8. Give a sketch of the arrangement of the class Arach- 
nida, especially of the family Arancidse. What characters 
are specially important in discriminating them ? 

9. Give an account of the structure and mode of arange- 
ment of the class Pisces. 

10. Reptilia Ord: Chelonia — the general structure, the 
families, with their peculiar habits. 

11. Fissirostres. What are the characteristic distinctions 
of this division of birds ? Enumerate the families. 

12. Mammalia. Arrange the class, giving the principal 
structural characters. 



ii: j.j 



f 1 



Wi ii 







1: 




— T . 

/ 
( 


T 







29nfiier0ft|? at STorouto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



THIRD YEAR. 



I !• 



NATURAL HISTORY. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



Uxaminert.'i^^^r ??°^' ^inoks, F.L.S. 
(T. J. Cottle, Esq. 



1. The vegetable cell, its substance, its natural figure its 
T^T.tf ^" ' living active state/causes which iffince 
Its figure difference between cells and vessels and the degree 
ot importance attached to it, principal contents of cells in 
their more advanced state. ^-eus in 

2. How may the divisions called sub-kingdoms — well 
known m the animal kingdom-be applied with advantage 
to the vegetable kingdom ? Name the three proposed suf 
lowfst!""'' """^ ^'' '^' '^""''"'^ ^^^^"^^«' andUersIn ?he 

3. Order Zantiioxylaceae— characters, and affinities, nro- 
perties-representation in North Americi. ' ^ 

tinn' J'J?"^'"^^'^'" Protozoa, its characteristics. Examina- 
tW th^' '•'• '^°' ^^/ suppressing it. The classes and fur- 
ther sub-divisions as far as well established. 

CWrJJ^y^u^ °^ 1*^? ^^*'' Crustacea : special account of 
tural /pnn?' *v '' 'ft^'T '9 ''^'' ^'^^tL^, their struc 

Serb;':Ss Sr'^-^ ^^-^^^^^^^ *^^ ^^^-*-- - 

r„t„7^^-V' ?^ distinguishing character of the great family 
Curcuhonidae ? How are their larvae frequently very dis- 



i u 



tructive? Give examples. What circumstance connects 
them with the family Longicornes? What objection may 
justly be made to the common practice of placing Coleoptera 
at the head of the class Insecta ? 

7. Describe the structural peculiarities of the genus Ap- 
teryx in the family Struthionidae. 

8. "Various applications of the mammalian structure to ani- 
mals inhabiting water. Distinguish the Cetacea — the family 
of the seals — the otters, shewing the peculiarities of each. 



'■•'"i\M 



'^ 









L 



^ 



f 

■ ' ' t '3 
' J I 



m^-:,'^ 








i 


Ill 


1 




i 


1 1 


' 1 


^'^i 


i! ! 



ii 




-f 



vw 

i'l: 



' ill 



Winifitvuits of ^Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864 



THIRD YEAR. 



METAPHYSICS AND ETHICS. 



Exnminer: Rev. Professor Murray. 



REID'S INTELLECTUAL POWERS, STEWART'S 
MORAL & ACTIVE POWERS. 

1. Explain the terms sensation, perception and conscious- 
nesa, in the distinctive senses in which they are emploved 
by Reid. ^ "^ 

2. What is the theory of perception which Reid regarded 
as the common doctriiie of philosophers, and which he made 
it the chief aim of his own philosophy to overthrow ? 

3. State and criticise Reid's account of Plato's theory of 
perception. *^ 

What is the doctrine which Berkeley intended 
to establish in his New Theory of Vision ? ' 

State briefly Berkeley's general theory with 
regard to the knowledge and the existence of 
matter. 

5. What does Reid understand by common sense ? 

6. a. State any of the grounds on which Reid con- 
siders it impossible to prove from induction the 
principle, that whatever begins to exist must 
have a cause if its existence. 

I, By whom was this principle questioned ? 



4. 



a. 



h. 



7. a. What three phenomena does Stewart mention as 

characteristic of appetites ? 

b. What are the three propensities to which he 
gives the name of appetites ? 

c. What other propensities does he mention as pos- 
sessing similar characteristics to those of the 
appetites ? 

8. a. What is the distinction between emulation and 

envi/ ? 

h. By whom was this distinction overlooked ? 

9. What are the several theories of Hobbes, Cudworth 
and Hutcheson with regard to our consciousness of ri<yht 
and wrong ? * 

10. State explicitly the opposite doctrines of thoso who 
maintain and of those who deny the liberty of the will, men- 
tioning some of the grounds on which each is supported. 



'^ 11, ^'' 















I 



I :!i 



I, 

i: 

i: i 



:|l 



•SI 



lilil ili 



mmtitvm^ of Eovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



THIRD YEAR. 



POLITICAL ECONOMY. 



Examiner : Rev. James Beaven, D.D. 



SENIOR. 

«J'-i?'?"!^rf'''"''''v '"'"'''"' ^"'^ commodities, and explain 
and illustrate the application of those terms. ^ 

3. " The fourth class of monopolies exists where produc 

ion must be assisted bj natural agents, limited n rumber 

and varying in power, re-paying with le s and less Stive 

assistance every increase in'the%mount of the kbou Ind 

abstinence bestowed on them." ^«t"uur ana 

mo^n^'ii; if la'^d!" ''' '^^""^^^^ '' *^^*« ^^^^^^ ^^ the 

4 State the nature of rent and explain the causes on 
which Its proportionate amount depends. 

5. Discuss the effects, pecuniary and moral, of the absence 
of an English landlord from his estate. aosence 

difficulty of learning the^artulJrud^^^f """ '"""'"" 



iil 



BURLAMAQUI. 

^ 1. Give the primary notion of rigid, and its definition in 
Its more general cense ; and exhibit the process by which 
Burlamaqm passes from one to the other, and shews that man 
is capable q2 right. 

2. State those grounds of the right of sovereignty which 
B. regards as inadequate, with his reasons; and establish, 
after him, the true grounds of that right. 

3. State, after B., the essential distinction between con- 
stramt and obligation. 

4. What functions does B. respectively attribute to the 
moral sense and to reason in the discovery of right and 
wrong ? What other name does he give to the first of these, 
flnd why? Compare his opinions with those of other 
writers on this subject. 

5. How does B. deitxmine the question, whether there is 
an absolute right and wrong, independent of the will of God ? 
Give his grounds and compare his views with those of other 
writers. 

What does B. understand by the sanction of 
laws ? And why does he consider it necessary? 
What two sanctions does he suppose to be attached 
to the laws of nature? Why does he consider 
the first insufficient? And on what grounds 
does he rest the second ? 



6. 



a. 



h. 



I * r * s 
r ■ 

•i 



■v ?' 



fN- 






». ill 

4 4 



• i» ■' ' 1 i'\. 



■i'm 









:i>^-^^\ 









C», ' 



IP II 



Wini\ittuitu of CEToronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18G4. 



iHlRD YEAR. 



METAPHYSICS AND ETHICS. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 
Examiner: Rev. Professor Murray. 



TENNEMANN'S HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY 
AND STEWART'S DISSERTATION. 

1. a. After whom were the Thomists and Scotists 

respectively named? 

b. In what century did the founder of these sects 
flourish ? 

2. a. About what time and at what university did 

William of Occam teach ? 

b. What logical principle did he bring into prom- 



inence 



c. 



Which side did he take in the controversy 
between the Realists and Nominalists, and what 
was his doctrine with regard to the foundation 
of morality? 

3. a. To what country and to what century did 

Giordano Bruno belong ? 

b. State the general nature of his philosophy. 

c. Of what ancient systems may it be considered 
as a refined reproduction ? 

4. a. State any thing you know with regard to the 

life and personal character of Spinoza. 



5. 



b. Give a brief account of the system expounded in 
his Ethics. 

a. What arc the thrc3 parts into which Hegel 
divides philosophy ? 

b. What are the two schools into which the Hegel- 
ians separated after their master's death ? 

c. State some of the questions on which the two 
schools separated and the side taken by each. 

a. State the doctrine of Hobbes with regard to the 
origin of society. 

7. b. Mention some of the circumstances of his time 
which may have influenced the development of 
that doctrine. 

e. On what points can his influence on Locke's sys- 
tem be recognised ? 



6. 



State and criticise 
existence of God. 



Clarke's demonstration of the 



8. a. What was Hartley's theory with regard to the 

action of matter on mind ? 

b. On what single principle did he attempt to 
explain all the mental phenomena ? 

9. a. From what English philosopher did Condillac 

derive the main principle of his theory ? 

b. Point out the connection of the English philoso- 
pher's system with that to which it was reduced 
by Condillac; and defend your answer to the 
question, whether the reduction is logical. 

10. State and criticise Stewart's estimate of Kant. 



'i V ^ 






X.: 



*^-^^ t'l!? 







> i 






< . 






m$ 




.rTv? 




-.:^. 



Zitnfb(t0ltj^ of ^Totonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS ; 1864. 



THIRD YEAR. 



METAPHYSICS AND ETHICS. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



Uxaminers.'f^ll' i'""^' ^'""T' ^'^' 
\ Rev. Pjrofessor Murray. 



MACKINTOSH. 



1. State the radical distinction between physical and 
moral sciences. 

2. Explain from Grotius the general principles of morals 
which prevailed immediately after the close of the scholastic 
period. 

3. What was the speculative question which formed the 
ground of dispute between Fenelon and Bossuet, and what 
views did each hold? Give the opinions of any other 
writers on the same subject. 

4. Give some account of the views of Jonathan Edwards, 
and note his coincidences with other philosophers. 

5. What is the relation of Hutcheson to Scottish specu- 
lative philosophy ? 

6. Give M.'s character of Paley, and state what principle 
M. borrowed from him, 

7. " Which last form of expression has so close a resem- 
blance to the language of Kant, that it should have protected 
the latter from the imputation of writing jargon." Explain. 






8. Explain Brown's objection to the use of the word 
Association in reference to ideas, and show the more general 
principle on which the objection is founded. 

9. Notice the leading points on which M. may be regarded 
as having added to moral philosophy. 



LOCKE I., WITH COUSIN'S CRITIQUE. 

1. What is the objection, which Cousin urges, against 
beginning an enquiry into the human understanding with 
the question discussed in the first book of Locke's Essay ? 

2. a. What docs Locke rctrard as the chief argument 

for the existence of innate principles ? 

b. By what considerations docs he answer this argu- 
ment with reference to the two speculative prin- 
ciples, whatever is, is, and, it is impossible for 
the same thing to be and not to be. 

3. State Locke's argument to prove that the idea of God 
is not innate. 

4. a. What is the distinction, on which Cousin insists, 

between the logical and the chronological order 
of our ideas ? 

b. Illustrate this distinction with reference to the 
idea of space. 

5. Defend your answer to the question, whether Locke's 
system may be logically reduced to sensualism. 



'-:! 1%: 




^ ' 'I 












,'-. \ 












: • * ■.., 




1. a. 

prof 
sciei 

b. 
rule 

2. "I 
Political 

•\ She 
continual 

4. « Ii 

tion of th 
assertion. 

5. Sho 
charat^ter 

6. Ex} 
Political : 



Winiii^tvuitxt of ^otonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4. 



THIRD YEAR. 



POLITICAL ECONOMY. 



Examiner: Rev. James Beaven, D.D. 






WHATELEY. 

1. a. Explain and illustrate "Whateley's views as to the 
propriety of appealing to scripture as a criterion of 
scientific truth. 

b. Give an instance in which ho has observed this 
rule. 

2. "I wish for my own part there was no such thine as 
Political Economy." Why? 

^. Shew the influence of emulation in the promotion of 
continual improvement. 

4. " In fact there is no good reason for calling the condi- 
tion of the rudest savages a state of nature." Support this 
assertion. 

5. Show how differences of religion may affect national 
character and prosperity. 

6. Explain the special necessity and use of definitions in 
Political Economy. 



' i ^.» t' i' >yi 



« ' f . 



•\^4 









'4 





T 



mnii^ttma of Sotonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



GREEK. 



JSxamtnerA' J ^^^' ^^^^ McCaul, LL.D. 



* . 







I. 

Translate : 

AI. TToXXwy ^KWTi T'^vSe aoi 8ovvai xapiv, 
^vvai, irpodvixo'i eifii, 'frpwra fikv dewv, 
CTTetTa iraihcov wv €7rayyiWei yovd^. 
e? TOVTO yap 8r) (f)povBik el/iL Tra? iyw. 
ovTcoS' ex^i fioi' aov /xeu eX0ouar)<i ydova, 
TretpdaofiaL aov irpo^evelv 8iKaio^ 6>v. 
ToaovSe fievToc ctol irpoarjfiaivw^ yvvuL' 
ex rrja-Be fiev yr}^ ov a ayeiv ^ovXija-o/jLuif 
auTT) 8' idvirep el<i ifiovf} eXOjj^ B6/j,ov<i, 
fieveU acruXo9, kov ae /Mr] fiedw rivt. 
CK rrja-Be S" avrrj 7^9 dtraWdcraQV iroha' 
dvaiTLo^ yap koI ^evoi<; elvai deXw. 

MH. ecrrat raB • aXXa iricrri'i el yivoiro fioi 

rovTwv, exoLfM av irdvia irpo'i aidev KaXm. 
AI. fiwv ov ireiroLOa'i ; fj ri aot ro Bvayepe'i ; 

MH. TreTToiOa' lleXiov B' iyOpo^ iart fjLoi Bofiof 
Kpe(ov re. tovtoi^ S' opKioia-i fiev ^vy€i<i 
ayovcTiv ov fiedeh av e/c yaia'i efie, 
x6yoi<; Be avfj,^a<i kuI Oewv ev(ofioro<i 
^tXo9 yevoc av KdiriKrjpvKevfiaai, 
ovK av irldoLo' rajxh fA,h yap da-Oevfj, 
T0t9 8' o\/3o9 iarrl kuI S0/A09 Tvpavvifc6<i. 



.0 



Vf 



■"h: 



.t ■ ■,( i.\t 



Al. TToWrju ^Xe^a?, w yuvai, Trpo/xrjdlav 

dXK el coKei croi Bpdu raS', ovk d<f>[(TTa/xai> 
ifioi T€ ^ap rdS* icrlv iKT^aXeaTara, 
(Tfcijyjriv riv e^Opolf frot'i c^^ovTaSeiKVUvai, 
TO (TOP T dpape fiaXXov e^rjyov 0€QV<i. 

EuiupiDKs, 3Jedea, 720-745. 

1. Oeihv. What is tlio construction ? 



2. TTalBcov oiv. 



To wliiit limitations is the attraction of 
the rehitive subject ? 

3. By what parts of the verb must jv fit) be followed ? 
With what diftorcnco in si<^nifioation ? 

4. avTi). Give the force. Quote a passage in which 
«jose is similarly used. 

5. aTTaWdaa-ov TroSa. What is the construction ? 

6. Give different readings of line : liyovaiv ov, &c. 

7 iva)fJiOTo<i OVK dvrriOoio. Give a different reading, 

and translate accordingly. 

8. i^ijjov. Give corresponding Latin phrase. 

9. What idea did the Greeks connect Avith TvpavvQ<i ? 

II. 

1. What extant specimen of a complete trilogy ? 

2. Explain the terms :^ 'yopov Bih6vai, eKKVKXrjfia, irapaa- 
KTjvia, e^apxof, dv/xiXrj, ovBev irpo'i Aiovvcrov. 

3. Give a scale of the Trochaic Tetrameter Catalectic. 

4. What is meant by the qnasi-c(C8ura ? 

5. Account for the popularity of Euripides in the middle 
ages. 

III. 

Translate : 

"H re Twv iTrnrjBeioiv TrapaKOfiiBrj ck t^? Eu/3o/a9, 
irporepoviK rov 'Q-pwirov nard yrjv Bed r^? Ae^eXeta? 
Odaaov ovaa, Trepl ^ovvlov Kara OdXaaaav 7ro\uT€\^«? 
iyiyvero- rwv re irdvrwv o/xoico^ iiraKrcav iBecro rj ttoXi^, 
Kaldvrl roy rroXi^ elvai (fipoupiov Karia-rr]. Trpo? yap ry 
irrdX^ei ri]v fiev rjfiipay Kara BiaBoxrjv ol 'A67)vaio(, 
(pvXdaaoirre';, t>ju Ot i/vktu Kal ^vfiiravre'i irXrjv rm 



I'mricoVy ol fih ij> ottXok ttov, oi S' M rov relxpv<i, Koi 
6ipov<i KoX x^tfi^vo'i iraXaLTrtopovvTO. fi&Kiara 8' aifrov<{ 
iirie^ev on hvo iroX^fiov^ afia elyov, kuI ^9 <f>i\ovetKlai> 
KaOia-Taa-av roiavrrjv tju rrplv yevecrOai rjiricTTqaev dv 749 
aKoyaa<i. ro yhp avTov<{ 7ro\iopKovfx,€vov<; iTrlTCLxia-fMi^ 
VTTO UeXoTrovvrja-ifov fi7]8^ W9 aTroaTrjvai e/c 2t/ce\(a9. 
aXXd CKCt XupaKova-aij toj avro) rpoTrrp avmroXLopKav, 
TToXiv ovSh eXdaata avrrjv <ye Ka& auTfjv Trjq 'KdrjvaitaVy 
Kol rov irapdXoyov roaovTOv Troiya-ai rot? "EXXr)(n rfit 
hvvdiiem koX roXfi7]<i, oaov kut' apx^^ rov iroXefiov ol 
fihiviavrov, oi hk hvo, oi 8e rpicov -ye erwj/, ovBeU irXeio) 
Xpovov, iuo/Mi^ov Trepioiaeiv avrov^, el oi UeXoTrovvijfTioi 
€<T^dXoieu 69 Tr;y x^P^^^ ^'^'^^ eret eTnaKaiBeKaTfp fier/i 
rr}v TrpMTrjv €afioXr]v riXOov e9 ^iKeXlav, rjBr) rrp TroXefitp 
Karh irdvra Terpvxo>fiivoi, koX TroXefiov ovBev iXdaaco 
nrpocravelXovTO rov irpoTepov v7rdpxovTo<i iK IleXo- 
'7ropi/i]aov. 

TiiucYDiDES, B. "VII., ch. 28. 

1. ^DpayTTov. State its geographical position. 

2. Karct 7?}9. What other reading ? 

3. i(f) o7rAof9, &c. What is the construction ? 

4. Distinguish the meanings of eVt according to the case 
it governs. 

5. Parse Kadearaaav, d-TrocTTrjvat, iXdtra-a, irepLolaeiv, 
irpoaaveCXovTo. 

6. AeKeX€la<i. What peculiar privilege was accorded to 
the Deceleans during the Peloponnesian war ? For what 
reason ? 



-t I 



■;i.^- 



>j^ 



IV. 

1. Give the names of the five parts of Syracuse. By 
what Roman general was it taken? 

2. What incident is sciid to have inspired Thucydides 
with the desire of becoming a historian ? 

3. Why was he banished ? 



^>. ; 



Tra 



fen 



nn\\)tvuit^} of ^Toronto. 




ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 






CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



,» * * 



LATIN. 






Examiners: 



J Rev. John McCaul, LL.D. 
X Thomas Moss, M.A. 



'■«r 



I. 



Translate : 



Da testem Romae tam sanctum, quara fuit hospes 
Numinis Idsei ; procedat vel Numa vel qui 
Servavit trepidam flagranti ex redo Minervam : 
Protinus ad censum, de moribus ultima fiet 
Qugestio : " quot pascit servos ? quot possidet agri 
Jugera? quam multa magnaque paropside coenat?" 
Quantum quisque sua nummorum servat in area, 
Tantum habet ct fidei. Jures licet et Samothracum 
Et nostrorum aras ; contemnere fulmina pauper 
Creditur atque Deos, Dis ignoscentibus ipsis. 
Quid ? quod matcriam prsebet causasque jocorum 
Omnibus hie idem, si foeda et scissa lacerna. 
Si toga sordidula est et rupta calceus alter 
Pelle patet : vel si, consuto vulnere, crassum 
Atque recens linum ostendit non una cicatrix. 
Nil habet infelix paupertas durius in ee, 
Quam quod ridiculos homines facit. 

Juvenal, Sat. 111., 137-153. 




1. Write explanatory notes on hospes Numinis Idcei^ oui 
servavit to Minervam^ and et Samothracum to aras. 



i i'l 



i ii 



ti; ;:, 



V •:! 



2. Jures. Why in subjunctive? Distinguish (Bde and 
cedibua, sordida and sordidula, alter and alius. 

3. Give a list of Latin authors of Epic, Dramatic, Lyric, 
and Satiric poetry, introducing dates where you can. 

IL 

Translate : 

Consumptls opibus vocem, Damasippc, locasti 
Sipario, clamosuin agcros ut Phasiua Catulli. 
Laurcolum vclox ctiam bene Lcntulus cgit, 
Judice me dignus vera cruce. Ncc taiiicn ipsi 
Ignoscas populo : populi frons durior hujus, 
Qui scdct ct spcctat triscurria patriciorum, 
Planipcdcs audit Fables, ridcrc potest qui 
Mamercorum alapas. Quanti sua funera vendant, 
Quldrcfort? Vonduut nullo cogonte Nerone, 
[Noc dubitant colsi pr;\!foris venderc ludis.] 
Finge tamen gladios indo, atquo bine pulpita pone : 
Quid satins ? jNIortoin sic quisquam cxliorruit, ut sit 
Zclotypus Thymcles, stupidi colloga Corintlii? 
Ecs baud niira tamcii, citharcTodo Principe, mimus 
Nobilis. IT:\}c ultra quid crit, nisi ludus? Et illud 
Dcdecus urbis babes: iico niirmillonis in arinis, 
Ncc clypeo Gracchum pugnantcm aut falce supina. 

Juvenal, Sat. VIIL, 185-201. 

Write explanatory notes on sipario, FJiasma Catulli, 
Laureolum, 2^l<-^nipcdes, pra'toris liulis, pulpita, citharaido 
Principe, hcne ultra quid erit, nisi ludus, mirmillonis and 
falce supina. 

III. 

Translate : 

Nullas Gormanorum populis urbes babitari satis no- 
tum est ; ne pati quidcm inter se junctas sedes. Colunt 
discreti ac divcrsi, ut fons, ut campus, ut nemus placuit. 
Vicos locant non in nostrum morcm, eonnexis ct coliaj- 
rentibus redificiis : suam quisquo domum spatio circum- 
dat, sive adversus casus ignis remcdium, sive inscitia 
jedificandi. No cremcntorum quidcm apud illos aut 
tegularum usus : materia ad omnia utuntur informi, et 
citra speclem aut dulcctatioiiem. Quiedam loca dili- 
gentius illinunt terra ita pura ac splendentc, ut picturam 
ac lineamenta colorum imitentur. Solent ct subterraneos 



: i 



specus aperiro, oosque raulto insuper fimo onerant, suf- 
fugium liiemi ct rcccptaculum frugibus,'^quia rigorem 
frigorum cjusmodi locis molliunt. Et si quando hostis 
advcnit, apcrta populiitnr, abdita autcm ot defossa aut 
ignorantur, aut eo ipso fallunt quod quocrenda sunt. 

Tacitus, Germania, ch. 16. 

1. Gcrmanorum popuUs. Give the names of some, and 
state their positions. 

2. Fail. Why in infinitive ? Inscitla. In what case ? 
Citra. What is the meaning? SiiffiKjlum. What is the 
construction ? 

3. Give the names of Latin historians after Tacitus. 

IV. 

Translate : 

Ipsi Britanni delcctum ac tributa ct injuncta im- 
perii muncra impigrc obeunt, si injuria) absint: has 
{K?gro tolerant, jam domiti ut parcant, nondum ut ser- 
vianfc. Igitur primus omnium Romanorum divus Ju- 
lius cuin exercitu Britanniam ingressus, quanquam pro- 
spera pugna terruerit incolas ac litore potitus sit, potest 
vidori ostendisso posteris, non tradidisse. Mox bella 
civil ia, et in rem publicam versa princioum arma, ac 
longa oblivio Britannioc otiam in pace. ' Consilium' id 
divus Augustus vocabat, Tiberius procceptum. Agitasse 
Caium Ca3sarem do intranda Britannia satis constat, ni 
velox ingenio, mobilis pocnitentia), et ingontes adver'sus 
Germaniam conatus frustra fuissent. Divus Claudius 
auctor operis, transvectis Icgionibus auxiliisque et as- 
sumpto in partem rerum Vespasiano ; quod initium 
venturo3 mox fortune fuit. Domita) gentes, capti ref^es 
et monstratus fatis Vespasianus. '^ ' 

Tacitus, Agrieola, ch. 13. 

TV 



To 



1. In what years did Julius Caesar invade Britain ? 
what part of it were his operations limited ? 

2. What relationship existed between Julius Caesar and 
Augustus, and what between Augustus and Tiberius ? Wh 
was Caius Ca3sar ? IIow was he related to Tiberius and 
how to Claudius ? What other Roman Emperors, besides 
Claudius, were in Britain ? 

3. Give examples of the government of the genitive bv 
adjectives, verbs, and adverbs. 




k i'Sf 




^ v-nr 





m 



Tram 



mni\>tvms! of Eovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 

GREEK. 

HONORS. 




"* :t!! 






Examiners : \ S^^' ^""'Z McCaul, LL.D. 
) Thomas Moss, M.A. 



I- 

Translate : 

TO irav 8' a^' 'EWaSo? aXa^ avvopfiivoiq 

irevOeia rXi](nKdp8Lo<i 

oofiwv eKeia-Tov irpeirei, 

rnroWa yoOv Oiyiydvet Trpo? ^irap- 

ot><; /Jt,ev yap Ti<i eirefiylrev 

olBev dprl Bk (fxor&v 

rev^T} KoX cnroho^ ek eKciarov B6fwv<: d<f>iKV€iTat. 

o 'XpvaafiotjSo^i S' "Apr}<i aco/iidTCOv 

teal ra\avrovxo<i iv fid')(rj 8opo<: 

irvpcddev ef 'IXt'oy 

<j)i\ot,<TL Trefiirei j3apv 

y^yjxa SvaSdKpvTov dv- 

rrjvopot; cnroSov ye/jil- 

^(ov \e^r)Ta<; evOerov^. 

(Trevovai 8' ev Xejovre^ avZpa top fiev w? 

fidxv^ iBpiq' rov 8' iv (J3oval<i /caXw? ireaovr 

aWorpia^: 8tal yvvaiKo^. rdBe atyd ti<; fiaO- 

Kei. J>eovephv 8' inr' dXyo^ ^p^rei irpoBUoL^ 'ArpetSa/?. 

OL b avTov irepl rel)(p<i 

urjKa^ 'I\ta3o9 yd<; 

ePfiopjfiot^ Karixovaiv iyOpd 8' '^-xovra^, ^Knvirev^ 

^apela 8' daTcop (^dri<i ^vp kotw '' 

8r)fioKpdvrov 8' dpd^ ripei xp^o^' 

iEsoHiLus, Affammnon, vv. 429-457. 



> .11 
11 



! I 



is; 



■ * 






■■' * 



■ ..I 



1. TO Trdv. What is the construction ? Give the Latin 
equivalent. In what other sense does iEschylus use the 
phrase ? 

2. diyydveo. Of what Latin word the probable root ? 
8. revxv* Give different translations. 

4. ^apu. (Line 441.) What other reading ? 

5. Xe^rjTa^ €v0eTov<;. Mention another reading. Which 
do you prefer, and why ? 

6. When do the tragedians use a masculine adjective or 
participle with a feminine noun ? 

7. Scan and give the metrical names of the first seven 
and the last three lines. 

IL 

Translate : 

dW' ifjLov eK TovB^ €pvo<i aepdev, 
Tr)v TroXvKXaurrjVT Icfyiyiveiav, 
a^ia hpd(Ta<i d^ia Trdaywv 
[irjiZev iv"AiZov fieyaXav)(€LT(o, 

^l(f)0Br]\7)Tfp 

OavuTcp Tlara<i airep rjp^ev. 

-^scHYLUS, Agamemnon, vv. 1525-1530. 

1. re. What is the force ? What distinction between the 
use of re and Kai as copulatives by the poets ? 

2. Tjp^ev. Discuss the etymology of this word. 

IIL 

Translate : 

aWa T et) Bpav <j>7]aiv, vfxa<i S' ovk ayeiv Ta<; '^fiepaq' 
ovBev op6(o<i, aW av(o re koX Karco KvBotBorrav' 
(oar dnreiXelv (f)r]cnv avrff roix} 6eov<i iKaaroTe 
-qviK av y^evadSiai Belirvov, KaTriwaiv otKaBe, 
Trj'i eoprrji; /mtj rv^^ovres Kara Xoyov twv rjp,epSiV. 
Kad' OTav Oveiv Berj, arpe^Xovre koI BiKatere' 
TToXXaKL^ 8' rj/jLwv dyovrojv rwv Oewv diTaariav, 
r^VLK av 'irev6o)p,ev rj rov Mejivov rj 'S.apirTjBova, 
a-irevBed' vpieU koX yeXar' dvO' Siv Xa^^cDv 'Tirep^oXo^i 

T«Tec L€onLLvnunvf7.v. ifnnreiff iit^ 'nuMv t'^«" "'^rTsM 

rov (TTeipavov d(f)r}pedT]' /moXXov yap ovtiv^ elaerai 
Karb. aeXrivrjv m dyeiv XPV "''0^ ^lov Ta<i ij/juipaij. 

• Aristophanes, JSuhes, vv. 614-626 



i I ,' 



1. Explain the following terms in the Athenian calendar : 
IJLrjve<i irXripeUi firjve'^ kolXoi, firjv €/M^o\ifiaio<iy hevrepa lara- 
fiivov, kvveaKaiSeKaeTTjpi^;, evq koL vea, 

2. Give the rule for reducing a date given in Olympiads 
to the year B. C. 

3. i€poixvi]ixove<i. State what you know of their functions 
and duties. 

4. T^<? eopTi]^ Tvxovre'i. On what principle is the genitive 
here used ? 

5. Translate and write notes upon — 

2TP. Kol firjv odev ye Trpwrov rjp^djxeaOa XoiZopelaOai 
iyoi <}>pdaoi' VetSr^ yap elaTKOfieO' , wairep tore, 
irpoiTov fiisv avTov ttjv \vpav Xa^ovr iycb ^fceXevaa 
daat ^ificovlBov fiiXa, rov KpLov, &)<? iTreyOr). 
o 8' evOiwi dpyalov elv €(f)a(TKe rb KiOapi^eiv 
aBeiv re irlvovO , warrepel Ka^pvij yvvalic dXoxxrav. 

ARisTOpnANES. 1353-1358. 

IV. 

1. What were the modes of effecting a change of scenery 
on the Greek stage ? 

2. What are monodies in Greek plays ? 

3. Give a scale of the Anapaestic Tetrameter Catalectic. 

4. What proofs are there that the language of ^schylus 
was affected by his residence in Sicily ? 

5. Explain the proverbial phrase : ovhe ra rpia Xrija-i- 
yppov ytyvcoaKei^. 

6. Who is conjectured to have been represented by X6705 
dBiKd ? On 'what ground ? 

7. When must the fifth foot of the Tragic Trimeter 
Acat. be an Iambus ? 

8. What verses are called EpicKoriamhie ? What 
Prosodiac ? 

9. Where is dv placed in the apodosis of a sentence ? 

10. What prepositions are used after comparatives to ex- 
press (1) a preference in general ; (2) a choice ; (3) excess ? 

11. Discuss the question : Was the middle comedy a dis- 
tinct species ? 



.'dtCSl 




■M 












[ 



■(I 

s|i 
.'if 

i 



V. 

Translate : 

Tlepl hk Trpo^rjfidr^v koX Xvcrecov, iK irSatov re Kal 
TToicou &v ecScov ecv, ^8e eecopova, y^votr' &v <f>avep6v. 
t^irel yap eart fi,.fivr>l^ o ttoitjt,)^, &airep hv ,) K^ypLo^ 

rov apc0p,ov, eu re deL m yhp ola ,}., r) ^larJ^ old ^aa, 
Kac BoKec .; ola ehac Bee- TaOra 8' e^ayy^XXerL xJec, ^ 
Kal yXcorruKi KaifxeracfiopaU. Kal TroXXd miOv -n/? xhed 
e(Tri.Ac8o,xepydpravra rol, irotr^ral,. Upb^ S^ roOroc, 
ov^ ,/ avrvopeorv<i earc rPi, 'jroXcrcKp),^ Kal rP), TroirjriKrj^. 
Ayry, Be r^^ 7roir,TiK>),8nr) .) dpapiia. ^ p.kv ydp Kad' 
avr^jv, ,jBe Kard crvfx^e^rj.^^,' EJ ^^.^ ^^ 7rpoec\,ro 
fiiM^aadai Kar uBvvafxuiv. alrfj^ ,) dfiaprla. el Bi r6 
TrpoeXeaeac p,r, opOcb,, dXXd rhv X-rrirov dfi<pco rd BePid 
irpo^e^X^Kora, ^ rh jcaff Udarr,, ri^vvv dfj^prrjU, 
olovro Kara carpcKrjv ^ dXX^v ri^vv^, ^ dBvv.zra ^eiroin 
rac onoLaovp, ov KaO eavrtjv. "Hare Bel rd ^'^r.rLfirjaara 
ev Tot? -rrpo^Xijfiaa-iv €k rovrtov eTnaKOTrovrra X{,eiv 
npcorov fxevyap, av rd TrpS^ avr'rjv r^v reyvr^v dB<>vara 
Treiroirjrai, i^ixaprrjrai. 'AW ipOm evot. el rv^ydvoc 
rov reXov, rov a{,rf T6ydp reXo^ ecpnrar eloiirco, 
eKTrXrjKriKcorepoi^y ayro 7) dXXo ttoioc fiipo,. UapdBayaa 
V rov E,Kropo, Buo^c,. El p^hroi rh reXo, ^ p^dXXov^ 
Vrrov epeBexero virapyeiv, Kal r.rd r^v irepl ro{,rJv 
rexvii}v tjfiaprtjraif ovk opOw^. 

Aristotle, Poetics, ch. 25. 

1. T% vtroKpLriKij^. What other readino- ? 

• 2. oirotaovv. What is the Latin equivalent ? 

3. What is Aristotle's idea of the proper function of the 
chorus { Quote the opinion of Horace upon this subject. 

^ 4. Explain the terms : K^fip.o'i—ardtTipov-^'jrepnTheia- 
avayv(api(n<i — 'yPP'^l'-"' — o^Sftsi. 

5. What objection to Aristotle's derivation of /cw/^^Sra ? 



<Siini\i(ViOiUj,) of ^oronta 



M 



ANNUAF, KXAMINATIONS: 18(iJ. 



CANDIDATKS FOll li.A. 



GREEK. 

IIONOUS. 



TT, . f IJ.HV. JOH? 

Examiners ; •( n, . , a 

\ THOMAS j> 



N MoCaul, LL.D. 
Mors, M.A. 



1. 



Translate. 



Zrp- 7 



e7re(f)ui ol avv a\\nXo(f)ovia 7e'i^os' upijiov 

\€i(f>Oq Be Hepa-avBf)o<; epnrevTi IloXweiKei, veoL<i iv aiOXoL^i 

iv fid)(^ai<i Te TroXefiov 

Ti/X(OfjLevo'i, ^A^paari^tw 6d\o<^ upw^ov hufioi^. 

o9ev cnrepfiaTO'i ey(oi>ri pt'^av. Trpiirei rov AlvijcnSd/jLou 

ijKoy/xloiV le jxeXkwv Xvpav t<? rvyy^aucfiev. 

*0Xv/jb7ria fjiev <ydp avro^ 'Aj/r. 7'* 

^epa<i eSeKTo, TIvOmul S' 6fiuK\apov e? u8eX(f)eou 

^ladjxol re kolvoX X.dpiTe<i uvOea TeOpiTTTrcov BvcoBeKaBpoficov 

dfyayov. to Be tv)(cIv 

TreipdapLevov dya)via<; TrapaXvei Bvcr^povav. 

6 fxav 7rXovTO<; uperal^ BeBatBaX/xeuof (pepei tw-v re koX twv 

Kaipov, (Sadelav v'Ke-)(Uiv /xepi/xvav uyporepav, 

dartip dpl^riXo<;, t-TUfxcoraTov 'Ett. 7'. 

uvBpl (peyyo^' ev Be pav e^wv ri<i olBev ro /neXXov, 

on OavovTcov puev ivOdK avri'i uirdXapiVot c^pevc^ 

irotva<i eriaav, ra S" iv raBe Ato? dp^a 

dXirpa Kara >yd<i BiKd^et, Tt? €)(j9pa 

\6yov (f>pd(raL<i uvdyKO.. 

Xcrov Be vvKTeaaiv alel., "Zrp. B\ 

Xaa 8' ev dfMepaL<; deXiov e)(^ovTe<i aTrovearepov 

iaXol BeKovrat /Blotov, ov ')(d6va rapd(TaovTe<i iv xep6<i dicfjLa 

ovBe irovrtov vZwp 

K€ivav irapa Blanav' aWa irapa fxev Ti/xioi^ 




' I 
t> .11 




•m 



'I 



II" 


'jflH 


I'ii 




1 





Be&Vf oiTiV€<{ eyaipov evopKlaii;^ aBaKpw vlfiovrdt 

alwva' rot 8' inrpocroparov oK^eovri rrrovov. 

oaoL 8' eTuXfiaaav €<TTpl<t Avr, S*. 

eKarepcodt fieivavTa inro Trd^trav aZUwv e-)(€iv 

y\rv)((iv, treiKav ^io<i ohov irapa KpovovTvpaiV ^vda (lUKapoiv 

vdcrofi (CKt-aviSe^ 

avpai •wepiTTveoKTiv, avOe^o, hk 'x^pvaov ^Xeyei, 

TU fiev ')(^p(To6ev air dyXaMU SevSpeiov, vBuip 8' liWa (^ep^ei, 

on/xoiai TMV %fc'pa? dvaTrXeKovn koX Ke(f}aXa<i 

pouXat? ei' opOalcTL 'Pa8afJ.uv0uo<i, 'J'jTT. S'. 

ov Traji]p H')((£i Kp6vo<i eroifMov nvroy TrdpeSpov, 

TToai^ 6 TrdvTMU 'Pea? vrreprarov k'^oiaa'^s Opovov. 

Pindar, Olymp. II., vv. 41-77. 

1. epirrevTL. P;irsc. What other roiuling ? Give the 
perfect passive. 

2. iv p.d-)(aL^. Explain the allusion. 

3. odev. Quote a passage in which undc is similarly used. 

4. exovri. What part of the verb ? AVhat other reading? 

5. Koival Xaptre?. Give diftcrent interpretations. 

6. dpi^TJXoq. What is Buttman's theory as to the root of 
this word ? 

7. e5 Be fjiiv e^cou. Mention another reading. With 
what word in the sentence would you couple ev, and why? 

8. iarph eKarepwO. From what source is Pindar sup- 
posed to have borrowed this idea ? 

II. 

1. Quote Horace's criticism on Pindar's style. 

2. What is the Schema Pindaricum ? To what case is 
its use in Attic Greek restricted ? 

3. Explain Pindar's use of different dialectical forms of 
the same word. 

4. Classify the odes according to the musical mode for 
which they are best adapted. 

5. How does Pindar's treatment of the ancient myths 
differ from that of the tragedians .-* 

6. Who introduced the present division of the odes ? 



111. 

Translate i 

Ov fii)V aXX* ^-rfX Tr;y Kpartcrrr^v fintpav ^nix^i rwv 
liWcov TO 'jrpoiTov. xeyo) Se ro /j.e'ya\()(f>vt-^, XPV unvraiiffa, 
Kol el B(opr}Toi/ TO Trpay/xa paWov t) kttjtov, 6fi(o<! Kad 
oaov olov re, Tav '»/^t»;^a'» avarpe^eiv •npo'i to. fieyeOi), Kal 
tixTirep eyKV/j,ova<; uel iroieiv yevvaUw irapaar/ifiaTO^. 
rtra, ^ryo-fts', rpuirov ; yey pa(f)d 'Jtvv koX CTepwOi to 
roiomov vyjro'i fieya\o^poavvi)<i a7r>;;^r;/ia. oOev koX (f)omi<{ 
hiva Oavfid^eTai irore ylriXij Kaif eavrijv »; evvoia hi avrb 
ro fi€ya\6<f)pov, ox??/ tou AinvTO<i eV NeKvia aKorri) p-eya 
Kal rravru^ vyp-ifKorepov \oyov. TrptoTov ovv ro e^ ov 
ylverai, rrpovTroriOeaOai rrdvrw^ dvayKoluv, W9 e^eiu Bet 
rov u\7)6f} pyropa f.u) raire^vov (f)p6v7jfia Kal uyevve<i. 
ovhe yap olov re, fiiKoa Kal BovXoTrpeTrf) (f)povovvra^ Kal 
eTrirrjBevovra'i irap hikov rov Biov 6avfiaar6u rt Kal rov 
'jravrb'i alo)uo<i l-^eveyKelv ci^iov fieydXoi Be ol \6yoi 
rovTCOv, Kara ro eUb^, (ov uv efi^piOeU Sicnv al evvoiai. 
ravrp Kal ek roi/^ fidXiara (ppovqfiaria'i ifiTriTrrei ra 
VTrepcfivd' 6 yap rro llapfievuovi, (f)i)cravri, ,,''7''^ H'^^ 

ypKeaSrjv [et 'AXe|aTyS/3osM'//i*?''/' Kr47co vrj Aui," 

eiiTOiv^ " el llap/jieviQ)V yfirj''" to avrov fieya\6(f)pov BeU- 
vvcnv w? Kal rb ^Ofirjpov Trapopil^ei ijLeya\o(f)ve<; kv ri^t 
Ovpavip iari'ipi^e Kdprj Kal enl y^Oovl /QatVei.] 

TO eV ovpavbv dirb y?)<i Buinrrjfia' Kal rovr av 

ecTTot Tt9 ov fidXXov rTj'i "E()i8o<i ?/ 'Ofjbypov fierpov. «S 
uvofiotov ye rb 'llaioBeiov tVt t»}s" 'A'xXvoi;, eXye 'llaibBov 
Kai rijv 'Acr7ri'8a Oereov 

rtj^ e/c ixev pivuv fiv^ai peov 
oil ydp Beivbv iirolrjae rb e'iB(o\ov, dXXd fiiarjrov. 

LONGINUS, S. IX. 

1. 'H toO Al'avro^} (Tiaymfj. Quote other instances of 
sublimity of the same kind. 

2. Teypa(f)d rrov, &c. Mention different explanations of 
the syntax of this passage. Which do you prefer? 

3. ovBe ydp olov re [iiKpd. Cite parallel passages. 

4. TOt? roiovTOiq eXaTTcofiaariv hTri-)(eip(fiv o/nojii avroOev 
6 K.ai,KiXio<i ev Tot<f vrrep Av<tiov avyypajifiaaLV dired- 
apprjcre rcZ rravrl Avaiav dfieivo) YlXdroiVOf dTro(f)rjvaa6ai, * 
Bvc7t rrddeaL '^^prjadfievo^i uKplroi'i' <f)iX(bi/ ydp rbv Avaiav 
0)9 ovB^ avrb<i avrbv 6/j.q)<; p^aXXov fiiael rut rravri IlXa- 
rwva t) Avaiav (piXel' 

Translate and give another reading of this passage. 



f«| 



'.*.:! 



f 



i 



sWa 



IV. 

1. What objection is there to the form of the name 
Donysiiig Longinus ? 

2. When should an orator, accoraing to Longinus, imitate 
Demosthenes, and ^vhon Cicero ? 

3. Explain the terms: " epanaphora," "litotes," " me- 
tonymia," "polyptoton." 

V. 

Translate : 

Tf A. yfravco jxev eywye, 

XaOiTTovov 8' oSvvCiv ovT evBodev ovre Ovpadev 
eari /not e^avvcrai /3iotop. roiavra vefxei Zeu?. 



IIP. 



W TVat TTOV TOT et 



(TTp. y . 



TaBe fie 7n8e ixe irp6a\aBe KovAcora'i. 

6 e, 10) 10) caLfjLOV. 

OpcoTKeL 8' nv, OpcoaKct BeiXaia avr. 3. 

BioXova i}ixa<i 

a7roTL/3aTO<i dypt'a voao^. 

0) IlrtXX«<f IIrt\Aa?, ToSe pi! av Xfo/Bdrai' iod iral 

rov ^VTop OLKTe'ipn'q dveTrl^Bovov elpvaov eyyo^, 

iralcrov epd<i vtto KXfjSo<i- ukov 8' a%o?, m //,' e^oXcoaev 

<Ta fidrrjp dOeof, rdv wS' eirlBoip^i ireaovcrav 

ainco'i, coB' aihox, co^ p' M\ea€v. S) y\vKV<i"AiBa<i, 

(h Aio'i av6aip,ani, dvr. y' 

evvaaov evvaa-ov wKVirera txopw 

TOP p.e\€()P (pdiaa'i. 
XO. k\vov(t t(l>pi^a ruaSe (7vp(f)opd^, (jjiXai,, 

dpatcTO'i, oia<i olo<i mp iXavperai. 
HP. (0 TToXXd B)) KoX Oeppd kov Xoyrp kuku 

KOI, X^pai KoX putroLcn p,o)^0)j(Ta<i eyco' 

Kovrra) tolovtov out dKOiTi<i i) Ai6<i 

7rpovdi]K€P ovd' aTvypo'i XivpvaOev^ ipol^ 

olop ToK i) BoXM7n<i OtVew? Koprj 

KaOijyjrev copioU 'Epipvcop 

vcpaPTOP dp,(f)i/3Xi]aTpov, (o Bi6XXvp,tu. 

Sophocles, TraoInmeB, vv. 1021-1052. 



nni\}tvuit^ of s:otonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1804. 



CANDIDATES FOR JB.A. 



GREEK. 

HONORS. 



/Thomas Moss, MA. 




--'■tr ^1 



I 

Translate : 

Toiydproi r'l rwv aveKTrlarm' kol inrpoaBo/o'/Tm' tV/)' 
yficov^ ou jeyovcv ; ov <yap /3lov ye 'ij/jieU avOpoainvnp 
(3e^i(t)Kafiev, aXV et'v TrapaSo^oXoylav rots; eaofievoi^ fied' 
t}fia<; €(f}VfJ,cv' Ovx 6 fiev rwv lUpaMV ^aaCkeu^, 6 rov 
Ada) Biopv^a^, 6 TOP 'FXKrjcnrovrov ^tv^aq, 6 yrjv koI 
vSap Toix; "EX\')]va<; uItmu, 6 roKfiwv iv rah eTriaToXalf 
ypd^eiv, on heaTTorti'; ecrriv diravroav dvOpdirrcov dj> 
yXjov dvi6vro(; /xixpt Svofxivov, vvv ov irepX rov KvpLOf 
erepwv elvat Siaycovl^erat, aXX' i^Sr} irepl tj}? rov (Tcof/,aro<i 
cr(ori]pia(; ; koI rov<i avrov<i opM/xev rfj<; re So|j7? ravrr]<i. 
KoX ri}<i eVi rou IJipatjv 7]y6/xoma^ rj^Kofievovii, oi koX to 
ev Ae\0Oi9 lepbv r/XevOipwaav ; ^P)/3ai Se Sf/^ai, ttoXk; 
darvyeircov, fxeO' i)fjLepav (jlluv etc yu-eo-r/? riy? 'EXXaSo? 
dv^piraarac, el Kot Slkulox;, rrepl rcou oXwv ouSev opOaxi 
^ovXevadfievoi, dXXa njv ye Oeo^Xd^eiav kuI rrjv d(f)po- 
(TVV7]v ovK dv6pQ)'7rivco<i dXXa Bta/jiovlco^ Krija-d/xevot ; 
AaKeoacfidviOL Be ol raXaiTrwpot, irpoaaylrd/juevot fiovov 
rovrwv rwv irpayfidrwv e| dpxr]<i rrepl rrjv rov lepov Kara- 
Xrjyjriv, ol rcov EXXtjvwv rrore d^Lovvre<i r]yeii6ve<i elvai, 
vvv 6fi7]peva-ovre<; koI t/)? avfK^opd^ eTrtSet^tv TroLTjaofievot, 
fieXXovcTiv to? AXe^avBpov dvaTrifnreadat, rovro ireKTo- 
fievoL Kol avrol koX rj irarph. 6 re dv eKCtvco BoPm koX ev 

rrt rov §enn.TnilVTn^ Ifm. rrrnnm^itf/nna-tinf iii^'wr\i,-,'^r"r' ■"%</J~5-r« 



fxevoi. 



iEsoHiNES, Contra Ctea, 




i*".' *i4' * 



1.1 



1. 6 rwv Uepatov ^a(TiK€v<i, Who ? 

2. AeX<;f)ot?, Mention any other celebrated oracles of 
antiquity. 

3. €K nea'qq. Distingnisli the meanings of of ira^ and 
//eo-09, acoording to the position of tho article. What is the 
meaning ot fieao<; TroXtr?;?? 

4. hatfioviw^. AVhat position did the haifiove^ occupy in 
the Greek mythology. 

5. ireiaofievoL. Parse. 

G. TrepX Ti)v rov lepov KardXrjylnv. Explain tlie allusion. 
7. Kpi9r]a6fievot. Mention and discuss another readino-. 

II. 

Translate : 

BovXofiaL ro'ivvv ^iraveXOew e0' a rovrwv e^/)? eVo- 
XiTevofiijv. KoX (TKoiretre iv tovtol<s ttuXlv a5, rL to rrj 
TToXei ^eXri(TTov yv. 'Opwv yap m avSp€<; 'AOyvaloi, 
TO vavTCKov vficoif KaraXvofievnv, koI rov'i fiev TrXovaiovi 
areXet'i utto fiiKpcou dvaXwp.drwv ytyvoi-ievov^, toi»9 he. 
fX€Tpia rjjiLKpa KeKjrjfievov^ twv ttoXitcov to, ovra diroX- 
XvvTa<;, €Ti S' varepi^ovaav €K tovtcov ttjv ttoXiv twp 
KaipMV, eOrjKa vdfiov KaO' ov tov<} fiev to, SUaia iroieiv 
yvdyKuaa, rov^ 7rXovcriov<;, toi»? Be 7revr}Ta<i "Trava 
dSiKovfiivovi, jfi TToXei S' o-rrep yv ;)^p?;crt/ift)TaTOi/, iv Kaipm 
yiyveadat Td<i Trapacy/cevd'i eTrolyaa. Kal <ypa(f)€k rov 
dycova tovtov ek v/J>a<; elcrTjkdov Kal direc^vyov, Kal to 
fi€po<; TMV yjn'icfjfov 6 Buokcov ovk eXa^cv. Kalrot iroaa 
XP^aia TOv<i ■))ye/ji6va<; twv crvfifiopiMv r/ tou? BevTepov^ 
Kal TpiTov<i oieadi fioi BiBdvat, toare /xaXiara fiev p) 
Belvai rov vo/xov tovtov, el Be /i?;, Kara^aXovra edv cV 
vTTcopoaia ; roaavr, m avBpe'f ^AOyvaloi, oaa oKvycraip! 
tiv TTpof; vfid<i eliretv. Kal ram eiKOTo)^ eirparrov eKelvoi. 

Demosthenes, p. 30. 

1. Write notes upon: dreXeh—rMv KatpMV—ypa^ek— 
TO fiepof; — yfr7)^a)V — (TVfipLopitov — p.dXiaTa p-ev — KarajSdX 
Xovra — VTToypoaria. 

2. Explain the phrases : dvBpidvra eKBiBovac Kara avyypa- 
(f)r/v — •TTCptdvat XPW"''^"- ''"'? — ^i](f>ov^ riOtvai — evOvvwi tTnarj- 
fxaivecrdai — dp^dfievo'i diro rivo<f. 



III. 

Translate : 

KaiTot TauTr]<; rPj'i fie\€T7)<j /cal rr;? e7nfie\€ia<;. Ala- 
XiVT), etvep tK '^vxv'i 8iicaia<i eyiryvero ml ra Tt]<i irarplho'i 
GVfXfjiepovTa irporjprj/xii'rjt;, tov^ Kapirov^ eBet yevvaiov^ 
KaiKaXovg Kal wacnv ro^eX/'/xou? elvuL, (rviJ,fxaxM<i nrokediv, 
iropov<i XPVf^"''roiv, e/jLTTopiou KaraaKevrjv, vofKov avfi<f>€- 
povrwv deaei<i^ Toi<i airoheixOelcnv i^Ppoh ivavTico/jLara. 
TovTwv yap uTravrcov ijv iv roh avM xpovoi<i efeTao-t?, 
Kal e8a)K€v 6 irapekOwv XPovo<i 7roXXa<i /i7ro8ei^eL<i avBpl 
koXm re KuyaOo), iv oh ovha^iov cri) cf^av/jaei yeyovox;, ov 
7rpwT09, ov SevTcpo^i, ov rpiro^, ov rerapro^i, ov Tre/ATrro?, 
ovx'cKTo'i, ovx oTToaroaovv. ov/cow eirl y oh r] iraTph 
Tfv^dveTO. Th yap av/xfiaxia a-ov Trpd^avTO'i yiyove tt} 
voXei ; T/'9 Be ^orjOeia 7) Krrja-i'i evvoLa<; rj Bo^rj^ ; rh Be 
irpea^eia ; t/? BiaKovla cV 7)v t] iroXfi evTifiorepa ; ri 
rS)V GLKeiwv rj rwv 'EWrjviKMV /cal ^eviKWV, oh eVecTTT;?, 
€7r7)V(cp8(OTai ; irolai rpi/jpeiq ; irola ^ikij ; vrotot vecoa- 
OLKoi ; rh eTria-Kevr] reix^v ; irolov lttttlkov , ti twv 
diruvTuw (TV XPWtP'O^ el ; rh tj roh evvopoi'i r} Toh diro- 
poL^ TToXiTiKi) Kal Koivt) /3o7]0eia xPVH'f^Tf^v ; ovBefiia. 
Aw , 6) rdv, el fiTjBev tovtcov, evvotd ye Kal irpoOvfiia ; 

Demosthenes, De. Cor. 

1. e^era(n<;. Whence derived ? Explain tlic force. 

2. ov irpano'i, ^e. Of what is this thouglit to be an imita- 
tion ? 

3. What is the general rule for the use of the negatives 
ov and ^r; in objective sentences ? 

4. When can w? be used for eh ? 

5. w rav. Discuss the etymology. 

IV. 

1. On what grounds was the accusation of Ctesiphon based ? 

2. Describe and distinguish elcrayyeXia and 7rpo^o\7]. 

3. Explain the meaning of Seisactlieia. 

4. What was the Syracusan term for Ostracism ? AVhat 
securities were there against the abuse of this system ? 

5. Describe the duties and powers of the vofioOerai. 




<•• ' • ■ '\ 



■■ii 






^' Z\ 



m 



W M 1 



6. What is the broad distinction in meaning between the 
present and aorist ? Illustrate by paraphrasing jpd^e and 
ypaylrov. 

7. What is the only word in which the temporal augment 
is omitted in Attic prose ? 

8. Give brief sketches of the political career and oratori- 
cal characteristics of iEschines, Demades, Lycurgus and 
Hyperides. 

V. 

Write in ordinary Greek, and translate : 

ArA@HITTXHI 
TONAAMnPOTATONAN0TnATON 
THSEAAAAOSP0YfJ»IONctlIvTON 
KAIAPEOriArEITHNIIEHAPIOT 
llArOTBOTAHKAIIIBOTAHTnN 
TP] AKOSiriNK AIOAHMOVOA©H 
NAinNETNOUSENEKAKAIETEP 
rESIASTIi:i;riEPITHNnOAINANE 
iiTlISENIIPONOIAcMABIOTnOM 
AAAOYXOTTOTAIAi'HMOTATOTKAI 
ATIOKOMrmN. 



Cinibevfiiitp of Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



LATIN. 

HONORS. 






Examiners • / ^^^- '^^^^ McCaul, 
■^^'^^''^^^^•t Thomas Moss, M.A. 



LL.D. 



I. 

His superioribusque illis equi adempti, qui publi- 
cum equum liabebant, tribuque moti SBrarii omnes 
facti. Neque senatu modo aut equestri ordine 
regendo cura se censorum tenuit, nomina omnium 
ex juniorum tabulis excerpserunt qui quadriennio 
non militassent, quibus neque vacatio justa militiae 
neque morbus causa fuisset : et ea supra duo millia 
nominum in serarios relata tribuque omnes moti : 
additumque tam tristi censorise notse triste senatua 
consultum, ut ii omnes, quos censores notassent, pedi- 
bus mererent mitterenturque in Siciliam ad Cannensis 
exercitus reliquias, cui militum generi non prius quam 
pulsus Italia hostis esset finitum stipendiorum tempus 
erat. Quum censores ob inopiam serarii se jam loca- 
tionibus abstinerent sedium sacrarum tuendarum curu- 
liumque equorum proebendorura ac similium bis rerum, 
convenere ad eos frequentes qui hastse hujus generis 
adsueverant, hortarique censores ut omnia perinde 
agerent locarent ac si pecunia in gerario esst : neminem 
nisi bello confecto pecuniam ab serario petiturum esse. 
Convenere deinde domini eorum, quos Tib. Sempro- 
nius ad Beneventum manu emiserat, arcessitosque se 
ab triumviris mensariis esse dixerunt ut pretia ser- 
vorum acciperent : cseterum non ante quam bello con- 



1^ 



i 




iiiii I 




11 i 

i li 



iKiilji ! 



fecto accepturos esse. Quum hsec incHnatio animorum 
plebis ad sustinendam inopiam cerarii fieret, pecunige 
quoque pupillarcs primo deinde viduarum coeptse con- 
ferri, nusquam eas tutius sanctiusque deponere cre- 
dentibus qui deferebant quam in publica fide. Inde 
si quid emptum paratumque pupiliis ac viduis foret 
a qusestore perscribebatur. 

LiVY, xxiv., 18. 

Write explanatory notes on publieum equum^ tribu 
moti, cerarii, juniorum tabulis, lacatio, pedibus merer- 
ent, Tiastse adsueverant, triumviris mensarm, peeunice 
pupillares, a quceatore perscribebatur. 

II. 

Translate to potentiores : 

Prseposuerat prsetorianis Publium Sabinum, a prse- 
fectura cohortis, Julium Priscura turn centurionem: 
Priscus Valentis, Sabinus Csecinse gratia pollebant. 
Inter discordes Yitellio nihil auctoritatis. Munia 
imperii Csecina ac Valens obibant, dim anxii odiis, 
quse bello et castris male dissimulata pravitas amicorum 
et fecunda gignendis inimicitiis civitas auxerat, dum 
ambitu, comitatu, et immensis salutantiura agminibus 
contendunt comparanturque, variis in hunc aut ilium 
Vitellii inclinationibus. Nee unquam satis fida potentia, 
ubi nimia est. Simul ipsum Vitellium, subitis offensis 
aut intempestivis blanditiis mutabilem, contemnebant 
metuebantque. Nee eo segnius invaserant domos, hor- 
tos, opesque imperii, cum flebilis et egens nobiiium 
turba, quos ipsos liberosque patriae Galba reddiderat, 
nulla principis misericordia juvarentur. Gratum prim- 
oribus civitatis etiam plebs approbavit, quod raversis 
ab exilio jura libertorum concessisset, quanquam id 
omni modo servilia ingenia corrumpebant, abditis 
pecuniis per occultos aut ambitiosos sinus, et quidam in 
^ domum Caesaris transgressi, atque ipsis dominis poten- 
tiores. 

Sed miles, plenis castris redundante mululudine, 
in porticibus aut delubris et urbe tota vagus, non prin- 
cipia noscere, non servare vigilias, neque labore 
firmari : per illecebras urbis et inhgnesta dictu, corpus 
otio, animum libidinibus imminuebant. Postremo, ne 
salutis quidcm cura, mfamibus Vaticani locis magna 
pars tetendit; unde crebrse in vulgus mortes. Et 
adjacente Tiberi, Germanorum Gallorumque obnoxia 






s, non priD- 



morbis corpora fluminis aviditas et sestus impatientia 
labefecit. Insuper confusus pravitate vel ambitu ordo 
militise. Sedecira prsetorige, quatuor urbanse cohortes 
scribebantur, quia singula millia inessent. 

Tacitus, Hist, ii., 92-93. 

1. Prsefectura cohortia. Explain. 

2. Jura libertorum. What? Explain the remainder 
of the sentence. 

3. Principia. What ? Tetendit. What is the meaning > 

4. Give an account of the cohortes prcetorice^ cohortes 
urhancBy and cohortes vigilum. 

6, Fluminis aviditas. Explain. 

III. 

Translate : 

Tertio die inducta cognitio est, multis sermonibus et 
vario rumore iactata, de lulii Tironis codicillis, quos 
ex parte veros esse constabat, ex parte falsi dicebantur. 
Substituebantur crimini Sempronius Senecio, eques 
Roraanus, et Eurythmus, Caesaris libertus et procu- 
rator. Heredes, quum Caesar esset in Dacia, com- 
muniter epistola scripta, petierant, ut susciperet 
cognitionem. Susceperat. Reversus diem dixerat : 
et, quum ex heredibus quidam, quasi reverentia Eu- 
rythmi, remitterent accusationem, pulcherrime dixerat 
Nee ille Polycletus est, nee ego Nero. Indulserat 
tamen petentibus dilationem ; cuius tempore exacto, 
consederat auditurus. A parte heredum intraverunt 
duo ; omnino postularunt, ut omncs heredes agere 
cogerentur, quum detulissent omnes, aut sibi quoque 
desistere permitteretur. Loquutus est Caesar summa 
gravitate, summa moderatione: quumque advocatus 
Senecionis et Eurythmi dixisset, suspicionibus relinqui 
reos,_ nisi audirentur, Non cuo, inquit, an isti 
suspicionibus relinquantur : ego relinquor. Dein, con- 
versus ad nos : 'ETTiWao-^e, quid facere deheamus? Isti 
enim queri volunt, quod sibi licuerit non accusare. 
Tum ex consilii sententia iussit denuntiari heredibus 
omnibus, aut agerent, aut singuli approbarent caussas 
non agendi, alioqui se vel de calumnia pronuntiaturum. 
Videsj quam honesti, quam severi dies, quos iucun- 
dissimae remissiones sequebantur. Adhibebamur quo- 
tidie coenae: erat modica, si principem cogites. In- 
terdum aKpod/xaTa audiebamus: interdum incundis- 




!^ ' 









.» :! 





IP 



liil 



gimia sermonibus nox ducebatur. Summo die abe- 
untibus nobis (tarn diligens in Cassare humanitas fuit), 
xcnia sunt missa. 

Pliny, EpiBt. vi., 81. 

1. Explain the meaning of the passages in italics. 

2. What were uKpoufiara ? What xenia ? 

3. Compare the styles of Livy, Tacitus, and Pliny ; and 
illustrate your statements by examples. 

4. Draw up a short synopsis of the principal changes 
made by the emperors, to the time of Hadrian, relative 
to the senate, the consuls, the provinces, the taxes, and the 
army. 

IV. 
Expand : 

M'STATIOM-F-CL-PRISOO 

LICINIOITALICO'LEGATOAVGVSTORVM 

PR-PR-PROVCAPPADOCIAELEGAVGG. 

PRPRPROV-BRITTANNIAE-LEGAVGG 

PR-PRPROV-MOESIAESVPERCVRATORI 

ALVEI-TIBERISETCLOACARVM-VRBISCOS 

LEG-AVGPROV-DACIAELEG-LEG-XIII-GP.F.LEG- 

LEG 
XliriGEM-MARTIAEVICTRICIS-SACERDOTI- 

TrriALI 
FLAVIALI-PR-INTER-CIVESET-PEREGRINOS-TR- 

PL-QVAEST 

PROC-AVG-XX'IIEREDITATIVM-PROVNARBO- 

NENSET AQVITAN 

PR-EQ-ALAE- 1 PRC-RTRMIL LEG- 1 ADIYTR-P-F 

ET-LEG XGPF 

ET-LEG-IIII-GALLICAEPRAEFCOHlin-LIN- 

GONVM-VEXILLOMIL 

DONATOA-DIVOIIADRIANO-IN-EXPEDITIONE 

IVDAICA 

QCASSIVSDOMITIVS-PALVMBVS. 

1. Distinguish AVG, AVGG, and AVGGG. 

2. Explain SVPER. 

3. What were the four great collegia sacerdotum ? 

4. Explain TITIALI and FLAVIALI. Give other simi- 
lar designations. 

5. Write notes on XX'HEREDITATIVM and EXPEDI- 
TION E'lVDAICA. 



SUnCUevsfti) of ^Tovonto. 






ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18C4. 



OANDJ DATES FOE B.A. 




LATIN. 

HONORS. 



Examiners :i^Z'J''M ^'^m\' ^^'^^ 
\ Thomas Moss, M.A. 




. -'1 



I. 

Translate : 

Eu. lam quidcm licrcle te ad praetorem rapiam et 

tibi scribam dicam, 
nisi refers. Ly. Quid tibi ego referam ? Eu. Quod 

subripuisti meum. 
Ly. Subripui ego tuom ? unde? aut quid id est? 

Eu. Ita to amabit lupitcr, 
ut tu nescis. Ly. Nisi quidcm tu mihi, quid quaeras, 

dixcris. 
Eu. Aulam auri, inquam, te reposco, quam tu con- 

fcssus's mihi 
te abstulisse. Ly. Ncque edepol ego dixi, neque 

feci. Eu. Negas ? 
Ly. Pernego imo : nam neque ego aurum, neque 

istaec aula quae siet, 
scio nee novi. Eu. Illam, ex Silvani luco quam 

abstuleras, cede! 
I, refer ! dimidiam tecum potius partem dividam. 
Tametsi fur mihi es : molestus non ero. Fur. I, refer. 
Ly. Sanua tu non eSj qui furem mo voces - co te 

EucliO) 



t 

J* 


• 


•' 


r 




ii ni 



de alia ro roscisse ccnsui, quod ad mcd attinet. 
Magna est [res], quam ego tecum otiose, si otium eat 
cupio loqui. ' 

Eu. Die bona fide: tu id aurum non subripuisti? 
Ly. Bona. 

Eu. Nequo scis, quis id abstulcrit? Ly. Istuc quo- 
quo bona. Eu. Atque id si scies, 

qui abstulcrit, mihi indicabis ? Ly. Faciam. Eu. 
Nequo partem tibi 

ab 00, qui(iui est, indo posccs, nequo furcm cxcipies ? 
Ly. Ita. 

Eu. Quid, sifallis? Ly. Turn mo faclat, quod volt, 
magnus lupiter ! 

Tlautus, AuMaria, iv., 10. 

1. In what metro ? Give a scale of it. Scan first ten 
verses. What other metres, besides Iambic and Trochaic, 
are found in Plautus ? What was the Saturnian measure ? 
What examples of it? On what grounds has its existence, 
as a species of metre, been denied ? 

2. Explain the use of d paragogic; give examples of 
peculiarities of elision, of the contraction of dissyllables, and 
trisyllables, of dincrosis, and of quantity, exceptional with 
reference to rules and the usage of other authors. 

3. Draw up an account of Roman comedies, with refer- 
ence to the varieties of such compositions, the occasions on 
which they were represented, the actors, the music, the time, 
and the place, especially the peculiarities of tho Roman 
theatre as compared with the Grecian, and give a list of 
authorities on tho general subject. 

II. 

Translate ; 

Posterius res inventast aurumque reportum. 

Quod facile ct validis et pulchris dempsit honorem : 

Divitioris enim sectam plorumque secuntur 

Quamlubet et fortes et pulchro corpore creti. 

Quod siquis vera vitam ratione gubernet, 

Divitiao graudcs homini sunt vivere parce 

Aequo animo : nequo enim est umquam penuria parvi. 

At claros homines voluerunt so atque potentes, 

Ut fundam-ento stabili fortuna maneret 

Et placidam possent opulcnti dcgere vitam, 






Nequiquam, quoniam ad summum snccctlero honorcm 

Ccrtantcs iter infcstum focoro viai, 

Et tamcn o summo, quasi fulmcn, clolcit ictos 

Invidia intcrdum contcmptira in Tartara tactra ; 

Ut satius multo iam sit parero quictura 

Quam rcgcro impcrio res vello ot re^na tencro. 

I'roindc sine in cassum dcfessi sangiiinc sudent, 

Angustum per iter luctantes ambitionis ; 

Quandoquidom sapiunt alicno ex ore petuntquo 

Res ex auditis potius qnam sensihus ipsis, 

Nee magis id nunc est ncquo crit mox quam fuit ante, 

Invidia quoniam, ceu fulmine, summa vaporant 

Plorumquo et quae sunt aliis magis edita cumque. 

LUCUKTIUS, V. 1111-1133. 

1. To wliat cause do you ascribe the uncommon variety of 
readings in Lucretius ? What are the theories of Eiclistaedt 
and Forbigcr V What doubts as to the orthography that 
sliould be adopted in his poem ? How is this question affec- 
ted by the consideration of the ago in -which ho lived ? 
Give examples of archaisms that have been admitted in the 
best editions. 

2. State briefly what you know of the most ancient extant 
specimens of the Latin language, and give examples of their 
peculiarities in declension, inflexion, and use of consonants 
and vowels. 

3. Give an outline of the life of Lucretius, citing authori- 
ties ; and state his views as to creation, sensation, disease 
and death. What are the Epicurean tenets as to the exis- 
tence of the Gods, divine providence, religion, and true 
piety ? What was the Atomic theory, and whence derived ? 

III. 

Translate : 

Nempo hicc assidue : jam clarum mane fenestras 
Intrat et angustas extendit lumine rimas, 
Stertimus, indomitum quod dcspumarc Falernum 
Sufficiat quinta dum linea tangitur umbra. 
" En quid agis ? siccas insana Canicula messes 
Jamdudum coquit, et patula pecus oranc sub ulmo est. 'v. 
Unus ait comitum. "VerumneV itane ? ocius adsit 
Hue aliquis ! nemon' ?" Turgoseit vitrca bilis, 
Finditur, Arcadise pecuaria rudere dicas. 



I: 



•'I 



'■-11 



.„> -♦ 



, w 



is I 



Jam liber ot bicolor positia mcmbrana caplllis, 
Inquo manus chartro nodoaaquo vonit arundo. 
Tunc qucritur, crassus calamo quod pcndcat humor, 
Nigra quod infusa vancscat sopia lyinpha; 
Dilutas quoritur gcuunet quod fistula guttas. 

O miser ! inquo dies ultra miser, huccino rorum 
Venimus? at cur non potius, tencroquo columbo 
Et similis regum pucris, papparo niinutura 
Poscis, ct iratus mamm:c lallare recusas ? 
" An tali studoam calamo ?" Cui verba ? quid istas 
Succinis ambages ? tibi luditur ; cflluis amens. 
Contemncrc : sonat vitium pcrcussa, maligne 
Respondot viridi non cocta fidclia limo. 
Udum et mollc lutum oa, nunc, nunc properandus ot acri 
Fingendus sine fine rota. 

Persius, Sat. 111., V. 1-24. 

1. What was the Roman division of the day and night? 
How was the period of noon determined before the use of 
dial i ? To whom has the introduction of dials at Rome been 
ascribed ? What other mode of measuring time ? What 
hour is indicated by quinta umbra ? IIow many linece wore 
there ? In what two senses may quinta hora bo taken ? 
Which do you prefer, and why ? 

2. Write notes on liber, mcmbrana, cliartce, arundo, and 
sepia ; and give an ticcount of other writing materials used 
by the Romans. Illustrate parts of this extract by parallels 
from Horace. 

3. Explain the terms sonat vitium pcrcussa, non cocta, 
fidelia, olla, amphora, urceus, udiuii lutum, acri rota. 
What was an obba? What was opus doliaret Expand 
EX'OF'FIG. Describe Sumian ware. 









Wini\$ttuii^ of Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



HONORS. 

LATIN. 



E, . / Rev. John MoCaul, LL.D. 



I. 



Translate : 



Tibi haec cruenta serta texuntur manu, 

Novena quae serpens ligat : 

Tibi har lyphoeus membra quae discors tulit, 

Qui rogna concussit lovis. 

Vectoris istic perfidi sanguis inest, 

Quem Nessus expirans d .dit. 

Oetaeus isto cinere defecit rogus, 

Qui virus Herculeum bibit. 

Piae sororis, impiae matris, facem 

Ultricis Althaeae vides. 

Reliquit istas invio plumas specu 

Harpyia, dum Zeten fugit. 

His adico pennas sauciae Stymphalidos, 

Lernaea passae spicula. 

Sonuistis, arae ! Tripodas agnosco meos, 

Favente commotos dea ' 

Video Triviae currus agiles, 

Non quos pleno lucida vultu 

Pernox agitat ; 

Sed quos facie luri da moesta, 

Cum, Thessalicis vexata minis, 

Coelum freno propiore legit. 




:!^i^ 



sigt» 


m-' 






■ S .'■ 




fPPx.- 


■■ • . 






»^ 


• . 


.._..' 








{, >,* 




■ *!-;■ 


■ ' ■> 






— 





...-■-.^a 






* *.■ 




'''*■. 










'■ ^-^1 










T ^H 










-;' ^^!^H 






kift 




\ «■ 


d 


m 


1 


'5; 






Mi 



«# '4 







! 



Sic face tristem pallida lucem 

Funde per auras ! 

Horrore novo terre populos ; 

Inquo auxilium, Dictynna, tuum 

Pretiosa sonent aera Corinthi ! 

Tibi sanguineo cespite sacrum 

Solcmno daraus ! 

Tibi de medio rapta sepulcro 

Fax nocturnos sustulit ignes ; 

Tibi raota caput 

Flexa voces cervice dcdi ; 

Tibi funereo de more iacens 

Passes cingit vitta capillos ; 

Tibi iactatur 

Tristis Stygia ramus ab unda; 

Tibi nudato pectore, Maenas, 

Sacro feriara brachia cultro. 

Manet noster sanguis ad aras ! 

Seneca, Medea, vv. 771-811. 

1. Write notes on Phoebe, novena, vectoris, sanguis, pise 
sororis, Stymphalidos, freno propiore, sera Corinthi, mota 
caput. 

2. Discuss the question as to the authorship of Seneca's 
tragedies. 

3. Give scales of the metres used by Seneca, and point 
out peculiarities. Distinguish the changes of metre in the 
foregoing extract. 

4. Mention ancient authorities on Latin metre. 

II. 

Translate : 

Poeraat&s draraatici vol activi genera sunt quattuor : 
apud Grsecos tragica, comica, satyrica, mimica ; apud 
Roraanos, prretextata, tabernaria, Atellana, planipes. 

Exegetici vel enarrativi species sunt tres, angeltice, 
historico, didascalice. Angeltice est, qua sententise 
scribuntur, ut est Theognidis liber, item chriae. His- 
torice est, qua narrationes et genealogige componuntur, 
ut est ilesiodi TvvaiKcav KaTaXoyo<i, et similia. Didas- 
calice est, qua comprehenditur pliilosophia Empedoclis 
et Lucretii, item astrologia, ut ^aivojMeva Arati et 
Ciceronis, et Georgica Virgilii, et his similia. 



"'"wbw 



Koivov vel communis poematos species prima est 
heroica, ut est Iliados et -^neidos : secunda lyrica 
ut est Archilochi et Horatii. 

DiOMEDES. 

Write noSes on satt/rioa, mimioa, prsetextata, taherna- 
na, Atellanci.planipes, chrise, didascalice, heroica, and lyrica^ 
introducing the names of authors where you can. 



Translate : 



III. 

Cujus vis fieri, libelle, munus ? 
Festina tibi vindicem parare, 
Ne nigram cito raptus in culinam 
Cordyllas madida tegas papyro, 
Vel thuris piperisque sis cucullus. 
Faustini fugis in sinum ! sapisti. 
Cedro nunc licet ambules perunctus, 
Et frontis gemino dcccns honore 
Pictis luxurieris umbilicis ; 
Et te purpura delicata velet, 
Et cocco rubeat superbus index : 
Illo vindice nee Probum timeto. 



Martial, Epig. iii., 2. 



1. Give a scale of the metre. 



2. Cite passages from Catullus, Horace, Persius, and Ovid, 
iu illustration of portions of the first seven verses. 

^ 3. Compare the account of a book in vv. 8-11 with those 
given by Tibullus and Ovid, and describe a lloman volume. 

4. Give an account of the lihrarii and hihliopolse. 

5. Of what ages are the most ancient manuscripts of the 
Greek and Latin Classics ? 

6. Give the names of the principal collectors of manu- 
scripts, teachers, scholars, editors and printers of the 15th 
century. 













I 



It. 



1 



;;iii: 




1%" 

J .1* 







^nibtvuitu of ffiiovonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 

TRANSLATION INTO GREEK PROSE AND 

VERSE. 



Uxaminers: \ S^^* "^^^^ McCaul, LL.D. 
I Thomas Moss, M.A. 



I. 

Cleon, though master of impudence which nothing could 
abash, seems to have been not wholly unconscious of his 
own emptiness and incapacity; and he strove to cover his 
intrinsic feebleness by a show of energy, which cost him no 
effort, and was exerted at the expense or the risk of the 
state. He wished to be known as the blunt and straight- 
forward man, of resolute counsels, and strong measures- 
who kept the good of the people steadily in view, and who 
would always take the shortest course to arrive at it He 
thus gained credit for plain good sense and honest patriot- 
ism, while he watched every turn of the popular inclination, 
that he might anticipate or go beyond it. It belonged to 
the policy of Cleon to treat the allies of the commonwealth 
With despotic harshness, as subjects who had no rights that 
could be allowed to interfere with the will of their sovereign 
a_nd were bound to submit without a murmur to all his exac- 
tions. Probably, indeed, he had private motives, besides 
the affectation of patriotic zeal, for taking the most violent 
side on every question which arose between Athens and her 
confederates. The more he was dreaded as an advocate of 
stern measures, the more important it was to retain or silence 
mm. He barked, as well as fawned, for food. 

II. 

Sure I am, 'tis madness, 
Inhuman madness, thus from half the world 
To drain its blood and treasure, to neglect 






Each art of peace, each care of government j 

And all for what ? By spreading desolation, 

Rapine, and slaughter o'er the other half, 

To gain a conquest we can never hold. 

I venerate this land. Those sacred hills, 

Those vales, those cities, trod by saints and prophets, 

By God himself, the scenes of heavenly wonders 

Inspire me with a certain awful joy. 

But the same God, my friend, pervades, sustains, 

Surrounds and fills this universal frame ; 

And every land, where spreads his vital presence. 

His all-enlivening breath, to me is holy. 



• .1I 



'.ipPf 




1 




A It'll 





iM^^^MMHwi ' 1 Mil 






!i I 



C > ' 



^ItfCbetfiiitj^ of Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1804. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



ASTRONOMY AND ACOUSTICS. 



Examiner: J. B. Cherriman, M.A. 



1. Describe the nature of the apparent motion of the fixed 
stars as seen from a given place on the earth. 

Describe tlie points of similarity and diflerence at two places 
according as they have the latitude or the same longitude. 

3. Show how the latitude of a place may be found from the 
meridian altitude of a known star. 

If two stars have the same altitude in crossing the meridian 
of a place in north latitude on opposite sides of the zenith, 
prove that either the sum of their declinations is double the 
latitude, or the difference double the co-latitude. 

3. What is the nature of the sun's apparent path in the celes- 
tial sphere as seen from the earth's centre ? 

What are the zones? Account for the changes in the length 
of day and night at places in the different zones. 

4. Menti'on the instruments essential to an astronomical ob- 
servatory, and the nature of the observations each is designed 
to make. 

How is the sidereal clock adjusted ? 

5. Distinguish between sidereal and solar lime. 
What time does a common watch show ? 

How can the watch be checked by a sun-dial ? 



6. What is the nature o( the earth's patli about the sun and 
the law of her motion therein? 

How is this ascertained, and how are the actual dimensions 
of this orbit determined ? 

^ Shew that this motion will account for the change of seasons. 
Can the four seasons be equal in length? 

7. Describe and explain the moon's phases. 

What is the age of the moon when she rises about noon, and 
what about midnight? 

' « 

8. Explain solar and lunar eclipses. 

Why does not an eclipse happen every time the moon is in 
conjunction or opposition? 

9. Mention the chief points which distinguish a planet from 
a fixed star and from a comet. 

10. Define an undulation, and give examples of diflferent 
kinds of undulations that may occur in the production of sound. 

On what elements of the undulation do the pitch, intensity, 
and quality of a musical note depend ? 

11. Describe the modeof vibration of the air in a pipe closed 
at both ends, when sounding its fundamental note or its har- 
monics. 

What is the lowest note that can be produced by such a pipe 
of given length ? 

12. Describe the formation of the diatonic and chromatic 
scales in music. Why is it necessary to temper, and what is the 
scale of equal temperament, ? 

If a person ascend from a note by perfect fifths and alter- 
nately descend by perfect thirds, how near can he come to the 
octave ? 



r.-hk'i 



f^n 



Wini\}tvfiit!i of Toronto* 






ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



RIGID DYNAMICS AND HYDRODYNAMICS. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



i 



Examiner: J. B. Ciierriman, M.A. 



■f» !„l| 



1. Demonstrate the existence of ii set of principal axes of 
moments of inertia at every point of a body ; trnd shew that if 
the moments are known about one set of principal axes, that 
about any line whatever can bo found from them. 

If parallel lines be ttikcn, shew tliat the locus of those 
which have the same moment of inertia aboiit them is a circular 
right cylinder. 

2. When a rigid body moves about a fixed horizontal axis, find 
the time of a small oscillation. 

A thin circular arc oscillates about a horizontal axis which 
is perpendicular to the plane of the arc and passes through one 
end of the chord drawn through its centre of gravity parallel to 
its base ; the length of the simple isochronous pendulum is equal 
to this chord. 

3. Enunciate the steps of the proof that the motion of a rigid 
body about a fixed point, when no forces act on it, can be repre- 
sented by the rolling of the central ellipsoid on a fixed plane. 

If a plane disk be thus moving about a point in its own 
plane such tli.it the principal moments of inertia in that plane 
are equal, and at any instant the angular velocity be w about an 
axis which makes equal angles with the principal axes, shew that 

the normal to the di^k coiiiplcles n revolution in the time - , 




i '!»'". 

!l,i>*''^ 



h 




4. Exi)lHin accurately what Ih meant by baying that the motion 
of a froo rigid body is reducible to one of rotation and one of 
translation. 

Rotations about parallel axes being simultaneously impressed 
on a firo rigid body at rest, shew that the resultant motion is 
either ono of nttation or one of translation, and detennino it in 
each caso. 

5. A free rigid body at rest is struck by given impulses, deter 
mine the initial instantaneous motion. 

If the lni])ulscs consist of a single blow (X, 1', Z) at the 
centre of Ljravity (the i)rincipal axes there being axes of co-ordi- 
nates, iitid A, Ji, C the ]>rincipal moments of inertia) and a 
single couple (//, At, N), shew that in order that the initial 
motion may be one of rotation, 

LX ^ JlfV^ ^ XZ 

I 1 1 __l "^ J_ ~~1 • 

B V C A A B 

6. State and prove the principle of the conservation of areds. 
Comparing this with the principle of vis viva, state what forces 
will disappear in the equations formed by aid of one of these 
principles, which would aj)pear in those formed from the other. 

Two heavy balls are cfuinected by a weightless rod which is 
set in motion about the centre of gravity of the balls as a iixed 
point, detei'mine the angular velocities of the rod. 

7. When a fluid rotates in relative equilibrium about a fixed 
axis nnder the action of assigned forces, determine the pressure 
at any point, 

A thin hollow tube, forming a rectilineal angle, contains 
water, and is made to revolve with a given angular velocity (w) 
about a vertical axis through its vertex inclined at given angles 
(a, /3) to the legs. If I bo the length of the fluid-filament, shew 
that it may separate at the lowest point if 

cos j3 \ 



U)' 



2.7 /cos a 



+ 



sin'yQ 



8. Having given the impressed force at a point of a fluid in 
direction of its motion at that point, investigate the relation 
between the pressure and velocity. 

What further considerations must be introduced, before the 
pressure and velocity can be actually ascertained 1 

9. To find the time of emptying a vessel through a small orifice. 
Point out the various assumptions made in your investi- 
gation. 

If the vessel be the surface formed by the revolution of the 
curve ^* CC a** about the axia of x (which is vertical, the vertex 






•out a fixed 
le pressure 



l»eing ilownwiirds,) hUcw tliat the volumes discharged during the 
former and latter halves of the time of emptying it are in the 

n+ 2 

ratio 2 " — 1 to 1 . 

10. To determine the resistance on the anterior surface of a 
solid of revolution moving in the direction of its axis through a 
quiescent fluid. 

What circumsUvuces vitiate the common theory of resis- 
tances'! 

A small bubble of ^dass filled with hydrogen ascends in the 
air (supposed of uniform temperature,) thf wind l)lowing horizon- 
tally, obtain expressions for the horizontal and vertical accoleca- 
tions of the bubble in any position. 

11. luvestigate the differential cquatioi. which expi'esses ho, 
motion in a coluinnof air (supposed to retain the same temperature) 
arising from a hiupII disturbance excited in it, and assuming the 
solution of thr qnaiion, examine in what cases two waves or 
only one will '-d ;)rop:if ted. 

If the u:«(t'irbu,nct be exjiressed by c sin Jl (at — x), find 

\ 

the length of the .. ave, and if two such waves be super-imposed, 
find the period of the beats. 



11 




nail orifice, 
ur investi- 




/ 



.-**^;-.i 



£|d 




''^ffiH 




jjJM 




^'^^l 


Kffn 




mnmtuiip of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOE B.A. 



SPHERICAL TRIGONOMETRY AND 
ASTRONOMY. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : J. B. Ciierriman, M.A. 



1, Investigate the properties of the polar triangle. 

If one side of a triangle be a quadrant, the three angles nmst 
be each less than a right angle, or each greater tlian a right angle. 

2. Shew how to find the area of a spherical triangle. 

'If A' be the s'pherical excess in a triangle where (7 is 90°' 

a 



tan i 2?= tan 



tan -— 



3. Prove the following formulas in a triangle, 
(i.) cose = cosa cosi + sina sin?j cosC; 
(ii.) cota sini = cot.4. sinC -f cosi cosC; 

(iii.) tuu I (A-B) = "" \ <"7^j cot I a 

(iv.) smB sin (7 — sin6 sine 

== cos5 cos C cosa + cost cose cosil. 
Deduce others from these by aid of the polar triangle. 

4. In a triangle, having given a, h, A, solve it, finding e directly 
either by a subsidiary angle or a gomnetrical construction, and 
shew how the ambiguity appears in this solution. 

Discuss fully the ca.so where A > 90°, h > 90", and deduce 
the corresponding case when A, i?, a, are given. 



5. Prove Legendre's Theorem, and shew how it may be em- 
ployed to obtain an approximate solution of the triangle in the 
previous question, when the sides are small compared with the 
radius of the sphere. 

6. Prove that there can be only five regular solids. 

If F, S, E, be the number of faces, solid angles, and edges 
in one of these, shew that ^pFS = ^E\ where p is 3, 4, or 5. 

7. Find the local times of sunrise and sunset for a given day at 
any place, and shew that their sum is nearly 12 hours. 

Find the correction to the time of sunrise at a place to adapt 
it to another of nearly the same latitude. 

8. Describe the errors of adjustment to which a transit instru- 
ment is liable. 

Determine the error of deviation by the method of high and 
low stars. 

9. To find the position of, the ecliptic in^ the heavens at any 
time with reference to the meridian and horizon of any place. 

Describe the changes of inclination of the ecliptic and hori- 
zon in consequence of the diurnal rotation, and find when this 
inclination increases fastest. 

How is it ascertained when tho fii'st point of Aries is on the 
meridian 1 

10. Describe the nature of the correction called parallax. 
Find the errors thence arising in the hour angle and declin- 
ation of a body, computed from an observed zenith distance. 

At what time of the day should the observation be made in 
order that the former of these errors may be the least possible 1 

11. Calculate the moon's phase, supposing her to move in the 
ecliptic ; and when her angle of elongation is 60°, compare the 
apparent areas of the dark and bright parts. 

Retaining the same supposition, explain the changes of in- 
clination to the horizon of the line joining her horns. 

12. To determine when a stiperior planet will be a morning 
or evening star. 










•f 



•ij 'ii 






W^:*:*-- .■i'-iJ 





K/^-. .I^^^^^^^^^lj 


^S? 


^?^^^^^^^^^^^B 


V ■ ' .*. 


' -'-^I^^^H 




^'^^^^^^^1^1 


. i. 


.in^^^^H 


!. * ■ 


'' H'^l^^^^l 


iiiMl. 






t> • . 





m 



i. Exa 

terms wli 
circulatin 

In( 

In (! 

In(; 
the circU 
previous < 

2. Giv( 
and fractii 

Ifc, 

taken 1, i 

(i.) H 



(ii) 1. c 
(iii) 



il%ni\^tvuitt^ of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



PURE MATHEMATICS. 



Examiners: / ^ ^' S?\^^^^^?J ^•'^• 
) Rev. W. Jones, B.A. 



iM 




.M 



>A !■*¥. 





i. Examine the forms of the proper fraction - in its lowest 

6 
terms when it is reducible to (1) a terminating, (2) a mixed 
circulating, (3) a pure circulating decimal. 

In (1), find the number of decimal places ; 

In (2), find the number of places before the circle ; 

In (3), if a remainder b — a occur, the remaining figurea of 
the circle can be found by subtracting from 9 each of the 
previous ones in order. 

2. Give Euler's proof of the Binomial Theorem for negative 
and fractional indices. 

If c^c^c^ be the number of combinations of n things 

taken 1, 2, 3, together, shew that 

(i.) l+c,»+c,>+ +c„'=..^'' 



[n j^ 



_ [2n 



(iii) 



n 



( — 1) . ^r \ n — r . 




i/i*.,'j,, 



i 



'tif'lf !..• 





ill. Obtain tho exponential value of x from the |equi\tion 
a5 + = 2 coa (? . 

X 

If in any triangle 2 cos A = x -|- , 2 coa B =r y 4- - , 



prove 2 co.i C 



( rw -|- — ), and slicw thai the twtvvaluea 
^ • xy ' 



of 6x+'ii/ »i*'o c and c + 4 ■/— T _ . 

4* Invostiirate cxpreasitJiKi for the riulii of tho inacribod and 
ciroiuuscrihctl cjrolcs of ii trianjik!. AIho ox])rcss tlso area of a 
triangle as a symmotrical fsiuctinn of lUo sidos anil angles. 

If < V y O^ bo the contrea of tlu> osorihod cirohs of a triangle 
which louclv the .sidoa «, 6, c, rosju'ci ivoly, and 0^0^ — a', Ofi^z=b\ 
0,0^rzT.c' show that tho area 0^0./)^ eciualb 

(() /rtd'see -f. 66' sec -- + cc' soc - j . 

(ii) -, (a'h' sin -^ -f t'c' sin - ^^ + c'o.' sin — ) . 

5. State how to transfinnn an oquuiion whose roots are a, 6, c, 

into four other e(i[uaiioiis, the tirst of which has roots — a, 

— b ; tho second 7)ia, mb ; tlie third a+A, 6-|-/i, 

and the fourth _ , - 

a 

Prove the second and fourth cases. 

If the sides of a triangle bo the roots of the equation 
di (x) =a;'+ 2/) j;'+ (? ^ — r = 0, show that the radii of tho four circles 
which touch the sides of tho triangle are given by the equation 

where A is the area of the triangle, and/(x) = x^(x). 

vi. Investigate the geometrical properties which are implied 
in the terms pole and polar in a conic, and shew that any line is 
cut liarmonically by the curve, the pole, and polar. 

Having given the locus of the pole, shew how to find the 
curve "Iways touched by the polar with reference to a given conic, 
and take for example the case wher. ti ) conic is an ellipse, and 
the locus of the pole is a parabola v/hicii has the same focus and 
latuiv. rectum. 

7. Define a differential co-etlj/^.ictiit, and give a geometrical inter- 
pretation of it. Hence, or in any ^ther -way, shew that if the 



t , '«, 



difforential co-cfliciont of a fimctiou bo positive, the function 
increuscH as the vuriiil)l(j incroasoH. 

Verify trio tlicorcni - — , — - — _ 
dx.dy dy.dx 



—1x4- v' 
(\) WIk^u u= tun — X ■'■ (ii) wIioiiM 



xV 



8. Intc^'rate tlio following functions : 
(i) tan X (ii) hcc'^x log tan x, 

—1 /5" /• A l—x coH a 

(tan ^f_ IV) , , o - , , 

^ ' y (^ l+2a; CCS a-f-x' 

and find a ionnula of reduction for/siu^O. coh"0<W. 

ix. In any si)iral, ^t = -_ =/(fy), prove the formulas 

where <?> ia the angle made by p with a fixed line. 

If at a point where r is finite, '^^ = and change sign. 



there is an ajwe ; if 



dd 



00, and cliange sign, there is a 



cusp; if ^ ^ or 03 and do not change aign, there is a point 

of inflexion. 

Draw the foruiH at the polo of the curves 
r'*^-a% r-aO\ r^aQ. 

X. State and prove Newton's Lemma iv., Section 1 . 

In a spiral given by the equation r' <x p''4.c\ p being the 
perpendicular from the pole on the tangent, the vectorial area 
swept out by r is always proportional to that swept out by p. 

11 If (a I3,y) = ^ ho a homogeneous erpiation of two dimen- 
sions in a,3,7, the tiilinear co-ordinates of a point, shew that the 
equation of the tangent at a',/3',7', to the conic section it repre- 
sents is 

da' ^ dS'^^ dy' 
Hence find the condition that the straight line I a ■{- m 15 

+ n Y = ^^y touch the conic section — + -g- '^~;r' ~^- 




>:m 






.( IV- 







I 



. n 



Hir ' i 



j.^oJ^roi!:r;nirzf^".r-Tui^^^^ 







ntimvuiiiJ! of SToironto, 



AIJNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1804. 



CANDIDATES FOE B.A. 






NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, 

HONORS. 



„ . . f J. B. ClIERRIMAN, M.A. 

JExammersj-l^j^^^^ W. Jones, B.A. 



i. State the seuses in wLicli the term rcmliant is used with refer- 
ence to a set of forces, mentioning any thvcrema involved in 
such use. 

Prove that the algebraic sum of the moments of two 
forces, in the same plane, about any point in it, is equal to the 
moment of their resultant about that point, and examme what 
this means when the two forces are equal, parallel, and acting in 
oppoaite senses. 

If three forces in one plane are not reducible to a single 
resultant force, shew that there is a point in the plane about 
which their moments are equal. 

2. Investigate formulas to find the centre of gravity of any 
solid by means of polar co-ordinates. 

Apply them to find the centre of gravity of a hemisphere 
whose density is constant along any radius, but varies aa the 
angular distance of the radius from the axis of the solid. 

iii. Find the attraction of a uniform thin rod, every point of 
which attracts inversely as the square of the distance, on a point 
situated in the perpendicular bisecting it. 

Three such rods form a triangle, and a particle is placed at 
the centre of the circumscribing circle ; shew that it will not 
remain at rest unless the triangle be equilateral 

4 A particle of elasticity e is projected from a given point 
with a given velocity t; in a direction inclined at a given angle to 
the horizon; shew that it wiU describe a series of parabolic arcs. 



'^1 







It ' '" 



' !i| 




i I 



i;;;; 





i^ind the sum f the parabolic areas which it will describe. 
V. A ])articlo descends a smooth inclined plane • fin,1 iU 
velocity acquired, and th,. time of descent. ^ ' ^ '^' 

Tf an inelastic particle drscend successively down a s^r;«. r 
n such planes each being incli, cd to the previous cZJ.T "^ 
angle « and h bo the vertical height do cendecl // tt / '''"r 
the L ....hts du. to the several obcities at the endf of tl T "^ 

2<7(A — ZTsin'a)- 

of a medium wl-i 1. i-™i,t8 ,n if™ i " "^"f .°" "'" '"''"'')' 

» uniform frictiou ;„ Z "l"'^' ''^ «"»"1«"-S *» eilcot of 

periodic timo. ^ ^ *'"' '^""^ "'l"' '" '1"! «>m" 

disfanoo to tt aomi.lr,L/„r "" '" *'"= ''»"° "' ""^ ^""^ 

p^^"S:»:!';o*f:^SdSt^^ltr'- *'« 

/l -1 

man J?' "''"' " ''''''•' ^''^" '^"■''''''^S Auia -4 in like 

9. Find the pr 
oblique refraction rou, a plate of tL aess ? 

distanffrlttro";!^/;;Ul ^eVtTat^t^^^T ^ ^^"^"^ 
6 u ux iijjuc, snew tiiat the angle of iucidmce 

of the axis of the pencil is sin~^ Vgw^p?". 



2 d secondary f i of a en. >encil after 



•f WlNV 



n„f ;i^TJ'^* ^""l ■*.' """^ Casfiegraln's telescopes, and point 
out the defects 1/ the image formed by each. ^ 

Shew that in the former the aberrations produced by the 
mirrors ave m the same direction, while in the latter they partly, 
but cannot wholly, counteract each other. ^ ^' 

xi. Investigate the formulas by which the position of the 
bowl7 ""^ ""^ ' """"^ "^^"^ *^^* the breadth of the 



IJ&)^>^ ■ 



2 

where S^ is the difference of refractive index for the extreme 
rays. What circumstance would cause the breadth of the bow 
to bo actually greater than this 1 




ifsl 



•■'•'ll 







."«<(ii.; P: 



m 



COS. 



mni\}tvtiitt} df Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: lRfi4. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



rUllE AND MIXED MATHEMATICS. 

HONORS. 



w • r J- B. ClIERRIMAN, M.A. 

■^^^""'^^^^•Irev. W.Jones, B.A. 



i. An event, of wlucli|tho a priori probability is p, is aflSrmeil 
by two independent witnesses whoso veracities are v, v\ deterniino 
tlio probability of the event from this evidence. 

Suppose the affirmation to be that a specified ticket was 
drawn from a bag known to contain n different tickets. 

Shew also that in this case, the j)robabiIity of a specified 
ticket having been drawn, as derived from the testimony of a 
single individual whose veracity is wholly unknown and is 
equally likely to be anything from to 1, is 

1 j {n-l)]os(n^l) - (n-2) J, 



if n be different from 2. 



Also find it when n = 2. 



ii. If 71 be a prime number, the powers (from 1 to ?i— 1 inclu- 
sive) of any one of the imaginarA roots will ])roduce the other 
imaginary roots of the equation tc" — 1 =0. 

How must this statnment be modified if oi be not a prime 
number ? 

Shew that the roots of xM — 1=0, where p, q are primes, 
are given by th') formula 

Uhl +V-1 sin 2^) (cos ^J^ +v/-isin 1^1) 

where a, /3 are the positive integral solution of pyS + ^a = any 
integer from to (jpq — 1) inclusive. 



1*1 






, i 'l 


-,, 


1 




< 


1 ■• •*■ 


V 




iii !fe 



i 






ill. Exninino tJio relation in wliJcli tho conic ia'+ma'+m'^i\ 
stands to tlie triar.glo of rcfcrcnco ABO. 
Show that it represents a circle, if 

_ J __ _ ^>' _ n 
sin 2 A sin i}yy sin W ' 
and a roctang; ^ir hyperbola, if 

I -\- m ■{- n = . 
4. Shew that the .symbols of diffc-rentiation nn* -ovcrned bv tho 

1_ £ 

[c sm w.r) = c ^ sin(wix+sino), 
where tan a = ^* . 

n1.,t V''''^ n T'l'* ^^^ .^^"^ "'*'''»«'"'^ ^n"^<^io» to a curve ? Ex 
phun the method ot trac.ng a curve froln its intrinsic e.'uJtion 
Trace the curves (i) . =, „ ^in 3 <^. (ii) , ^ „ ,^3 , ^^ 

(iii) = sin — . 
a 

vi. Trove that /7(.^),/,^ ^ 

wheroy(:£) denotes the nth derivative of f{x). 

J^nid / f"'' </•'•, and obtain con vcrginjj series for Z*'^ " , 
both when « is > and < J, y/^. 

section of^ 'r,'V*' ^let,o,mino the general nature of the curve of 
section ot a surface of the second order by a plane. 

If tho section of the surface J^ + -l£ 4, ^-V _> 1 

by the plane /:. + niy ^ ,^. = ^, ^^ a rectangular hyperbola, 
shew that .. .. j_ _^ 4. 1 _ n 

8. Obtain an equation to determine tho tension at anv mint of 
a uniform flexible string, when acted on by any cenLScT 



■ A \uutoYm string wtiicli oooAiploH ono half of an elUptio tul)o 
bounded by tlui major axiw, is attructiid by two (^qual controH of 

force ( -j , one in each focua ; .show that tho tcriHiou at any 
point P is 

' ^0' ISP. IIP J 

9. A particln is projoctfid witli a voloolty n, in a direction 
making an an«I<! a with tlio axis o\' x, and is act(.d on by a oon- 
Htant forco / parallel to the axis of y; if th(, r.-sistnnee = 
k (velocity)' ahew that the diflereutial ecpiation to its path is 

Another particle is projectiul with the same velocity in a 
d.reetam n.ehned at an an;,de ft to the axis of x ; shew that when 
c(|t.al len^4hH ot tlu'ir paths have b.«en described by the two 
partieUis their (breetioiis are parallel. 

_ X. The central force varyin^r us distance, determine the dimen- 
sions and position of the orbit from the circumstanc(!s of motion 
at an assigiuid point. 

If at any point a small chan-e (ga) be made in the direction 
ot motion, 1>M<1 the cnsecpient cliang(,s in the ax<.s of the orbit • 

rectmirthiif '''''"^" ^'''^' ^'^^''' '''^ '"' extremity of a latus- 

2b, ^i, e being the minor axis, absolute forco, and cxcentricity. 

11. What is the condition that the deviation of a ray refracted 

hrough .a prism in a ,,rincipal plane may be a minimum? 

Obtain a formula from which the refractive index of a substance 

Shew that rays must be incident upon a prism within an 
angulnr distance sin-i | '-^S^^- } , in order that they may 

be refracted thiough the prism in a principal plane, i bein^ 
the i;efracting angle of the prism, and a the critiod angle of the 
medium. & ' •'"<- 



xii. When assigned forces act on any system, explain what is 
understood by the '-work done" by them, and examine in wha 
cases It will be measured by the change of vis viva of the system. 




^ (rk6 cliambei* of au air-gitn forms part of the ban*el (which 
IS of iiniform boro) and contains air of pressure p, the length 
occni)ie<l being a. If the bullet be resisted by a uniform friction 
/, find the "work done" during the discharge, and shew that it 
will bo the greatest possible when the length of the barrel is 
P 



I 



il!i 






[which 
length 
notion 
that it 
rrel is 



li^mw 



^V'i. 




i ':'■ ''I 




ilitnflievfiifti^ of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1804. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



NEWTON, SECTIONS IX- & XL, AND 
LUNAR THEORY, 



HONORS. 



Examiner : IIev. W. Jones, B.A. 



w i 




III Hi 



1. The orbit in which a body moves revolves round the 
centre of force with an angular velocity, which always bears 
a fixed ratio to that of the body ; s.'iew that the body may be 
made to move in the revolving orbit in the same manner as in 
the orbit at rest by the action of a force tending to the same 
centre. 

What modification must be made in the proof, if the motion 

of the orbit be retrograde, and the angular velocity of the orbit 

be (i) greater and (ii) less than that of the body moving in it? 

Draw the figure of the proposition in each of these cases. 

If the polar equation to VP be given, shew hcv to find 

that to Vp'. 

orbit nearly circular und(>r 



2. A body moves in 



an 



action of a force = ~^f{r) at a distance r, 



shew that 



the 

th(' 



apsidal r igle of the ovbit 






where a is the great- 



ij'{a) 



est value of r. 

Conversely having given the apsidal angle, find the law 
of force. 

3. Two bodies ^ and P revolve a thi id 2' so that P describes 
an orbit much interior to that of S; explain what is meant 
by the disturbing force on F relatively to 2\ and fiind expres- 
sions for (i) the tangential disturbing force on F, (ii) the cen^ 
trai disturbing force on F, and (iii) the whole gravitation of x" 
to T. 



nd the law 



4. The moon is at P in her orbit supposed elliptic, and a 
I ngent PY is drawn in the direction of her motion ; shew 
that the angle TPY'\^ acute when she is moving from apogee 
to perigee, and obtuse when from perigee to apogee. 

Examine tli'o effect of the central disturbing force on the 
motion of the moon's apsides, when the apsidal line is in 
quadrature. 

5. Examine the effect of the nblatitious force on the inclina 
tion of P^s orbit to that of ^S^, when the node lies between 
quadrature and farther syzygy. 

Under what circumstances will the inclination be tlie 
least possible ? 

6. Investigate the differential equation of the moon's radius 
vector 



-<ll • If i 



7. Given ^* + « = . 



+ G cos(p^+A)4- . . . 



integrate the equation, and shew that this term will fall in the 
integration by one order, if p is nearly equal 1. 

State the different cases in wliich terms of a higher order 
than that required must be retained in the differential equations. 

8. Having given 

-2 "' "^"^ l(2-2>»)e-2j8i] 

T 3 

^^ = - .j»a'sin{{2-2m),^-2/3t+3m»esinj (2 - 2m - c)9 

-2^+af, 

find u to the 2nd order. 

9. Explain the physical meaning of the term 

— JAi'sin 2(gpt—r/) 
in the expression for the moon's longitude. 

10. Define mean place, and shew that as the sun moves from 
per"; *n apogee, the moon's true place is behind her mean 

pi.c. 

11. Shew that the moon's orbit is everywhere concave to 
the sun. 

Draw a diagram shewing her path about the sun during 
a year. 



'.-i. 





'' - 5 , I 






mnmvniiai! of 9:otonl;o« 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONd : 1804. 



CANDIDATES FOR H.A. 



PROBLEMS. 

HONORS. 









^mminers.'fi' ^- CH^f^i^^AN, M.A. 
( Rkv. W. J 



Jones, B.A. 



1?'^ ''ii ^li 



1. Two jmiiiU, C I) aro taken m a givon line A li, f:ad tho moan 
lengtli of (J I). 

2. If the arcs wliicli bisect the anjfleH /f, 6', of a nplierical 
triangle A BC, meet in ; then will 

-^,1 \ (7 cos ylOC + cos 1 // coa /f Oi? = - cos | yl. 

3. From the crxo's ^,J9, of any diunuiter of a given small circle 
on a sphere, arc • are drawn ,>erpendicular to a gWen great circle ; 
prove that the ,sr;ni .f their sii^-'s is invariable, 

4. The base and ar..;i./f a s}>herioal triangl*; are given ; prove 
that the arc joining tic nuudle points of its sides is of given 
length. 

5. A quadrant of a circle describes a hemisi»}iere by revolving 
uniformly about one of its bounding radii, while a point traces out 
a spiral by moving uniformly along the quadrant irom one end to 
the other ; shew that the surface of the hemisphc^i-e is divided into 
two equal portiouvS by the contour formed by the spiral and the 
quadrant in its fii-st j)osition. 

G. Determine the longest and shortest durations of twilight at 
a given place. 

7. Having given the ratio of tlie measurements from N. to S., 
T^au iivii-. iij. it.T TT ., ui \jiL\i prujuciiun oii iviercaiors cnartoi asmaii 
circular island, find its latitude. 



'1^ 






8. The loss of weight in a body at the earth's equator, In con- 
sequence of the diurnal rotfition, is ^ggth part of its apparent 
weight. If by an increase of this rotation, bodies at the equator 
ceased to have weight, in what ratio would the sidereal day be 
altered in length 1 

9. In an ellipse described under force to focus, determine the 
points where the following changes in the body's motion could 
respectively be made without altering the direction of the apse- 
line : 

(a), a small change in velocity without change of direction ; 
(8), a small change in direction without change of velocity ; 
(y), a change in both velocity and direction by a small impulse 
directed towards the centre of force. 

10. In a plane lamina whoso form is a regular polygon of n 
sides, r is the radius of the inscribed circle : prove that for the 
moment of inertia (Mk"^) about any line in its plane which passes 
through the centre, 

12^ 



k' 



tan' 



11' 



11. A hollow vertical cylinder of length ?, open at top, stands 
in the atmosphere. A tight smooth piston (without weight) 
being inserted and forced down to any depth, water is poured in 
above it so as to fill up the cylinder when equilibrium is attained. 
If a small hole be now opened in the surface of the cylinder 
above the ])iston at a distance h from the base, shew that the 
piston may be brought jiermanently to rest in either of two 
positions, provided 

h > //, and (A + llf > 4///, 

where H is the height of the water-barometer at the time. 

12. Any uniform rigid body, whose figure is symmetrical with 
regard to an axis which is supposed to be rigidly connected witli 
it, is allowed to foil under the action of gravity from rest in a 
position where this axis is horizontal, a point in this axis being 
fixed. Shew that the angle which the axis has described when 
the vertical pressure on the point is equal to the weight of the 
body, is the same in all cases. 

13. A heavy rigid body, of which G^ is the centre of gravity, is 
supported at two fixed points -4, 7i, in the same horizontal 2:>lane ; 
if .«(, s' be the segments into which A B is divided by the vertical 
through G^ z be the distance of G from A B, h the radius of 
gyration about a horizontal line through G perpendicular to A S, 
shew that when one of the points is suddenly set free, the vertical 
pressure on the other will be initiallv unaltered if 



ss' 



■.z'+k''. 



.. I* ( 



14. A rigid rod is balancing horizontally about its centre of 
gravity fixed, and a ball drojKS vertically upon it at such a distance 
from its centre that tlie moments of inertia of the ball at impact 
iiiid the rod about this centre are equal. Examine whether under 
any circumstances the ball can begin to ascend after the impact. 

If an ela'^^^-'nity could exist for which such would bo the 
ciiHC, and the i. x c impact of ball and rod occun*ed at the same 
j)(»int of the rod, prove that tlie latter would then remain at rest. 

15. A solid uniform right circular cylinder, whose length is I 
and radius r, is freely movable about its axis which is fixed 
vertically. A smooth groove is cut in its surfoce in the form of 
a helix v/liich is everywhere inclined to the horizon at an angle a, 
and a heavy particle runs through the groove, starting from the 
top, and passing out at the lower end ; shew that the angular 
velocity (to) acquired by the cylinder is given by 

coV ( 1 + ^) (tan^a+ ^ secVt) = 2^/?, 

where X is the ratio of the masses of the cylinder and particle. 

IG. A thin straight tiibe is bent at a right angle, and one end is 
closed. The closed branch is })laced horizontally, and the other 
vertically, being exposed to the atmosphere ; mercury is now 
poured in so as to fill the vertical branch and occupy also lialf the 
horizontal branch (of which tlie length is J) and the tube is made 
to revolve about a vertical axis througli its closed end with an 
angular velocity o), so that when the state of relative equilibrium 
is attained, the horizontal braiich is just clear of mercuiy ; shew 
that 



rl 




i» ;,."i| 



le 



2k 



w 



= !/J 



I 2k 
e dr, 



where k is the ratio of pressure to density in air, and e is the 
Napierian base. 



1 







1 




8 






n 





.,;■■.* 



I 



( 




'E.f 



/ 





IMAGE EVALUATION 
TEST TARGET (MT-S) 




& 




/. 





.</ 










y. 



fA 



& 
^ 



1.0 



I.I 



11.25 



U£|Z8 |2.5 

£ US i2.C 



1.8 



IM. IM 




Photographic 

Sdences 
Corporation 



23 WEST MAIN STREET 

WEBSTER, NY 14580 

(716) 872-4S03 






m 



iV 




<- 



% 



V 



^ 






», 





6^ 



<^ 



«^ 



<1> 







mnmvms of Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



PRINCE OF WALES' PRIZE. 



HISTORY AND ETHNOLOGY. 



^2:amm.r«;/?' Wilson, LL.p. 
(. J. A. Boyd, M. A. 



1. How was Sparta affected by the battle of Mantinea. 
B. C. 418. 

2. In what respects did the battle of Chaeroneia decide the 
fate of Greece ? 

8. Describe the origin and nature of the privileges en- 
joyed by the Latin colonies of Italy, and trace the°causes 
and results of the social war, B. C. 90-88. 

4. Trace the influence of Charlemagne on the political 
and ecclesiastical institutions of medieval Europe. 

5. Construct a genealogical tree showing the Anglo-Saxon, 
Danish, and Norman relation by blood and marriage, of 
Edward the Confessor, Harold II., and William the Con- 
queror. 

6. Trace the grounds of Edward III.'s claim to the French 
throne, and discuss its merits. 

ETHNOLOGY. 

1. Agassiz says : " The boundaries within which the dif- 
ferent naturt combinations of animals are known to be 
circumscribed upon the surface of our earth, coincide with 

the natural ranao nf HiHtinnf: firnpa nf rnon " "^V^-f ?a -V 

plied in this theory ? Discuss its value. 



2. Herodotus calls the Dorians a Hellenic, and the lonians 
a I'elasgian people. He also refers to the iEolians as Pel- 
asgian. Discuss the ethnological deductions which this 
suggests, in connexion with the final adoption of the name 
Hellenes for the whole people of Greece ; and define the 
bearings of the traditions relative to Cecrops, Cadmus. 
Danaus, and Pelops. ^ * "umuo, 

3. Classify ethnologically, with reasons : the Oscans, the 
babmes, the Etruscans, the Carthaginians, the Basques, 
the Belgge, the Spanish Moors, and the Majiars. 

4. Trace the origin and development of the Romance 
languages; and discuss their bearing on the general question 
of the ethnical significance of philological evidence. 

5. Seeing that Gaul and Britain were both occupied by 
Celtic nations when conquered by the Romans, and were 
subjected to similar influences by their conquerors : account for 
the fact that the former exchanged its Celtic for a Romance 
language, and the latter for a Germanic one. 

6. Max Muller asks " What is grammar, after all, but 
declension and conjugation?" Define what is implied in 
this ; and consider its significance in relation to the different 
theon.es of the origin of language. 

7. Define the specific bearings of philological evidence on 
ethnological researches ; and state in what respects physical 
and philological evidence supplement each other. 




- .^1 




I. Shal 
f(l.) 

(2.) 
(3.) 

(4.) 



(^ 



mnmvnitS! ot Eovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



ENGLISH. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



i7a:amm.r«;/?-f^iS0N,LL.D. 
\ J. A. Boyd, M. A. 



I. Shakspeare's Henry IV., parts 1 and 2. 

f(l.) What characters and circumstances connect these 
plays with Richard II. and Henry V. i 

(2.) Note the anachronisms which occur in Henry 
IV., and give grounds of justification for Shak- 
speare's use of anachronisms. 

(3.) What references to contemporary authors and 
literature does Shakspeare make in these dramas ? 
What were his prohable objects in these refer- 
ences ? 

(4.) (1.) " The skipping king, he ambled up and down 
(2.) With shallow jesters, and rash bavin wits, 
(3.) Sooe kindled and sooe burned ; carded his 

state ; 
(4.) Mingled his royalty with carping fools ; 
(5.) Had his great name profaned with their 

scorns ; 
(6.) And gave his countenance, against his name, 
(7.) To laugh at gibing boys, and st&nd the push 
(8.) Of every beardless, vain comparative; 
(9.^ Grew a companion to the common streets, 
(10.) Enfeoffed himself to popularity ; 








m 



1 



' L hi 




(11.) That being daily swallowed by men's eyes 
(12.) They surfeited with honey; and began * 
(13.) To loathe the taste of swcotnc.ss, whereof a 

little 
(14.) More than a little is by much too much." 
* 1 lien. IV., Act 1, scene 2. 

(a.) Point out and name all tlie figures, rhetori- 
cal and syntactical, in this passage. 

{l>.) Discuss the various readings proposed 
instead of '• bavin," " carping," and 
" carded." 

(«'.) ^yhat is the meaning of " comparative "f 
Exemplify Slinkspcare's use of the word 
by another passage from this play. 

{d.) State accurately the force of the 6th, 
7th, 8th, and 10th lines. 

{e.) Give groups of synonyms for the words 
in italics, and distinguish between the 
shades of meaning of the words in each 
group. 

(5.) In these plays occur the following words:— 
" Younhe.r," '' mammets" " corrival," " kick- 
shaws," ''gossip," ''curry," {i.e., curry favour.) 
Give the derivation and transmutations of mean- 
ing of each. 

II. Milton, Spencer, Pope and Cowper. 

(1.) Give an account of the origin and history of the 
English sonnet. 

(2.) Detail the laws of the sonnet in its strictness ; 
mention the modifications in form and matter 
which it received from Milton. 

(3.) Shew in what manner the Spenserian stanza was 
compounded from earlier forms of verse ; give 
the laws of the closing line, its name, and why 
80 called. 

(4.) State fully the advantages and disadvantages of 
this measure as used by Spenser; and also the 
influence which it had upon his language. 






(5.) Analyse Pope's rhyming couplet with reference 
to its metrical character, and compare it with the 
same mcaiuire as used by Keats. 

(6.) Contrast the influence of Tope and Cowper on 
English poetry. State briefly the benefits ren- 
dered by each to the cause of poetical literature. 

(7.) " Concord she deeped was in common reed. 

* * * * 

By her the heaven is in ht8 course contained, 
And all the world in state unmoved stands. 
As their Almightie Maker first ordained, 
And bound them with inviolable bands ; 
Else would the waters overflow ihe lands 
And fire dcvoure the ayre, and hell them quight. 
But that she holds them with her blessed hands. 
She is the nourse of pleasure and delight. 
And unto Venus grace the gate doth open right. 
By her I entring half dismay d was ; 
But she in gentle wise me entertayned 
And twixt her selfe and Love did let me pas ; 
But Hatred would my entrance have restrayned, 
. And with his ;lub mo threatned to have brayned, 
Had not the Ladie with her powrefull speach 
Him from his wicked will uneath refrayned; 
And th'other eke his malice did empeach. 
Till I was throughly past the perill of his reach. 
Faerie Queene, B. 4, C. 10. 

(a.) Indicate all the figures, rhetorical and syn- 
tactical, in this passage. 

(b.) Give the derivation and signification of the 
words in italics. 

(c.) *• Hell them quight." Give the various read- 
ings as to these words, and the changes of 
meaning resulting therefrom. 

(d.) Point out any peculiarities in the prosody or 
rhythm. 




^ t 





H», 




'' ' ■ , ■! 


ii 




\ 




■1 










J!^ni\}ttuitu of 2!:oronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



CANDIDATES, FOR B.A. 



ENGLISH. 



TP . f D. Wilson, LL.D. 



-I 



*;^* Answers to all the questions are not indispensable ; hut 
FULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over- 
taken within the time. 

" To begin, then, with Shakspeare. He was the man 
who, of all modern, and perhaps ancient poets, had the 
largest and most comprehensive soul. All the images of 
nature were still present to him, and he drew them not 
laboriously, but luckily. When he describes any thing, you 
more than see it, you feel it too. Those that accuse him to 
have wanted learning give him the greater commendation. 
He was naturally learned : ho needed not the spectacles of 
books to read nature ; he looked inward and found her 
there. I cannot say he is every where alike ; were he so, I 
should do him injustice to compare him with the greatest of 
mankind. He is many times flat, insipid ; his comic wit 
degenerating into clinches, his serious swelling into bombast. 
But he is always great when some great occasion is presented 
to him ; no man can say he ever had a fit subject for his 
wits and did not raise himself as high above the rest of the 
poets." John Dryden. 

1. Give the derivation of all words of Latin and 
French origin in this sentence. 

2. Point out all examples of obsolete structure, and 
reconstruct them according to present usage, with reasons. 



T'T't. 



3. Point out all archaic terms, and words used in a 
different sense from their present value ; and replace them 
by their modern equivalents. 

4. What is implied in the fact that forms of construction, 
and uses of terms, which were correct in tlio 17th century 
are no longer admissible in English composition. 

5. When the Romans conquered Gaul and Britain, the 
languages of both countries were Celtic; the result in France 
has been tho substitution of a Neo-Latin or Romance lan- 
guage ; whereas that of England is Germanic. Account for 
this. 

6. Fowler says of tho present tendencies of the English 
language : " The distinction between the subjunctive and 
the indicative mode, and that between the participle passive 
and tho past tense, are likely to pass away." Explain and 
illustrate each. 

7. Point out all the sources from which the Latin element 
has been introduced into the English language ; and define 
the relative importance of each. 

8. " The Saxon element is much more expressive than 
the Latin part of the language." {Fowler.) Assign reasons 
for adopting or rejecting this opinion. 

5. " The English of the 9th century is one language, and 
the English of the 19th century another. They differ at least 
as much as the Italian differs from the German." {Oraik.) 
Explain vhat is meant, and account for the fact. 

10. Define the rank of Goldsmith as a poet and dr: .atist, 
in reference to his immediate predecessors, contemp jraries, 
and successors. 

11. Craik says, "In all that constitutes artistic character 
the poetry of Coleridge is a contrast to that of Wordsworth." 
Discuss the significance and accuracy of this criticism. 

12. Define the terms objective and subjective^ as applied 
to discriminate between Shakspeare and Byron. 



■1! 







m 



5 



1 




1. Sub 



Translate 

L( 

assez 

Ses ^ 

gloir 

licen 

etait 

confi 

les ci 

politi 

bien 

nait 

dulit< 

ne s'l 

cette 

Bes SI 

eux 1 

rellei 



rMi 



i^nmvm^ of ^otwto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 










FRENCH. 



JS^a:awmm;H^^^s Fornbri, LL.D. 
\ Robert Sullivan, A.M. 



I. 



1. Subject for French composition: "Humility rare in 

victory." 



11. 



Translate : 



Le grand malheur de Frederic fut de n'avoir point 
assez do respect pour la religion ni pour les moeurs. 
Ses gouts 6taient cyniques. Bien que I'amour de la 
gloiro ait donne do I'dMvation a ses pens^es, sa mani^re 
licencieuse de s'exprimer sur les objets les plus sacr^s 
etait cause que ses vertus mgmes n'inspiraient pas de 
confiance : on en jouissait, on les approuvait, mais on 
les croyait un calcul. Tout semblaic devoir 6tre de la 
politique dans Frederic ; ainsi done, co qu'il faisait de 
bien rendait I'etat du pays meilleur, mais ne perfection- 
nait pas la morality de la nation. II affichait I'incredu- 
duhtd et se moquait de la vertu des femmes ; et rien 
ne s'accordait moins avec le caract^re allemand que 
cette maniere de penser. Frederic, en affranchissant 
ses sujets de ce qu'il apnelait les prejugeSj fetei^nait en 
eux le' patriotisme : carj pour s'attache'r aux pays natu- 
rellement sombres et steriles, il faut qu'il y r^gne des 




i^-; S 



An-, 



;i.. 



1 it. , ti ^ 




opinions et dea principes d'une grande s6v6rit^. Dans 
ces contr^ea sablonneuses, o^ la terre ne produit que dea 
sapins ec^ des bruyeres, la force de I'homme consiste 
dans son arne ; et si vous lui otez ce qui fait la vie de 
cette lime, les sentiments religieux, il n'aura plus que 
du degoiit pour sa triste patrie. 

Mmme. de Stael, De VAllemagne. 

1. Bien que. Give a synonym. 

2. On en jouissait. What does eii refer to ? 

3. Mais on leg croyait. What is the antecedent of les? 
Give the force of un calcul. 

4. Tout semhlait devoir. Turn semhlait into an imper- 
sonal verb, and resolve devoir into tense and mood, with 
tout as subject. 

5. I^tre de la politique. Give the force. 

6. Itendait meilleur. Turn it into a single word. 

7. En affranchissant. Resolve by a conjunction, tense 
and mood. 

8. Pour s'attacher. Make it definite. 

Ill- 
Translate : 

CHIMENE. 

Pour moi ! mon ennemi ! I'objet de ma colore ! 
L'auteur de mes malheurs ! I'assassin de mon p^re ! 
De ma juste poursuite on fait si peu de cas 
Qu'on me croit obliger en ne m'ecoutant pas ! 
Puisque vous refusez la justice k mes larmes, 
Sire, permittez-moi de recourir aux armes ; 
C'est par la seulement qu'il a su m'outrager, 
Et c'est aussi par 1^ que je me dois venger. 
A tons vos cavaliers je demande sa t6te ; 
Oui, qu'un d'eux me I'apporte, et je suis sa conquSte ; 
Qu'ils le combattent, sire ; et, le combat fini, 
J'^pouse le vainqueur, si Rodrigue est puni. 
Sous votre autorit6 souffrez qu'on le public. 

CoRNEiLLE, Act iv., Sccne v. 

1. Pour moi! mon ennemi! Fill up the ellipsis, and 
connect this and following line with the preceding one. 



h" i"d> 






2. On fait sipeu de cas. Give the force. 

3. Qu'on me croit ohliger. What are this and preceding 
lines an answer to, and what the two on refer to ? 

4. O'eat par Id. Destroy the pleonasm in this and follow- 
ing verse, and give the force o? par Id. 

5. Si Rodrigue est puni. When does the conjunction si 
govern the present, and when the future tense, and when is 
it turned into que with the subjunctive. Give an example 
for each case. 

IV. 

History of French literature, from the 18th century to the 
present time (Chouquet's.) 

1. What work is considered the masterpiece of the French 
stage, and by whom was it written ? 

2. Name the founders of the Biographie UniverseUe, and 
give the character of the work. 

3. What are the works which place F. Arago among the 
most distinguished literary men of our age ? 

4. Give a biographical sketch of E. Sue, and state what 
sort of romance he is the creator of. 

5. To whom is Franco indebted for Eistoire de Dix 
ans, and what is its character ? 





•I ,l!l 



Hi 1\ 



Translate 

Pai 

fait le 
et la 
et la 
votro 
pour ^ 



Oua 

choses 

Tais 

pas a 1 



Je V 

it ! 

d'autre 
est un ( 



WLnit^tvuiti^ otmx^uo. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



FRENCH. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



Examiners: J i^^^^ Forneri, LL.D. 
i Robert Sullivan, M.A. 



Translate into English : 

JACQUELINE. 

Par ma fi, monsieu, ceti^ci fera justement ce qu'anfc 

ll I Ti- ' "^ff'^'?^ q«e ce sera queussi queumi 
et la meileure mddecame quo Fan pourrait bailler ^ 
votro fi le ce serait, selon moi, un biau et bon mari 
pour qui alle eiit de Tamiqute. ' 

gerontb. 
Ouais ! nourrice ma mie, vous vous mglea de bien des 



cboses ! 



LUCAS. 



Taisez-vous, notre minag^re Jacquelaine: ce n'est 
pas a vous a bouter U votre nez. « » ce n est 

JACQUELINE. 

L .1.1 .^uo ae 1 lau uiaire; que votre fiiie a besoin 
d autre chose que do rhibarbe et de s^n^, et qu^ln mad 
est un empiatre qui garit tous les maux des filled 








•ii 



i • , 







GERONTE. 

Est-elle en 6tat maintenant qu'on s'en vouliit charger 
avec rinfirmitS qu'elle a ? Et lorsque j'ai 6te dans le 
dessein de la marier, ne s'est-elle pas opposde k mes 
volont^s? 

JACQUELINE. 

Je le crois bian ; vous li vouliez bailler eun homme 
qu'alle R'aime point. Que ne preniais-vous ce monsieur 
Liandre, qui li touchait au cocur ? Alle aurait ete fort 
obcissante ; et je m'en vas gager qu'il la prendrait, li, 
comme alle est, si vous la li vouillais donner. 

MoLiERE, Le Medecin Malgre lui, Act ii., Scene ii. 

1. Les autres. Add the noun. 

2. Queussi queumi. Give the force. 

8. Taisez-vous. Compare se taire, taire etfaire taire. 

4. Ce w' est pas a vous a bouter Id voire nez. Give the force 
of a bouter Id voire nez, especially of Id. State what differ- 
ence between c'est d vous de, and e'est d vous d. 

5. N'y feront rian que de I'iau claire. Give the force. 
What does y refer to ? 

6. Que ne preniais-vous, ^c. For what does que stand 
here? 

7. Li, comme alle est. Give the force. 

8. Turn all incorrect words and expressions into good 
modern French. 

II. 

Translate into English : 

Mais, pour punir enfin nos maitres §. leur tour 
Dieu fit choix do Cyrus avant qu'il vit le jour, 
L'appela par son nom, le promit k la terre, 
Le fit naltre, et soudain I'arma de son tonnerre, 
Brisa les fiers remparts et les portes d'airain, 
Mit des superbes rois la depouille en sa main, 
De son temple ddtruit vengea sur eux I'injure : 
Babylone paya nos pleurs avec usure. 
Cyrus, par lui vainqueur, publia ses bienfaits, 
Regarda notre peuple avec dcs ycux de paix, 
Nous rendit et nos lois et nos f ^tes divines ; 
Et le temple d^ja sortoit de ses mines. 



--i 



,'9 



Mais, de ce roi si sage, h^ritier insens^, 
Son fils interrompit I'ouvrage commence, 
Fut sourd a nos douleurs : Dieu rejeta sa race, 
Le retrancha lui-meme et vous mit en sa place. 

Racine, EatheVy Act iii., Scene iv. 
1. Nob maitrea. Name them. 

1. Dieu fit choix de Cyru9. Explain the prophecy con- 
cerning Cyrus and name the prophet. 

3. Avant qu'il vit le jour. Give the force or give a 
synonym. 

4. Le fit nattre. Explain the peculiarity of faire when 
followed by an infinitive without preposition, and compare 
ne faire que with ne faire que de. 

5. Bahylone — aveo usure. Give the force aveo usure. 

6. Son file interrompit. Who is he ? 

7. L'ouvrage commence. Name it. 

8. Point out the two most striking inversions, and state 
what figure you perceive in the lines from " Dieu fit choix 
de Oyrui*' up to Cyrus, ^c. 



''[.' 



"'1 



' r p; 



,t ; * I 





* \l 




hpl 



.* 



HI 



■l 


:i;i 


^^H 


m 


mH' 


ifi- 


Ih 


■^ <■ * 







a: *': 'M '. ' riiia. 



CInCiif Vfiiftj? of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS I 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



FRENCH. 

HONORS AND SCIIOLAIISIIIPS. 



I KOBERT Sullivan, M.A. 






POETRY OF THE TROUBADOURS AND TROUVERES COMPARED 
AND RENDERED INTO FRENCH PROSE. 

Translate into modern French : 

Aquelles mans que james perdonaren 
Han ja romput lo fill tenint la vida 
De vos, qui son do aquest mon exida 
Segons los fats en secret ordenaren. 
Tot quant yo veig: e sent dolor me torna 
Cant me recort de vos que tant amava. 
En ma dolor, si prim e bel cercava 
Si trobara que 'n dclit se contorna. 
Donchs durara, puix t6 qui la sosting. 
Car sens delit dolor cresch nos reting. 

En cor gentil amor per mort no passa, 
Mas en aquell qui sol lo vici tira ; 
La quantitat d' amor durar no mira. 
La qualitat d' amor bona no s'lassa. 
Quant r uU no veu e lo toch no pratica 
Mor lo voler que tot por el so guanya 
Qui 'n tal punt el dolor sent molt estranya 
Mas dura poch qui 'n passau testifica. 
Amor honest los^sancts amant fa colre 
D' aquest vos am, et mort nol me pot tolre. 

SiSMONDi, Langue d' Oc, page 160. 










1. AqucUea mans, &c. Whose mans ? 

2. Tenint. llcsolvo it into a tcnso and mood. 

3. Scgons losfata. Fill up tho ellipsis. 

4. Tot quant, llesolvo quant. 

5. .SV trohara que 'n ddit, kc. Trcfix the antecedent 
to que. 

0. Puix te. Fill up tho ellipsis. 

7. La sostint/. What docs la refer to ? 

8. Dolor creseh nos retimj. Resolve cresch and 
analyse nos. ' • 

9. Mas en aquellqui. Fill up the ellipsis. 

10. La quantitat \l amor La qualitat, &c Ev 

plain tho antithesis. i <■• m- 

11. No mira. Prefix the subject. 

12. For el. What does el refer to ? 

13. Qui. Give tho antecedent. 

of Ma-^^''''^"'*'' ^''^' '^"'' '^'" ^^^'"'^ '"' *^'^ '-antecedent 

15. En passau tcstifica. Give tho force, as well ns of 
sancts amantfa colre. ' ^ ^* 

II. 

Translate into modern French : 

Oimi amors si dure departio 
Me convendra fairo do la moillor 
Qui oncques fust amee no servie. 
Dex mo ramoint a lut por sa doucor 
fei voirement que j'cn part tl dolor. 
i)ex ! qu ai-ja dit, je no m'en part jo mie : 
be li cors va servir notre seignor, 
Tout li miens cuers remaint en sa baillie. 

SiSMONDi, Langue d' Oil, page 209. 

1. 3Ie convendra faire. Prefix tho subject. Give a 
synonym of cmvendra ; suppress mc, and' resolve faire 
into a tense and mood. ^ 



•'^. Que fen part d dolor. Wliat Joes en refer to ? 
4. Qu'ai-Ja dit J Introduce a pleonasm. 

from t^m"/ T ""J- 'A '•"'''' ''''''^•'^ '''^^° P''»«««'^ unaltered 
trom tl.o Xr ,yyw6' nl 0. into any of the modern tongues and 
all those winch have p,,HHed from tho Languc d^o'lZl 
modern French without any modifications. 

7. Name all words, or expressions, which under tho same 
polling bear a different meaning in any of the modem 

languages. *' ""uutia 

8. Translate into modern French: 

Tenmt, sajon^, ^uix, creHch, ulL-{Lancim d' Oc.) 
Moillor, 07icques, hit, and cucrH.—{Lanijuc d' Oil.) 

9. To what class of composition do the two stanzas above 
belong; what inspired them ; and who arc tho authors? 

III. 

ORiaiN AND FORMATION OF TIIR ROMANCE LANGUAGES, 
(By Sir 0. CoiiNWAi.r, Lewis.) 

1. How many conjugations has the Provencal Ian -rua^re • 

a,m7.^';!"'° ''™^'«'^«"-'->'« »J the gerund of each 

3. How did the Provencal use its gerund? 
vertf^""''^''^"'"''^ '\ '^'"''''^ '^''' ^" conjunction with 

T). Name two words in each languairo Italian Sn^ni.T. 
and French, derived from the Teutonic.^ ' ' ^ '^' 

G. What sense did ab and a take in the Provengal ? 
muUitrd^e'? ''''"'^'' ^''^ '^'" ^''''""^'"^ "'' "^^^^ ^ °°"« «f 
8. How did the Proven(jaI form the degrees of comparison .? 





#• 


1 < 


ft- 





Uni\^tv»iiji of ^Tovoiftd, 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



GERMAN. 



) Robert Sullivan, M-A. 



I. 

SUBJECT FOR GERMAN COMPOSITION. 
"Character of the Ass." 
Within twenty lines at least. 



Translate : 



II. 



®tnc ©tiftung ncucr 2lrt unb etgcner ©attune^ tfl bfefc 
fpantfc|e 3nquifttton, bte tm ganjen «aufc ber 3eiten hin 
SSorbilt) finbct, unt> mtt fcinem geiftlic^en, fcmcm wcltHc^en, 
tribunal ju »erglctc^en fiel)t. Snqutftitton bat eg gcj^cben, 
fcitbcm bic SScrnunft ftc^ an bag iJetltgc wai^te, [ettbem eg 
Bwetfler imb 9^euever ^ah; aber erft urn bte mim beg 
bretjebnten 3abr^unbertg, nacbbem eini'gc 33etfpiele bcr 
5lbtranntsfett btc ^^terarc^te aufcjefd^reft batten, baitte i\)x 
Snnocenttug ber 2)rttte cmen etgeuen Sh'c^terftubl, unb 
trenntc auf eine unnaturlic^e SBetfc bte f\eiftltcbc Stufftcbtunb 
Unterwetfung sjon bcr ftrofenbcn (^cmlt Urn bcfto ffcberer 
au fei;n, baf fern SJicnfc^engeful;! unb feme S3cftecbung bcr 
S^atur btc ftarrc ©trengc ibrer ©tatuten aufliJfe, etttjog er 
ftc ben S3tfcb6fen unb ber faculartfc|)en ©ciftltcbfctt, bte burc^ 
btc S3anbc beg bttrgerlid;en Sebcng noc^ ju [cbr an ber 2>?cn* 
[(bbett ^ing, urn ftc ^D^Cncbcn ju iibertrageit, ctner 5lbart beg 
nicn[(blicbcn 5«amcng, btc btc beiltgen 2;rtebc ber 9^atur 
abgcf^iwprctt, btenftbarcn ^reaturen beg riJmifcben ®tublg. 
Schiller Geschichte des Abfalls. 



ii ^ ' 



' ^^^:'i5f 



- -l/M^- 




.'. 1 






I* A\^ 



1. Uine Stiftung, &o. Give to this compound sentflnra 
a regular construcuon 111 the ellipsis and e^Iafn the ^u 
of zu vergleichen Ueht nvir. u synonym to stlht. 

attrLt a^:^'^^ ''''^- ''"^^ *'''^^-^-' -to an 
8. A71, il^^ ' iHgc. Turn it into a relative sentence. 

4. Es , . .,ff4ih, vf hat sort of verb, and what case does 
It govern ? ^^^ 

5. Die Rierarchie. M%xaQ it. 

6. Baute ihr. What does ihr refer to ? 

7. Unnaturm Weise. When is tho adverbial idea 
to be expressed by the substantive Weise and the adjective 
in tho form of the genitive ? Give an example. 

8. Urn desto scherer zu aet/n. Give a synonym of 
dcsto, and state when je can bo used instead of desto. Give 
an example. 

9. Untzog er sie. Give the antecedents of er and sic. 

10. Den Bischd-fen Urn sie MiSnchen iihertragen. 

hi atm r-«j rule of these dative cases. 

11. Du nstbaren Kreaturen, &c. With what docs it 
stand in opposition ? 

III. 

Translate : 

^arvtcfba. 
®o jfc^t t)dn SnM cin nuf tcme^ 3flc{(|c^ JBobcu! 

go t'mmcr fteigcnb fommt 3^r ouf W Jpi)\)m 
2;c^ ©ott^arbt^, njo bt'c ew'cjm ©cm fmt>, 
Jtc m\ bc^ ^tmmetg ©triJmeu fdbfi ficl) fatten. 
SDovt ne^mt 3&r 5lbfrf;tct) »on bcv tcutfc^en grbe, 
Unb muntcrn 2ouf^ fai;rt ©uc^ tin anbrer ©trout 
3n^ Sanb 3talie;t |)fna(), (?uc^ bag gelobte. 

Soiller's Wilhelm Tell 

1. So zieht so imner^ %. uive the force of both 

these so. 






■ 'il 



^. Die ew' gen Seen. What arc they? 

a. Von dea himmels Striimen. Give the force. 

4. Dort. Where. 

6. Muntern Laufs Ina Land ItaUen. Explain the 

rules applicable to these two expressions. 

6. (;e;?oJ<(;. What does it qualify ? Turn it into ft 
relative sentence. 

IV. 

German Literature, 7th period, (Gostick's.) 

1. Which of Scl,>!!er'3 Dramas won for the poet uni- 
vcrsal reputation in hh native land; and which of his 
plays was the aiost popular ? 

2. Into how many classes can the prose fictions of the 
Germans bo arranged ? Name them. 

3. In what class do you fix Goete's Wilhelm Meister's 
and Wagner 8 novols ? 

4. In what class is German literature particularly rich : 
and in what is it comparatively poor 'i 

5. What writings led tc the conclusion : « There is noth- 
ing m the understanding ivhich has not arrived there 
through the senses'^ and what did Leibnitz reply to that 
conclusion t '^ •' 







.<M| 










^ 




TransI 

2)1 
S3( 



1. . 

2. j 

single 1 



nni\)tiuit]i} ot Eorottte* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



GERMAN. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



J^xaminers.'fi^^^^^ Forner^ LL.D. 
I Robert Sullivan, M. A. 



Translate : 



I. 



2)a»tfon. 
Eos Sobra war mid; au,!cnl)lf(fs atmi 

.Den brojften SDimin tn en.qlanb."' ^Tiun bcaanit 
©er eMe Talbot unb serivtWVem $BoIf ^ 
3n fanften SCortcn fein gcmaltfamcei 

3Som ^la^e fcr;lt(|,. ' 

Schiller, Maria Stuart, Act iv., Scene xi. 
1. Die andern Lords. Why Lords spelt with a final 



t f or/""^* '"^ ^'''''^'^* ^^"^P^^ss the ph 



« 



? 



single word 



irase into a 



8. Aufgehrachte Volk, Turn aufgehraohte into a rela- 
tive sentence. 

4. Augcnblioks. What does the genitive express, and 
explain to what it owes its origin ? 

5. iSobald. Fill up the ellipsis. 

0, Der ist es ! Das ist er. Explain the peculiarities of 
es and das. 

7. Ber rettette. What is the antecedent of der ? 

8. JV^iin hegann. Give the difference between nun and 
jetzt. 

9. So kraftvoU iiberzeugend. Repolve iiberzeugend by a 
conjunction, and place it after dasz. 

10. AUcs, &c. What does a??cs express here? Give its 
peculiarities. 

Translate : 

3n fccm blut'gen X\)<d tcr X^crmopplcn, 
!SBo bcv @rtcd)cn freic ©cf^aavcn fielen, 
©rub til iDuivmoi- tbvcr iBrii^ev 2)auf: 
,/^lHint'vcv ! \cic(ii ten fintcvlofcn C^ltern, 
iDajj fitv'ci 3>atcvtant) auf fciefcn geltern 
„eparta'^ f iibnc .^clteuluc^cub [an! !" — 
lliib 3ci()vtau[cnt)c fint> ^i^Jtaub cjcivorben, 
3cuc^ a)iarmovi3 l^circjc <5aule bva4); 
3)oc^ tn tvtumpl^tvcnbeu 5lccorben 
9ftiffcn'ci bic 3abf()unbcvtc fid) nad^ 

Hub cvjal^ttcu, tvoU bem etuvmflet(5|'e 
3l)vcr Beit/ ^'•'H ber .<:evocn*®iopc 
®er ©cfaU'ucn iinb t^ou Spovta'^ Dcinf. — 
©vop UHW @vied;cnlaiib buvd) [cine ^elben, 
^^Ibcr cjvo^'cr nod; buvd; [cin ^ergelten, 
2Bcnu ber ^iivvicr fiiv bie grei()eit [ant 
3en[eit l')I)nt cin ©ott mtt cw'flcn 8tral;Ien, 
2)od; ba5 Scbcn unU and) [cincn ©lanj. 
9Iur mtt 3vb'[d)cm faun fcie (^vbe jal^lcit, 
llnb bci OcljiDcifl tuinbct iUi) jum ^vanj. 

KoiiNEii, Episeha Fragmenie, &c., page 28L 

1. in c?cm blufgen Thai der ThermopyUn, &c. Give 
short notes of this event. 



,1 *^ . 



2. 0ruh in Marmor, Give the subject. 

S. KilJine Ileldenjugend. What number do collective 
substantives govern the verb in ; and what the pronouns 
referring to them ? 

4. lahrtansende smdy &c. Paraphrase this line, and 
state why sind and not ist, 

5. Riefen's. What docs es refer to ? 

6. Sich. Is it reflective or reciprocal ? State the use of 
einander. 

7. Und erzdhlten. Prefix the subject. 

8. Hirer Zeit. What does Hirer refer to ? 

9. Durch seine Ilelden. Compare durch with von. 

10. Aber grosser noch. Fill up the ellipsis. 

11. lenselt. Give the force. 

12. Will auch. Add the verb. 

13. Niir mit Ird'schem. Turn it into a relative sentence. 

14 Und der Oelztveig, &c. Turn und into namely, and 
the remainder of the line into an attributive adjective, 
governed by mit. 



> i I 








1, '^'ifTTl 



' * . .'-. 






Transla 

Tl 
pe< 
ex£ 
cur 
err 
dec 



Translai 
] 




Unif^tvm^ of STotonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



ITALIAN. 



JSxaminen: ] t^^^ Forneri, LL.D. 
3 Robert Sullivan, M.A. 



?■ 



1 M 



a 



ft I 
i 




Translate into Italian : 



I. 



Zeusi entered into a contest of art with Parrasius. 
nplS'T.if ^'"*'lf '"f'"' '" *'"'y ^^^^ ^^r^« came and 

exaotiv t . ?• -^^^ ""^^ ^^^^"^'^'^^ ^ ^'^'•tain so 
exactly that Zeusi coming, said: "Take away the 

curtain that we may see this piece." And finding his 
error, said; ''Parrasius, thou hast conquered ; I only 
deceived birds, thou an artist. ^ 




Translate into English : 

E '1 Duca disse a me ; Piii non si desta 
Di qua dal suon dell' angelica tromba. 
guando verra la nimica podesta, 

Oiascunrityovera la trista tomba, 
Ripigheril sua carnc e sua figura, 
Udira quel che in etoj-no rimbomba. 

bi trapassammo per sozza mistara 

Doll' ombre e della pioggia, a passi lenti, 
loccando un poco la vita futura : 

1 erch 10 dissi : Maestro, esti tormenti 
Crescerann' ei dopo la gran sentenza, 
U hen minori, o saran si cocenti ? 




:,(!>;,» 



1 1 


1 m 



m 



\*' \ 



r 



Ed cgli a me : Ritorna a tua scienza, 

Cho vuol quanto la cosa e piii perfetta, 
Piii senta '1 bene, e cosi la doglienza. 

Tuttoche questa gente maledetta 

In vera perfezion giamraai non vada, 
Di la piu che di qua, essere aspetta. 

Noi apigirammo a tondo quella strada, 
Parlando p5u assai eh' i' non ridico: 
Venimmo al punto dove si digrada: 

Quivi trovammo Pluto il gran nemico. 

Dante, Inferno, Canto vi. 

1. Pill non si desta. Give the force. 

2. Di qua dalsuon, kc. Paraphrase especially aw^/e^wa 
tromba. 

3. Nimica podesta. What is it ? 

4. Quel che in eterno rimhomba. What is it ? 

5. Toccando un poco. Explain. 

6. Dopo la gran sentenza. Define it. 

7. Fien. From what Latin verb is it derived ? What 
tense is it, and for what does it stand here ? 

8. Si cocenti. Give the second term of comparison. 

9. A tua scienza. Name it. 

10. Di Id, diqud. Add the complement and give the full 
force of this line. 

11. A tondo. Explain. 

12. Pill assai cli i noji ridico. What language is thi 
form of comparison common to ? ^ 

13. Si digrada. Give the force. 

14. Pluto il gran nemico. Who is Pluto according to 
poets ? 

15. 11 gran nemico. Of whom or what ? 

III. 

Translate into English : 



LXX. 




Come r alma gentile uscita ei vede, 
Rallenta qnel vigor ch' avea raccolto, 



E P imperij di s^ libero cede 

Al duol gia fatto impetuoso e stolto, 

Ch' al cor si stringe, o chiusa in breve sede 

La vita, empie di inorte i sensi e'l volto. 

Gitl simile all' estimo il vivo langue 

Al colore, al silenzio, agli atti, al sangue. 

Lxxr. 

E ben la vita sua, sdegnosa e schiva, 
Spezzando a forza il suo ritegno frale, 
La bella aniraa sciolta alfin seguiva, 
Che poco innanzi a lei spiegava 1' ale. 
Ma quivi stuol de' Franchi a caso arriva, 
Cui trae bisogno d' acqua o d' altro tale, 
E con la donna, il Cavalier ne porta 
In sh mal vivo, e morto in lei ch' e raorta. 

LXXII. 

Pero che '1 Duce loro ancor discosto 
Conosce all' arme il Principe Cristiano ; 
Onde v' accorre; e poi ravvisa tosto 
La vaga estinta, e duolsi al caso strano. 
E giil lasciar non vuole ai lupi esposto 
II bel corpo che stima ancor Pagano ; 
Ma sovra 1' altrui braccia ambi li pone, 
E ne vien di Tancredi al padiglione. 

LXXIII. 

Affatto ancor nel piano e lento moto 
Non si risente il Cavalier ferito ; 
Pur fievolmente getr.e, e quinci & noto 
Che '1 suo corso vital non e finite : 
Ma r altro corpo tacito ed immoto 
Dimostra ben che n' e lo spirto uscito. 
Cosi portati, e 1' uno e 1' altro appresso, 
Ma in diflferente stanza, alfine e messo. 

Tasso, Crerusalemme Liberata. 

1. Set these four stanzas into regular construction, and 
then translate them into English. 

2. Al duol gid fatto, ^'o. Form a relative sentence. 

3. E chiusa in breve sede, ^-c. Fill up the ellipsis be- 
fore chiusa. 

4. Empie di morte. Prefix the subject. 





mr 



5. Gid simile aV estinto. Paraphrase this line. 

6. La bella anima sclolta. Name it, and state whv 
seiolta '.' •' 

7. Aljin Ufjniva. What figure do you perceive in 
aeguiva ? 

8. A hi. Give the word referred to. 
J>. Ne jwrfa. Give the force of ne. 

10. In S6> mal vivo e morto, ,j^c. Explain the meaning of 
this hnc. ° 

11. U Altrui braccia. Give the force. 

IV. 

HISTORY OF ITALIAN LITERATURE. (Sismondi's.) 

1. What heroic poems did Boccaccio leave, and what in- 
fluence had they over the future poetry of Italy, Spain, and 
Portugal ? 

2. Why did he object to the terza rima of Dante ? 

3. Give the character of the 15th century with respect to 
Italian literature. 

4. Nnuio some of the men Avho flourished in the I6th cen- 
tury, and to whom wo owe the revival of Greek ^md 
Latin literature. 

5. Give a short biographical sketch of Francesco Filelfo; 
state what he left behind, and how ho contributed especially 
to the progress of literature. 



^m 


Wh 


^H not? 




H 


Tra 


^H came 


! veri 


H 


Wh 


^H tion, 


and 


1 


Wh 


^H 


•, to 


1 


Tra 


^^1 o'clock is 


H 


At 


H 


Wit 


^H pens 


are 


^H Translate 


^H 


A 


^H 


late 


^H 


alwi 


■1 


goni 



mni\}tvuitp of ^Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 
CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



SPANISH. 



Ji^xamtners. | ^^^^^^ Sullivan, M.A. 






... I Hi I IF''' 



'1/ I 




( i M 



I. 

guammatical questions. 

1. When is the participle past muerto declined, and when 

not? 

2. Translate : Th/ brother came very near falling. I 
came very near writiny to thee this morning. 

3. What verb is employed in Spanish to express a repeti- 
tion, and what to express, I have just done a thing P 

4. When is the participle past, constructed with the verb 
tener, to be declined and when not ? 

5. Translate : What o'clock is it 1- One o'clock. Seven 
o'clock is about striking. 

6. A brother of his, a friend of mine. 

7. With what word does cuyo agree. Translate ' Whose 
pens are these P 

II. 

Translate into Spanish : 

A man had two sons, one of whom liked to sleep very 
late in the morning, and the other was industrious, and 
always rose very early. The latter having one day 
gone out very early, found a purse well filled with 









W 



money. Ho ran to his hrothcr to inform Mm «f !,■ 
Rood luck, and said to him : " Sco Lowk ! . ■ '"' 
by rising early ?" " Faith !" »n™^ ^ ''1 .;;f 
• .f tl,e person to whom it belong, ha,, not Zn^' 
than J, Jjo would not havo lost it." ^^laor 

III. 

Translate : 

Poro mientras I03 dos arab.ilcs, ,,or su rcdiicolon v cl 
buon trato ,lol vonccnor con olios, gozaban do la luayo 
al.undancia, la ciudad, al oontrario, so vcia roduci.lf nl 
mayor cstrocl>o por la lalta do todas las cosasi:; ;^ 
a la vida. Constrcil.dos al fin por la neccsidad s 
moradorcs ofrcc.oron echar a los almoravidcs do alii v 
cntn-arsc d Jlodngo, si dontro do cierto tiompo no ies 
vcnian socorr.s del Africa. Con estas condicioncs 
cons.p.eron treguas por dos meses, en cuyo tormino 
part.o el Cid A hacor algunas corrcrfas en los contornos 
do Pinnacatel, dondo encerr.1 todo el botin que habia 
cogido, y despucs pas6 a las tierras del scnor de 
Albarracin, y las estrag6 todas en castigo de haberselc 
rebelado aqucl moro. 

QuiNTANA, Vida del Cid., p. 12. 

1. For su reduccion. What does su refer to ? ComnarG 
por with para. ^ 

2. De la mayor, ^c. Give a synonym. 

3. Se veia reducida. Turn it into a passive verb. 

4. Constrenidos alfin. Fill up the ellipsis. 

5. De alii. Suppress and give the equivalent. 

6. En cuyo termino. Give the peculiarity of cuyo. 

7. Algunas correrias When is uno or alguno to be ex- 
pressed, and when not ? 

8._ Habersele rebelado, ^c. Analyse hahersele, and trans- 
late it literally. Give the three constructions of se. 



IV. 



Translate : 

Do5tA Irene. Con que, Senor D. Diego ^es ya la 
de vamonos? ..Buenos dias.. .{Apaga la luz que estd 
sobre la mesa.) ^Reza usted ? 



D. DiEQO. Sf para rczar cstoy ahora. (Paaedn. 
dose con inquietud.) y^asean- 

cndo chocolate, y quo aviscn al Mayoral par? quo 
onRanchcn luogo que. ;rcro qn6 tic-nc ustcl.^Scnor ? 
...Jlay alguna novedad ? ' ' 

D DiEuo. Si no (loja do h.-.bcr novcdadcs. 
I)o.NA IiiEXE. Pues qu6...D.galo ustcd nor Dies 
Vaya,_ Vaya !...No sabc ustcd lo asustada quo (stoy 
Cualqu.cra cosa, a«r, repc.tina, ,no ren.uevrto. 7n'.o 
.•;-l^<^'«<lo ol nll.n.o ,nal parto quo tuvc c(uel6 t n 
sumamonto dolicada<lo los 'ncrvios ..Y va ya n ' a dio/ 
y nuovo anos, si no son voir.to ; poro dosdo*^ .t nccs ya 
«o, cualqujora fnolora n.e tras'torna...Ni los bafios m' 
e^t dos do cu ebra, ni la cor.scrva <lo tamarind's . " id 
mo ha servido, do niancra quo... 

I). DiKoo. Vauios, ahora no hablotnos do nnlo^ 

at quo tratai...^Quc liacen csas muchachas 'i 

MoRATiN, m St de las Ninas, Act iii., Scene xi. 

1. Es ya la de vdmonos. Fill ud tho nliin.ic t • 
the force of the whole. ^ ''"'P"^' ^''^ .^'^^ 

^- &X para rezar estou ahora. In whaf «n,-r;f i i 
speak thisf Whynot«.i;instead of..!!; '^'''' '^''' ^'' 

'• ^" ^^^^^^^''^ ^*''' ^^'^^ ^^l^at is the subject of pueden ? 

4. r^Meamm. Fill up the ellipsis. 

5. Zmc(/o <^i«J... Add the complement. 

into^kl^ch!"''' ''''''^- ^^''^'^^^^^ novedad :^ Translate 

7. Si, no dcja de haher, ,j^o. Give the force. 

8. Yva ja i,ara diez y nueve anas. Give the force. 

9. Nada me ha servido. When is nada affirmative ? 

10. Be que tratar. Fill up the ellipsis. 

11. Point out the most strikino-T)enuliarifvorn^-r •• 
not common to other modern languages. *^ PCc;uhanties 





11^ 






V. 

HISTORY OF SPANISH LITERATURE (Sismonoi's ) 

1. Characterise the style of Cervantes in his Don Quixote, 
and name some of his best novels. 

2. Into how many periods may the life of the Cid be 
divided? State them, and specify the contents of each 
period. Give a short biographical sketch of Mendoza, and 
name some of his best prose compositions. 



^Wini\}ttuitn of SToronlo* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY. 



Examiner: Henry Croft, D.C.L. 



1. Give the methods of detecting sulphur and sulphurous 
acid. 

2. Give the methods of detecting sulphuric acid and a 
base, in sulphates insoluble in water and acids. 

3. Give the blowpipe tests for manganese, iron, copper, 
cobalt and chromium. 

4. How m'ly arsenical spots or rings be distinguished 
from those caused by antimony ? 

5. Analyse a mixture of potassa, soda and ammonia salts. 

6. Give the tests for distinguishing baryta, strontia, lime 
and magnesia salts. 

7. How may meconates, sulphocyanates and acetates be 
distinguished ? 

8. How may the value of binoxide of manganese be 
determined ? 

9. How may sulphuric acid be freed from arsenic without 
diluting. 

10. What adulterations may occur in iodide of potassium ? 
How do they arise ? How detected ? 





1. W] 

2. Gi 

of the raj 

3. CI; 
metals) ac 
either org 

4. Ho 

out the ai 

5. Wl 

logous ser 

6. Ho 

7. Wh 
of the vap 

8. Wh 
cule ? W 

9. Giv 

bon, oxyg( 

10. At 
pourid can 
CI., 6.54 ] 
obtained ? 



Unmvuitp of STotonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



GENERAL CHEMISTRY. 



I 



Examiner: Henry Croft, D.C.L., 



1. What is meant by djalisis ? 

2. Give instances of the diffusion of gases, and the law 
of the rapidity of diffusion. 

3. Classify the non-metallic elements (and analogous 
inetals) according to their atomicity, and mention compounds 
either organic or inorganic, proving the same. 

4. How may nitric acid and ammonia be produced with- 
out the aid of their salts ? 

5. What law is apparent in the boiling points of homo- 
logous series ? Give several instances of these series. 

6. How is the specific gravity of vapours determined? 

7. What connection is there between the specific giavity 
of the vapour of a compound and its molecular weight? 

8. What is the difference between an atom and a mole- 
cule ? What is the active molecule of chlorine ? 

9. Give reasons for doubling the old equivalents of car- 
bon, oxygen, and the molecule of cyanogen. 

10. A hydrocarbon contains 85.71 C, 14.29 H.; a com- 
i.w^jiiu Ctiii Dc uDtaiiiua iiuui it containing -ii.uu (J., 4d.40 
CI., 6.54 H., required its formula. How is the hydrocarbon 
obtained ? 



:"r;i rr 3X ' s : :; ' ,saca 



W' \ 'A 



1. He 

tively ? 

2. WI 
they difFe: 

3. Sh 
inorganic 
oil of mus 

4. Ho 
cyanogen 

5. Wl 

tion of ful 

6. Re 

ferent ser 

7. Gi 
how decoi 

8. Gi' 
chlorine, 

9. Wl 

10. Fr. 
relation b 



WLnibtvnits of ^ovonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864, 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



ORGANIC CHEMISTRY. 



Examiner: Henry Croft, D.C.L. 



1. How may an organic compound be analysed qualita- 
tively ? 

2. What is meant by rests or residues, and how do 
they differ from the old compound radicals ? 

3. Show how the following bodies may be produced from 
inorganic mrjterials: formic acid, alchohol, glycerine, and 
oil of mustard. 

4. How is hydrocyanic acid related to formic acid, and 
cyanogen to oxalic acid ? 

5. What is the present idea with regard to the composi- 
tion of fulminic acid ? 

6. Represent a tribasic acid typically, and give the dif- 
ferent series of salts and ethers which it forms. 

7. Give the methods of forming the compound ethers, 
how decomposed by potassa, and hovv acted on by ammonia. 

8. Give the homologues of ethylene, how acted on by 
chlorine, what atomicity have they when acting as residues. 

9. What are double ethers, how formed ? 

10. From what substances can caffeine be obtained? What 
relation between it and tlieobromine ? 







i'.j'W 



li'ii"™ 



[JiMiiiiiiiaiia?:' 





I 

i.::r 

iir 



I ^llIS>'llIi'^>»«flir 








•• -.■ll 



ll'f 



ii 



m«mii 



j,j I 







mni\itvuitn of iETotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOE B.A. 



METEOROLOGY. 



Examiner: G. T. Kingston, M.A. 



1. State a remarkable exception to the law that bodies 
contract with a diminution of heat, and explain the beneficial 
consequences that result from this exception. 

2. Define the terms ^^ specific Jieat" an^ ^^ latent heat ;" 
and determine the weight of ice at temperature 16° that 
must bo mixed with lib. of water at temperature 50° in 
order that the result may be ice at 32°, the specific heat of 
ice being 05 and the latent heat of liquefaction 142. 

3. Explain the manner in which heat, rendered latent in 
the formation of vapour, tends to equalize the temperatures 
of localities that are diff'erently circumstanced with respect 
to the action of the sun. 

4. Describe the barometer : name the corrections to be 
applied to its readings, and state in each case whether the 
corrections are additive or subtractive, as well as the circum- 
stances which determine their increase or diminution. 

5. Define the terms annual variation and diurnal varia- 
tion. State also the nature and explain the cause of the 
change in the amplitude of the diurnal variations of tempera- 
ture in the difi"erent seasons. 

6. Define the terms ^^ pressure of vapour," and ^^ relative 
humidity,'*' and describe the process of deducing these quan- 
tities from the readings of the dry and wet thermometers. 



7. If the temperature of the air and the pressure of the 
vapour be known, shew how the depression of the dew point 
may be obtained. 

8. Given the total pressure, as shewn by the' barometer, 
and the pressure of vapour, find the so called pressure of 
dry air. 

9. Explain the utility of a series of hourly observations 
of temperature at a central station, in its relation to observa- 
tions at the same and at other stations taken less frequently 
than at every hour. 

10. Explain also the utility of temperature observations 
continued for a long series of years at some one station, in 
their bearing upon shorter series made in other localities. 

11. Describe and account for the monsoons in the Indian 

seas. 

12. Enunciate and explain Dove's law relative to the 
rotation of the wind. 

13. Give the meaning of the following terms : " Monthly 
and annual isothermal lines" ''^monthly normal temperature 
of a parallel of latitude" " thermic anomaly" and *' thermic 
normals." 

14. Investigate a formula for computing the resultant 
direction of the wind for any space of time, when the actual 
directions of the wind during that time are given, as well as 
the number of miles travelled in each direction. 



^^ 


'nf^P 


Iff 


Si! 








mi 



I. M 








W' k 



t-*^ 



\ia 






GEO] 



Jg^; 



1. Wha 

rocks, and 

2. Desc 
coal perioc 

3. Ment 
ous period. 

4. To wi 

Oriskany, 
tribution of 

, 5. What 
its geologic 

.6. Descr 

minerals. 

7. Descri 
tlieory of tl 

, 8. Descri 
it3 origin. 

9. How i 
seem to govt 

}^- What 
■e MouD 



^nmtms ^t ^ovonto. 



jUiI 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4. 
CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



GEOLOGY AND PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 

&ttmimr.- T. Sierry Hunt, M.A., F.R.s. 



miplfot" "" ^'"^"'^^^ "f ^""h ^"'''rica during the 
J peS'"" '°°" °^ '^'' P"""'?*' P'an's of the carbonifer- 

Ortka^„;r»d^Tref.on'rlt"'K ?°*^ I-'andeilo.Wenlock, 
"ibution of the later? '"'°"S' """^ »'"" « 'h^ dis- 

i/geoTogtfreCo™'?''""'"' .'^ «'-^™»'»-' »<» "hat are 
I iSr""' *'"' ^"""■"'"■' »«i»«; it^ chief reeks and 

! ^l^:Ttit;:!z''"""' •" ^""^ «-?-»••. ^^ the , 

I it.tigr"'' '""^ """ of ^o^"' A-""-"- and the theory ef 






* '£ntS f *''' "S' "f ""^ laurentides, and of the 




'P-mW^. 






tl , .1 



ir 



iW \M 



1. D 

and giv 

2. G 

albite, 
other ti 

3. E: 

state wl 

4. W 

their ha 

5. St 
geologic 

6. H 

it obtaii 

7. W 
and the; 

8. Gi 
oxydizii 



Uni\}tvuitti of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



CANDIDATE FOR B.A. 



MINERALOGY. 



tt''i 

■'■it 



Examiner: T. Sterry Hunt, M.A., F.R.S. 






1. Describe what is meant by uemitropism. in crystals, 
and give samples from monometric and triclinic forms. 

2. Give tlie general clicmical formula of orthoclase and 
albite, and explain the relations between the latter and 
other triclinic feldspars. 

3. Explain the production of kaolin from^feldspar, and 
state what becomes of the separated elements. 

4. What native compounds of iron are magnetic ? Give 
their hardness, gravity, and color. 

5. State the mineralogical characters of tinstone, and its 
geological relations. 

6. How is gold found in nature, and fby what processes is 
it obtained ? 

7. What are the principal vein-stones of the ores of lead 
and their composition ? 

8. Give the theory of the blow-pipe, and the manner of 
oxydizing and reducing by it. 




1 



¥ m 



Slnlliet^Ctj) of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1804. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



MINERALOGY AND GEOLOGY. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



Examiner : T. Sterry Hunt, M.A., F.R.S. 



1. What silicious minerals contain a large proportion of 
magnesia ? Give their hardness, density, and composition. 

2. Describe the micas, and enumerate the principal species 
01 the mica group. 

3. Describe the occurrence, association, and probable 
origin of deposits of gypsum. 

4. Explain the theory of metallic deposits, both in beds 
and in veins. 

5. Describe the principal groups of mineral springs in 
Canada. 



'I* '/'I 



6. Describe the Quebec group, and its relation to the 
other Lower Silurian rocks. 

7. Explain jointing, slaty cleavage, and foliation, with tho 
causes to v hich they are attributed. 

S. Explain the structure of synclinals and anticlinals, and 
their relations to hills and valleys. 

y. Into how manv filaasPH matr vn^„T>fo;»,g K/x j:..:j_j __4 

now are volcanic cones and trappean mountains formed ? 






.HT ^T|-r-Tr 



I I , 





Wini\>tvuiti!! of ^Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A, 



BOTANY AND HISTOLOGY. 



^^arniners:l^ll^^^^^^^^ 



1. The Amomal alliance— its common character— analysis 
of its orders, with an account erf their properties and uses. 

2. Sub-kingdom DicotyledoncEC, class Gymnogengs : ex- 
plain the structural characters of the class, and give some 
account of the orders. 

3. Analysis of the Urtical alliance, noticing its more 
important orders, mth their distinctions and properties. 

4. Order Simarubacece — its position and characters— its 
properties. Notice of the Cedron. 

5. Daphnal alliance — its position. Analysis of its orders, 
orders, "with an account of their properties. 

6. Order Apocynaceoe — its position and properties : ex- 
amples of familiar and beautiful plants belonging to it. 
Native example. 

7. What are the meaning, objects and present position of 
the science of Histology, with its connection with other 
important sciences ? 

8= Give some account of the rotation of fluids within the 
cells of plants. 



9. The different microscopical appearance of flax, cotton, 
wool and silk. * 

10. Sclerogenou3 deposits in vegetable cells; general 
mode of deposit ; parts of plants in which such deposits are 
most remarkable ; examples of peculiar appearances. 

11. Structure of bone— its microscopical appearances, and 
their chief varieties. 

12. Pedicellarioe of Echinodermata— their peculiar appear- 
ance—curious error respecting their nature- their supposed 
use. '^^ 






■ f h ' 




t ••fMJjF."' : 



IP 



1. T 

viewini 
in orde 

2. I 

differei 
accoun 
to a m( 
mon t} 

3. S 
aqueou 
sary, a 
accomj 

4. F 

its valu 
animals 

5. G 

light aj 

6. S 

pans 11 

parativ 



Winibtvm^ of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



COMPARATIVE PHYSIOLOGY. 




JExammera.'i^^'i' ^^^^- Winces, F.L.S. 
\ T. J. Cottle, Esq. 



1. What are the principal differences in the mode of 
viewing the phenomena presented by the animated creation, 
in order to derive from them general scientific laws ? 

2. Principle respecting the mode of providing for the 
different habits of minor groups under a common type, which 
accounts for the peculiar development or occasional reduction 
to a merely rudimentary state of parts belonging to the com- 
mon type. 

3. State the reason why a provision for exhalation of 
aqueous fluid from the surface of organised beings is neces- 
sary, and give some account of the means by which it is 
accomplished in the animal kingdom. 

4. Food — its varieties, and the circumstances upon which 
its value depends. Adaptation of the structure of different 
animals to the kind of food they are destined to consume. 

5. Give the known particulars respecting the evolution of 
light and heat in the vegetable kingdom. 

6. Structure of the brain in vertebrata — state the separate 
parts found in the brain, and the differences of their com- 
parative development in the different divisions. 





II"" ii 




9 


w 


:rJ^H 


M 


m 


'^^H 


W' 




-4-''^^^^^^| 


m 


W 


''^^^^H 


T^y 




'^^1 


If 


W A 


r^l 



Unii^tvuitt:^ ot ^Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



FOURTH YEAR. 



POLITICAL ECONOMY. 



Examiner: Rev. James Bbaven, D.D. 



SMITH'S WEALTH OF NATIONS. 

1. a. In the ordinary state of agriculture, what else, 
besides the wages of labour, has to be provided for out 
of the produce of labour ? 

h. " This great apparent profit, however, is frequently 
no more than the reasonable wages of labour." 

Explain and illustrate, and state the portion of the 
subject in which it stands. 

2. a. Which of the products of land always aflfords rent? 

h. Give examples of products which sometimes do 
and sometimes do not afford rent, and shew the causes 
of the difference. 

c. State the causes of the different money value of 
corn at different periods ; and connect this with the 
variations in the value of silver. 

3. State and exemplify the difference between productive 
and unproductive labour. Point out the connexion between 
capital and either of these, and its relation to industry and 
parsimony respectively. 

4. Shew the object of restraints upon the importation of 
such goods as can be produced at horaej and discuss the ex- 
pediency of such restraints. 



5. ** But the political institutions of the English colonies 
liave been more favourable to the improvement and cultiva- 
tion of this land (North America) than those of any of the 
other nations." 

Explain this passage and state what point it is intended to 
illustrate. 

6. " The works constructed by the ancient sovereigns of 
Egypt, for the proper distribution of the waters of the Nile, 
were famous in antiquity, and the ruined remains of some of 
them are still the admiration of travellers." 

What subject is illustrated by this paragraph, and how ? 



. 'u^ 








!"«* 

,;/;,: 




i 




' '-'ft 









ClnCiitrsfttf of rovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



METAPHYSICS AND ETHICS, 

IIO^UIIS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



Examiner: Rev. rnoFESSoii Mubkay. 



o 



1. a. Of what larger work was tho Novum Organon 
intended to form a part? ^ 

b. What was the end ivhich that larger work had 
in view i 

c. Explain tho relation of the Novum Orffanon to 
the other parts of the work. 

a. Into how many parts is the Novum Organon 

divided ? State the suhject of each part. 
h. In what form are both parts written ? 

3. Explain (a) the method wnich IJacon considered tho 
great obstacle to the advancement of science, and f^>) the 
method which ho proposed to substitute in its place. 

4. a. What does Bacon understand by idola ? 

h. IIow many kinds of idola does he enumerate? 
c. Explain each kind. 

5._ State which kind of idola is referred to in each of tho 
lollowing quotations : 

a. "That our language (when we speak of a chain 
of causes and effects) is merely analogical, 
must, 1 think, be admitted by every person who 
has taken the trouble to reflect on the subject; 
and yet it is certain that it has misled the 
greater part of philosophers.'' {B. Stewart) 



h. Tn our reason there exist fundamental rules 
of Its exercise which have completely the ap. 
pearanco of objective principles. Now from 
his cause it happens, that the subjective neces" 
sitjr of a certain connection of our conceptions 
IS regarded as an objective necessity of Z 
determination of things in themselves." (^an/.) 
c. " Musicians think our souls are harmonies, 
riiysicians ho d that tlioy complexions be; 
Ep^ures make them swarms of atomies, ' 
Which do by chance into our bodies flee." 

{Sir J. DavieB.) 

7. Point out the conclusiveness of ' « • 

b. Explwn Hamilton's division of tho dualities of 
natter, pomt ng out its peculiarity an'd il "cla- 

pccptio';^ ""'""'°" '"='-^" --'- -1 

says^eid*'""""^ " "" '"""^*'''"' ■'""'''"'S" of tl,e past," 

*■ m feili-"" ''"'!:'"*'' "f ""» "™»<"" of memory 
on lieid s own theory of im.ue.Iiate peroeptlo^ 

lU. fetato Hamilton's distribuh'nn /.p +i 
with regard to rerccDtion ^vnl • '■''' ^'^''^ou^ tl'cories 
he desi,ites ^^ ^:^ X:^^ ^ZS^^ ^ 








; 'i m,f 




-'S 


M 






■'*: 


"■v . 











■f3'i 



iSinif^tvmp of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



METAPHYSICS AND ETHICS. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: Rev. James Beaven, D.D. 



TENNEMANN AND MORELL. 

1. Give from Tennemann and Morell several definitions 
of philosophy, and show to which of them Aristotle most 
nearly approximated. To which does Morell incline ? 

2. What place did philosophy hold in the system of 
thought of the Christian Fathers ? 

3. Connect Leibnitz with previous philosophy, showing 
how it contributed to form his mind. Show his divergencies 
from it. Point out his leading principles, and connect his 
line of thought with subsequent German philosophy. 

_ 4. Point out and exemplify the differences between theolo- 
gical and philosophical scepticism. 

6. Why cannot phrenology serve as the basis of a system 
of psychology ? Who has attempted to make it do so ? 
What has it really done ? 

6. Sketch from Tennemann and Morell the principles of 
Fichte's theory of the foundation of human knowledge. 

7. Give Maret's place in philosophy. Explain the nature 
and objects of his great work, and exhibit its defects. 



JOUFFROY AND STEWART. 

«„li 71"^* i<!ea according to Jouffroy, is the foundation of 

all duty, right, obligation and rules of morality ?" Br 

what steps, do wo rise to the conception of this fundamental 

Idea i and what is its connexion with God and with beauty? 

2 What two facts of our nature does Jouffroy point out 
as the basis of mysticism, and how does he support his 
opinion ? Sketch its effects on the anchorites. 

3. Give Jouff-roy's estimate of the scepticism of the 
present age, as compared with that of the 18th century, and 
as it is m Itself. "^ ' 

4. Bentham argues that to contend for an innate principle 
of moral action independent of utility is despotic and anar- 
chical : explain this argument and the principle against 
which It IS directed. Refute it, and show that his own prin- 
ciple has these very faults. 

5. What share had Shaftesbury, Bufier and Hutcheson 
respectively in the development of the doctrine of a moral 
sense? With what peculiarities do Hume and Mackintosh 
support that doctrine ? 

6. Show, from Stewart's arguments in reference to Cud- 
worth and Hutcheson, that he did not consider reason by 
itself, or feeling by itself, to be the faculty by which we dis- 
tinguish right and wrong. How far is Jouff-roy lustified in 
asserting that Stewart " inclines to adopt reason, though 
declaring that the question is of little importance, if it is 
once admitted that the words good and evil represent simple 
and real qualities of actions." 






¥, . I' 



;i' . i. 



i: i -m 



■|5I|, I 




r 



Wini\^tvuitsf of ^rotoitito. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS ; 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



METAPHYSICS AND ETHICS. 

HONOES AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



\ Rev. r.xC.Fi=iS3CE MuAc:tiAT. 



THOMSON. 

1. Show the utility of some acquaintance with logic, even 
if not M]y matured, and on ground the most unlikely. 
Illustrate tius from the faculty of anticipation. 

2. Connect definition with one kind of immediate infer- 
ences. 

3. Point out the distinction between formal and material 
truth, and show the relations which the four principal cri- 
teria of truth bear to each. 

4. What are categories, and what is the use of a table of 
them ? Examine Aristotle's table by this test. 



llV 



LOCKE, WITH COUSIN'S CRITIQUE; KANT'S 
CRITIQUE OF THE PURE REASON. 

1. a. What, according to Cousin, are the two enquiries 
which may be made with regard to ideas, and 
which of these should com-; / rst ? 

h. With which of these does Locke begin ? 



c. What objection may bo urged against Locke's 
method in this respect ? 

2. How has this method of Locke influenced philosophical 
researches generally in his school ? 

3. ih What is the distinction, on which Cousin insists, 

between the logical and the chronological order 
of our ideas ? 

6. lilastrate this distinction with reference to the 
idea cf time. 

4. State Cousin's objections to the following doctrines of 
Locke, that 

a. All words are derived from sensible ideas ; 

I. All words are purely conventional ; 

c. All general ideas are merely words ; 

d. Words are the sole causes of errors. 

5. What is the distinction, which Kant institutes, between 
knowledge a priori and knowledge a posteriori ? 

6. a. Explain the difference between analytic and syn- 

thetic judgments. 

h. Explain the question in Avhich Kant sums up the 
problem of the pure reason, IIoiu are synthetic 
judgments a priori possible ? 

7. What is Kant's distinction between transcendental and 
transcendent P 

8. a. What does Kant understand by Transcendental 

Aesthetic and Transcendental Logic respectively ? 
h. What are the two parts into which Transcendental 
Logic IS divided, and the enquiries to which each 
IS devoted ? 

9. In what sense does Kant use the word idea ? 

10. a. What does he understand by an antinomy of the 

pure reason ? 

h. State any one of the antinomies. 






li 


t '/ ■ 1 


1)'''" « 


l' ■ .'} -i 


\ A. 





;■■■ \< A 



t:yi 



li 

I 






pf 



. I'; 




iJ , t| 





■H 



nni\}tvnltti of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



FOURTH YE Ul, 



POLITICAL ECONOMY. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS, 



Examiner: Rev. James Bbaven, D.D. 



MILL. 

1. Give Mill's definition oT labour generally, and compare 
it with Senior's, especially with regard to their accuracy. 
Show the several workings of both bodily and mental 
labour. 

2. " From that time it is the law of production from the 
land, that in any given state of agricultural skill and know- 
ledge, by increasing the labour, the produce is not increased 
in an equal degree." 

What are the results of this lav ? What con ractinn^ 
principle, and how does that work 'i What remeUies, and 
when and how far are they effectual ? 

3. How does it come to pass that the expressio.i.^ — that 
wages depend upon the demand and supply of labour, and 
that they depend upon the proportion between lab' ■'. and 
capital, — are equivalent to each other? Exf -lin th laws 
which govern the proportion of population ? one 
locality. 

4. Show that credit by itself does not increase capital. 
What then are its advantages ? Explain the different ways 
in which credit is made to answer the purposes of money. 



6. Discuss the jfuestion of restricting the iss, r bank 
notes to one establishment, or allowing a plurality, , issuers. 

6. Show the effect of tithe, considered as a permanent 

m ? r^' r '^l P^i^^ °f ^''^ ^-d the rate ff profits 
What other effects has it ? pi^uts. 






LIEBER. 

1. Support the opinion that ethics ought and can b« 
applied to pohtics. Why ought others besides statesmen to 
be taught so to apply them ? How do these reasons annlv 
more strongly to modern times ? ^^^ 

2. Point out the permanent and variable eloments in tho 
formation of a good form of government, and pply hern to 
the^discussion of the question-which is the bLVgov^m. 

3. Discuss the case of smuggling. 

4. " In Hesse-Cassel it was found that far too many voun^ 
men received a university education, thus preparrn^/them 
for careers m which thoy oould not'succeed, o^wing^to t}^ 
number of apphc.uts. . was passed which allowed t le 
child of certain p.re.. only to study in the universities." 

Wl_at subject dr this illustrate ? Discuss the princinle 
here involved, an show ^ e of its workings. P'^'^^'P'^ 

lJ;iff;f\^J'-'^ explait. t. ,^ iea of representatives in 

WhJ^' '"'''"' ''^^ ^? ^ ^^ considered as ei mies, and why ' 
What harm may i ghtly be done to them, anu why 9 "^^ • 



m 






^ 



1. D 

rib— th 
and adj 

2. G 

extend 

3. D 

4. Di 

5. D( 

6. D< 

relatione 



,. i ■,:' ' , i '■ ,1 11 



^niMttuitQ of rovonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



FIRST YEAR. 



ANATOMY. 

FOR HONORS. 



Examiner: Wm. T. Aikins, M.D. 



1. Describe the posterior extremity of the fifth or sixth 
rib--the lower extremity of the radius-and the head neck 
and adjoming part only of the femur. ' ' 

2. Give the attachments of the muscles which flex and 
extend the fore-arm, with the ligaments of the clb^w Joint 

3. Describe the stomach and its relations. 

4. Describe the kidney and its relations. 

5. Describe the pericardium; its attachments and uses. 

6 Describe the left side of the heart, with the course and 
relations of the thoracic aorta. 




W 



.:,(^ :,.., 






'[1 



'it 



m^ 





■'■ i 


1*' - 


.;',- 




!■' ■t' 


^,„i---^' 


1 ^H' 



1. D 

separal 
their r( 
ponent 

2. r 

of a lo 

3. I 
the ch 

4. ( 
tural,c 

5. 1 
descril 

6. ] 

the s^ 

ft 

they I 



iSluiiietfiiUj? of 5Covonto, 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 






.|,«,B 






i^m 



FIKST YEAR. 



PHYSIOLOGY. 



Examiner : M. Barrett, M.A., M.D. 



1. Describe the methods by which the organic may be 
separated from the inorganic constituents of bone: state 
their relative proportions, and name the several earthy com- 
ponents. 

2. Describe the course of the nutritive fluid in the shaft 
of a long bone. 

3. Describe the several coats of an artery, and mention 
the characteristic differences between an artery and a vein. 

4. Give a description of areolar tissue, naming its struc- 
tural,elements, its various positions and its purposes. 

5. Mention the chief agents in gastric digestion, and 
describe t'.e gastric mucous membrane. 

6. How are the nitrogenous excretions eliminated from 
the system? and mention the chief forms under which 
they appear. 




%i^' 



1. 

a solid 

2. 
referrf 

3. 

liquids 

4. 

5. 

and hj 

6. ; 

method 

7. ] 

8. 1 

9. J 
alkaline 

10. l\ 



&'■*■ 



Bni\^tvfiiti} Of ^ovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



FIRST YEAR. 



W ■ :< 



'^MimE^'i 



CHEMISTRY. 



Examiners: J ^^^^"^ Croft, D.C.L. 
. i H. Y. Hind, M.A. 



a solid h:rvil';th» ra°:r ""^""^ ""= ^j'^^'*" s-"'y ^^ 

liqufds7'"" "''■"'""''""''^^ "ff^' 'I'o boiling points of 

4. By what moans may bodies be orystalised .' 
and M^og:;!:' *" P"P»™'i°","'' F.-o,>orties of oxygen 

r^el^^Zi!^^'"^^ "^"^-'^^ "J '-^ general 

7. Describe the preparation and properties of chlorine. 

8. Mention the sources and properties of carbonic acid. 

alkatfethran^d'^r^tr;';"'."'^""'''^' °^'"^ »"'^"-. 
10. Mention the principal oxides of iron, rrivin^ f„r„„.u. 



II 



til'* 



**' ^ 



] 



and 

c 

tube 



give 



and 




ad 

stror 

IC 

copp 

11 

are i 

Bulpl 

i .: 

and 







nnihtvnits of Kovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18G4. 



FIEST YEAR. 



CHEMISTRY. 

FOR HONORS. 



I H. Y. IIiND, M.A. 




m 



W 



1. Reduce 112° Fahrenheit to Centigrade and Reaumur, 
and 60° Cent, to Reaumur and Fahrenheit. 

2. What is the cause of the ascent of liquids in narrow 
tubes ? 

3. What is meant by the latent heat of steam ? 

4. What circumstances are essential to combustion ? 

5. Explain the formation of hydrogen. 

6. Describe the preparation of common phosphoric acid * 
give its formula and those of its soda salts. 

7. Mention the sources and modes of proparaticn of lif^ht 
and heavy carburettcd hydrogen. 

8. Describe the preparation of the carbonates of potassa 
ad soda. 

9. From what mi-orals are the salts of barium and 
strontium obtained, and how ? 

10. Give the formulas of the o.vi'l' 
copper, lead, tin, and mercury. 

11. From what substance is arson i..!^ acid obtained ; what 
are its principal properties, and why is it often found in 
sulphuric acid ? 

12. What other elements are usually ranked with arsenic, 
and why ? 



manganese, iron, 



p^" 



1. 

theh 
undei 

2. 
follov 
pulm( 

3. 
adult. 

4. 

gang! 

5. 

portrc 

6. ] 

state 1 



ii» 'illiliU' ■ 



nnmvmp of ^ovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



SECOND TEAR. 



PHYSIOLOGY. 



Examiner : M. Barrett, M.A., M.D. 



1. How IS the blood exposed to the action of the air in 
the lungs ; and how many cubic inches of air are exchansred 
under ordinary circumstances, at oii jl respiration ? * 

2. What nerves penetrate tlie pulaionary substance 
following the ramifications of the bronchu.s, and of the 
pulmonary artery ? 

3. Describe the structure and function of the hea-t n. the 
adult. 

4. Name the most remarkable nerves proceeding from the 
ganglia of the thoracic portion cf the sympathetic. 

5. What are the peculiarities of the blood of the vena 
portfc ? 

6. Describe the glands of the duodenum and ileum, and 
state what is known of the functions of the latter. 



11 



; 


■'I 




i 



•■ m 



p":k 





" 




,v. 




mBt^R. 


¥ 


1. ■ .. ., 


\ri 


;*' 




>* ,f li 


p, 


h^^" 
^ -^A 


•i 



IS r 

acti 
dire 
pow 
she\ 
hyd: 
and 



occi 

1( 

diffe 

1] 

outa 

V. 
Give 



mnibtvuitp of Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 






'> 



SECOND YEAR. 



CHEMISTRY. 

FOR HONORS. 



Uxammera: \ H^nry Croft, D.C.L. 
I H. Y. Hind, M.A. 



, ,iM| 



!!■ ' ^' 



• "'^^i.^r"'^,'^®.*^® phenomena observed when sutta percha 
IS rubbed with flannel. ^ pt^icua 

2. Describe an electrical machine and its mode of action. 

3. Describe the condensing electroscope and its mode of 
action. 

4. Describe Grove's galvanic battery. What is the 
direction of the current ? 

5. Give Ampere's theory of magnets, and show lio^Y a 
powerful magnet may be made. 

6. Give the present definition of organic chemistry, and 
shew why older definitions are erroneouS. 

7. Give the sources, preparation and properties of 
hydrocyanic acid. ^ ^ 

8. Give the sources and formulas of methylic, cthylic, 
and amyhc alcohols. "^ ^ ' 

9. In what organic bodies do sulphur and cyanogen 
occur? ^ ^^''i"ot.u 

10. Give some of the fatty acid series, and show how they 
differ from each other. •' 

11. What are the amides and nitriles : how arp th^^ 
obtaineU f , — _ — y 

12. What are the compound ammonias ; how obtained? 
Vjive instances. 



.-.i i'i;"a!!iii!aiiiiii»Bgte5iR- 



1. 

2. 

3. 

Leyd( 

4. 

5. 
organ 

6. 

7. 
orgar 

8, 
and c 

9, 

10 
may 

11 

12 
impo 



Uni\}tvf$it^ of roronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINAT NS: 1864. 



8ECOND xEAr 



chi:mistry. 



I 1 



"ml 



Examiners: 



{ Henry Croft, D.C.L. 
i 11. Y. Hind, M.A. 



1. '}' are the general properties of magnets? 

2. What is meant by the term electrical excitation? • 

3. Describe some of the effects of a discharge from a 
Ley den jar. 

4. Describe Volta's pile. 

5. What elements enter into the composition of natural 
organic bodies ? • 

6. Explain the general principle of organic analysis. 

7. Give some instances of the artificial formation of 
organic bodies. 

8. How is cyanogen obtained ; what are its properties 
and composition ? 

9. What are the products of the fermentation of sugar? 

10. Into what classes are the sugars divided, and how 
may grape sugar be formed ? 

11. What is the nature of gun cotton ? 

12. What are the vegetable alkaloids ? Mention the most 
important. 



w 




IMAGE EVALUATION 
TEST TARGET (MT-3) 




h 




// 





{/ 




/- 







«p^ 



f/. 



7/ 



^^ 



10 



I.I 



i^ 1^ 111112 2 

1^ lis IIIIIM 



L25 i 1.4 



1.8 



1.6 



m 



v^ 




^> 






>> 






'^^^». 



>> 




C/;.^ 






/^ 



Photographic 

Sciences 
Corporation 



23 WEST MAIN STREET 

WEBSTER, MY. 14580 

(716) 872-4$03 






4^ 



,\ 





iV 



:\ 



\ 



^<b 



V 







"<«v 



a 



^^ 






.v-..'^'^^^ 

«=^^ 

£^y 






Ua 



^ 







I • 



m 



I" • 





■ :-T 


!: X'-^b ■ 


':"'4 


■ ■' 


. ■■■;» 



,V ''^-!'iji^'^« 




m 


■■ '■ 'If''-, 


m 


(it 


A- 





il*' . 'IN, 



Wini\itvtiits of Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



BOTANY. 



„ . f Rev. Professor Hincjks, F.L.S. 
■^^«^*"^^«-\ T.J. Cottle, Esq. 



1. What are the two principal kinds of organizable mate- 
rial of which plants are formed ? How do they differ in 
chemical composition ? 

2. Deposits on the walls of cells and vessels, what is their 
nature, and how is their uniformity interrupted ? 

3. Describe the structure and mode of increase of endo- 
genous and exogenous wood, and show that three sections 
are required to examine by the microscope the nature of the 
latter, whilst two suffice for the former. 

4. What is meant by the term phyllodium? Give an 
example. 

5. What is chorisis ? What are its two kinds ? What 
class of phenomena is it supposed to explain ? 

6. Principal modes of placentation of seeds, with an ex- 
planation of their origin. 

7. What is the position of the embryo in respect to the 
albumen in the seeds of grasses, as wheat, rice, Indian corn. 
&c. ? How is the gluten disposed in the seed of wheat ? 



m 

8. What is the nature of the reproductive system of ferns? 

9. The bloodroot or puccoun— what is its scientific name ? 
to what natural order does it belong ? what medical proper- 
ties belong to it ? 

10. Aconitum napellus— monkshood — to what order does 
It belong ? What are the general properties of the order, 
and how are they manifested in this species ? 

11. Name some Canadian examples of the order Scrophu- 

lariacese. What are the prevailing properties of the order ? 

Name one or two other important medicinal plants belonginff 
to it ? IT o e, 

12. Give an analysis of the orders of the class Endogense. 



';|,:''i '\ 



,:l . i 



Wis III!" I V, P 

w - " ■': 
:pf!ll|:i:'':!:::J||| 



: ■' ... I'n 



''iim 






,1, .^^,UI,,il 



firiiii;;.:. 



1 



TB 



1. 1 

it obta 

2. ] 

3. \ 
What 
variety 

4. I 
therap 

5. \ 
phur, i 

6. ^ 

7. \ 
of zinc 

8. g 
potash, 

9. \ 

are its 
by the 

10. V 
and wl 



Wini\itvuits of 3:ototito. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



THERAPEUTICS AND PHARMACOLOGY. 



Examiner: Uzziel Ogdkn, M.D. 



I" . I'l I 



W 



'jlllllill 



«T init'ilMii 



IL 



' ii 



■M 



^ 1. What are the sources of magnesiae sulphus, and how is 
It obtained from each ? 

2. How is potassae nitras prepared artificially ? 

3. What alkaloids are obtained from Peruvian bark? 
What are their therapeutical differences, and from which 
variety of bark are they respectively obtained ? 

4. Name the chief alkaloids of opium, and state their 
therapeutical difference. 

5. What are the therapeutical properties and uses of sul- 
phur, its dose, and officinal preparations ? 

6. What is the strength of vinura antimonii ? 

7. What are the therapeutical properties, uses and doses 
of zinci sulphas, cupri sulphas, and argenti nitras ? 

8. State the formulae of the hypophosphites of lime, soda, 
potash, and ammonia. 

9. What are the physical properties of gamboge ? What 
are its therapeutical properties, and how are these modified 
by the dose ? 

10. Where is jalap obtained, what are its chief constituents, 
and what is its dose ? 



:■«■ 




I - , '11 



i»! 



1. : 

tussis. 

2 ' 
treatir 

3. ' 
sical r 

4. ^ 

5. 

of the 

6. } 
would 

7. ^ 

treat ii 

8. \ 

9. \ 
treat il 

10. i 
with at 



^nmvuits! Of {Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864 



I. 'I||l 



III 



THIRD YEAR. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 

Examiner : Uzziel Oqden, M.D. 



tuss'is.^'''"^' '^' '''''''' ^^"'P*^™^' «^nd treatment of per- 

^r'^Z^n^or^^^^^^^^^^ metastases, and 

sicf i S^r '^' ^^"«^« «f endocarditis, and its chief phy- 

4. What are the symptoms and treatment of ton^^-'Iitis ^ 

treat iu'lctsf '"""P'" ''°""''''' ■""> ''»'' "ould you 
8. What are the symptoms and signs of acute bronchitis ? 
treat if?"" "' "" '^"P"""'"' «J»'i«is, and how would you 

with alr^u't. "■' '""'"'"" ""' ^"-6-».s associated 



; 'I, 



,^4 



i 




( 



( . 



' ''1 

il 



I 4' 



ff; 



1. 

sick ; 

2. 
hydrc 

3. : 



4. { 
of a ] 
wound 

5. ^ 
necesss 
with tl 
luxatioi 

6. A 

bright r 

7. Gi 
the knee 






THIJRD YEAR. 



ill 



'1 , i ' 



SUKGERr. 



2. State th. *^ """^""^ '»-<'<«>" 

hydrocele of tJ:t„S'-t„.t«"°'" '""' '-'-nt of 
'• "'"^""'^ •""■ "•^»' » acute ab,oe„. 

of a T.Z r;r^^"'5"'-.'""J '-atme„t of f^oture 
"ound of the lung '^ ' "Sam when compoundeHth 




"*;.»' 



^^iNi 






;^;.i , ..>:•!' 





i 


w 


M 



' ijitjy 



Ei 



1. Wha 

2. Wha 

3. Wha 

4. In fu 
what is th( 

5. Whai 
>Yhat is th( 



anluetttltj? of mvonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS ; 1864. 



m 



I' Hi. 



THIED YEAR. 



OBSTETRICS, &c. 



Ilzaminer: C. J. Philbrick, F.R.C.S, Enq. 



1. What are the symptoms and proofs of pregnancy ? 

2. What is labour ? 

3. What presentations occur ? 

whtt ?MleteCmf °"' "'"" ■"■" ""' -=""-'--«-. and 



, N. B — These questions ore also for Honors. 





1. Wl 

2. W] 
founded 

3. De 

4. De 
6. m 
6. Wl 



Wini\itv»itsf ot Zatonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



THIRD YEAR. 



■:;-.j| 



MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE; 



Exammer: C. J. Phubriok, F.R.C.S., Eso. 



:■'■' 1,*;; 



f"'^' I! i| 



1. What is strangulation ? 

2 What appearances attend it ? and what may be con- 
founded with it ? ^ 

3. Determine that a woman has been delivered of a child. 

4. Determine the time of the delivery. 

5. What are the symptoms of poisoning by strychnia ? 

6. What are the tests for strychnia ? 



N. B — Also for Honors. 






I'**' m) 




ti 
tl 
t\ 

tr 
tfa 



di 
ex 
be 



ex 

ep 

hei 
pe 



ap< 
the 



^ni\$tvmi^ of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



THIRD YEAR. 



COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 



Examiner: M. Barrett, M.A., M.D. 




1. Note the differences existing between fishes ^nrl *.«« 

2. Describo the testes or spermatic organs of birds a, f„ 
the.r pos,t,on, structure, and perio.Iical df velopLnt ' 

e.itte^S''rf''.h."'' ""' P"-^^'"'"*!"^'! "lation of ,he co- 

5. What substance replaces uric acid in the urin» „f 
herWrous an.mals, and what are its most "ema^kawTpr:.' 

6. Compare the human skull with that of the anthro„„i^ 
apes, in reference to the position of th, f^L„ anthropoid 
the angles whinh the eondX i *''^..f'"^?°'«'> magnum. 



*'lll 
,'^.itW 



fi',... 


1 




^M :■ 



4 
dete( 

5 

6 

7 
amm 

8 
grou] 

9 

10 



<Slnfbrrfiiit9 of rotonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



THIRD YEAR. 



CHEMISTRY. 



I 

'Ml 



";iii. 



I .111 



^milii'iiiilM 






:;;;fisi:P 

--,•:■?!,;■ III! 



J !■!!■(« 
I' ■i!» il 

'11 / : .1.1 



^ PI. Y. IIixXD, M.A. 



1. Give the tests for potassa .uul ammonia. 

2. Give the tests for protoxide and peroxide of iron. 

3. Give the tests for oxide of copper. 

4. What impurities occur in hydrochloric acid: how 
detected ? 

5. Give the best tests for lead. 

6. Give the best tests for oxide (red) of mercury. 

7. What metals are precipitated white by sulphide of 
ammonium? 

8. What reagents are used in dividing the acids into 
groups? 

9. How is uric acid detected ? 

10. Give the best test for strychnine. 






1. 

nitric 

2. 
sorbed 



4. 

and ho 

5. 
hydros 

6. 
disting 

7. 

8. 
calculi 

9. 

10. 
on line 



Uni\)tvnit^ of is:otonto« 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4. 



TIimD YEAR 






||.. :! I 



Pi'' 

'f'':ll 



CHEMISTRY. 

FOR HONORS. 



^o^ammer.;/ Henry Croft D.C.L. 
\ H. Y. Hind, M.A. 



1. How may sulphuric acid be freed from arsenious and 
nitric acids ? 

2. Describe the process of detecting arsenic when ab-» 
sorbed into the tissues. 

3. Give the tests for antimony. 

4. What metals are precipitated by hydrochloric acid, 
and how are they distinguished ? 

5. What metals are precipitated from acid solutions by 
hydrosulphuric acid ? 

6. How may sulphocyanic, mcconic, and acetic acids be 
distinguished ? 

7. Give the tests for zinc, cliroraiam, and aluminum. 

8. How may phosphoric acid be detected in a fusible 
calculus ? 

9. How may oxalate of lime be recognised ? 

10. What process would be adopted in detecting blood 
on lineu or steel ? 



ilfi!' 



i 









'i^ 



'■„. w ■!■, ;, 



i'.'M 



r-^m 



•n 



V ■ ■■ ;-.li 



%i 



CAN 



1. ] 

the po 

2. ^ 

3. I 

4. C 

viscera 
ings, ai 

5. G 
supply] 

6. E 

its brar 

7. E 
portal 1 

8. D 
thoraci( 

9. G 
betweer 



uni\^tvm!i of mvmto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS ; 1804. 



CANDIDATES FOR M.B.-FOR PRIMARY EXAMINA- 
TION, OR SECOND YEAR SCHOLARSHIP. 



■ km 






L.. 



,-;,flv!i|l 



ANATOMY. 



:i 



Examiner: Wm. T. Aikins, M.D. 



1. Describe the first cervical vertebra, designating also 
the points of muscular and ligamentous attachment. 

2. What are the boundaries of the femoral ring ? 

3. Describe the anatomy of the inguinal canal and rings. 

^ 4. Give the situation, shape, attachments, structure and 
visceral relations of the diaphragm, the nature of its open- 
mgs, and what they transmit. 

5. Give the origin, course and distribution of the nerves 
supplying the diaphragm. 

6. Describe the extent and relations of the brachial artery. 
Its branches and their distribution. 

7. Describe the origin, course, termination and use of the 
portal vein. 

8. Describe the origin, course, termination and use of the 
thoracic duct. 

9. Give the dissection of the region of the neck lying 
between the os hyoides and the inferior maxilla. 



■m 






\l^'^% 



I 



Unmvmu of ^ovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



DEGREE OF M.B. 



PHYSIOLOGY. 



Examiner : M. Barrett, M.A., M.D. 



!| ''''')!«/ 




' i'l'j 



li ' wm 



!! I' 



,1^1 



!," Ii*il 



i;-i;:l:; 



1. Describe the hepatic circulation, and state what 
changes are effected in the blood passing through this organ. 

2. Name the principal components of the biliary secretion, 
and give Pettenkofer's test for bile. 

3. Describe the structure and function of the foetal heart. 

4. Give the microscopical anatomy, and function of the 
kidney. 

5. How may the specific gravity of the urine be deter- 
mined without the aid of the urinometer, and what informa- 
tion does a knowledge of the specific gravity afford ? 

6. Trace the longditudinal fibres which are to be seen on 
raising the superficial layer of the pons varolii, both up- 
wards and downwards ; name the nerves connected with this 
tract, and the function to which they are subservient. 



•"il 



jM 



1. \ 

treatmi 

2. y 

how w( 

3. I 

of crou 
disease 

4. V 

how wc 

5. A 
of age, 
appetit 
increas 
nous a 
treated 

6. E 

Write ^ 

7. A 
tacked 
giddine 
cold, fji 
Whati 
other 8 
you tre 



r/«»-r 



Winmvnits of STotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAAfTNATIONS : 1864. 



DEGREE OF M.B. 



PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. 



Examiner : Uzziel Ogden, M.D. 




'lr-<t 



1. What are the symptoms, usual period, of attacl- and 
treatment of acute podagra ? 

2. What are the most frequent causes of haemoptysis, and 
now would you treat it ? 

3. How would you diagnose between the false membranes 
ot croup and diphtheria, and how would you treat the latt^-r 
disease in a child four years old ? 

4. What are the most frequent causes of haeraaturia, and 
now would you treat it ? 

5. A few months ago I was called to see a boy 14 years 
of age, who was thin, pale, and slightly anasarcous ; his 
appetite was bad, bowels confined ; urine pale ; very much 
increased in quantity ; specific gravity 1005 ; very albumi- 
nous and containing oil globules. How would you have 
treated him. and what would have been your prognosis ? 

6. How would you treat acute bronchitis in the adult ? 
Write your prescription for the acute stage 

7. A young man having studied hard nil winter is at- 
tacked near the close of the session with severe headache, 
giddiness, and occasional vomiting, head alternately hot and 
cold, face pale, eyes pained by light and bowels con^ned. 
What is most likely to be the nature of his illness, what 
other symptoms would assist your diagnosis, and how would 
you treat him ? 



W ' 







1*' .,' 


: ) ■■■ ( 



1. 

inflamt 
treatm 

2. 

3. 

ulcus s 

4. 

fractur 

5. 

require 

6. 

larger 

7. 
and wh 

8. : 
retentii 

9. 
animal 

10. 
the tun 
each? 



mni\$ttms of ^Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOR M.B. 



SURGERY. 



li ■ >' '■■ Mi 



■.;„|l| 






ii IP ii 



i; '.-ili 



'imM 



mmm 

, 



ij hj. ^ r||l 



ii<;; w 



iiir.::. 



m 

km 



Examiner: Wm. T. Aikins, M.D. 



\: ■■■ .:i 



^ 1. Give the general and local treatment for acute 
inflammation of a part, and the reason for each step in said 
treatment. 

2. Diagnose and treat a case of acute periostitis. 

3. State the treatment, (hygienic, and other,) of scrof- 
ulous synovitis. 

4. State with particularity the treatment for oblique 
fracture of the shaft of the femur. 

5. Under what circumstances would fracture of the skull 
require the employment of the trephine ? 

6. State the several steps to be taken in one of the 
larger amputations. 

7. In malignant diseases what conditions would warrant 
and what forbid an operation with the knife ? 

8. Name the usual causes, symptoms and treatment for 
retention of urine. 

^ 9. What is the treatment for a bite inflicted by a rabid 
animal ? 

10. What are the several varieties as to the condition of 
the tumor, &c., of inguinal hernia, and the treatment for 
each? 



i:;.i ill :i 



!«!'■' 



•il! ■■ ifl 



tfi^i- 



m 







for 



3 
lab( 

4 

Iab( 
just 
and 

5 
torn 

*6 

of tl 

*7, 
quel 



Unmvmn of Toronto. 






fi iiiiiiitiiiii. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



lli|li''^^^W 



'i,i];'!',i"!'!iH;'i 



CANDIDATES FOR M.B. 



OBSTETRICS, &c. 



Examiner: C.J. Philbrick, F.R.C.S., Enq. 



for^it T^^^ '' menstruation ? and what may be mistaken 
2. On what do irregularities in menstruation depend? 

lab^o'urT''* ""'" '^' '^''^"^' P'°"^' *^'^ ^ ^^"^^'^ '^ i" 

4. You are called to attend a woman who has been in 

abour more than twenty-four hours, and the child can only 

just be reached by the finger : what conditions may exisL 

and what is the treatment ? ^ * 

f J; .^ T^^^' '?^^^"^ v'" "'"^^ ^^^'bits certain symp- 
toms ; what symptoms indicate that she is again pregnant ? 

ofliie^'prall!'^ ^^ -^ ^-ctions 

*7. Describe the diseases of the placenta, and the conse- 
quences to the mother and the conception. 



* Honor Questions. 












■I- 1' J 



■iiiK 






liiiii: 



iiii 






II ■' 



! -uwm 



mm 




F 



s 
( 



a 



mm, 



Winli^tvuits of ^Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



DEGREE OP M.B. 



THERAPEUTICS AND PHARMACOLOGY. 



[I 1 '" 



1^. 



''HI 






. !'''■■■ ■iffi 



Examiner: Uzziel Ogden, M.D. 



1. What are the therapeutical properties of gallic acid, 
and what is its dose ? 

2. How is the ferri ammonio citras prepared, and what is 
its dose ? 

3. Where is diosma crenata obtained, and what are its 
therapeutical properties ? 

4. What are the therapeutical properties of potassae bitar- 
tras, and in what doses would you give it ? 

5. How is syrupus ferri iodidi prepared, what are its 
therapeutical properties, uses and dose ? 

6. What are the doses of the hypophosphites of lime, soda, 
potash, ammonia, and quinine ? In what respects do they 
differ in their effects on the system, and what care should be 
observed in their administration ? 

7. Vinegar was given in the treatment of some of the 
sequelrs of scarlatina during a recent epidemic in Hamilton. 
Can you tell me its supposed modus medendi ? 

8. Name the most valuable antispasmodics, their doses 
and modus operandi. 

9. For what disease is sulphur a specific ? 



»::::i|lif' 



■<" i/: ■!:■ 







1, 

reas 

2, 
groi 

3 
insti 

4, 
doul 

5, 
org£ 

6, 
and 
allt 

7, 

8, 
acid 

9, 
refe 

10 
alkn 

11 

obta 

12 

vesi 



'I It I 

'''lli 



mnmvms of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



FOURTH YEAR. 



CHEMISTRY, 



I H. Y. Hind, M.A. 




;,l:' 



1. Arrange the non-metallic elements in groups, giving 
reasons. o &. 

2. What metallic elements arc ranked with one of these 
groups, and why ? 

3. Give the definition of monodi and tribasic acids, give 
instances and refer to types. 

4. Give the formulas of the magncsian sulphates, the 
double magnesian sulphates and the alums. 

6. Define organic chemistry, and give the types to which 
organic compounds may be referred. 

6. Give the general formulas of the alcohols, aldehydes, 
and fatty acids, showing how the latter arc derived; refer 
all to types. 

7. Account for the formation of so-called sulphuric ether. 

8. Give the mode of preparation of cyanogen — urea— uric 
acid — morphine — formic acid — glycerine. 

9. To what class of bodies may the fats and oils be 
referred, how are they acted on by potassa ? 

10. Give the general process for the extraction of the 
alkaloids, and give tiieir characters. 

11. What are the ammonium bases, how may they be 
obtained V Give their characters. 

12. Give the chemical compositon of the more common 
vesical calculi. 



m 



lij'ii 



■11 



mi 



an 



lin 



ma 



sol 



mi 



1< 
an< 



•■'■ ■^:l: ■ I 



^ni\^tvmi} ot Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



FOURTH YEAR. 



PRACTICAL CHEMISTRY. 



(II. Y. Hind, M.A. 



a ; „.■: 



1. What impurities may occur in sulphuric acid, and how 
may they be detected ? 

2. What are the usual impurities in carbonate of soda, 
and how detected ? 

_ 3. Give the distinguishing tests for baryta, strontia, and 
lime. 

4. What metals in solution give yellow sulphides ; how 
may they be distinguished ? 

5. What metals are precipitated black from alkaline 
solutions only, and how are they distinguished ? 

6. Mention all the liquid tests for arsenious acid. 

7. How may strychnine be separated from an organic 
mixture and detected ? 

8. Give the tests for morphine and opium. 

9. Give the tests for blood and bile. 

10. Give the tests for iodine, sulphur, phosphoric, boracic 
and oxalic acids. 



is 



1. 

deatl 



2. 
deatl: 

3. 

what 

4. 

*5. 
vapoi 

♦6. 
sulph 



Unibtvnits ot ttovonu. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOR M.B. 



MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE. 



'-: h 



Examiner: C. J. Philbrick, F.R.C.S., Enq. 



I.; II 



death?^^*^'°"'°^ ^^""^ "" ^^""""^ ^^^ ^®®" produced before 

defth?^''^'""'"^ '^^' "" ^''"''' ^^' ^''" produced before 

3. What are the symptoms of poisoning by urea ? and 
what post mortem conditions confirm the point ? 

4. What are the tests of morphia? 

vIpouTsY' '^"""^"^ ''''"'^ ^""^ to suspect poisoning by noxious 

Jlny,^-''"^' *^^ characteristics of poisoning by oxalic acid, 
sulphuric acid, corrosive sublimate, arsenic, sugar of lead ^ 



* Honor Questione. 



ADS' 



Ei 



1. 

lectur 

2. : 

laws? 
3. : 

4. : 

source 

6./ 
tradis 



Utmtvnitp ''f JTotottto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1804. 



SECOND YEAR. 



AUSTIN'S PROVINCE OF JURISPRUDENCE. 



Hxaminera-X^^^^ Orooks, Q. C, LL.D. 
Jt^zamtners. | Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. 



i , 1 = 



:.. II 



1. Give a brief abstract of the outlines of Mr. Austin's 
lectures. 

2. How does he distinguish between the different kind of 
laws ? 

3. Distinguish between command^ duty^ and sanction. 

4. Explain what is meant by the theory of utility as the 
source of certain laws. 

6. What are the diflferent kinds of laws improper, in con- 
tradistinction to laws properly so called. 



(Ill, 



/.«iJi 



U: 



X 



1. Me 

theory o 

2. Me 
of moral 

3. Wh 
minate ai 

4. Dis 

5. Dis 
morality ' 



tAt\t\}tvm» ot ^Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



SECOND YEAR 



AUSTIN^S JURISPRUDENCE. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



Examiners: f^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D. 

t JiDWARD FlTZaERALD, M.A., LL.B. 



thL^lf'.'^-r" "^ '^'' '^''''''''' '^ ^'' Austin to the 
theory of utzhti/ as a source of law ? 

2. Mention some of the arguments in favour of the theory 
of moral sense. i-ueory 

3. What is the distinction between laws set by a deter^ 
mmate and an indeterminate body of persons ? 

4. Distinguish between the different forms of government ? 



liil! 



,i ill! ni'i'i 



i! 



Mi 



iiiijiiii; 



mm 

Mm 



I"; I';:" I . N' „ li, i' 






iiiiir-i:!!'- 



mnl\}tvuitp of STotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATION : 18G4. 



SECOND YEAR. 



BOWYER'S CIVIL LAW. 



\ Edward FiizaERALD, M.A., LL.B. 



litl 



1 1 

llilliiiiii 



II 






iii!R!i!i|;!ili,iii(j!: 



^ 1. Give a brief sketch of the rise and progress of Roman 
jurisprudence. 

2. Give a general view of the Institutes. 

3. What are the different branches of the law of things ? 

4. Distinguish between a legacy and a j^c?^' commissum. 

5. What is aa obligation in solidum ? 



HH:, 






'■m 



?i|f!: 



WinittKMs^ ot ^0 to It to. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864, 



SECOND YEAR 



'' ii 



j."i, lu; 



l!l,;,l|i: '! 



im 



i'li; 



BOWYER^S CIVIL LAW. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



Examiners: \ ^^^^ ^^^^o^s, Q.C., LL.D. 

i Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. 



1. Distinguish between mutuunif commodatum, depositum. 
and pignus. 

2. What are the diflferent obligations quasi ex contractu ? 

3. What different kinds of contracts are involved in the 
consideration de societate ? 

4. Classify "actions," and explain the nature of each. 
6. What are interdicta and their divisions ? 



!|);p, ,1; lijij 



lii 



J. 



i^m 






iiffil!' 



111 



iiiiHiiiji 



HAL 



Exa 



1. Wh 

during th 

2. Whj 
Commons 

3. Whc 
the First ; 

4. Wha 

^ 5. Give 
his reign. 



^nmtvnlii) of Eovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



HALLAM'S CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY 



JEJzammers:i:t^^^ Crooks, Q. C., LL.D. 

{ Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. 



1. What were the different changes in the EnfflishThiir^l, 
dunng the reigns of Henry VIII.^Edward Vl^lnS Ma/; 9 

the%.^^airh^^:sLf '^^ ''''^- ^^^-- <^^-^- 

4. What led to the restoration of Charles 11. ? 
hi/;eigi™ ""' '^"^ «»^'itational measures passed during 








lii! 

Ill', i 



:!hi:: !ii:i u 



: 



II 



111::; 



!i: 



isjr 

lii: 



il'^: 



liiiiiV: ■ 'y'' 



I! 



¥%^^ 



:i'iv: 






r»t: 



I 



1. 

reign 

2. 
durin 

3. 

4. 

of Qu, 

5. ^ 

ofEni 



^niittmts Of 8rov<inM. 



ANNUAL liXAMINATIONa.- 1804. 



SECOND YEAR. 



HALLAM'S CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY. 

Examiners :} ^^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D 

i J^DWAiiD Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. 



3. What was involved in the trial of Sacheverel ? 
of QuoTn'lr/'' ''"'° "' ""= "™^'"«"» ^-"e *"« reign 



ill '-' 



''l"i! 

:•'! 



1/ 
'ill 



iiiii!':' 



mni^tvnits of Eovonto^ 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS ; 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



SMITirS MEllCANTILE LAW. 



»m ' I 






Uxaminera • J ^^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D. 
j^xamtners. ^ Edward Fitzgerald, M.A. LL.B. 



1. On what principle is it that one partner can bind 
another within the scope of the partnership business ? 

2. Define a joint stock company. Are there any such in 
this country, and if so name some of them ? 

3. What title and rights does the transfer of an overdue 
note acquire ? Explain fully. 

4. What claim can a trustee make upon a policy of insu- 
rance effected by him as such trustee on the life of another ? 

5. What are the provsions of the 17th section of the 
Statute of Frauds, and in what respect is it affected by 9 
Geo. IV., chap. 14. 



'-! 












1 


!;.;.„, '^ 


i 




t 



1. 

order 

2. 

expre; 
the wj 

3. 1 

formei 
What, 

4. I 

to " T] 
provisii 

5. A 
as to cl 
notice ( 



^ntrttvtutxf of jcoronto. 

ANNDAL EXAlilNATIONS : mi. 
SECOND YEAR. 



SMITH'S MERCANTILE LAW. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



I 



■Examiners: f ^^^M Crooks, Q. c., LL D 

^Edward Pxiza.RALD:M A ;ll.B. 



ordliraftK-f,--^^^^^^^^^ neeessan in 

-,t-"trai average ? 

What la ou>- law „„ ?],;, subject? "^ ''*'« of interest? 

proviaions of the|E„g?Lh act "="™'^ ' «''« ^ome*^:? thf 
notice of protest ? ' ^^^*' ^^^ the essentials of the 






.*•' ■ -M 



hi- 


^^^M 


V. 


1 




m 




1 



SM 



E 



1. A 

relieve ' 

2. W 
fraud ? 

3. ^ 

court en 
any cas( 

4. w: 

the bill 

5. Wl 
must be 



mnmvuitsf of STotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



SMITHES MANUAL OF EUUITY JURIS- 
PEUDENCE. 



Uzaminers.-f^^^'^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D. 

(JiiDWARD Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. 



llm 






reHevf f'"'* ""^^^ '"'^^ '^ '^'''^^'' ^"'^ ^ ^^"^* ^f Equity 
3 What is meant by "specific performance?" Will the 



'* 



1 

doei 

2 
in a 
and 

3. 
som( 

4. 

put i 
of he 

5. 
liabil 
fullj 



'1' I : ■: \'. 



Winmvms^ of ^Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



SMITH'S MANML W MUITY JURIS- 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



JSxaminers.'f^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D. 

i Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. 



aoi Sldong r' "^' ''^"*^'^° '''''' ' To which class 

2. la ■ pTridence admissible on boli-iir nf n,M 

»n a suit ,ific performance of a wlitl IT ^"''^ 

and if so, . iiat case or cases ? agreement, 

3. What is an injunction ^ TTnw I'a ,v i.^. • , « 

some of the cases i„^ „,,ieh tins 1^^;; i' ^p'^lTclb!; '""" 

putXnleVt^^^^^^^^^^ '-3 ^wi.„„ 

of her husband ? "'''''*^ ^^ ^^^^ ^J the will 









I 






"m 






ar 



CO 



m 



wl 



Wini\}tvnits of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



SECOND YEAE. 



WILLIAMS ON REAL PROPERTY. 



T7 . f Adam Crooks, Q. C, LL.D. 
^^«^^"^^^-\ Edward Fitzgerald, M. A., LL.B. 



11^ " 

r: 

III::. 






1. What is an estate tail, an estate for life, and in fee, 
and state the rule in Shelly's case ? 

2. Define co-partners, joint tenants, and tenants in 
common. 

3. What advantage in conveyancing was obtained by 
means of the lease and release under the Statute of Frauds ? 

4. What is dower, and how is it conveyed when the widow 
has married a second time ? 

5. Define vendor's lien and state some of the cases in 
which this lien will be held to be waived or destroyed ? 



I:H :i 



m 



^nibnmp ot Eovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



SECOND YEAR. 



WILLIAMS OJf REAL PllOPERTF. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



Examiners: J ^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D. 

i hDWARD Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. 



3. Define corporeal and incorporeal heredlfflmpnfo ^ 
what were the usual words of conveyance annltZp?' \°v 
Is there any word now that will convey bofh? '' '''^ ' 

4. What is the office of the hahernJnm ir. „ ^ 



l!|!llllil:!l!l 






t'^ 






:';, ■■!:" 



'■ ,; I' : 



t;: 



f 

V 



II 



' i !! 



Wini\}ttms! of zovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



THIKD YEAR. 



ARCHBOLD^S LANDLORD AND TENANT. 



Examiners :f^^^^ ^^^oks, Q. C, LL.D. 

\ Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. 



1. What leases require to be in writing, and what under 
seal ? Give the authorities. What authority does an agent 
require to enable him to execute a valid lease ? 

2. What may be distrained for rent, and is the common 
law affected by any, and what statute or statutes on this 
head, and how P 

3. What are emblements, and who are entitled to them ? 

4. What notice to quit is necessary in the case of tenancy 
trom year to year, quarter to quarter, month to month, and 
week to week ? ' 

. 5. How may leases be validly assigned ? Is a condition 
m a lease against assignment legal ? 



ill' ii!i 



ft 

i 



lis 






!ii! • 






lift 



i ' 



i 






SI 



an 

(.1(3 



wli 
th( 



the 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 
THIRD YEAR 

ARCHBOLD'S LANDLORD AND TENANT. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 

Examiners ; f ^^^" Ckooks, Q. C, LL n 

I Edwahd FmoEKAiD, M.A.;ll.B. 

sio;-crn^:!;:v;;™;":;:;i,;v'.!?i.5;''' «?'- °f "«' ^-c- 

they arc rem„vable hy the tenant ? "^ "" '''''^"'«'' 

tho'samef '"^ """"" "s'"^' »" »'-'« ""o law respecting 






1' 13 



nnrnvuitii oe ©orontu. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1861 



THIRD YEAR. 



BURTON'S COMPENDIUM OF REAL 
PJtOPERTY. 



Exam 



inerpr ' ^:;'^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D. 

J ±.L-.'ARD FlTZGEKAU), M.A., LL.B. 



law,- a^'b/Itt f "™' ™"" "' ■""'-«- "' "--n 

52. What is the efiect of ]imitin<T a 
convoyanco ? ° 

3. Distinguish between the different kinds of 
recognised in Im. 

4. Define rent. 

6. Mention the different kinds of egmtak interests in land. 



use upon a use in a 
estates 



iiiL 






!v'ii, 



';!!;■, 





it,;' 


' 








i 

i 

i 

i 

il 


'l.. 


>'-» 


ii 

* 







■i^v El, 



U'. 



1. & 

2 D 
deed oi 

.3. Vi 

distinct 

4. H 
sion ? a 

5. W 
are the ; 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 
THIRD YEAR. 

BURTON\S COMPENDIUM. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



Examiners: \ ^^^^ Crooks, Q.C, LL.D. 

( Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. 



1. Scintilla juris, 
defdortfat' '''""■' '""™' ""'' ™« ^«-». and in 



'^|i.'T 



li 






i 

m 



m 



"If--*: 



IH 



''*. 



ii'WM 



■;:i!iil 



::|;:ilM 




1. 

2. 

functi 

3. 

and tl 

4. 

politic 

5. 1 
partnii 



Illlv'lili 



wnmtvms of arotonto. 

ANNCAI, EXAMINATIONS: 186il. 



THIRD YEAR. 



COI'S BRITISH COMMONWEALTH. 

hammers iX^"^^'^ Crooks, Q. C, LLD 

J JlDWAKD FlIZaERAtD, M.A., LL.B. 

1. What arc the objects and duties of a government ' 

JliZ'';LZf" "°"™™'' '■" '■"»•"■ °f 'I-o existence of 
pariSin Gitl Sin" ? '""'""^' """^ ''^-"-trative de- 



H li:"l 



ill' ;_ 

!!:'■ "' 




flu 
tio 

i. 
dui 



iS^mntrms of sroronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



THIED YEAR. 



COX^S BRITISH COMMONWEALTH. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



Uxaminers: \ ^^^^ Crooks, Q.C., LL.D. 

I Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. 



H-nn'f^'I? *^^ arguments in favour of a property qualifica- 
tion for the exercise of parliamentary suffrage. ^ 

3. Compare the advantages of open and secret voting. 

4. Wiiat is an action at law ? and state briefly its proce- 
dure and different stages. "^ ^ 

5. Distinguish between the different kinds of colonies. 






1; ■'■'■- 



ii;i' 

'''! 
!il!^. 



r "»» I 



IN 



1. \} 

lite on 

2. ^ 

describe 
in equit 

3. W 

What is 
bill does 

4. He 

ence in \ 

5. Ho 
tow long 
aa infant 



^nmmts Of rotoHto. 



JUfNUAl EXAMINATIOKS. 1864. 
THIRD TEAR. 

MITFORD ON TLEADIKG, &C. 

Examiners : J ^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL D 

iiiDWARD FlTZGEKALD, M.A./lL.B. 



an infant ia a defendant ? ' "" P™""""^ '''"e 



IH" 



i:- 



I 
llf 



lb.' 

.'■Mf. 



m--:M 



111.' 



/i 

'.',; 



^nmmt!^ of mvonto. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 
THIRD YEAR. 

MITFORD ON PLEADING. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 



Examiners: I ^^^^ Crooks, Q. Q., LL.D 

I J1.DWARD Fitzgerald, M.A.,'lL.B., 



1. Within what time was a mortgagor entiflM f. a 

sn\t rptt\"''''-''' ^.^lo^^rj; STr 

3. Does a defendant ever reauim o »,«^f c - ^ 

in what case or cases ? ^ "^'''^ ^"^"^' '-^n^ if so, 

4. What was the old methnr? nf o«<.*.- 

purchase for valuable coSl^^^^^ ^^^^nce of 

were the proper aHegation ? To "b to?f '"' 5"^ ^^=^' 
such a defence allowed ? ^"^ ^"^^^^® ^<>^'er, is 

5. What does a replication put in issup o. i .x 
generally when a plaintiff ought to fi ^ rS ' *• ^ ^***® 
amend his bill? ^ ^'^^ replication, or to 






til 



ife:'- 



jiVii^' 



.• 'If ! 



I' "ill?! 



^nih.mt^ otzovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 186i. 



THIRD YEAR. 



SMITH ON CONTRACTS. 



Uxammers.'f^^^^ Cj^ooks, Q. C., LL.D. 

(Edward Fiizqekald, M.A., LL.B. 



to be in writing ? author,t,y of tlie agent require 

boL^S;v'Ui?;:u;re."^"'™ *" »"■■- -""-to 
of t.::bi\:tSi„Tbr ;:, j;;::/!/^ '^ "^'°? 

* .K voluntary grantee ? IVli/? '"'™'"='''' '':>' ™ assignee of 

breth'' Jeor:otf aXS if :^L:?^ T' ['■ T^ '" " 
between mch . medie>? "" ''" "'"'f d'Aerence 



:!::':i 






I" 



8im^er«ctj? Of coronto^ 



i;i'' . '.ii 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



TIIIRD YEAR. 



SMITH ON CONTEACTS. 

HONORS AND SCUOLARSHIPS. 



Examiners: {^^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D., 

1 Edward Flizqerald, M.A., LL.B. 



.]• ^'f ^ }^ ?^® ^^w in reference to contracts in restraint 
of trade? Point out the different cases. "^restraint 

isL'^i^d^^onr'''^"'^'"' '''' "^ ''''-'^''^' What 

3. What is ratification, and the effect of it? Can the 

h^rfdo if? ^ ' ' "* °' ''' ''''^-'' "^^^"^'^ W^- -n 

a.t )!!' r Tr'' ^J^^"^.' '^ ^^^'t'-^tion, and state the law 
as to the limitation of actions in cases of simple contract' 

Li^itatolr' '^' ''''P'"'^ ^" ^'^ ^"Slish Statute of 






ii''^'i 




1. : 

one c( 

2. : 

person 

3. ( 

4. I 

to coni 

6. ^ 



2^nf^irrfi(ft» of rorimto* 



-ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS! 1864. 



THIRD YEAR. 



WESTLAKE'S CONFLICT OF LAWS. 



Examiners :\:^^^'^ Crooks, Q. C., LL.D. 

J Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. 



one'co^nl^'L'''" "" ^''f^^' ^" bankruptcy obtained in 
one country be recognised by the courts of another ? 

pefson^? ''^""^ "^'^'"'^ "^"'^ ^''^'''^' ""^^'^ t^e ^«i^«^% of a 

3. Give a definition of domicile. 
to ton^ralts^r' *^' ^'"^ ^''' "^^^''«^^^« ^P^^ate with respect 

5. What is the operation of the lex situs on property ? 



f ' 

ill 



i!!; 

! I;' ii 

m 



I 



.1 ' ■ 







re 
re 
do 

to 

» 
wh 
per 



^nmvms of Zovonto. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1834. 
THIRD YEAR. 



WESTLAKE'S CONFLICT OP LAWS. 

HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS. 

Examiners : J ^^^^ Crooks, Q. C , LL D 

( i^BWAUD Fitzgerald, M.A.,'lL.B. 



do!; ircxt::,f ° ^"^"' -'^ -^ ^^ »"»s'--. -^ how fa. 



5. When testamentary instruments 
lat validity Iiave 
personal property 't 



what validity have they in i^^.Inl^tneirer re^n^' 



III 



Ijiiiiir 
''I'ii:-' 



ill 



^ni\innm of ^Toronto. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS; 1864. 
CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



i^LACKSTONE, VOL. IV. 

Examiners:! :^^^^ Crooks, Q. C., LL D 

i JiDWARD TlTZGERALD, M. A., LL.B. 



ii m 






2. D^tinguish botwoen principals and accessories. 

3. W at a,e the different offences against public justice ^ 

4. What are the different kinds of homicide » 

5. What must exist to constitute the crime of larceny ? 






1:1 



!!ii.lii 



^nmvms^ of STotonto. 

ANNUAL EXA MINATIONS : 1864. 
CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



BlACKSTOJfE, VOL. lY. 

HONORS. 



Examiners: f ^^^^ Ciooks, Q. C., LL D 

I iiDWARD Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. 



of '^rSZ) '■■"' *"'* °' ""> "- '""' P^»S-- «f the laws 
by j,v '"" "" ""' ''"'"™' '"•"'^^ «f ^'-''-g", i„ the tri„l 

3- Mention the offences against public trade ? 
4. What are the ^iffovent kin,:, of misprisons ? 
5- Distinguish betwe>,,. t, ,>„,,op. ^„<, 3,jiti„„ , 



iiii'i 

if 



'•"'ill 



mnmmtif of jroronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



GIBBON^S ROME, &c. 



JSxaminers:!^^^^ Crooks, Q.C, LL.D. 

i J^DWARD Fitzgerald, M. A., LL.B. 



conyisthe^R^tVLtT" ''''''' ""^^^' ^^^^^ ^^^^^on 
JutlJall '"" '''' "^^"'' '' *^« reformation effected by 

3. Into what different books are the Listitutes divided ' 
J J. What was the status of the wife under the Roman 

5. Explain the Terentillian law 



: i' ■! 



i rVl, 



! li !l/ 



jk' 



mi 
m 



ill 



# ♦ 






11 



r( 






^nibtvuits of t ^nto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



GIBBON ^ ARNOLD. 

HONOKS. 



i Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. 



2. What was the contract of locatio ? 

3. What are the principal points noticed by Gibbon in 
respect to rights of property ? " 

4. Explain the Valerian and Canuleian laws ? 

5. What was the Licinian law ? 



ig 






I. 



^4JSr 




' ^r':^ 





IMAGE EVALUATION 
TEST TARGET (MT-S) 



4is 







1.0 



1.1 



1.25 



UimA 

■ 50 "^ 

^ 1^ 



1.4 



2.5 
2.2 

1.6 



V] 



<? 



/] 




/ 







% .^> 



/A 







'/ 




Photographic 

Sciences 
Corporation 




^2%. 



"%'• 



23 WEST MAIN STREET 

WEBSTER, N.Y. HS80 

(716) 873-4503 






t/. 





ai 

th 

in 

eit 
in 

wh 



^nmvm» of Eotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



JAEMAN ON WILLS. 



I!xaminer8:i^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D. 

I Edwakd FiTzaERALD, M.A., LL.B. 



5. What interest in personalty is conferred by words 
which create an estate tail in realty? Why? 



!i'» 



^nmmtp ot ^Toronto. 

ANNUAL EXa"^TIONS: 1864. 
CANDIDATES FOE LL.B. 

JAKMAJV OJV WILLS. 

HONORS. 

o^U^rSr^e :-•"/»' -^» » Win .Vs., 

"• ''»nat revokes a will? Qf«. , 
revocation. '''^^ ' State the different cases of 

4. What is the effect nf n ^- . 



m 
m 



iiiii 
I III I 



I'.rhl 



HiSiv 



^niiitvms Of aroronto. 

AmVAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 
CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 

JUSTINIAN'S INSflTUTES. 

Examiners : ^ ■^^^'^ Crooks, Q. n LL D 

tEDWAKDFix.aEnALD;M!l!:-li,.B. 



1- Quibus constitutionibnq nf ;n ^ 

caveanttutoresvelcuratores pi^or^bi;? ^T'^'*"^' «* "^^^ 
-Z^^^. 3, Tit. 24, s. 3. 'P'^"^^''^"«captiscoerceantur.— 

(«) Translate. 

W What oonsti.„ti„„3 are here referred to? 
(0^ What were the relative powers ,^,1 ^ .• . 
ian and ward in the RomTn Law . "' "^ «""' 

woaidlrlX ^ ""'''"■" "y^ i» which the «»/™,, 

3. How were servitudes extinguished 1 

4. What was the heres neomariw ? 



=i»i 



^nmtmp Of ^Torouio. 

ANNUAL EXACTIONS: 1864. 



CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



JUSTINIAFS INSTITUTES. 

HONORS. 



W" 
!-ii- 



Examiners :i^^^^ Crooks, Q. n LT r> 

1- Eodem numero sunf inro ^^ 

™sticor„„, ,„, e.ia„ scrWtm .^^trVh'^"""' *' 
3.-Ment.o„ the different kind, ofse [t',:; ^i, ^' '"• ^' «• 
referred to ? servitudes tliat are liere 

2. Explain totamentum, ealata comitia an^ . ■ 
3- Distinguish, between re, pnUia-. '"•°«»«'««? 

»«««., m eacr^, re, religZI? ' "" """'«'*'«", re, 

4 VVhat were the different modes of „„„ • ■ 
m the Roman law? ""Ocs ot acquiring property 

6. Give the formula bv which , «j • 
self? ' ^"""» » fideiu,,or bound him- 



^nmvmt» of (Toronto, 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 



MACKELDEY'S CIVIL LAW. 

HONORS. 



Uxammers'.f^^^^ Crooks, Q. C., L.LD. 

(H-DWARD FlTZGEAilLD, M.A., LL.B. 



1. By what different modes are rights terminated ? 
eJ^^H:^"" ''''''''' ''' -^^'^ -^^'^-^--^ and the 

3. Explain « juridicial possession " ? 

4. What is <^aece8sior and give its different classes ? 

5. Give a brief analysis of Mackeldey's treatise? 






^ni\)tvms Of Toronto. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1861 
CANDIDATES FOR LL.b". 



STODEN ON VENDORS AND PURCHASEBS. 



7 ; the „,™o. «»bs^o,ueXTrt1ollt ^^r/^ 
JuIrtJZfr^'' ""^^ «°"^»y»» - ".-cod, „h.t 



se ? ^*" ^nore be recovered in any 



of 
case? 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1884. 
CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 

SPGDENONVEND^D PURCHASERS. 

HONORS. 
■Examiners:! :^^^^ Crooks, Q. n LL D 



>s the principle ? '"'"'"'= °f Fi-ands, and what 

nant. of the vendor' in the^Ze/at e^xtncT^' "^ ""^»- 
3- What is a„ abstract of title, and ought iuo shew? 

4.a;t'otutlStr"tan"th' '' ^"^"^^"'' ^''apter 
the grantor defeat a voluntarv 1 ,„ ^'''"'"? "' ^""''^^ of 
a -.e for value, and is nSoTe^^Sl; ^ST ^^ 



!hl 



wmntmts Of aroMiuo. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 
CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



SUGDEN ON POWERS. 

HONORS. 

Examiners :S^^^^ Crooks, Q. C., LL D 
(JiDWARD Fitzgerald, M.A.,' 



LL.B. 



. 1. Name the different kind of powpr., wu . ■ 
given bj will called ? ^ ^' ^^^* ^^ a power 

Could such third partv be thf „„l f ""'?' '" l*^ °>"»i"'i<i ? 
pursuance of the po"Jr ? '^"'''"""' "^ P'»P»«^ sold i„ 



Unmvmt} J^f ^Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864. 
CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 

TAYLOR ON EVIDENCE 

Examiners:! ^^^^ Crooks, Q. C., LL.D. 

I hDWARD Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B. 



belin'f f t*l™'" '" "^'^'■"'"'"S -■>» »- the right to 
've'Zl'^??' ■'■"^^ "' -idenco are admissible 



prove handwriting ? 



to 



^nt\)tvmp or Toronto. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS! 1864. 
CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



TAYLOR ON EVIDENCE 

HONORS. 

JExaminersJ^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL D 
(±iDWARD Fitzgerald, M.A., 



LL.B. 



does* rgtln/fciT^^^^^^^^^^ r^--' -d when 

secondarj evidence ? ^^"'' ^"^^ ^ P^^^J to give 

2. In what case or cases are dyinff declaritmnQ „.i • -u, 
evidence is necessary of such promise ? ""'*^^'°"'' ^^^^ ^hat 

reft h iiirtr^y ? ^^'^0^1)::;? ^^^^t ^"-^<^ *^ 

trial or examination ? ^^''^ ^' produced at the 

5. State some of the mutt^rl,} „7<. 
invalidate a written instrumen L thT^".' "l"""" "'" 
seeking to enforce it ? ""^ ^""^^ "^ "■ Party